Ec Trak Manual

Baker Hughes INTEQ
Ec*Trak Directional
Directional Survey and
Well Design System
User’s Guide
743-500-022UG420 Version 4.2 February 1996
Baker Hughes INTEQ

Technical Software Department
2001 Rankin Road
Houston, Texas
Telephone: 713-625-4200
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction to Ec*Trak Directional
Program Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
The Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Using Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Selecting a Menu Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Selecting an Item Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Re-ordering of Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Leaving a Series of Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Data Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Wellpath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Moving Around a Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Entering Data and Moving Within a Data Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
“Normal” Data Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Selection Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Leaving a Data Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Leaving and Saving Data — The Exit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Leaving Without Saving Data — The Quit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Leaving Ec*Trak Directional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Chapter 2
How to Use the Manual
Contents of the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
What Is Not in the Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Using the Electronic Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
User’s Guide i
743-500-022UG420 Version 4.2 / February 1996 Confidential
Table of Contents Ec*Trak Directional
Chapter 3
Operator, Field and Structure Setup
Selecting an Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Selecting a Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Selecting a Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Selecting a Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Using the Structure Edit Options Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Using the Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Course Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Calculation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
North Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Coordinates and Depths From ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Section From ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Section Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Projection Type and Grid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Grid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Spheroid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Error Summation at Tie-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Standard Deviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Report ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Casing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Depth to Start Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Surface Position Uncertainty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Using the Operator, Field, Structure and Location Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Data Entry Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Leaving the Screen Without Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Operator Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Field Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Field Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
How to Enter Latitude Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
How to Enter Longitude Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
How to Enter Grid Easting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
How to Enter Grid Northing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
How to Enter Central Meridian and Hemisphere . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Field Horizontal Datum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Field Vertical Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Allocation Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
ii Baker Hughes INTEQ

Confidential 743-500-022UG420 Version 4.2 / February 1996
Ec*Trak Directional Table of Contents
Block Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Structure Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Structure Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Structure Horizontal Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Structure Vertical Datum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Vertical Datum Above Field Vertical Datum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Field Vertical Datum above Seabed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Field and Structure Reference Point Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Avoiding Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Unknown Field Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Quitting Structure Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Saving Structure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Setting Up a Sample Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Chapter 4
Slot Data
Entering Slot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Slot Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Slot Horizontal Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Drill Depth Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Elevation Above Structure Vertical Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
What to Do Next. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Adding a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Linking a Slot with a Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Linking a Slot with a Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Performing Other Slot Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Edit Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Edit Next. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Rotate Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Offset Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Saving Slot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Setting Up Sample Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Chapter 5
Target Data
Entering Target Data Within Structure Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Entering New Target Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
User’s Guide iii

Entering Target Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Entering Target Size and Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Editing Existing Target Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Deleting a Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Saving Target Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Setting Up Sample Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Creating Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Linking Slots with Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Entering Target Data at the Well Design Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Adding a Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Selecting a Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Editing a Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Removing a Target from the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Saving Target Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Chapter 6
Other Structure Data
Well Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Accessing Well Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Entering Well Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Editing Well Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Saving Well Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Declination Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Accessing Declination Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adding Declination Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Using the Declination Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Editing Declination Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Saving Declination Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Casing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Accessing Casing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Adding Casing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Proposed Top and Bottom TVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Diameter and Hole Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Run Through Shoe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
String Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Maximum Acceptable Dogleg Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Actual Top and Bottom MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Date Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
iv Baker Hughes INTEQ

Copying Existing Casing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Using Next Deepest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Saving Casing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Survey Tool Error Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Viewing an Existing Tool Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Adding a Custom Tool Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Transfer of Error Models from Version 4.1 to Version 4.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Rebuilding Version 4.1 Standard Error Models in Version 4.2 . . . . . . 6-17
Rebuilding Version 4.1 Custom Error Models in Version 4.2. . . . . . . . 6-18
Setting up Sample Wells, Casing and Declination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Setting up Sample Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Linking Slots with Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Setting up Declination Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Setting up Casing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Chapter 7
Well Design Spreadsheet
Accessing the Well Design Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Examining the Well Design Spreadsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Spreadsheet Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Design Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Advisory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Using the Well Design Spreadsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Leaving the Spreadsheet Without Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Chapter 8
Designing a Wellpath
Designing a Sample Wellpath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Determine a Sample Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Determine a Sample Tie Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Determine a Sample Kick Off Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Load a Sample Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Load a Sample Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Complete a Sample Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Optimize a Sample Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Save a Sample Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Specifying the Tie Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Specifying the Kick Off Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
User’s Guide v
Loading a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

J [2D]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
S [2D]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
S Extended [2D]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
J [3D]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
S [3D]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
S Extended [3D]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Curved/Straight Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Removing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Replacing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Loading a Target to a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Removing a Target from the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Entering Target Data Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Offsetting Targets from the Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Completing a Wellpath Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Optimizing a Wellpath Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Saving a Wellpath Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Chapter 9
Advanced Well Design Features
Correcting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Build Rate Is Too Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Illogical Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Incorrect Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Overspecification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Is It Drillable? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Complex Well Design Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Multiple Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Non-Profile Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Sample Wellpath Design Using Multiple Profiles and Non-Profile Stations . . . 9-7
Walk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Sense of Curvature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Other Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Top/Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Back/Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Casing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Set Section Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
vi Baker Hughes INTEQ

Survey Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Well Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Well Design Spreadsheet Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Selecting a Graph Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Selecting the Reference Wellpath Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Selecting Object Wellpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Working with the Graphics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Using Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Chapter 10
Survey Data
Accessing the Survey Spreadsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Editing a Survey or Creating a New Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Examining the Survey Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Specifying the Tie Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Entering Survey Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Using Automatic MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Importing a Survey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Using the Survey Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Top/Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Back/Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Print Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Automatic MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Casings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Survey Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Vertical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Tool Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Modify Identifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Redefine Tie Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Well Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Import Survey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Projecting from the End of a Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Projecting Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Calculating Curvature to the Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Viewing Survey Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Entering a Sample Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Graphing the Sample Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
User’s Guide vii

Calculating Curvature from Sample Survey to Target . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Projecting Ahead of the Sample Survey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Chapter 11
Rigsite System
Accessing the Rigsite System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Examining the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Using the Rigsite Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Leaving the Rigsite System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Projecting Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Using the Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Viewing Rigsite Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Viewing Instant Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Graph Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Active Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Using the Ideal Tool Run Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Typing in Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Specifying Values Graphically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Specifying Build and Turn Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Chapter 12
Selecting Data for Reports and Plots
Using the Report or Plot Type Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Report Type Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Plot Type Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Using the Interpolation/Range Specification Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Ellipses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Coordinate/Depth Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Walk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Casing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Clearance Plot Safety Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Interpolations and Depth Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Specifying Reference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Specifying Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Specifying Multiple Reference and Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Selecting by Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
What to do Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
viii Baker Hughes INTEQ

Chapter 13
Report System
Moving Around the Report Previewer Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Using the File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Standard Wellpath Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Wellpath (MD-Inc-Azi) Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Wellpath with Ellipses Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Wellpath (NPD Format) Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Proposal Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Horizontal Plane Clearance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Minimum Distance Clearance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Travelling Cylinder Clearance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Summary Clearance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Structure Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Wellpath Reports in Postscript. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Inertial Back Calculation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
MMS Format for Directional Survey Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
DDS and DDS-Lite Transfer Format Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Chapter 14
Plot Types
Wellpath Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Structure Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Field Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Horizontal Clearance Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Travelling Cylinder Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Wellheads Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Comparison (MD/TVD) Page Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Position Uncertainty vs. Depth Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Working on the Graphics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Using the Main Graphics Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Show/Hide Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Edit Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Detail Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Hard Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Change Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
User’s Guide ix
Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Save Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Leaving the Graphics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Chapter 15
Layout Editor
Moving/Deleting a Sub-Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Moving a Sub-Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Deleting a Sub-Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Modifying/Adding a Sub-Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Specifying an Existing Sub-Plot to Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Specifying a Sub-Plot to Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Sizing and Positioning a Sub-Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Using the Modify Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Changing Sub-Plot Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Casing Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Slot Circles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Casing Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
General MD and General TVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Local MD/TVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Inclinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Station Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Display Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Display Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Other Wellpath Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Setting the Depth Range for a Sub-Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Setting Vertical Section Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
Dashing All Proposals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Select Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Setting Line Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
Using Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Setting View Vector and Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Setting the View Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Setting the Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Setting Scale and Area for a Sub-Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
Position Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
x Baker Hughes INTEQ

Select Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26

Resize Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
Returning to the Main Graphics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
Edit Layout Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
Chapter 16
Detail Editor
Adding Art and Text to a Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Boxed Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Hard Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
North Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Selecting Items to Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Editing Objects on a Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Copying Art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Saving and Loading Art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Chapter 17
Hard Copy Output
Hard Copy Output — Basic Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Printing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Printing a Well Design Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Printing a Survey Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Printing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Printing/Plotting a Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
User’s Guide xi
Hard Copy Output — Advanced Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5

Printing a Report to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Printing a Report to a DOS Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Printing a Graph to a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Generating the Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Sending the Saved Graph to a Printer or Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Specifying the Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Disabling/Enabling Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Disabling a Single Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Disabling All Devices on the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Working While Devices Are Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Enabling an Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
Changing Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
Chapter 18
Utilities
Database Deletion Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Bulk Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Selecting Wellpaths Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Selecting Groups of Wellpaths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Bulk Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
MD/Inc/Azi Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Set Tool Error Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Associate Casing String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Leaving the Bulk Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Generate Well Site Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Insert Incoming Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Insert Incoming Sysdrill Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Backup Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Delete Temp/Spool Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Appendix A
Geodetics Summary
Azimuth References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Magnetic North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Grid North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Azimuth Reference System Conversions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Declination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
xii Baker Hughes INTEQ

Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
System Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Geographic Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Latitude and Longitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Geographic Datum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Lambert Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Local Grid Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Appendix B
Grid Types and Spheroids
Grid Types for Alaska Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Grid Types for Lambert Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Grid Types for Mercator Projection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Grid Types for International Lambert Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Spheroids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
Appendix C
Ec*Trak Directional Flow Charts
Create/Edit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
Structure Edit Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Well Design Spreadsheet Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Survey Spreadsheet Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
Report Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8
Accessing the Main Graphics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-9
Most Graphics Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-10
Edit Layout Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-11
Exit/Utility Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-12
Appendix D
Data Entry Methods
Entering Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Azimuth Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Quadrature Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Entering MD or TVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Entering Inclination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Entering North/South and East/West Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Entering Polar Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
User’s Guide xiii

Entering Curvature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Entering Toolface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Appendix E
Position Uncertainty
Baker Hughes INTEQ Error Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1
Straight Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-2
General Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-6
Tool Error Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-11
Photomechanical Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-12
Photomechanical Magnetic (Bent Sub) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-12
Steering Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-12
Steering Tool (Bent Sub) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-13
Steering Tool (Sag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-13
Steering Tool (Mag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-14
Steering Tool (Sag and Mag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-14
EMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-15
EMS (Sag Corrected). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-15
EMS (Mag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-16
EMS (Sag and Mag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-16
MTC (Collar) and DMWD (DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-17
MTC (Collar) (Bent Sub) and DMWD (DSP) (Bent Sub) . . . . . . . . . . .E-17
MTC (Collar) (Sag Corrected) and DMWD (DSP)
(Sag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-18
MTC (Collar) (Mag Corrected) and DMWD (DSP)
(Mag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-18
MTC (Collar) (Sag and Mag Corrected) and DMWD (DSP)
(Sag and Mag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-19
DDS (Collar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-19
DDS (Collar) (Bent Sub) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-20
DDS (Collar) (Sag Corrected). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-20
DDS (Collar) (Mag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-21
DDS (Collar) (Sag and Mag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-21
NaviTrak (DAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-22
NaviTrak (DAS) (Bent Sub) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-22
NaviTrak (DAS) (Sag Corrected). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-22
NaviTrak (DAS) (Mag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-23
NaviTrak (DAS) (Sag and Mag Corrected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-23
Level Rotor Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-24
Level Rotor Gyro (Bent Sub) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-24
xiv Baker Hughes INTEQ

Seeker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-24
RIGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-25
FINDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-25
RIGS 2 and Pinpoint (under development) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-25
Table of Location-Dependent Uncertainties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-25
Additional Notes Relating to Position Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-30
Editing of Error Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-30
Station Interval Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-30
Errors Assigned to Sidetracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-31
Depth to Start Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-31
Survey Tie-On Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-32
Separation Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-33
Casing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-33
Surface Position Uncertainty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-34
Position Uncertainty vs. Depth Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-35
Appendix F
Logos
Glossary
Index
User’s Guide xv
Chapter 1
Introduction to Ec*Trak Directional
This chapter presents general information which applies to

the entire Ec*Trak Directional program. The major topics
include entering and exiting the program, using the
keyboard and mouse, making menu selections, moving
within and between fields, saving data, quitting without
saving data and organizing the data hierarchy.
Program Overview
This manual describes the Baker Hughes INTEQ Ec*Trak Directional
Survey and Well Design System, Version 4.2, dated February 1996.
The manual refers to this software program as Ec*Trak Directional.
Ec*Trak Directional runs under the SCO Unix operating system. Although
certain data can be imported from and exported to IBM-compatible (DOS)
computers, the program itself does not run under DOS.
Ec*Trak Directional has the flexibility and power to model almost any
directional drilling situation and analyze it in many ways, according to
your needs. It allows you to enter the following information:
• The location of a slot where drilling is to begin.
• The location of a target where drilling is to end.
• One or more actual or proposed paths between them.
After you enter the data, Ec*Trak Directional can perform the following
operations:
• It calculates a detailed three-dimensional design or survey wellpath.
It allows you to vary parameters within the design, and calculates
the effect on the proposal.
• It considers the measurement uncertainties of survey tools and the
interaction between different tool types when making its calculations.
User’s Guide 1-1

Introduction to Ec*Trak Directional Ec*Trak Directional
• It looks ahead and projects a wellpath from the last survey point,
according to user-provided conditions.
• It looks around in three-dimensional space to find any other wells in
the area and determines how far away they are.
• It allows you to change your point of reference, so you can look at the
situation from a number of viewpoints.
• It outputs data in tabular or graphic form for the current wellpath and
for any others you wish to consider.
All data input screens, reports and graphs can be printed on a dot-matrix
or laser printer. Graphs can also be plotted on paper as large as 84cm
(33 in) wide.
The program contains several major functional areas, as follows:
• Structure Setup — Set up information for operators, fields, structures,
slots, wells, targets, declination and survey tools. For more informa-
tion, see Chapters 3 through 6.
• Well Design Spreadsheet — Plan a well design from slot to target or
from end of survey to target. For more information, see Chapters 7
through 9.
• Survey Spreadsheet — Record actual survey information as the well
is drilled. For more information, see Chapter 10.
• Rigsite System — Record survey information and project ahead to the
target. For more information, see Chapter 11.
• Report System — Output information of interest in tabular form.
For more information, see Chapters 12 and 13.
• Graphic System — Output information of interest in graphic form.
Edit and enhance plots as required. For more information, see
Chapters 12, 14, 15 and 16.
The Main Menu

This manual describes the Ec*Trak Directional program starting at the
Main Menu. Since Ec*Trak Directional runs on a number of hardware
platforms, the specific procedure for arriving at the Main Menu varies;
for more information see your Ec*Trak Directional system administrator.
As part of the startup procedure, you see the Copyright screen, shown in
Figure 1-1, before the Main Menu appears.
The Main Menu, shown in Figure 1-2, provides four options, as follows:
• Plot — Enter the graphics area of the program. Create and edit a
graphic representation of selected data. Then save, plot or print the
1-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Ec*Trak Directional Introduction to Ec*Trak Directional
Figure 1-1.
Copyright
Screen. You see
this screen only
once, during the
startup procedure
for Ec*Trak
Directional, before
the Main Menu
appears.
graphs, if desired. You may display data which exists in the database,
but you may not create or edit data. For more information about
graphics, see Chapters 12, 14, 15 and 16.
Figure 1-2.
Ec*Trak
Directional
Main Menu.
• Report — Assemble selected data in tabular form for viewing and/or

printing. You may display data which exists in the database, but you
may not create or edit data. For more information about reports, see
Chapters 12 and 13.
• Create/Edit — Add new information to the database or edit existing
data. More information about creating and editing data begins in
Chapter 3.
• Exit/Utilities — Leave the program (see page 1-10), back up data
(see page 18-9) and control printers (see page 17-9), report preview
(see page 17-5) and temporary files (see page 18-9).
To select one of the first three options, highlight it by pressing the Up or
Down arrow key. Then press [ENTER]. To select Exit/Utilities, press [F1].
User’s Guide 1-3

On all systems, before you reach the Main Menu, you must provide a valid
login name and password. The login name and its group membership —
which are established and maintained by your system administrator —
determine which functions appear when you select Create/Edit, as follows:
• Members of the Planner group can access all functions. The Create/
Edit menu they see resembles that shown in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3.
Create/Edit Menu
for Planner. All
functions on the
Create/Edit menu
are available to
anyone who can
log in to the system
as a Planner.
• Members of the Drilling group can access the Directional Survey,

Directional Well Design, Structure Edit and Rigsite functions only.
• Members of the Survey group can access the Directional Survey and
Structure Edit functions only.
• Members of the Sales group can report and plot existing data only;
they cannot access anything on the Create/Edit menu.
This manual describes all available functions; it assumes you are a planner.
If you are not a planner, only the functions that are available to you appear
on your screen.
Using Function Keys

Most non-graphic screens in Ec*Trak Directional resemble the Main Menu
in that they consist of a data (or menu) area in the middle and a function
key guide along the bottom. The only active function keys are [F1], [F2],
[F3] and [F4].
As you make menu selections and move from screen to screen, the function
keys change too, reflecting the different options available to you. You
should be aware of the status of each function key at all times.
Using the Mouse

Within the Graphics System, the function keys are not active; use the
mouse instead. Move the mouse pointer, which usually appears as a
cross, to the area of interest and left-click to select it.

Although an arrow which responds to mouse movements may be visible

on non-graphic screens in Ec*Trak Directional, the mouse has no function-
ality on those screens. Move the arrow out of the way (but keep it in the
Ec*Trak window) and forget about the mouse until you enter graphics.
The mouse also works on the Report Previewer screen, where it activates
the File menu and operates the scroll bars. For more information, see
“Moving Around the Report Previewer Screen” on page 13-1.
In this manual, left-click means to press the left mouse button, while right-
click means to press the right mouse button. On a three-button mouse, the
center button is equivalent to the right button.
Using Menus
Selecting a Menu Item

Ec*Trak Directional operates by a combination of menu selections and
function keys. There are three ways to make a selection from a menu on
non-graphic screens, as follows:
• Use the Down and Up arrow keys to highlight the desired item. Press
[ENTER] to select it.
• Press the first letter of the item to highlight it. It does not matter
whether you type an upper or lower case letter. If there are two or
more entries with the same first letter, the first entry with that letter
is highlighted. Press the letter a second time to go to the next entry,
and so on.
For some selections, this both highlights and selects the item. For
others, it only highlights it, and you must press [ENTER] to select it.
• Use the Match in Menu function. Press [F4], type in the first letter(s)
you are searching for and press [ENTER]. This function is case-
sensitive; the upper and lower case letters you type here must match
the way the intended item is entered (Company A is not the same as
company a). To search for more possible matching entries, press [F4]
and [ENTER]. Match in Menu is available only when listed among the
function keys.
Some menu listings contain more items than fit in the menu window. In
that case, a message appears at the top of the window reading, for example,
<< 12/20>>. This means that there are a total of 20 items on the list, 12 of
which are displayed. Press the Down or Up arrow key to scroll the others
into view.
You can also scroll through most menus one screen at a time. Generally,
press [F2] to move up the list by one screenful and [F3] to move down by
one screenful.
User’s Guide 1-5

You cannot use the mouse to make menu selections on non-graphic

screens.
To make a menu selection on a graphic screen, you must use the mouse.
Move the mouse pointer on top of the desired item, which highlights it.
Then left-click to select it.
Selecting an Item Automatically

When making a menu selection, several menus may appear at the same
time. This occurs when there is only one item on a particular menu to
select. The program assumes that is the item you want, so it automatically
selects it and displays the next menu.
For example, you want to edit a Well Design Spreadsheet. After selecting
an operator, you normally select a field. However, if there is only one field
in the database, the program automatically selects it and displays the menu
of structures. If there is one structure, it is automatically selected, too.
(For more information about operators, fields and structures, see “Data
Hierarchy” on page 1-7.)
Re-ordering of Menu Items

As you work with Ec*Trak Directional, the order of items within many
menus changes. In those menus, the program moves the most recent
selection to the top. This can be a time-saver if you leave and return
to the same data screen.
For example, you are working on a particular Well Design Spreadsheet, but
have to leave it to perform another task. To return to the spreadsheet, you
need not search for the proper menu selections; they are all at the top of the
list and are highlighted when the menus appear. To return to the same
spreadsheet, keep pressing [ENTER].
Leaving a Series of Menus

If you are selecting from a series of menus and find that you have gone
down an incorrect path, press [F1] to move back one menu. Continue
pressing [F1] to back up to the wrong selection; then choose again.
If you move down an incorrect path and reach a data screen, find the
function to quit without saving data to the database (see “Leaving Without
Saving Data — The Quit Function” on page 1-10). Use it to leave the data
screen.

Data Hierarchy
Ec*Trak Directional stores its data in a hierarchy of four levels. They are,
in order:
Field
Structure
Slot
Wellpath
Each level of data owns the level below it; for example, a field owns one
or more structures. Each lower level belongs to the level above it; for
example, a structure belongs to a field. A field may own many structures,
but a structure may belong to only one field.
Well planning and survey data apply to wellpaths. Therefore, before you
can enter these data, you must establish the hierarchy leading to the
wellpath. That is, you must first set up the field, structure and slot that
the wellpath belongs to. Then you can perform wellpath operations.
The most important feature of setting up the field, structure and slot is
to assign a reference point to each of them. Three elements define each
reference point, as follows:
• a North/South component
• an East/West component
• a vertical component
Field
The field is the highest level of the hierarchy. Each field has a field
reference point which positions it in the world. When you create a field,
you also associate it with an operator name. You may set up any number
of fields, and they may own any number of structures. For more
information about fields, see pages 3-14 through 3-18.
Structure
You may create any number of structures, or platforms, within a field.
Each structure logically owns at least one slot. One point on the structure
is assigned to be the structure reference point. For more information about
structures, see pages 3-18 through 3-19.
Slot
Slots, or wellheads, relate to their structure by means of local coordinates.
Rather than describing the slot reference point by a global reference, you
User’s Guide 1-7

generally express its position as an offset from the structure reference

point. For more information about slots, see pages 4-2 through 4-5.
Wellpath
A wellpath belongs to the slot above it in the data hierarchy. A wellpath
may be either a proposed path or an actual drilled path. Each wellpath
holds data describing the trajectory of the wellpath. The database can
contain as many wellpaths, either proposals or surveys, as needed.
Moving Around a Data Screen

Use the four arrow keys to make most movements between data fields1,
which are the defined areas on the screen where you can enter data. These
keys generally move the cursor in the indicated direction on the screen
until you type something into the data field. At that point, press [ENTER]
to leave the data field.
Entering Data and Moving Within a Data Field

There are three basic types of data fields for you to deal with. As you
encounter a data field within the program, the manual describes which
category it fits into and how to handle it.
“Normal” Data Fields

The most common data field is one where you can type in the necessary
information. After placing the cursor in the desired data field, begin
entering data. The first keystroke removes any existing data. At this point
the following cursor control keys are active:
• [BACKSPACE] deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
• The Left and Right arrow keys move the cursor in the indicated
direction.
• [DELETE] deletes the character at the cursor.
• Characters that you type are inserted at the cursor, moving existing
characters to the right.
• Press [ENTER] to complete the data field entry and move to the next
data field.
Note: When you finish entering data in each data field, press
[ENTER]. If you enter a value and then leave the screen,
or if you press the Up or Down arrow key to leave a data
1. Notice the difference between a field (such as an oilfield), which is a geographical
area where drilling activity occurs, and a data field, which is an area on the computer
screen where you can enter data.

field, the contents of that data field are not saved to the
database or recalled to the screen
Notice the following functions which are not available:

• There is no typeover mode, where a new character replaces an
existing character.
• You cannot edit an existing entry by changing selected characters.
To make a change, you must re-type the entire entry.
Selection Fields
Some data fields consist of a small number of possibilities to choose from;
press [ENTER] to display them, one at a time. When you find the one you
want, press the Up or Down arrow key to leave the field. If you pass the
desired selection, continue pressing [ENTER] until it appears again.
If a data field can display two possibilities, you toggle between them by
pressing [ENTER]. If a data field can display more than two possibilities,
you cycle among them.
In a special kind of selection field, you can turn something on or off by
continuing to press [ENTER]. If the item is turned on, it appears in UPPER
CASE letters; if the item is turned off, it appears in lower case letters.
Menu Fields
Data fields with a longer list of possibilities to choose from present the list
on a menu. When you press [ENTER] with the cursor on one of these data
fields, a menu appears listing the choices. Highlight the desired selection
and press [ENTER]. For more information, see “Using Menus” on page 1-5.
Leaving a Data Section

There are two ways to leave most data sections. You can leave with or
without saving the data you entered or edited during the current session.
The two scenarios, and the reasons for using them, follow.
Leaving and Saving Data — The Exit Function

If the data you entered or edited in a data section are good, you want to
save them to the database. That way, they are available for viewing, editing
and compiling into reports and graphs.
Use the Exit function to save the data. When you exit a section, the
program asks if you want to Save to Database? Answer Yes to save
the data; answer No to return to the data section without saving.
User’s Guide 1-9

Leaving Without Saving Data — The Quit Function

You can use Ec*Trak Directional to make hypothetical “what-if?”
calculations. If you do not want to save the test data, leave the section
by using the Quit function.
When you select Quit, the program asks if you want to Quit without saving
to database? Answer Yes to leave without saving data; answer No to return
to the data section, also without saving it.
If you are editing a previously-entered data section and quit, the previous
data remain intact, as if you had not entered the section. If you are creating
new data and quit the section, no new data are stored and whatever you
created is not retained in the database.
The Quit function, therefore, acts as a safety device to protect your data.
If you start editing data and make mistakes or get confused, you can return
the data to their initial condition by quitting the section.
Leaving Ec*Trak Directional

To leave Ec*Trak Directional, first return to the Main Menu. From there,
press [F1] — Exit, Utilities. The first item on the menu is Exit Ec*Trak.
Highlight it and press [ENTER]. A confirmation box appears; highlight
Yes and press [ENTER] to leave. To return to the Ec*Trak Directional
Main Menu, highlight No and press [ENTER].

Chapter 2
How to Use the Manual
This chapter discusses the scope of the manual, what is and

is not included. It also suggests some ways to get the most
out of the manual, in both its printed and its electronic form.
Contents of the Manual

This manual describes how to use the Ec*Trak Directional Version 4.2
software program, starting at the Main Menu shown in Figure 1-2 on
page 1-3. It assumes that the program has been properly installed and
started up, and uses standard configuration parameters.
The organization of the manual is as follows:
• Chapter 1 presents general material such as the data hierarchy, how to
select items, how to enter data, and how/when to use function keys
and the mouse.
• This chapter explains how to use the manual and what is not included
in it.
• Chapters 3 through 6 explain Structure Setup, including operators,
fields, locations, structures, slots, wells, targets, declination, casing
and survey tools. You must set up a structure before making a
wellpath design or entering survey data.
• Chapters 7 through 9 explain the Well Design Spreadsheet and how to
plan a well design.
• Chapter 10 explains the Survey Spreadsheet and how to enter actual
survey data for a wellpath.
• Chapter 11 explains the Rigsite System, a self-contained module for
use while the hole is being drilled.
• Chapters 12 and 13 explain the Report System, how to output tabular
reports of the data entered and calculated.
User’s Guide 2-1

How to Use the Manual Ec*Trak Directional
• Chapters 12, 14, 15 and 16 explain the Graphics System and how
to generate and modify plots of the data entered and calculated.
• Chapters 17 and 18 explain how to print or plot data, reports and
graphs, how to transfer data to and from Ec*Trak Directional and
how to perform several other utility functions.
In addition to the major chapters of the manual, there are other features
which you should find useful. They are as follows:
• The Table of Contents at the front of the manual lists the headlined
topics from the text and gives the page number where they can be
found.
• Appendix A contains a brief discussion of geodetics and grid systems.
This background information is useful when entering the position of a
structure (see pages 3-6 through 3-20) and when entering declination
(see pages 6-5 through 6-7).
• Appendix B lists the grid types available in Ec*Trak Directional.
These are used during structure setup (for more information, see
page 3-10).
• Appendix C presents flow charts for the menu system in Ec*Trak
Directional. These charts show how to get to a certain menu and
where you can go from that point.
Flow charts also appear at various places within the general text. It is
not essential that you study or follow the flow charts. If they confuse
you more than they help you, ignore them.
• Appendix D explains the various formats in which you can enter data,
depending on the type of data requested.
• Appendix E discusses the Baker Hughes INTEQ error model for
survey tools and the values for the parameters of the model. It also
discusses other factors which contribute to an accurate calculation of
the position uncertainty of any survey station. This background is
useful when entering survey tool error models (for more information,
see pages 6-13 through 6-16).
• Appendix F displays the logos that you can place on plots and gives
the file names needed to access them.
• A Glossary defines the most important terms used in the manual and
tells where more information about the term can be found.
• An extensive Index at the end of the manual lists the topics discussed
and the pages where they can be found.
The manual has been designed for both new users and experienced users.
New users should read the manual in the order in which topics are

Ec*Trak Directional How to Use the Manual
presented and should pay close attention to the examples. If you encounter
an unfamiliar term, check the glossary for its definition and the index for
further references.
Experienced users can approach the manual somewhat differently. You
should use the Index or Table of Contents to look up the topic of interest.
Once there, you should first look at any diagrams and their captions on the
left (sometimes on the bottom). Often, that provides enough information.
If not, the next step is to read the accompanying text to receive a more
complete explanation.
What Is Not in the Manual

Ec*Trak Directional runs under the SCO Unix operating system and
utilizes X Windows. Certain SCO and X configuration files can be changed
to affect the appearance and performance of Ec*Trak Directional. The
identity of these files, how they can be changed and the effect they have
are not discussed in this manual.
There are also a number of configuration files within Ec*Trak Directional
itself. These can affect all users on a system, certain classes of users or
individual users. These files are also not discussed in this manual.
Installation procedures are not discussed in this manual, nor are hardware
issues that can affect the operation of the program.
The best source of information about these configuration and installation
topics is your Ec*Trak Directional system administrator. Close communi-
cation with that person is important to achieve the greatest productivity
from your system and to customize it most closely to your needs.
Remember that Ec*Trak Directional is extremely flexible and can
be configured to meet your requirements.
If you ever wondered, “I wish I could do __________ ,” the capability
probably already exists; your configuration just needs to be changed to
allow you to do it. Contact your system administrator with your wish list.
Using the Electronic Manual

The Ec*Trak Directional manual is also available in electronic form, as a
PDF file which is viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader. The entire book is
contained in a single file.
Note: Adobe Acrobat does not run under SCO Unix.
In addition to the standard Acrobat Reader capabilities, there are a number

of areas of the text which are hot; that is, they are linked to other sections
of the manual. When you move the mouse to hot text, the mouse pointer
User’s Guide 2-3

How to Use the Manual Ec*Trak Directional
becomes a hand with a pointing finger. Left-click to jump to the linked

section.
The following items in the manual are hot:
• Each entry in the Table of Contents.
• Each entry in the Index. Since an index entry can contain more than
one page number, left-click on the page number you desire.
• Each entry in the Glossary. Left-click on See page x-y which appears
at the end of each definition.
• Each cross-reference within the text. Cross-references appear in blue
type, like this (but this one is not hot).

Chapter 3
Operator, Field and Structure Setup
Before entering wellpath data or projections, you must set

up the higher levels of the data hierarchy. This chapter
describes how to create and edit information about the
operator, field, location and structure that a wellpath
belongs to. Chapter 4 discusses how to enter slot data.
Chapters 5 and 6 cover other Structure Setup topics.
You must set up the data hierarchy leading to the wellpath you want to plan
or for which you want to enter survey data. The necessary elements are as
follows:
• Field, discussed in this chapter.
• Structure, discussed in this chapter.
• Slot, discussed in Chapter 4.
Additional elements to set up are as follows:
• Operator, discussed in this chapter.
• Location, discussed in this chapter.
• Well, discussed in Chapter 6.
• Target, discussed in Chapter 5. A target is required for projections,
but is not part of the data hierarchy leading to the wellpath.
This chapter presents methods for creating and editing an operator, field,
location and structure. In each case, you enter the data of interest onto the
following two screens:
• The Options menu, shown in Figure 3-9 on page 3-7.
• The Operator, Field, Structure and Location Data screen, shown in
Figure 3-10 on page 3-12.
User’s Guide 3-1

Operator, Field and Structure Setup Ec*Trak Directional
However, the route you travel to arrive at these menus varies. A diagram of
the possible routes appears in Figure 3-1. According to the diagram, there
are five menus between the Create/Edit menu and the Structure Edit
Options menu. Your choice to create an item or to use an existing item
determines which menus you encounter.
Main Menu
plot
report
create/edit
Operator, Field, Structure, Location Data screen
Create/Edit Menu
structure, wellheads, etc.
Directional survey Structure Edit
Directional well design Options Menu
Rigsite system
Survey (NO LOCK) Structure name and position
Well Design (NO LOCK) Options
bulk edit svy/prop Slot data
Database Deletion Utility Well data
Generate Well Site Data Target data
Insert Incoming Data Declination data
Insert Incoming Sysdrill Data Survey tool errors
Save current edits
Quit, no update
create operator create field create location

existing operator existing field existing location Options menu
create structure
existing structure Warning Notice
Figure 3-1. Flow Chart for Creating and Editing Operators, Fields, Structures and
Locations. Your choices of new or existing elements determine which route you travel to the
Structure Edit Options menu.
To summarize the procedure to go from the Main Menu to the Structure

Edit Options menu: select an existing operator, field, location and
structure, or create a new one, as each menu arises. A more detailed
explanation follows and continues through page 3-6.
Selecting an Operator
From the Main Menu, highlight Create/Edit and press [ENTER] to reveal
the Create/Edit menu shown in Figure 3-2.
At the Create/Edit menu, highlight Structure, Wellheads, etc. and press
[ENTER]. The Operator menu appears, listing the existing operators in the
database (and the number of structures they own) and the Create New
Operator option. An example is shown in Figure 3-3.

Ec*Trak Directional Operator, Field and Structure Setup
Figure 3-2.
Create/Edit
Menu.
To create a new operator, highlight Create New Operator, the first item
in the menu, and press [ENTER]. The Field menu appears; for more
information, see the following section.
Figure 3-3.
Operator Menu.
Create a new
operator or choose
an existing
operator.
Otherwise, select an existing operator by highlighting it and pressing

[ENTER]. The Structure menu appears; see page 3-5 for more information.
CAUTION
If creating an operator, field, location or
structure, double-check the list to be sure that the
item does not already exist. If editing an existing
element, make sure you select the correct one. If
you make a mistake at this point, you can severely
corrupt the integrity of your database.
Note: If you create a new operator, field, location or structure

by mistake, you must continue through the sequence of
screens until you reach the Structure Edit Options menu,
User’s Guide 3-3

shown in Figure 3-8 on page 3-6. Then quit with no

update; see the Note on page 3-6 for more information.
Selecting a Field
If you decide to create either a new operator or structure (see page 3-5),
the Field menu appears. It lists the existing fields (and their location) in
the database and the Create New Field option. An example is shown in
Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4. Field

Menu. Create a
new field for the
new operator or
choose an existing
field.
To create a new field, either press [F1] or highlight Create New Field and
press [ENTER]. The Location menu appears; for more information, see the
following section.
Otherwise, select an existing field by highlighting it and pressing [ENTER].
The Structure Edit Options menu appears; see page 3-6 for more
information.
Selecting a Location
After you choose to create a new field, the Location menu appears. It lists
the existing locations in the database and the Create New Location option.
An example of this screen is shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5.
Location Menu.
Create a new
location for the new
field, or choose an
existing location.
The location is a text description of the field location, such as North Sea,
as opposed to the global coordinates which define the field’s position.

To assign an existing location to a new field, highlight the location and

press [ENTER]. To create a new location for the field, highlight Create New
Location, the first item in the menu, and press [ENTER]. You can also
create a new location by pressing [F1]. Whether using an existing location
or creating a new one, you advance to the Structure Edit Options menu,
shown in Figure 3-8 on page 3-6.
Selecting a Structure
The Structure menu appears when you edit an existing operator. The menu
lists the existing structures (and the number of slots in each one) owned
by the operator. The first item on the menu is Create New Structure. An
example of a Structure menu is shown in Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-6.
Structure Menu.
Create a new
structure for the
existing operator or
choose an existing
structure.
To create a new structure, highlight Create New Structure and press

[ENTER]. The Field menu, shown in Figure 3-4 on page 3-4, appears.
Select a field and location as described on page 3-5.
To edit an existing structure, highlight it and press [ENTER]. The warning
message shown in Figure 3-7 appears. The message refers to situations
where you have already entered well design or survey data. If you change
the options or position for the structure, the well design or survey data may
no longer be correct.
Figure 3-7.
Warning Message.
Press [ENTER] to move to the Structure Edit Options menu, shown in

Figure 3-8 on page 3-6.
User’s Guide 3-5

Note: A notation [F2] select by token appears at the bottom of

the Structure menu. This function has no effect; ignore it.
Using the Structure Edit Options Menu

All routes lead to the Structure Edit Options menu, shown in Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-8.
Structure Edit
Options Menu.
Note: If you are at the Structure Edit Options menu by mistake,

and you do not wish to enter or edit structure informa-
tion, leave the screen now. Highlight the last item on the
menu, Quit, No Update, and press [ENTER]. When the
confirmation screen appears, highlight Yes in response
to Quit, Without Save to Database?. Press [ENTER] to
return to the Main Menu.
The first two items on the menu — Options and Structure Name and
Position — are discussed in this chapter. The other items are discussed
as follows:
• Slot Data — see page 4-1
• Well Data — see page 6-2
• Target Data — see page 5-1
• Declination Data — see page 6-5
• Survey Tool Errors — see page 6-13
Note: The manual uses the term Structure Setup or Structure

Edit to refer to the series of menus and screens leading to
and from the Structure Edit Options menu.
To select a menu item, highlight it and press [ENTER] to select it.

Typically, you want to enter the options information first. Then enter the
general operator, field, structure and location information, if these items
are not yet specified. Instructions for entering these data follow.
Using the Options Menu

Even though Options is listed second in the Structure Edit Options menu,
you should visit it first. The options you select affect other menus in
Structure Setup.
At the Structure Edit Options menu, highlight the second item, Options.
When you press [ENTER] to select it, the Options menu, an example of
which is shown in Figure 3-9, appears.
Figure 3-9.
Options Menu.
Use the Up and
Down arrow key
to highlight the
item you wish to
change. Press
[ENTER] to toggle
or cycle among the
available choices.
The Options menu allows you to configure output from Ec*Trak

Directional in a form acceptable to the operator. Each structure has an
Options menu, allowing you to establish a different set of options for
each structure. The settings you make on this screen are effective across
the entire structure.
Most items on the Options menu either toggle between two choices or
cycle among more than two choices. A few items have so many choices
that a menu appears.
To select an item to change, use the Up or Down arrow key to highlight it.
Then press [ENTER] to toggle or cycle through the choices. The choice that
appears in the menu is the one that the program uses. When finished with
the Options menu, press [F1] to return to the Structure Edit Options menu.
Units
You may express distances in feet or meters; toggle between them.
If you select feet, the next item becomes course length = 100. If you
select meters, the next item becomes course length = 30.
User’s Guide 3-7

Course Length
The second item, Course Length, is controlled by your unit selection,
but you can change it if desired. Cycle among 10, 30 and 100. Course
length represents the distance over which quantities such as walk rate
and curvature are calculated (for example, 3° per 30 meters).
Calculation Method
The third data field controls the method that Ec*Trak Directional uses
to calculate surveys. Cycle among the following methods:
• minimum curvature (the default value)
• radius of curvature
• average angle
• balanced tangential
The minimum curvature method is used throughout Ec*Trak Directional.
The other methods are used only for standard and geodetic reports. All
trajectory planning uses the minimum curvature method.
North Alignment
The fourth data field controls the alignment of coordinates. Toggle
between grid north (the default value) and true north. The selection
you make is reference north.
Scale Factor
The scale factor is a factor which Ec*Trak Directional uses to calculate
positions when the structure is aligned to true north. This data field gives
you the option of applying the same factor to structures aligned to grid
north.
Toggle between applying and not applying the scale factor. Ec*Trak
Directional reminds you that you should apply the scale factor only if
requested by the customer; the default is not to apply the scale factor.
Coordinates and Depths From ...

The items on these two lines determine the reference point from which
horizontal and vertical measurements are made for the structure. On both
lines, cycle among the following choices:
• field reference point
• structure reference point (the default value)
• wellhead

Note: Ec*Trak Directional uses the term wellhead to mean slot,

even though, at the rig, they are two different items
located at two different points.
You may, if desired, set the horizontal coordinates to one reference point
and the depth to a different reference point.
Your choices here determine the default reference points to be used for all
wellpaths on this structure. However, Ec*Trak Directional overrides your
reference selections in certain cases, as follows:
• Field plots and reports always use the field reference point.
• Structure plots and reports use the structure reference point, even if
wellhead is chosen.
• When specifying reference and object data for comparison purposes
on a report or plot, all coordinates are expressed relative to the choices
you make for the reference data. For more information about
reference data, see “Specifying Reference Data” on page 12-9.
The default values for both coordinates and depth are the structure
reference point. However, they are commonly changed to wellhead,
meaning that downhole measurements are referenced to the individual slot.
You may temporarily override the selections whenever you generate a plot
or report by specifying a different reference point at the Interpolation/
Range Specification screen. For more information, see “Coordinate/Depth
Reference” on page 12-7.
Section From ...

Specify the default reference point for determining vertical section for all
wellpaths on this structure. Toggle between wellhead and structure. The
default is wellhead.
Section Plane
Specify the default plane to be used when calculating vertical section for
all wellpaths on this structure. Cycle among the following three options:
• Hold Azimuth — This is the default value. The direction of the first
hold section in the well design is used to calculate vertical section.
• Structure Center to Target — The direction from the structure
reference point to the target is used to calculate vertical section.
• Wellhead to Target — The direction from the slot to the target is used
to calculate vertical section.
User’s Guide 3-9

You may override this selection from within the well design and survey
systems for each wellpath. See pages 8-21, 9-17 and 10-8 for more
information.
Projection Type and Grid Type

When you press [ENTER] on the data field following the Section Plane
data field, a menu appears listing five projection types: Mercator, Alaska,
Lambert, Lambert International and Brunei. A discussion of projection
types appears on pages A-7 through A-10. The default value is Mercator.
When you highlight the desired projection type and press [ENTER], a menu
listing the grid types of that projection type appears.1 Highlight the desired
grid type and press [ENTER].
As you make a selection in this manner, a default spheroid selection
also appears. You may independently change either the grid type or
the spheroid, as described in the following sections.
Grid Type
If you wish to change the grid type for a given projection type, highlight
the grid type and press [ENTER]. A menu appears listing the available grid
types for the projection. Highlight the desired grid type and press [ENTER]
to select it. Tables 1 through 4 in Appendix B show all the possible grid
types.
Spheroid
To change the spheroid, highlight the current spheroid and press [ENTER].
A menu appears listing the available spheroids, which are shown in Table 5
of Appendix B. Highlight the desired choice and press [ENTER] to select it.
For more information, see “Geographic Datum” on page A-6.
If you wish to apply a custom spheroid, press [F2] at the Spheroid menu.
Type in the major axis followed by a comma (,) and the minor axis. Press
[ENTER] to return to the Options menu. The axes you type appear on the
spheroid line.
Error Summation at Tie-Ons

This item instructs Ec*Trak Directional how to handle ellipse of uncer-
tainty calculations when one survey is tied-on to another. Toggle between
systematic and fully random error summation. For more information, see
“Survey Tie-On Methods” on page E-32.
1. Except for Brunei, because there is only one grid type associated with it.

Standard Deviations
The number of standard deviations you choose determines the probability
that the survey points actually lie within the calculated ellipse of
uncertainty. As the number of standard deviations and probability increase,
so does the size of the ellipse. Cycle among the following choices:
• 1 standard deviation (68% probability)1
• 2 standard deviations (95% probability), the default value
• 2.58 standard deviations (99% probability)
• 3 standard deviations (99.7% probability)
Report ...
On ellipse reports, choose whether the ellipse semi axes (centroid to edge)
or full axes diameters (edge to edge) are reported.
Casing Dimensions
Choose whether to include casing dimensions in clearance reports.
Toggle to include or not to include. For more information, see “Casing
Dimensions” on page E-33.
Depth to Start Errors

You may specify one of three depths to begin calculating position
uncertainties. These depths are at drill depth zero, at seabed and at some
user-specified depth. Press [ENTER] on this field to produce a menu;
highlight the desired depth and press [ENTER]. If you choose a user-
specified depth, type in the desired measured depth at the following screen.
For more information, see “Depth to Start Errors” on page E-31.
Surface Position Uncertainty

Toggle to include or not include the uncertainty of the surface position.
For more information, see “Surface Position Uncertainty” on page E-34.
Using the Operator, Field, Structure and Location Data Screen

At the Structure Edit Options menu, highlight the first item, Structure
Name and Position. When you press [ENTER] to select it, the Operator,
Field, Structure and Location Data screen, an example of which is shown
in Figure 3-10, appears.
1. Percentages cited here are for one dimension only. The probability decreases as the
number of dimensions increases.
User’s Guide 3-11

Figure 3-10.
Operator, Field,
Structure and
Location Data
Screen. If you are
creating a new
operator, structure,
field and location,
your screen looks
like this.
The screen is divided into four sections — operator, structure, field and
location. If your route to this screen included the selection of existing data,
Ec*Trak Directional fills in the corresponding section of the screen with
that information. Some examples follow:
• If you chose to create a new operator for an existing field, Ec*Trak
Directional fills in the field data and loads the field coordinates to
the structure coordinates.
• If you chose to edit an existing structure, you saw the warning
message. Ec*Trak Directional fills in the entire screen.
• If you chose to create a new structure, Ec*Trak Directional provides
default values except for operator, structure, field and location names
where no existing data were selected.
Type in new data or edit existing data as described in the following
sections. Press [ENTER] to complete your data entry and move to the next
data field. If you do not press [ENTER], your input for that data field cannot
be saved to the database.
CAUTION
The innocent-looking Operator, Field, Structure
and Location Data screen is very powerful. If you
use it incorrectly, you can permanently damage
the integrity of your data. Be careful and follow
the rules and suggestions in this chapter.

Data Entry Guidelines

Keep in mind these general rules when you enter or edit data on the
Operator, Field, Structure and Location Data screen:
• Structure data are the only items on the screen which are independent.
You can enter or change structure data, and they apply only to the
current structure.
• Other data — operator, field and location — may be linked. Any
data that you enter or change on the current screen affect all other
structures which have the same operator, field or location name.
• If you do not know the operator, field or location name when you set
up a structure, type in a unique name. Do not leave the space blank.
Do not type a name that is repeated for another structure; if you do,
the two structures may become linked, or multiple entries of the same
name may appear on future Operator, Field or Location menus.
Such multiple entries can pose a problem. For example, the Field
menu shown in Figure 3-11 has two entries for the Neptune field in
the Norwegian Sea. If you want to edit a structure in the Neptune
field, which menu item should you select?
Figure 3-11. FIeld

Menu with Two
Identical Entries.
Which one should
you select to two identical entries
create or edit a
structure in the
Neptune field in
the Norwegian
Sea?
• Once you create and save a structure, avoid later changes to its
operator, field and location data. Such changes may affect other
structures which share the same operator, field or location name.
If you are certain that the operator, field or location name is not
used anywhere else, you can safely change it.
Leaving the Screen Without Saving Data

If you discover that you traveled an incorrect route to the Operator,
Structure, Field and Location Data screen, you should quit without saving
data. This procedure also allows you to discard any changes you may have
made to existing data. Follow these steps:
1. Press [F1] to return to the Structure Edit Options menu.
User’s Guide 3-13

2. Press Q to highlight Quit, No Update and [ENTER] to select it.

3. Confirm your intention to leave the section without saving data
by highlighting Yes and pressing [ENTER].
4. You return to the Main Menu and the database remains
unchanged since the last time you saved data.
Continue your work in Ec*Trak Directional; you may travel a different
route to return to the Structure Edit Options menu, if desired.
Operator Name
If you are creating a new operator, this line is initially blank. Type in the
name of the company which is operating the structure.
The name should be different from the other operator names in the
database; if it is not, you should have chosen an existing operator. In that
case, return to the Main Menu; for more information see “Leaving the
Screen Without Saving Data” on page 3-13.
If you chose an existing operator, its name appears on the line. If you
change it, all structures owned by the operator — not just this one —
take on the new operator name.
Field Name
Note: The order of sections on the screen is Operator,

Structure, Field and Location. However, the manual
describes the screen in the more logical order of
Operator, Field, Location and Structure. Actually, you
may enter data in any order you wish, even skipping
around the screen.
If you are creating a new field, this line is initially blank. Type in the name
of the field which owns the structure.
The name should be different from the other field names in the database; if
it is not, you should have chosen an existing field. In that case, return to the
Main Menu; for more information see “Leaving the Screen Without Saving
Data” on page 3-13.
If you chose an existing field, its name appears on the line. If you change it,
all structures owned by the field — not just this one — take on the new
field name.
Field Position
Before entering position data into Ec*Trak Directional, someone must
determine the three important reference points, which are:

• field reference point (discussed in this section)

• structure reference point (see page 3-18)
• slot reference point (see page 4-4)
Each reference point has two components, horizontal and vertical. The
horizontal component of a reference point is its position on the surface
of the earth (see Appendix A for a summary of geodetics). Enter this
component as follows:
• If you know the geographic coordinates, type in Latitude and
Longitude. The program automatically fills in the Grid Easting
and Northing, Central Meridian and Hemisphere.
• If you know the grid coordinates, type in the Grid Easting and
Northing. The program automatically fills in the Latitude and
Longitude unless you specified a UTM projection at the Options
menu (see page 3-10). In that case, you must also enter the Central
Meridian and Hemisphere to identify the point uniquely.
For information about the vertical component of the field reference point,
see “Field Vertical Datum” on page 3-17.
If you specify field coordinates first, their values are loaded to the structure
coordinates. Similarly, if you specify structure coordinates first, their
values are loaded to the field coordinates. If the field and structure
reference points are not supposed to be the same, make the necessary
changes.
If you change the position information for an existing field, the field
reference point for all structures owned by the field name is changed.
How to Enter Latitude Data

Enter latitude as a value between 0 and 90 degrees. It consists of a whole
number of degrees between 0 and 90, a whole number of minutes between
0 and 60 and decimal seconds between 0 and 60. Use a space to separate
degrees, minutes and seconds. To denote a point in the southern
hemisphere, precede the value with an S or a minus sign (-). Some
examples follow:
• To enter 56°20′15.628″ North, type in 56 20 15.628
• To enter 3°17′12.002″ South, type in −3 17 12.002
How to Enter Longitude Data

Enter longitude as a value between 0 and 180 degrees. It consists of a
whole number of degrees between 0 and 180, a whole number of minutes
between 0 and 60 and decimal seconds between 0 and 60. Use a space to
separate degrees, minutes and seconds. To denote a point in the western
User’s Guide 3-15

hemisphere, precede the value with a W or a minus sign (-). Some

examples follow:
• To enter 3°20′15.628″ East, type in 3 20 15.628
• To enter 118°20′15.628″ West, type in W118 20 15.628
Note: Other methods exist for entering latitude and longitude

data. See Appendix D for more information.
How to Enter Grid Easting Data

Easting data employs a central meridian as a reference line. By convention,
the central meridian is assigned an arbitrary value. For example, in the
UTM system, the central meridian has a value of 500,000 meters. The grid
easting is a positive decimal number which expresses the distance between
the field reference point and the central meridian.
For example, a point 100,000 meters west of the UTM central meridian has
a grid easting of 400,000 (enter as 400000). A point 200,000.888 meters
east of the UTM central meridian has a grid easting of 700,000.888 (enter
as 700000.888).
Different grid systems assign different values to their central meridian, but
all values are assigned to produce positive eastings.
How to Enter Grid Northing Data

Northing data employs a base latitude as a reference line. By convention,
the base latitude is assigned an arbitrary value. The grid northing is a
positive decimal number which expresses the distance between the field
reference point and the base latitude.
In the UTM system, the equator is the base latitude. Northings for points in
the northern hemisphere begin at 0 at the equator and increase to the north,
while northings for points in the southern hemisphere begin at 10,000,000
at the equator and decrease to the south.
For example, a point 3,000,000 meters north of the equator has a UTM grid
northing of 3,000,000 (enter as 3000000). A point 2,000,000 meters south
of the equator has a UTM grid northing of 8,000,000 (enter as 8000000).
Different grid systems assign different values to their base latitude, but all
values are assigned to produce positive northings.
How to Enter Central Meridian and Hemisphere
Note: Central meridian and hemisphere are only relevant for

UTM projections. If UTM is not selected at the Options
menu (see page 3-10), skip these two data fields.

A central meridian is a reference line of longitude for UTM grid easting

values. If you enter grid easting and northing, you must also enter a value
for the central meridian in decimal degrees. If the central meridian lies in
the western hemisphere, precede it with a minus sign (-).
Do not enter the UTM zone number into this data field; enter the longitude
that corresponds to the center line of the UTM zone.
After you enter the central meridian, Ec*Trak Directional places an N in
the Hemisphere data field, signifying that the reference point is assumed
to be located in the northern hemisphere. At this point, the horizontal
component of the reference point is completely specified. The latitude,
longitude, easting and northing data fields for both field and structure are
automatically filled in.
If the reference point is actually located in the southern hemisphere, change
the Hemisphere data field to S; Ec*Trak Directional automatically
recalculates the latitude and longitude.
Field Horizontal Datum

Enter text to describe the horizontal component of the field reference point.
This text is not used in computations, but appears on printed reports and
plots whenever the field reference point is used. The default value,
commonly left alone, is field ref point. Type in different text if you wish
to change it.
Field Vertical Datum

Enter text to describe the vertical component of the field reference point.
This text is not used in computations, but appears on printed reports and
plots whenever the field reference point is used. The default value is mean
sea level. Type in different text if you wish to change it. A common field
vertical datum value for a land-based well is ground level.
This is the only place to designate the vertical component of the field
reference point. The text must be accurate because the vertical component
of the structure reference point (see “Vertical Datum Above Field Vertical
Datum” on page 3-19) is expressed relative to the field reference point.
Allocation Phase
Any text you enter on this line is added to the token list of the database.
For more information about tokens, see page 8-22. The default value,
initial allocation, is generally adequate. However, if you wish to assign
a different token name, enter it on this line.
User’s Guide 3-17

Location
This is a text description for the area where the field is situated; for
example, North Sea. If you chose a new location or field, this line is
initially blank. Type in the field location.
The name should be different from the other location names in the data-
base; if it is not, you should have chosen an existing location. In that case,
return to the Main Menu; for more information see “Leaving the Screen
Without Saving Data” on page 3-13.
If you chose an existing location, its name appears on the line. If you
change it, all structures with this location— not just this one — take
on the new location name.
Block Name
The block name is the name for an area of the field as designated by the
regulatory body responsible for issuing drilling licenses. It is an optional
text field.
Structure Name
If you are creating a new structure, this line is initially blank. Type in the
name of the structure.
If you are editing an existing structure, you may change the structure name
without affecting any other structures.
Structure Position
Enter the horizontal component of the structure reference point into the
structure latitude/longitude or easting/northing data fields, if necessary.
For details, see “Field Position” on page 3-14. Proceed as follows:
• If the structure reference point is different from a previously-entered
field reference point, enter the structure coordinates.
• If you have not entered the field coordinates, enter the structure
coordinates. If you enter UTM grid easting and northing coordinates
for the structure, you must enter a central meridian and hemisphere
to completely specify the structure coordinates. The central meridian
and hemisphere data fields are located within the field section of
the screen.
• If an existing structure’s coordinates are incorrect, change them.
These changes do not affect any other structure.1
1. However, they may affect other items, such as wellpath projections and proximity
calculations. If you change structure coordinates, re-run these calculations.

Structure Horizontal Datum

Enter text to describe the horizontal component of the structure reference
point. This text is not used in computations, but appears on printed reports
and plots whenever the structure reference point is used. The default value
is structure. If the structure reference point is located on the structure itself,
you should enter a description of the structure reference point such as a slot
name (if that is what it is) or a phrase such as northwest corner of deck.
Structure Vertical Datum

Enter text to describe the vertical component of the structure reference
point. This text is not used in computations, but appears on printed reports
and plots whenever the structure reference point is used. The default value
is structure. If the structure reference point is located on the structure itself,
describe this point as rkb, or something similar.
Vertical Datum Above Field Vertical Datum

The vertical component of the structure reference point is the height
difference between it and the field reference point. Enter this number
in meters or feet, as defined in the Options menu (see page 3-7). If
the structure reference point is lower than the field reference point,
the value should be negative.
In a common example, if the field vertical reference is at mean sea level
and the structure vertical reference is at RKB, enter the kelly bushing
elevation as the vertical datum above field vertical datum.
Field Vertical Datum above Seabed

This is the distance from the field reference point, commonly mean sea
level, to the seabed. Enter this value in feet or meters as appropriate. If
drilling on land, enter the height of the field reference point above ground
level.
Convergence
Convergence is calculated by Ec*Trak Directional from the coordinate
data on this screen and the Projection Type, Grid Type and Spheroid on
the Options menu. You can not scroll to the Convergence data field nor
directly change its contents.

Press [F2] to enter the uncertainty of the reference point position. A menu
appears which allows you to enter a radius and TVD of uncertainty. Press
[F2] a second time to view some suggested radius values, depending on
User’s Guide 3-19

how the surface position was determined. Enter the radius and TVD in the
units (feet or meters) specified at the Options menu.
The dimensions used should always be at a 2σ confidence level. Once
entered they are adjusted by the program to match the confidence level
selected at the Options menu.
Press [F1] to return to the Operator, Field, Structure and Location Data
menu. For more information, see “Surface Position Uncertainty” on page
E-34.
Field and Structure Reference Point Summary

Ec*Trak Directional deals with three reference points — field, structure
and slot — and it is essential that you define each of them properly
before entering further data. Each reference point is determined by
three coordinates — North/South, East/West and vertical.
For the field reference point, enter numerical values for North/South
and East/West, as latitude and longitude or grid northing and easting.
Enter text in the Field Vertical Datum data field to describe the vertical
component.
Enter the North/South and East/West values for the structure reference
point similar to the field reference point. Enter a numerical value in the
Vertical Datum Above Field Vertical Datum data field to represent the
height difference between the structure and field reference points.
Your placement of the three reference points, combined with your choice
of which points to measure coordinates and depths from (see page 3-8),
provide the flexibility to meet most calculating and reporting requirements.
Avoiding Common Problems

The easiest situation for Ec*Trak Directional to handle is when you know
all the pertinent data about a structure; enter the data and save the structure.
See “Saving Structure Data” on page 3-21.
However, at times there are situations where you do not know all the data.
Two examples are presented in the following sections.
Unknown Field Name

You may need to plan a well or enter survey data without knowing all the
facts about the structure. For example, you may not know the field name.
When you create the structure, you must enter a unique field name. Do not
leave it blank or use a generic term such as Unknown. If you do, you may
do the same thing for a second structure without a field name. From that
point onward, the two structures share the same field name in Ec*Trak
Directional, although that may not actually be true.

Be sure to enter a unique field name. At the Field menu, shown in

Figure 3-4 on page 3-4, note the existing names before selecting Create
New Field. Make sure the name you enter does not match any of them.
For unknown field names, you may want to use something like Unknown
1, Unknown 2 and so on. Since these name are not very descriptive, you
may have to keep a log outside of Ec*Trak Directional explaining what
each of these field names signifies.
Quitting Structure Edit

While entering data on the Options menu or the Operator, Field, Structure
and Location data screen, you may realize that you do not have all the
necessary information. In this case it is often best to leave Structure Edit
without adding anything to the database, determine the correct data and
enter them later.
To abandon the current session, proceed as follows:
• You may want to print out the information currently showing on your
monitor; press [CONTROL-P].
• From either screen, press [F1] to return to the Structure Edit Options
menu.
• Press Q and Y to return to the Main Menu. Nothing you entered
during the Structure Setup session is saved to the database.1
Saving Structure Data

The new data or changes you enter in either the Options menu or the
Operator, Field, Structure and Location Data screen are initially stored in
the computer’s memory. If you are sure they are correct, save them to the
database. Once saved, you can review and/or change them in the future.
There are two methods of saving your data, as follows:
• Save and continue working on the structure — At the Structure Edit
Options menu, highlight Save Current Edits and press [ENTER]. A
confirmation screen appears, asking if you wish to Commit Current
Edits. Answer Yes to save the data, or No not to save. In either case,
you return to the Structure Edit Options menu, where you may
continue working with the present structure.
• Save and leave the structure — At the Structure Edit Options menu,
press [F1] to exit the structure. A confirmation screen appears, asking
if you wish to Exit With Save. Answer Yes to save the data and return
1. Exception — See “Save and Continue Working on the Structure” on page 3-21. If you
performed this procedure during the Structure Edit session, only those changes made
afterward are discarded.
User’s Guide 3-21

to the Main Menu. If you do not wish to save the data, answer No to
Exit With Save.1
To leave the structure and discard any data you entered or changed, select
Quit, No Update at the Structure Edit Options menu. For more information,
see the Note on page 3-6.
Setting Up a Sample Structure

To illustrate the main topics of this chapter, a sample structure is set up.
The raw information is as follows:
• Operator, field, location and structure are all named Manual.
• The field reference point is a marker buoy located at 1° 23′ 15.68″
South Latitude, 8° 7′ 44.93″ East Longitude.
• The structure reference point is located at slot #1 on the structure.
It is positioned at 1° 23′ 14.68″ South Latitude, 8° 7′ 43.93″ East
Longitude.
• The surface of the structure lies 25m above mean sea level. The sea
depth is 300m.
• The block name is 024-RLD Block A.
• The desired course length is 30 meters.
• Make all calculations by the minimum curvature method.
• Reference all directions to true north. Coordinates and vertical section
for each wellpath are measured from the respective slot. Depths are
from rkb.
• Use UTM ellipsoid.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select Create/Edit from the Main Menu.
2. Select Structure, Wellheads, etc. from the Create/Edit menu.
3. Select Create New Operator from the Operator menu.
4. Select Create New Field from the Field menu.
5. Select Create New Location from the Location menu.
1. If you answer No, Ec*Trak Directional returns to the Structure Edit Options menu
and automatically selects the item from the menu that was highlighted when you
pressed [F1] to Exit.
At this point, press [F1] from most of the resulting menus and screens to return to
the Structure Edit Options menu. The lone exception is if you are asked to Commit
Current Edits. Answer No to return to the Structure Edit Options menu.

6. Select Options from the Structure Edit Options menu. The

Options menu appears as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12.
Options Menu.
The default values
are displayed for
a new structure.
Change those you
need to change
and press [F1]
when finished.
7. Since you desire metric units, press [ENTER], which changes

the first item to metric and the course length to 30. Since that
matches the desired course length, you do not have to change
the second data field.
8. Press the Down arrow key three times to move to the next item
that requires changing, Aligned to Grid North. Since it should be
true north, press [ENTER] to make that change.
9. Press the Down arrow key twice and then [ENTER] to change
the Coords item from structure reference point to wellhead
(wellhead and slot are the same thing in Ec*Trak Directional).
10. Press the Down arrow key once and then [ENTER] to change the
Depths item from structure reference point to wellhead.
11. You do not need to change anything else; your Options menu
should match that shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13. Edit

Options Menu.
Appearance after
changing option
items for Manual
Structure.
12. Press [F1] to return to the Structure Edit Options menu.
User’s Guide 3-23

13. Save the options data you changed. Highlight Save Current Edits
and press [ENTER]. When asked to Commit Current Edits?,
highlight Yes and press [ENTER].
14. Highlight Structure Name and Position at the Structure Edit
Options menu. Press [ENTER]. The Operator, Field, Structure
and Location Data screen appears, as shown in Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14.
Operator, Field,
Structure and
Location Data
Screen. The
default values are
displayed for a
new structure.
Type in the correct
information and
press [F1] when
finished.
15. Fill in the operator name as Manual Operator and press [ENTER].
16. Press the Down arrow key until you are highlighting the Field
Name data field. Fill it in as Manual Field and press [ENTER].
17. Type in the field latitude as −1 23 15.68. Press [ENTER]. Type
in the field longitude as 8 7 44.93 and press [ENTER]. If a box
appears asking to keep Central Meridian at <?>, highlight No
and press [ENTER].
18. At this point, Ec*Trak Directional automatically fills in the grid
easting, grid northing, central meridian and hemisphere for the
field. Accept the default values for the rest of the field data by
skipping them.
19. Position the cursor in the location data field. Type Manual
Location followed by [ENTER]. Enter 024-RLD Block A as
the block name.
20. Press [ENTER] three times to go to the Structure data field. Type
Manual Structure and [ENTER].
21. Notice that Ec*Trak Directional automatically fills in the
structure location with the same figures as for the field. If the
field and structure reference points are the same, you need not
change the structure coordinates. However in this case, they are
different. Type in the structure latitude as −1 23 14.68. Press

[ENTER]. Type in the structure longitude as 8 7 43.93 and press

[ENTER]. The structure easting and northing change accordingly.
Note: You cannot edit one number in the data fields. You have
to retype the entire coordinate.
22. Press the Down arrow key twice to move to the Vertical Datum
field. Type rkb and press [ENTER].
23. At the Vertical Datum Above Field Vertical Datum. Type 25 and
press [ENTER].
24. The last data field to consider is Field Vertical Datum Above
Seabed. Type 300, the mean sea level, and press [ENTER]. The
completed screen should match that shown in Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-15.
Operator, Field,
Structure and
Location Data
Screen.
Appearance after
changing items for
Manual Structure.
25. Press [F1] to return to the Structure Edit Options menu. Save your
work by pressing [F1]. When the confirmation screen appears,
highlight Yes and press [ENTER]. (To use this Manual Structure
for future examples in the manual, make sure you save it.)
User’s Guide 3-25

Chapter 4
Slot Data
This is the second of four chapters dealing with Structure

Setup topics. It discusses how to enter and edit information
about the slots on a structure, including the reference point
for each slot. Methods for positioning the slots, rotating
them and offsetting them are reviewed, as are linking slots
with wells and targets.
Chapter 3 describes how to set up an operator, field, location and structure.

After you set them up, you must set up one or more slots (also referred to
as wellheads) belonging to the structure. This chapter discusses the
methods for entering and editing slot information.
The Structure Edit Options menu, shown in Figure 4-1, is the gateway
to entering slot information. No matter how you arrive at this menu
(the possible routes are shown in Figure 3-1 on page 3-2), the same
slot data screens are available.
Figure 4-1.
Structure Edit
Options Menu.
Select Slot Data to
start entering data
pertaining to the
slots owned by
the structure.
You can also enter slot data on your way to the Well Design, Survey or
Rigsite Spreadsheet. Ec*Trak Directional asks you to specify an operator,
field and structure to work with. When you reach the slot level, you can
specify an existing slot or create a new one. If you choose to create a new
User’s Guide 4-1

Slot Data Ec*Trak Directional
slot, the Slot Information screen, shown in Figure 4-6 on page 4-4, appears.
All the functions and screens leading from the Slot Information screen are
the same no matter how it is accessed. For more information, see page 7-2.
Other elements pertaining to Structure Setup are discussed as follows:
• operator, field, location, structure — see Chapter 3.
• target — see Chapter 5.
• casing, well, declination, survey tool error model — see Chapter 6.
The flow chart in Figure 4-2 shows the menus and screens you can access
when you select Slot Data from the Structure Edit Options menu.
Structure Edit
Options Menu Slot Information screen
Remove association
Structure name and position [F2] Re-date as today
Options add slot Leave alone
Slot data
Well data [F4]
Target data link with target
Declination data existing target
Survey tool errors
Save current edits [F3]
Quit, no update link with well
existing existing well
slot [F2]
casing program [F2]
add well
add
Edit current edit Well Data Form screen
Edit next next deepest
Find copy casing program
Add Casing Information
Rotate Slots Heading screen
Offset Slots
North offset East offset yes/no

existing slot
Figure 4-2. Slot Data Flow Chart. The Casing Program screens are discussed in Chapter 6,
as are those for adding a well and using the Well Data Form Screen.
Entering Slot Data

You may perform the following operations for each slot on the structure:
• Add it to the database.
• Specify its location by filling in the Slot Information screen.
• Associate it with a well name.
• Associate it with a target.
• Enter a casing program for it (see page 6-8 for more information).
At the Structure Edit Options menu, highlight Slot Data and press [ENTER]
to produce the Edit Options menu shown in Figure 4-3.

Ec*Trak Directional Slot Data
Figure 4-3. Edit

Options Menu.
Select Find to list
the existing slots.
Select Add to create
a new slot.
The best way to work with the Edit Options menu is to highlight Find and
press [ENTER]. This produces the list of existing slots for the structure, an
example of which is shown in Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4.
Existing Slots.
The name,
horizontal
coordinates and
elevation from the well name
structure reference elevation from struct. ref.
point are given for coordinates north/south
each slot, as is its and east/west of struct. ref.
slot name
well association.
If you are entering slot data on a structure for the first time, Find
produces the menu shown in Figure 4-5. One slot appears because
Ec*Trak Directional assumes that a structure has at least one slot.
Figure 4-5.
Existing Slot on
New Structure.
The program starts
you off with one slot
on a new structure.
Select it and enter
the necessary data.
Then add more
slots as needed.
Highlight the desired slot and press [ENTER] to select it. The Slot
Information screen appears, as shown in Figure 4-6. Previously saved
data appear on the screen. If you are entering slot data for the first time,
User’s Guide 4-3

the structure reference coordinates appear in the latitude/longitude and

easting/northing data fields. The following sections describe the data fields
on this screen.
Figure 4-6. Slot

Information
Screen.
Coordinates
represent the
distance from
the structure
reference point to
the slot position.
Slot Name
Ec*Trak Directional provides default slot names, slot #1, slot #2 and so on.
Generally, you do not need to change the slot name. This is emphasized by
the cursor starting out on the second field of the screen.
However, you may change the slot name to anything you wish. Press the
Up and Down arrow keys to highlight the slot name, and type in your
desired entry. Press [ENTER] to complete the slot name entry and move
the cursor to the North/South Coordinate data field.
Note: If you wish to assign a well name to the slot, you should
enter it in the Well Data section. For more information,
see page 6-2.
Slot Horizontal Coordinates

You generally define the slot location by its distance from the structure
reference point. In the North/South Coordinate data field, enter the number
of meters (or feet) the slot is located to the north (or south) of the structure
reference point. An unsigned value or an N signifies north, while a
negative value or an S signifies south.
Press [ENTER] to complete the North/South input and move to the next
field. Fill in the East/West Coordinate data field the same way. Here
an unsigned value or an E signifies east, while a negative value or a W
signifies west.
An alternate method of entering slot coordinates is to enter the slot
geometry pattern with the structure oriented to a false north. Then use the
Rotate Slots function of the Edit Options menu to rotate the structure to its
actual orientation with respect to north. This method is useful for structures
that have not yet been placed into position. By entering the slot layout and

intended orientation, you can generate preliminary slot coordinates for

planning purposes. Later, when the actual structure orientation is known,
re-rotate the slots to their final position (for more information, see page
4-8).
Instead of entering the slot location into the coordinates data fields,
you may use the latitude/longitude data fields or the easting/northing
data fields.
Whether you enter local, geographical or grid coordinates, Ec*Trak
Directional converts your input to the other two and enters the value
into the appropriate data fields. In all cases, the information is stored
in the database as the distance from the structure reference point.
Note: If you change the location of the structure reference

point, the slot location changes with it. This is true even if
you entered global or grid slot coordinates (in latitude/
longitude or easting/northing form).
Drill Depth Zero

This a text data field for reports and plots. Your entry indicates the vertical
reference point for the slot. The report and plot systems use this text
whenever the slot reference point is specified.
Elevation Above Structure Vertical Datum

In the Elevation data field, enter the distance in meters (or feet) that the
slot reference point is above (or below) the structure reference point.
A negative value signifies that the slot reference point is lower than the
structure reference point.
What to Do Next
At this point you have completed the data entry for the Slot Information
screen. Proceed as follows:
• Press [F1] to return to the Edit Options menu and work with a different
slot.
• Press [F2] to access the Casing Program. For more information, see
“Casing Data” on page 6-8.
• Press [F3] to link the current slot with a well. For more information,
see “Linking a Slot with a Well” on page 4-6.
• Press [F4] to link the current slot with a target. For more information,
see “Linking a Slot with a Target” on page 4-7.
User’s Guide 4-5

Adding a Slot
There are several points within the Slot Data area where you can add a slot
to the structure, as follows:
• From the Edit Options menu, highlight Add and press [ENTER].
• From the list of existing slots (shown in Figure 4-4 on page 4-3),
press [F2].
In each case, a new Slot Information screen appears. Fill it in as previously
described.
Linking a Slot with a Well

After creating a slot, you can link it with a well. From the Slot Information
screen, press [F3] to produce a list of existing well names for the structure,
as shown in Figure 4-7. Highlight the well name to associate with the
current slot and press [ENTER]. A slot can only be linked with one well
at a time. If it is already linked with a well, that link is broken when you
associate it with a new well.
Figure 4-7. List of

Existing Wells.
Select the desired
well to associate
with the slot. A slot
can be linked with
only one well;
linking it with one
well also unlinks it
from any other well.
If the desired well name does not appear within the list of wells, you can
create it here. When the list of wells is displayed, press [F2] to add a well.
For more information about adding a well, see page 6-2.
Note: Ec*Trak Directional does not require that you create a

well nor that you link it with a slot.
To unlink a slot from a well without linking to another, select the slot of
interest from the list of slots. At the Slot Information screen, press [F3].
When the list of wells appears, press [F1]. You return to the Edit Options
menu, and the previous link is broken.

Linking a Slot with a Target

After creating a slot, you can link it with a target or remove an existing
link. Linking slots with targets can help you to organize the data on a large
structure prior to making well designs. You can link a slot with more than
one target, and you can link a target with more than one slot.
From the Slot Information screen, press [F4] to produce a list of existing
targets for the structure, as shown in Figure 4-8. Highlight the target to
associate with the current slot and press [ENTER].
Figure 4-8. List of

Existing Targets.
To link or unlink a
target from the
selected slot,
highlight the target
and press [ENTER].
Unlike wells, you can not create a target from within the Slot Data area.
To create a target, press [F1] until you return to the Structure Edit Options
menu, and select Target Data. Create the target (for more information, see
page 5-1), then return to the Slot Information screen for the desired slot and
press [F4]; the newly-created target should be listed.
From the target listing as shown in Figure 4-8, highlight the target you
wish to deal with and press [ENTER]. The screen shown in Figure 4-9
appears.
Figure 4-9.
Target Association
Menu. To unlink a
slot from a target,
select Remove
Association. To
link them, select
Re-date as Today.
Proceed as follows:
• To link the selected slot with the target, highlight Re-date as Today
and press [ENTER]. If they are already linked, this updates the date
they are associated, as stored in the database.
User’s Guide 4-7

• To unlink the selected slot from the target, highlight Remove

Association and press [ENTER]. This only removes the link; it
does not delete the target from the database.
• To change nothing, highlight Leave Alone and press [ENTER].
After making any of the three selections, you return to the Edit Options
menu (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-3).
Performing Other Slot Operations

This section of the manual discusses the remaining items on the Edit
Options menu (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-3). The two items that have
been discussed are Find (see page 4-3) and Add (see page 4-6).
Edit Current
This function allows you to re-edit the last Slot Information screen you
viewed. If beginning a slot editing session, the Slot Information screen
appears for the first slot on the listing, as shown in Figure 4-4 on page 4-3.
Edit Next
This function allows you to edit the Slot Information screen for the next
slot on the listing, as shown in Figure 4-4 on page 4-3. It is useful when
you need to make changes to each slot on the structure.
Rotate Slots
As noted on page 4-4, you may enter the slot geometry pattern into the
slot coordinate data fields while assuming that the slots are oriented to
the north. Then you can rotate the structure to its actual orientation,
at which time Ec*Trak Directional calculates the actual slot coordinates.
The diagram in Figure 4-10 shows the rotation of a structure.
To enter the rotation, highlight Rotate Slots and press [ENTER]. The Slot
Rotation screen appears, as shown in Figure 4-11. The title of the screen
tells you the current structure heading (Heading currently 0.00) and asks
you to type in the new heading. The rotation angle is absolute; enter the
structure heading from north, not the rotation from the current heading,
and press [ENTER].
Express the structure heading in a clockwise azimuth fashion — for
example, 30°. If the structure is oriented counterclockwise from north,
enter a negative value or subtract the angle from 360° to obtain the heading
azimuth (−30° or 330°).
You return to the Edit Options menu. If you select Find to see the list of
slots (see Figure 4-4 on page 4-3), notice that Ec*Trak Directional has
changed their local coordinates to reflect the rotation you applied. The

330°
N
N −30°
Structure
Reference
+
Structure
Reference
+
Figure 4-10 (a). Slots Oriented North. Figure 4-10 (b). Actual Structure
Enter slot geometry with respect to the Orientation. If the structure is not oriented
structure reference point. north, enter its heading (see page 4-8).
Ec*Trak Directional automatically calculates
and displays the slot coordinates, taking
the rotation into account. In this figure,
the rotation is 330 ° or −30 °.
new coordinates also appear on each Slot Information screen. Notice that
the rotation takes place around the structure reference point, so that a
slot located at 0.00 north and 0.00 east (structure reference) remains
in place throughout the rotation.
Figure 4-11. Slot

Rotation Screen.
Enter the absolute
angle of rotation for
the structure.
If you must change the slot geometry after applying a rotation, proceed as
follows:
• Note the current heading.
• Remove the rotation by selecting Rotate Slots and entering 0 as the
structure heading.
• Go to the Slot Information screen for the slot you need to change
and edit its coordinates.
• Restore the previous structure heading by selecting Rotate Slots and
typing it in again.
User’s Guide 4-9

Offset Slots
If necessary, you may move all the slots on a structure by a certain distance
while keeping the same structure reference point. You can accomplish this
by using the Offset Slots function on the Edit Options menu.
Highlight Offset Slots and press [ENTER] to produce the North Offset
screen shown in Figure 4-12. Enter the north/south (south is negative)
distance to move all the slots from their present position and press
[ENTER]. The East Offset screen appears; enter the east/west (west
is negative) distance to move all the slots from their present position.
Press [ENTER] to return to the Edit Options menu.
Figure 4-12.
North Offset
Screen. Enter the
distance to move
the slots. Do the
same for the East
screen that follows.
If you select Find to see the list of slots (see Figure 4-4 on page 4-3),
notice that Ec*Trak Directional has changed their local coordinates
to reflect the offset you applied. The new coordinates also appear on
each Slot Information screen.
Saving Slot Data

All the slot data you enter or change reside in the computer’s memory. To
save them to the database, press [F1] until you return to the Structure Edit
Options menu (see Figure 4-1 on page 4-1). To save the new or changed
slot data, select one of the following:
• Save and continue working on the structure — Highlight Save Current
Edits and press [ENTER]. A confirmation screen appears, asking if you
wish to Commit Current Edits. Answer Yes to save the data, or No not
to save. In either case, you return to the Structure Edit Options menu,
where you may continue working with the present structure.
to the Main Menu.
If you do not wish to save the data, answer No to Exit With Save.
For more information, see the footnote on page 3-21.
To leave the structure and discard any changes, select Quit, No Update
at the Structure Edit Options menu.

Setting Up Sample Slots

To illustrate the main topics of this chapter, six sample slots are set up.
The raw information is as follows:
• The slots are to be set up on the Manual structure, whose setup is
described on pages 3-22 through 3-25.
• The slot geometry consists of two rows of three slots, each 2 meters
apart.
• Slot #1 is at the structure reference point.
• The structure heading (through Slots 1 and 4) is N63E.
A diagram of the structure is shown in Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13.
Sample Structure. Structure Heading
Slots, numbered N63E
in the center, are
spaced 2 meters
apart. Structure
heading is N63E; 1 2 3
rotate the slots 2m
to that heading. 2m
4 5 6
Proceed as follows:
3. Select Manual Operator from the Operator menu.
4. Select Manual Structure from the Structure menu.
5. Select Slot Data from the Structure Edit Options menu.
6. Select Find from the Edit Options menu.
7. Select Slot #1 from the list of existing slots. Each structure
automatically starts out with one slot on it.
8. The Slot Information screen, shown in Figure 4-14, appears.
Notice that the Latitude/Longitude and Easting/Northing data
fields are filled in with the structure reference point coordinates.
User’s Guide 4-11

Figure 4-14. Slot

Information
Screen. If the slot
position is the same
as the structure
reference point,
its North/South,
East/West and
Elevation values
should all be 0.
Since Slot #1 corresponds to the structure reference point, its

North/South, East/West and Elevation coordinates are 0. Since
zeroes appear in those data fields, no changes need to be made.
Press [F1] and select Add to add the next slot.
9. Notice that the slot name changes to Slot #2. Type 0 in the
North/South Coordinate data field and press [ENTER]. Type 2 in
the East/West data field and press [ENTER]. At this point, your
screen should match that shown in Figure 4-15. Notice that
Ec*Trak Directional re-calculates the latitude/longitude and
easting/northing data for the slot.
Figure 4-15. Slot

Information
Screen. After you
enter the slot #2
coordinates,
Ec*Trak Directional
re-calculates the
geographical and
grid data.
10. Press [F1] and select Add to add the third slot. Type 0 in the
North/South Coordinate data field and 4 in the East/West data
field.
11. Press [F1] and select Add to add the fourth slot. Its initial
coordinates are -2 (2 meters south) and 0 (0 meters east).
12. Press [F1] and select Add to add the fifth and sixth slots at
coordinates 2m south, 2m east and at 2m south, 4m east,
respectively.
13. Press [F1] to return to the Edit Options screen.

14. Highlight Find and press [ENTER] to view the results of your slot
data input thus far.
15. Press [F1] and select Slot Data to return to the Edit Options
Menu.
16. Highlight Rotate Slots and press [ENTER].
17. Type in 63 and press [ENTER]. This brings the structure to its
actual orientation with respect to map north. Ec*Trak Directional
transforms the slot geometry to the actual slot coordinates.
18. Highlight Find and press [ENTER]. Note the different coordinates
for slots 2 through 6 after the rotation; see Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16. List

of Slots Before
and After Rotation.
Note the change in
coordinates for slots
2 through 6.
19. Press [F1] to return to the Structure Edit Options menu. Save the
new slot data by pressing [F1]. When the confirmation screen
appears, highlight Yes and press [ENTER].
In this example the slots were not offset, nor were there any elevation
changes in relation to the structure reference point. Additionally, no links
with wells or targets were carried out because the wells and targets have
not been created. When they are created, return to the Slot Information
screen to make the links.
User’s Guide 4-13

+++
++++
Chapter 5
Target Data
This is the third of four chapters dealing with Structure

Setup topics. It discusses how to enter and edit information
about targets, both in Structure Setup and at the Well
Design Spreadsheet. Methods for positioning the targets,
specifying their size and shape and offsetting them from
the center of the wellpath are discussed.
Chapter 3 describes how to set up an operator, field, location and structure,

and Chapter 4 describes how to enter slot data. The material in those
chapters specify the starting point of a wellpath.
The subject of this chapter is the target, or ending point of a wellpath.
Other Structure Setup topics are casing, well, declination and survey tool
error model. They are discussed in Chapter 6.
There are two places in Ec*Trak Directional where you can enter or edit
target data. They are in Structure Setup (see page 5-2) and in the Well
Design Spreadsheet (see page 5-9). Choose where to enter target data
according to your selection for Coords and Depth From at the Options
menu in Structure Setup (see page 3-8):
• If you chose the field or structure reference points, you can enter
target data at either area.
• If you chose wellhead (the slot reference point), use Structure Setup
if the target position is given from the structure reference point; use
the Well Design Spreadsheet if the target is referenced to the slot.1
All target data, no matter where entered, are available to all wellpaths and
all structures for the field.
1. The reason is that the target area in Structure Setup does not know which slot to
use as a coordinate reference. Therefore, if you specified the slot reference point,
the target area in Structure Setup defaults to the structure reference point.
User’s Guide 5-1

Target Data Ec*Trak Directional
Entering Target Data Within Structure Setup

The Structure Edit Options menu is the gateway to entering target
information in Structure Setup. The flow chart in Figure 5-1 shows
the available menus and screens when you select Target Data from
the Structure Edit Options menu.
Figure 5-1. Flow

Chart for Target Structure Edit
Data in Structure Options Menu
Setup. If no Structure name and position
Options
targets exist, you Slot data
Well data Add Target
go directly to the Target data Edit Target Target Details
Target Details Declination data Delete Target screen
screen. Survey tool errors
Save current edits edit
existing
Quit, no update target
Entering New Target Data

You may perform the following operations for each target:
• Add it to the database.
• Specify its location, name, size and shape by filling in the Target
Details screen.
• Edit its existing data.
• Delete it from the database.
At the Structure Edit Options menu, highlight Target Data and press
[ENTER]. If targets have been entered for the structure, the Target Option
menu appears as shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2. Target

Option Menu.
Choose to add a
new target, edit an
existing one or
delete an unused
target.
If no targets exist for the structure, or if you highlight Add and press
[ENTER], the Target Details screen, shown in Figure 5-3, appears.
Notice that the Target Details screen has two sections. The top part, which
you must complete, is devoted to the target’s location. The bottom part,
which is optional, is devoted to the size and shape of the target.

Ec*Trak Directional Target Data
Figure 5-3. Target

Details Screen.
Enter the target’s
location in the top
part of the screen.
Enter the target’s
size and shape in
the bottom part.
Note: Press [ENTER] or the cursor control keys to move around

the Target Details screen. However, the cursor often does
not move as expected. Continue pressing the key until the
cursor appears in the desired data field.
Entering Target Coordinates

When you describe a target position, give it a vertical and a horizontal
distance. The reference point1 from which the distances are measured is
shown in the following table, which applies to the target area in Structure
Setup only:
If the reference point chosen Target coordinates are

in the Option menu is: measured from:
field field reference point

structure structure reference point
slot structure reference point
Enter the vertical component into the TVD (true vertical depth) data field.
You may enter the horizontal component in one of the following four
ways, after which Ec*Trak Directional calculates and displays the other
three and the convergence (you cannot change the convergence).
• North/South and East/West Coordinates — Enter the distance in each
direction as measured from the reference point you specified at the
Coords From item on the Options menu.
• Polar Coordinates — Enter the distance from the same reference point
and the angle from north. For example, for a distance of 3000 meters
at 127°, enter 3000 127.
• Latitude/Longitude — Enter the global position in degrees, minutes
and decimal seconds.
1. See “Coordinates and Depths From ...” on page 3-8.
User’s Guide 5-3

• Grid N and Grid E — Enter the grid northing and easting values.
Note: If you enter the target location using local coordinates

(N/S, E/W or polar) and later change the location of the
field reference point, the target location changes with it.
In the Name data field, type a name for the target. Unlike an operator, field
or location name, the target name need not be unique. However, since
target names are displayed when you edit or delete a target (see Figure 5-4
on page 5-5), a unique name helps you identify the correct target.
Entering Target Size and Shape

Enter one of five geometric shapes for the target, as follows:
• Point — Leave the bottom section blank.
• Circle — Type in the radius of the target in the Dimension #1 data
field. Ec*Trak Directional enters circle into the Shape data field.
• Rectangle — Type in the North/South and East/West dimensions
of the target in the Dimension #1 and the Dimension #2 data fields,
respectively. Ec*Trak Directional enters rectangle into the Shape data
field. You may enter a value for rotation from north, if needed.
• Semi-Circle — Type in the radius of the target in the Dimension #1
data field, and the angle of rotation (may be 0) in the Rotation from
North data field. Move to the Shape data field and type semi.
• Ellipse — Type in the length of the target’s axes in the Dimension #1
and #2 data fields. You may also enter a thickness or a rotation from
north, if needed. Move to the Shape data field and type ell.
The dimension entered in the Dimension #1 data field initially points to
the north. Use the Rotation from North data field to rotate the target the
entered number of degrees. The most common use for this data field is
to orient the target to the azimuth at which the wellpath enters the target.
Rotation applies to rectangles, semi-circles and ellipses.
You can move the cursor to the Shape data field and type in the name of the
desired shape. You can type a shortened form, such as cir, rect, semi or ell.
If you enter something that the program does not recognize, it presents a
menu to choose from.
The Thickness data field allows you to provide a third dimension to circles,
rectangles, semi-circles and ellipses. Thickness is applied from the target
TVD downward.
The final data field is Target Offset From Wellpath? When you design
a wellpath or project from a survey to the target, Ec*Trak Directional
normally aims the center of the wellpath at the center of the target. If that

is what you want, type N and [ENTER]. However, if you want the wellpath
to cross the target at a point other than the center, type Y and [ENTER]. At
the well design spreadsheet, you specify exactly where to intersect the
target; for more information, see page 8-19.
When finished entering the target data, press [F1] to return to the Structure
Edit Options menu.
Editing Existing Target Data

To edit existing target data, highlight Target Data at the Structure Edit
Options menu and press [ENTER]. At the Target Option menu, highlight
Edit Target and press [ENTER]. The list of existing targets for the structure
appears, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4. List of

Existing Targets.
Highlight the target
you wish to edit or
delete and press
[ENTER].
Highlight the desired target and press [ENTER]. The Target Details screen
appears, and contains the previously entered target data. You can change
any information on the screen.
Note: If you change the position of a target to which you have

already made a well design, Ec*Trak Directional does
not re-calculate the design. You must return to the
appropriate Well Design Spreadsheet and plan the
well again.
Deleting a Target
To delete a target from the database, highlight Target Data at the Structure
Edit Options menu and press [ENTER]. At the Target Option menu, high-
light Delete Target and press [ENTER]. The list of existing targets appears.
Highlight the target you wish to delete and press [ENTER]. If successful,
you return to the Structure Edit Options menu.
You can only delete a target if it is not linked with a slot or a well design. If
there is a link, Ec*Trak Directional informs you when you try to delete the
target and disallows your action, as shown in Figure 5-5. Press [ENTER]
to return to the Structure Edit Options menu.
User’s Guide 5-5

Figure 5-5. No
Deletion. You can
not delete a target
which is linked with
a slot or with a well
design. If you
attempt it, this
screen appears.
Press [ENTER]
to continue.
Saving Target Data

The target data you enter or change reside in the computer’s memory. To
save them to the database, return to the Structure Edit Options menu and
proceed as follows:
• Save and continue working on the structure — Highlight Save Current
Edits and press [ENTER]. A confirmation screen appears, asking if you
wish to Commit Current Edits. Answer Yes to save the data, or No not
to save. In either case, you return to the Structure Edit Options menu,
where you may continue working with the present structure.
to the Main Menu.
If you do not wish to save the data, answer No to Exit With Save. For
more information, see the footnote on page 3-21.
To leave the structure and discard any changes, select Quit, No Update at
the Structure Edit Options menu.
Setting Up Sample Targets

Three sample targets are to be set up in Structure Edit. The raw information
is as follows, with all distances measured from the structure reference
point:
• Target 1 is to be drilled from Slot #1. It is a point 2750 meters deep
and lies 1500 meters north and 1250 meters west.
• Target 2 is to be drilled from Slot #2. It is a 30 meter radius circle,
2500 meters deep, 1000 meters north and 1200 meters east.
• Target 3 is to be drilled from Slot #3. It is a 30 meter square rotated in
the direction of the wellpath, 3000 meters deep, 500 meters north and
1000 meters east.

Creating Targets
Proceed as follows:
5. Select Target Data from the Structure Edit Options menu.
6. The Target Details screen, shown in Figure 5-6 appears.
Figure 5-6. Target

Details Screen.
7. In this case, the coordinates and depths are measured from the
slot, as entered in the Options menu (see page 3-23). Since the
Target Details screen does not know which slot to use as a
coordinate reference, the data entered onto it default to the
structure reference point.
8. Fill out the screen for Target 1. Type 2750 in the TVD field and
press [ENTER]. Type 1500 as the N/S coordinate and press
[ENTER]. Type −1250 as the E/W coordinate and press [ENTER].
9. Ec*Trak Directional fills in the equivalent polar coordinates,

latitude/longitude, grid northing/easting coordinates and the
convergence.
10. Type the name Target 1 into the Name data field and press
[ENTER]. Your screen should match that shown in Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7. Target

Details Screen.
Data are filled in
for Target 1.
11. You have completed the data entry for Target 1. Press [F1] to
return to the Target Option menu.
User’s Guide 5-7

12. To create Target 2, select Add Target. Enter TVD = 2500, N/S =
1000, E/W = 1200, Name = Target 2.
13. Move the cursor to the Dimension #1 data field. Type in 30 and
press [ENTER]. Ec*Trak Directional automatically fills in the
shape as circle.
14. Press [F1] to return to the Target Option menu.
15. Add Target 3 in the same manner. Enter TVD = 3000, N/S =
500, E/W = 1000, Name = Target 3. After entering Dimension
#1 = 30 and pressing [ENTER], enter Dimension #2 = 30 and
press [ENTER]. Ec*Trak Directional changes the shape from
circle to rectangle.
16. Since the well design has not been made, you do not know the
target rotation angle. Leave the Rotation from North data field
blank for now. After you determine a well design, you can enter
the angle at the Well Design Spreadsheet.
17. Press [F1] twice to return to the Structure Edit Options menu.
18. Save the targets to the database by selecting Save Current Edits
and answering Yes to Commit Current Edits.
Linking Slots with Targets

Now that you have created the targets, you can link the slots with them.
For more information, see “Linking a Slot with a Target” on page 4-7.
In this example, the goal is to link slots 1 through 3 with their respective
targets. Proceed as follows:
3. Select Slot #1 from the list of slots.
4. Press [F4] at the Slot Information screen.
5. Highlight the target you wish to link with the selected slot (in this
case, Target 1), and press [ENTER].
6. On the Target Association menu, highlight Re-date as Today and
press [ENTER].
7. You return to the Edit Options menu. Repeat Steps 4 through 7
for targets 2 and 3.
8. Press [F1] until you return to the Structure Edit Options menu.
9. Press [F1] and answer Yes to Exit with Save to save the slot/
target links.

Entering Target Data at the Well Design

Spreadsheet
You may add or edit target data at the Well Design Spreadsheet. All data
at the Well Design Spreadsheet are measured from the reference point
specified in the Options menu (see page 3-23). The flow chart in Figure 5-8
shows the available menus and screens.
Figure 5-8.
Flow Chart for Well Design
Target Data Spreadsheet
on Well Design [F1]
plan options
Spreadsheet.
Top
Bottom
Back Target Details
Forward Add screen
Print Modify
Walk Select targets on design
Casings Select target on slot existing target
Comments Select target on field Modify
Set section plane Remove from design
Redefine tie
Survey errors
Well name
Quit
Exit [F2]
targets
From the Well Design Spreadsheet, press [F1] to access the Design Options
menu. Then press [F2] to access the Operations on Targets menu at the
lower right-hand corner of the screen, as shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9.
Operations on
Target Menu.
To load a target
to the end of the
first profile on
the spreadsheet,
select it and
press [F1].
Notice that the first two items on the menu are Add and Modify, which
correspond to Add Target and Edit Target, respectively, on the Target
User’s Guide 5-9

Option menu in Structure Setup (see page 5-2). Target data are the same
whether you work on them in Structure Setup or at the Well Design
Spreadsheet.
Adding a Target
To add a target to the database, highlight Add and press [ENTER]. A blank
Target Details screen appears, as shown in Figure 5-10. This Target Details
screen is identical to the one which appears in the Target Data area of
Structure Setup. See page 5-3 for a detailed discussion of how to fill in
this screen. When you finish entering the target data, press [F1] to return
to the spreadsheet and load the target to the end of a profile (for more
information, see page 8-16.) When you add a target in this manner, it
is linked to the field, the slot and the design.
Figure 5-10.
Target Details
Screen.
Selecting a Target
To modify an existing target or to load it onto the spreadsheet, you must
first choose a target. Highlight Select Targets on Field to produce a menu
listing the targets for all structures in the field.
If that list is too long, you can choose Select Targets on Slot, which
shortens the listing to those targets linked with the selected slot (for more
information, see page 4-7). For an even shorter list, choose Select Targets
on Design, which lists the targets loaded to the current wellpath design,
including the target on the Target Details screen.
After highlighting Select Targets on Field, Slot or Design and pressing
[ENTER], one of the following takes place:
• A menu appears if two or more targets can be selected. Highlight the

desired target and press [ENTER]. The Target Details screen is filled
with the data for the chosen target.

• If exactly one target can be selected, there is no menu, but that target’s
data appear in the Target Details screen.
• If no target can be selected (for example, if you Select Targets on
Design for a new proposal), nothing happens.
Editing a Target
After the data for the selected target are displayed on the Target Details
screen, highlight Modify and press [ENTER]. If modifying a target used in
any wellpath design (see the Note on page 5-5), Ec*Trak Directional asks
you to confirm that you want to continue. If you answer Yes, the cursor
moves to the Target Details screen, where you can make the desired
changes. When finished, press [F1] to return to the spreadsheet and load
the target to the end of a profile (for more information, see page 8-16).
Removing a Target from the Design

When you select Remove from Design at the Operations on Targets
menu, you unlink the target from the displayed wellpath design. For
more information, see page 8-18.
Saving Target Data

Any additions or changes you make to target data are not saved to the
database until you save the wellpath design where the target changes were
made. For more information about saving a wellpath design, see page 8-21.
User’s Guide 5-11

Chapter 6
This is the last of four chapters dealing with Structure Setup

topics. It discusses how to handle well data, declination
data, casing information and survey tool error models. Each
item is optional; it is available, but not necessary for well
planning or survey recording purposes.
Chapters 3 through 5 describe setting up the essential elements of

a structure. This chapter discusses the remaining items pertaining
to Structure Setup. You are not required to perform any of them,
but they are present if you need to use them.
The items discussed in this chapter are as follows:
• well data — see page 6-2
• declination data — see page 6-5
• casing data — see page 6-8
• survey tool error models — see page 6-13
User’s Guide 6-1

Other Structure Data Ec*Trak Directional
Well Data
Accessing Well Data
There are four areas within Ec*Trak Directional where you can enter well
data. They are as follows:
• Within Structure Setup — See the following section of the manual
and the flow chart shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1. Well

Data Flow Chart. Structure Edit
This shows how to Options Menu
Structure name and position
access well data Options
from the Structure Slot data
Well data existing well Well Data Form screen
Edit Options menu. Target data
You can access Declination data
Survey tool errors
well data from three Save current edits
other places in the Quit, no update
program.
• On your way to the Well Design, Survey or Rigsite Spreadsheet —

Specify an operator, field and structure to work with. Then choose to
add a new slot. From the Slot Information screen, press [F3]. See page
7-2 for more information.
• At the Well Design Spreadsheet — Press [F1] to access the planning
options and select Well Name. See page 9-20 for more information.
• At the Survey Spreadsheet — Press [F1] to access the survey options
and select Well Name. See page 10-10 for more information.
Entering Well Data

From the Structure Edit Options menu, highlight Well Data and press
[ENTER]. If no wells exist for the structure, the Well Data Form screen,
shown in Figure 6-2, appears.
Figure 6-2. Well

Data Form Screen.
Remember to press
[ENTER] after
typing the well
name and license.
To move between
fields, press the
Down or Up
arrow key.

Ec*Trak Directional Other Structure Data
Enter a well name on the first line; try to keep it as short as possible. If
the name is more than six characters long, Ec*Trak Directional displays
the warning message shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3. Well

Warning Message.
Well names longer
than about six
characters may
be shortened
when they appear
on plots.
Although long names are permitted, they have trouble fitting on plots, so
Ec*Trak Directional shortens them there.
After you type the well name and press [ENTER], the cursor remains on the
first line. To move to the License data field, press the Up or Down arrow
key. In the License data field, fill in the license name or number issued by
the regulatory body responsible for drilling operations. For example, you
may enter the API Well Number or the OCSG or DoE reference number.
Press [ENTER] when complete. If specified, the license data you enter
appear on wellpath reports.
To add another well, press [F2]. To display the list of existing wells, press
[F1]. Continue until you have added all the wells you need.
Note: Whenever you specify Add Well, you add a new well to
the structure. If you leave the Well Data Form screen
blank and press [F1], a well titled Unnamed is added to
the list of existing wells.
Editing Well Data

After you add at least one well to the structure, the list of existing well
names appears both before and after you access the Well Data Form screen.
Such a listing is shown in Figure 6-4.
Highlight the well you wish to edit and press [ENTER]. Then change either
or both items in the Well Data Form screen. Be sure to press [ENTER] after
typing the changes. Notice that this is a good way to change a well that you
accidentally called Unnamed.
You cannot delete a well once you add it.
To add a well from the list of wells, press [F2]. If you reach the list of
existing wells in error and wish to return to the Structure Edit Options
menu, press [F1].
User’s Guide 6-3

Figure 6-4. List

of Existing Wells.
Select a well to edit,
or press [F2]
to add a new well.
Saving Well Data

Save well data to the database in the same manner as other structure data.
From the Structure Edit Options menu, either select Save Current Edits to
save and continue working on the structure, or press [F1] to save and exit.
If you do not wish to save the edits, select Quit, No Update at the Structure
Edit Options menu.

Declination Data
When you fill in the declination data as described in this section of the
manual, Ec*Trak Directional uses this information in the North Arrow
display (see page 16-10). For more information about declination, see
page A-2.
CAUTION
Although Ec*Trak Directional calculates
declination values, it does not apply them to
the survey data you enter onto the Survey
Spreadsheet. You must apply any declination
corrections before entering the survey data.
Accessing Declination Data

Enter the declination area from the Structure Edit Options menu. The
available menus and screens are shown in the flow chart in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5.
Declination Data Structure Edit
Flow Chart. If no Options Menu
declination data Structure name and position
Options
exist, you advance Slot data
immediately to Well data
Target data Add Declination
the Declination Declination data Edit Information Screen
Information screen. Survey tool errors Next Oldest
Save current edits
Quit, no update
Adding Declination Data

From the Structure Edit Options menu, highlight Declination Data and
press [ENTER]. If no declination data exist for the structure, the Declination
Information screen, shown in Figure 6-6, appears.
Move the cursor to the Date Commenced data field. Type the date for
which you want the declination calculated in DD-MMM-YY form or type
today. You may enter a past or future date. Then press [ENTER]. Ec*Trak
Directional calculates and fills in the remaining data fields on the screen
according to the geodetic coordinates of the structure reference point.
Press [F1] to return to the Declination Options menu, shown in Figure 6-7.
To add a declination date, highlight Add and press [ENTER]; then type in
the new date and press [ENTER] and [F1].
User’s Guide 6-5

Figure 6-6.
Declination
Information
Screen. Enter the
date on the first line
and press [ENTER].
Ec*Trak Directional
fills in the
remaining data
fields.
Note: Whenever you specify Add, you add a new declination

date to the structure. You cannot delete a declination date
once you add it.
Using the Declination Options Menu

If a structure contains declination data, the Declination Options menu
appears, as shown in Figure 6-7. This menu appears when you choose
Declination Data from the Structure Edit Options menu or when you
press [F1] at the Declination Information screen.
Figure 6-7.
Declination
Options Menu.
The Next Oldest
option allows you
to step through the
declination screens
in chronological
order.
Proceed as follows:
• Highlight Add and press [ENTER] to add a declination date.
• Highlight Edit and press [ENTER] to display the current declination,
which is either the last declination you edited or, if you came from the
Structure Edit Options menu, the latest declination date.
• Highlight Next Oldest and press [ENTER] to display the next earliest
declination to the current one. By continuing to select Next Oldest,
you can step through the entire declination history of the structure.

Notice the following characteristics of the Declination Options menu:

• You can not call the desired date directly to the screen. You must step
through the later dates until you arrive at the desired date.
• After you look at the earliest date, the Next Oldest option is removed
from the Declination Options menu.
• If you want to see a date later than the current date, you must
press [F1] to return to the Structure Edit Options menu; then
select Declination Data again.
Editing Declination Data

To change the declination date, move the cursor to the Date Commenced
data field, type in the desired date and press [ENTER].
Although performed infrequently, you may edit any of the other data fields
on the Declination Information screen. If you do so, change the Data
Source data field to indicate that the declination is user-specified.
The final data field, In General Use?, normally is set to Yes. However, it
can be used to hold declination data private to a particular survey, as some
survey tools produce declinations to be used on that survey alone. To hold
a declination private, proceed as follows:
1. Set up the declination, leaving In General Use? set to Yes.
2. Create the survey at the Survey Spreadsheet.
3. Edit the declination and change In General Use? to No.
Saving Declination Data

Save declination data to the database in the same manner as other structure
data. From the Structure Edit Options menu, either select Save Current
Edits to save and continue working on the structure, or press [F1] to save
and exit. If you do not wish to save the edits, select Quit, No Update at the
User’s Guide 6-7

Casing Data
Accessing Casing Data
There are five areas within Ec*Trak Directional where you can enter
casing data. They are as follows:
• Within Structure Setup — See the following section of the manual
and the flow chart shown in Figure 6-8.
Structure Edit Slot Information screen

Options Menu Edit current Casing Information
Structure name and position Edit next [F2] screen
Options Find casing program
Slot data Add
Well data Rotate Slots add
Target data Offset Slots edit
Declination data next deepest
Survey tool errors copy casing program existing slot
Save current edits yes/no
Quit, no update
Figure 6-8. Casing Data Flow Chart. This chart shows the casing menus and screens
accessible in the Structure Setup section of Ec*Trak Directional.
As shown in the flow chart, you can enter the casing program from
the Slot Information screen. From the Structure Edit Options menu,
proceed as follows:
1. Highlight Slot and press [ENTER].
2. At the Edit Options menu, highlight Find and press [ENTER].
3. Highlight the slot whose casing you wish to work on. Press
[ENTER].
4. At the Slot Information screen for the desired slot, press [F2].
5. The Casing Options menu, shown in Figure 6-9, appears. If
no casing data exist for the slot, the only items on the menu
are Add and Copy Casing Program.
• At the Well Design Spreadsheet (see page 9-14), the Survey
Spreadsheet (see page 10-7), the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet (see page
11-4) or the Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet (see page 11-7) — Press
[F1] to access the options. Highlight Casings and press [ENTER].
Adding Casing Data

At the Slot Information screen press [F2]; the Casing Options menu
appears, shown in Figure 6-9. If no casing data exist for the slot, the
only items on the menu are Add and Copy Casing Program.

Figure 6-9.
Casing Options
Menu. Use Next
Deepest to step
through the casing
sections in order
of depth, from
the surface to
the bottom of
the well.
To create a casing section for the slot, highlight Add and press [ENTER].
The Casing Information screen, shown in Figure 6-10, appears. Fill in each
data field, as described in the following sections, and press [ENTER].
Figure 6-10.
Casing
Information
Screen. Each
section of casing
has a separate
screen. The String
Identifier should
be A, unless this
section is the start
of a sidetrack.
Name
This is a text description of the casing section, such as 13-3/8” Casing. The
name is displayed on a list of casing sections when you access them at the
spreadsheets (see page 6-8).
Note: The inch mark (”) does not appear on plots. Use in, inch
or two apostrophes (’) instead.
Proposed Top and Bottom TVD

Enter 0 for the Top TVD for casing (casing always extends to the surface);
the Bottom TVD is the casing shoe depth. If setting a liner, which hangs
from the shoe of the previous casing section, type in the TVD of the top
and bottom of the liner.
Diameter and Hole Size

Enter the casing diameter and hole diameter in inches in a format of 13.375
or 13-3/8. To input a measurement in a different unit, type the unit after the
User’s Guide 6-9

number. Valid examples include 1 ft, 99mm, 34cm and 0.34m (a zero
before the decimal point is necessary). When you press [ENTER], your
entry is converted to the equivalent number of inches, rounded to the
nearest 32nd of an inch.
Run Through Shoe?

Normally, answer Yes, even for the top section of casing. However, to
represent the milling of a window and the setting of a new casing section
through the window (start of a sidetrack), answer No and set the string
identifier as described in the following section.
String Identifier
Ec*Trak Directional provides a default value of A for new casings. Identify
all casings on a single wellpath from the surface as A. To represent setting
a new casing section through a window (sidetracked casing), set the string
identifier to the letter following the identifier of the previous casing
section. Additionally, you must change the identifier on the casings of the
previous string which are also a part of the current string. See Figure 6-11
for an example.
Figure 6-11.
Sidetracked
Casings. This
diagram illustrates abc
how to apply string
identifiers to casing abc
sections in bc
sidetracked wells. bc
a c
b
c
a
In this example, identify each casing section initially as A. When the first
sidetrack is drilled, set its casing sections to B. Set Run Through Shoe? to
No for the first section in the sidetrack. Then change the identifier from A
to AB for casings on A which are also part of B.
Similarly in the second sidetrack, set each new casing section to C. Set Run
Through Shoe? to No for the first section. Change the identifier for casings
from previous strings which are also part of C. As a result, casing
identifiers from string A become ABC, and those from B become BC.

Maximum Acceptable Dogleg Severity

Enter the maximum permissible dogleg severity for this casing section.
This is for informational purposes only; it is not used in any calculations,
nor does it appear on reports or graphs.
Actual Top and Bottom MD

Fill in these data fields only when the casing is actually set. During
Structure Setup, since no well design or survey exists, the relationship
between TVD and MD is unknown.
Date Set
Enter the date the casing is actually set, either in DD-MMM-YY format or
as today. If you enter an actual MD value in either MD data field, Ec*Trak
Directional fills in the Date Set with today’s date. To unset a previously set
casing section, press [F2]; the Date Set changes to Not Yet Set.
When finished with the Casing Information screen, press [F1] to return to
the Casing Options menu.
Note: Whenever you select Add, you add a casing section to the
slot, even if you do not type in any data.
Copying Existing Casing Data

You can copy the casing program from one slot to another on the same
structure. This feature makes a casing program entered on one slot
available to any other slot on the structure. Proceed as follows:
1. Determine which slot contains the casing data (the source slot)
and which slot is to receive them (the destination slot).
2. From the Edit Options menu, select Find and select the
destination slot number.
3. From the Slot Information screen for the destination slot, press
[F2] to go to the Casing Options menu.
4. Highlight Copy Casing Program and press [ENTER].

5. If casing data already exist for the destination slot, confirm that
you wish to replace them by highlighting Yes and pressing
[ENTER].
6. The list of existing slots appears. Highlight the slot containing

the source casing program and press [ENTER].
7. The Casing Information screen appears, containing the new data
for the topmost casing section of the destination slot.
User’s Guide 6-11

Only casing sections with an identifier of A are copied. Within those

sections, only the Top and Bottom TVDs, Diameter, Hole Size, Maximum
DLS and Name data fields are copied; you must type in values of the other
data fields.
Using Next Deepest

Select Edit at the Casing Options menu, shown in Figure 6-9 on page 6-9,
to display the casing section closest to the surface. You may change any
data field; press [F1] to return to the Casing Options menu.
Highlight Next Deepest and press [ENTER] to display the next deepest
casing section. By continuing to select Next Deepest, you can step through
all the casing sections for the slot.
Notice the following characteristics of the Casing Options menu:
• You can not call the desired section directly to the screen. You must
step through the upper sections until you arrive at the desired one.
• After you look at the deepest section, the Next Deepest option is
removed from the Casing Options menu.
• If you want to see a section shallower than the current one, you must
press [F1] to return to the Slot Information screen; then press [F2] to
select Casing Programs again.
Saving Casing Data

Save casing data to the database in the same manner as other structure data.
Press [F1] until you return to the Structure Edit Options menu. Then either
select Save Current Edits to save and continue working on the structure, or
press [F1] to save and exit. If you do not wish to save the edits, select Quit,
No Update at the Structure Edit Options menu.

Survey Tool Error Models

In this section, you can perform one of the following tasks:
• Look at the parameter values for existing tools.
• Add and delete custom tools.
Ec*Trak Directional contains error models for the following 11 standard
tools. You can not change or delete the error models for these tools:
Magnetic:
MTC (collar) DDS (Collar)
DMWD (DDS) NaviTrak (DAS)
EMS Steering Tool
Photomechanical Magnetic
Gyro/INS:
Seeker RIGS
FINDS Level Rotor Gyro
You apply both standard and custom tools to a well design or survey at the
appropriate spreadsheet (for more information, see pages 9-19 and 10-8).
Your choice of tool error model affects the calculation and display of
ellipses of uncertainty (for more information, see “Ellipses” on page 12-6).
The models are stored at the field level, so you can apply them to any
wellpath in the field.
For more information about survey tool errors, see Appendix E.
Viewing an Existing Tool Error Model

Enter Survey Tool Errors from the Structure Edit Options menu. The
available menus and screens are shown in the flow chart in Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12.
Survey Tool Errors Structure Edit
Flow Chart. You Options Menu
Structure name and position Tool
Tool Error
Error
can view existing Options Specification screen
Specifications Screen
standard or custom Slot data
Well data
tool error models. Target data
You can also Declination data existing
Survey tool errors Parameters
create or delete Save current edits
tool names
custom models. Quit, no update
User’s Guide 6-13

Press [ENTER] on Survey Tool Errors to move to a menu which contains

Standard Tools followed by any existing custom tools. You can view a
custom tool by highlighting it and pressing [ENTER].
Viewing a standard tool requires several additional steps, as follows:
1. Select Standard Tools from the list of tools.
2. Select whether the tool is in the Magnetic or Gyro/INS group.
See the list on page 6-13.
3. Select the tool you wish to view. The Parameters screen, an
example of which is shown in Figure 6-13, appears.
Figure 6-13.
Parameters
Screen. Your
choices at this
screen result in
different values for
the correction
factors. You must
press [ENTER]
after changing
each parameter.
4. Choose the desired parameters for the tool by typing Y and

pressing [ENTER]. Each time you change a parameter and press
[ENTER], the tool name is modified to reflect the current
selection.
For the example shown in Figure 6-13, you may specify a
NaviTrak tool with or without a bent sub, and you have the
choice of applying a sag or mag correction, if desired.
5. When you are finished with the Parameters screen, press [F1] to
view the Tool Error Specification screen, an example of which
is shown in Figure 6-14.
6. When finished viewing the values, press [F1] to return to the
The parameter values for standard tools are printed in this manual on pages
E-12 through E-25.
Adding a Custom Tool Error Model
Note: Most users can skip this section. Only knowledgeable

users should attempt to implement custom models.

Figure 6-14.
Tool Error
Specification
Screen. At this
screen you can
look at existing tool
error values, or you
can enter values for
custom tools you
are creating.
Follow these steps to add a custom tool error model:

1. From the list of tools, press [F3] to add a new tool.
2. To select the type of survey tool, highlight Magnetic, Gyro/INS
or Cone and press [ENTER].
• Selecting Magnetic or Gyro/INS allows you to use one
of the Standard Tools as a starting point for your custom
tool. Continue through the menus as described in Steps 2
through 5 on page 6-14. A Tool Error Specification screen
resembling the one shown in Figure 6-15 appears.
Figure 6-15.
Tool Error
Specification
Screen. Enter a
tool name and your
name, and change
all the necessary
numbers to create
a custom tool.
• Selecting Cone allows you to specify a custom tool whose

error is a simple cone of uncertainty with dependence on
inclination. Making this selection brings up the form of the
Tool Error Specification screen shown in Figure 6-16.
3. At the Tool Error Specification screen you must fill in a name for
the new tool and the name for the author of the tool error model.
User’s Guide 6-15

Figure 6-16.
Tool Error
Specification
Screen for Cone.
Enter a tool name,
your name and
the amount of
uncertainty within
one or more ranges
of inclination.
4. Change the existing values to those you desire (if you are at
the type of screen shown in Figure 6-15), or enter the cone
of uncertainty values (if you are at the screen shown in
Figure 6-16).
5. When you are satisfied with the data on the Tool Error
Specification screen, press [F1] to save the custom tool and return
to the Structure Edit Options menu. If you do not wish to save
the tool, press [F2] to quit without saving.
Once you have entered and saved data for a custom tool, you can not edit
the values. You can, however, delete the entire tool. Follow these steps:
1. From the Structure Edit Options menu, select Survey Tool
Errors.
2. At the list of tools, highlight the custom tool you wish to delete.
3. Press [F4] and confirm.
Transfer of Error Models from Version 4.1 to Version 4.2

None of the standard tool error models that existed in Version 4.1 of
Ec*Trak Directional has an exact equivalent in Version 4.2. However,
all the previous error models have been assigned to new corresponding
standard models.
The uncertainties generated by the new models differ from those of the old
models, in some cases significantly. During the installation of Version 4.2,
the old standard models are reassigned according to the table shown in
Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-17.
Standard Tool Old (4.1) Model New (4.2) Model
Error Models.
During the Poor Gyro Level Rotor Gyro
installation of Tolerable Gyro Level Rotor Gyro
Ec*Trak Directional
Version 4.2, the Good Gyro Level Rotor Gyro
standard survey tool
error models of Poor Magnetic Photomechanical Magnetic
Version 4.1 (shown Good Magnetic Photomechanical Magnetic
on the left) are
converted to the INTEQ MWD MTC (Collar)
corresponding
models for Version EMS (N/S) EMS
4.2 (shown on the EMS (E/W) EMS
right).
Seeker Seeker
FINDS FINDS
RIGS RIGS
Teleco MWD MTC (collar)
The installation program also generates two reports regarding tool error
models, as follows:
• The first report, log, lists all the files that have user-defined tools
on them, along with the tool name.
• The second report, log.tools, lists all the user-specified models
transferred from Version 4.1, along with their error parameters.
Wherever possible the new models should be used rather than rebuilding
old models, since the new models are more valid. Only if a client insists or
if there is a short-term requirement to maintain consistency during a project
or task, should user-specified models be used to reproduce old models. All
user-specified models must be entered on a structure-by-structure basis.
Rebuilding Version 4.1 Standard Error Models in Version 4.2

There are terminology differences between the tool error models of
Version 4.1 and those of Version 4.2. These are shown in the table in
Figure 6-18. Use this table as a guide if you need to to re-create error
models that you used in Version 4.1.
It is possible to reproduce exactly the Version 4.1 standard error models by
setting up custom (user-specified) models in Version 4.2. These allow the
retention of the original uncertainty. The table shown in Figure 6-19 shows
the numbers to enter in Version 4.2 to produce the old standard models.
User’s Guide 6-17

Figure 6-18.
Terminology Old (4.1) Term New (4.2) Term
Translation
Reference Azimuth Reference
Table. Terms used
to define error Alignment Misalignmenta
parameters have
changed from Depth Depth
Version 4.1 to
Inertial Surface —
Version 4.2.
Inertial Lateral Inertial Lateral
Inclination Sag (variable)
Azimuth (magnetic) Drillstring Interference
Azimuth (free gyro) Gyro Drift

a. The old Alignment term is not identical to the new Misalignment term. Alignment had a
weighting of 1, while Misalignment has a weighting of 1 ⁄ 2 . Therefore, to get the same
output, old Alignment values should be multiplied by 1.41 before being included in the new
model.
Rebuilding Version 4.1 Custom Error Models in Version 4.2

Any custom (user-specified) error models that you created in Version 4.1
cannot be converted to an equivalent model in Version 4.2. However, a
dummy error model is created. It has the same name as the old custom
model and is still attached to the same survey. You can edit these old
custom models once, according to the following procedure:
1. Select Survey Tool Errors from the Structure Edit Options menu.
2. A menu appears listing “Standard Tools” and the custom tools in
the database. The custom tools which appear inside brackets,
such as <my tool>, are the dummy tools that you need to
respecify.
3. Highlight the desired custom tool and press [F2] to select the
model to edit.
4. Go through the same series of screen as if you had pressed [F3] to
add a new tool (for more information, see “Adding a Custom
Tool Error Model” on page 6-14). This allows you to choose a
new standard model on which to base your custom model.
5. Enter the desired parameters at the Tool Error Specifications
screen and press [F1] to exit. Save the model to the database.
6. The next time you select Survey Tool Errors, the custom model
name is no longer bracketed, and you can not edit it again.

Version 4.1
Figure 6-19.
Reproducing
User’s Guide
in Version 4.2.
Standard Models
Ec*Trak Directional
New Error Poor Tolerable Good Poor Good INTEQ EMS EMS Teleco
Seeker FINDS RIGS
Term Gyro Gyro Gyro Magnetic Magnetic MWD N/S E/W MWD
743-500-022UG420 Version 4.2 / February 1996

Azimuth
1.00 0.30 0.10 1.50 1.50 0.30 0.20 0.20 — — 0.15 0.70
Reference
Drillstring
— — — 10.0 0.25 0.50 0.20 0.40 — — — 0.50
Interference
Gyro
2.50 1.00 0.50 — — — — — — — — —
Drift
Confidential
Gyro,
— — — — — — — — 0.10 — — —
Input Axis
Gyro,
— — — — — — — — 0.10 — — —
Spin Axis
Sag
0.50 0.25 0.20 1.00 0.50 0.25 0.20 0.20 0.20 — 0.025 0.25
(Variable)
Depth 2.00 1.50 0.50 2.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 — 0.50 1.00
Inertial
— — — — — — — — — 0.50 — —
Lateral
Misalignment 0.28 0.18 0.04 0.42 0.14 0.21 0.14 0.14 0.14 — 0.035 0.14
The above values are ready for input into the model. The Misalignment term has already been adjusted.
6-19
Setting up Sample Wells, Casing and Declination

In the following sections, examples are given to illustrate well, declination
and casing data setup. The wells are also linked with their slots. No
example of custom survey tool error models is given.
Setting up Sample Wells

Set up Well A, B and C for the Manual Structure. Proceed as follows:
5. Select Well Data from the Structure Edit Options menu.
6. The Well Data Form screen, shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-2,
appears.
7. Type Well A as the well name and press [ENTER].
8. Press [F2] to add a second well. Type Well B and press [ENTER].
9. Press [F2] to add a third well. Type Well C and press [ENTER].
11. Save the well data by highlighting Save Current Edits and
pressing [ENTER]. Answer Yes to the confirmation question.
Linking Slots with Wells

After you create the wells, you can link a slot to a well. The goal is to link
Slot #1 with Well A, Slot #2 with Well B and Slot #3 with Well C. Proceed
as follows:
4. Press [F3] Link with Well at the Slot Information screen.
5. Highlight Well A at the list of existing slots and press [ENTER]
and [F1].
6. You have linked Slot #1 with Well A and have returned to the
Edit Options menu.

7. Highlight Find and press [ENTER]. Select Slot #2 from the list of
slots. Then press [F3].
8. Highlight Well B and press [ENTER] and [F1].
9. Repeat the two previous steps to link Slot #3 with Well C.
10. Verify the links by selecting Find from the Edit Options menu.
The slot display includes the linked wells, an example of which
is shown in Figure 4-4 on page 4-3.
11. Press [F1] until you return to the Structure Edit Options menu.
Save the links by highlighting Save Current Edits, pressing
[ENTER] and confirming.
Setting up Declination Data

The goal is to enter declination for today, one year in the future and two
years in the future. Proceed as follows:
1. Select Declination Data from the Structure Edit Options menu.
The Declination Information screen, shown on Figure 6-6 on
page 6-6, appears.
2. Move the cursor to the Date Commenced data field. Type today
and press [ENTER].
3. Ec*Trak Directional fills in the rest of the data fields. Press [F1]
to move to the Declination Options menu.
4. Highlight Add and press [ENTER].
5. Move the cursor to the first field on the Declination Information
screen. Type next year’s date in DD-MMM-YY form, such as
20-JAN-97, and press [ENTER].
6. Press [F1], highlight Add and press [ENTER].
7. Enter the following year’s date, such as 20-JAN-98, and press
[ENTER].

Save the declination data by highlighting Save Current Edits,
pressing [ENTER] and confirming.
Setting up Casing Data

The goal is to enter two planned casing sections for Slot #1, as follows:
• The first section is 133⁄8″ in diameter and runs from the surface to
a projected depth of 1000m TVD in a 171⁄2″ hole. Do not exceed
5°/30m dogleg.
User’s Guide 6-21

• The second section is 9 5⁄8″ in diameter and runs from the surface to
2000m projected TVD in a 121⁄4 ″ hole. Do not exceed 5°/30m dogleg.
Proceed as follows:
4. Press [F2] at the Slot Information screen. Since no casing data
exist, only two items appear on the Casing Options menu, Add
and Copy Casing Program.
5. Select Add.
6. At the Casing Information screen, type in Name = 17 1/2’’1
Casing, Projected Top TVD = 0, Projected Bottom TVD = 1000,
Diameter = 13-3/8, Hole Size = 17-1/2, Run Through Shoe? =
Yes, String Identifier = A, Max. Acceptable DLS = 5. Press
[ENTER] after the final entry.
7. Since the casing section is not yet set, do not fill in the last three
data fields.
8. Press [F1] to return to the Casing Options menu. (Notice that Edit
now appears on the menu.)
9. Select Add to enter the second casing section.
10. At the Casing Information screen, type in Name = 9 5/8’’1
Casing, Projected Top TVD = 0, Projected Bottom TVD = 2000,
Diameter = 9-5/8, Hole Size = 12-1/4, Run Through Shoe? = Yes,
String Identifier = A, Max. Acceptable DLS = 5. Press [ENTER]
after the final entry.
11. Press [F1] to return to the Casing Options menu.
12. Press [F1] three times to return to the Structure Edit Options
menu.
13. Save the casing data by pressing [F1] and confirming.
1. Use two apostrophes.

Chapter 7
This chapter describes how to access the Well Design

Spreadsheet, which is the screen on which you design
the proposed wellpath. The chapter also describes the
appearance and general properties of the spreadsheet.
After you finish setting up the necessary structure, slots, targets and other
items, as described in Chapters 3 through 6, you are ready to design the
wellpath from the slot to the target. The Well Design Spreadsheet is where
wellpath planning takes place.
Three chapters in the manual are devoted to the wellpath planning process.
They are organized as follows:
• This chapter describes how to access the Well Design Spreadsheet
and its appearance, properties and functions.
• The following chapter, Chapter 8, describes the actual wellpath
planning procedures.
• Chapter 9 describes some advanced wellpath planning features.
Accessing the Well Design Spreadsheet

The usual procedure to access the Well Design Spreadsheet is as follows:
2. Select Directional Well Design from the Create/Edit menu.
3. Select the desired operator from the Operator menu.
4. Select the desired field from the Field menu.
5. Select the desired structure from the Structure menu.
6. Select the desired slot from the Slot menu.
User’s Guide 7-1

Well Design Spreadsheet Ec*Trak Directional
7. Select the desired existing wellpath design from the Wellpath

menu, or choose Create New Proposal.
If only one item exists on a menu, Ec*Trak Directional automatically
selects it for you and displays the next menu. If you made an incorrect
selection at any menu, press [F1] to back up to the menu where you made
the error; then make a different selection.
The flow chart in Figure 7-1 shows the routes you can take to reach the
Well Design Spreadsheet.
Main Menu [F1]

exit
plot
report Remove association
create/edit Well Data
Entry Re-date as today
Form screen
Form Leave alone
Create/Edit [F2]
add well
structure, wellheads, etc.
Directional survey existing well existing target
Directional well design
Rigsite system [F3] [F4]
Survey (NO LOCK) link with well link with targ.
Well Design (NO LOCK)
bulk edit svy/prop Slot
Database Deletion Utility Information Well Design
Generate Well Site Data screen [F1] Spreadsheet
Insert Incoming Data exit form
existing operator existing field existing structure create slot create path
existing slot existing path
Figure 7-1. Flow Chart for Arriving at Well Design Spreadsheet. Generally, you select an
existing slot and a new or existing wellpath, going directly to the Well Design Spreadsheet.
Notice that there is a possible detour at the Slot menu. If you reach this
menu and realize that you are about to design a wellpath starting at a
non-existent slot, you can add the slot here. That saves you the trouble
of returning to the Main Menu, going into the Structure Setup section,
creating the slot, returning to the Main Menu and re-entering the Well
Design Spreadsheet.
If you create a slot, the following capabilities and limitations are in effect:
• You may add one slot, no more and no fewer. See pages 4-4 through
4-5 for more information about filling in the Slot Information screen.
• You may link the slot with a well (see “Linking a Slot with a Well” on
page 4-6) or with a target (see “Linking a Slot with a Target” on page
4-7), but not both.

Ec*Trak Directional Well Design Spreadsheet
• You may link the wellpath design with a well (see page 7-4) and
a target (see page 8-16) when you reach the spreadsheet.
• You may add any number of wells, but you can not add a target.
• You must save the design to the database (see page 8-21) to save
the slot or wells you add.
Note: The slot, well and target screens on the way to the Well
Design Spreadsheet are designed for small adjustments
to those elements. If you have extensive setup work to
perform, you should return to the Main Menu and go
to the Structure Setup section to make the changes.
Examining the Well Design Spreadsheet

The Well Design Spreadsheet for a new wellpath design is shown
in Figure 7-2. It can be divided into four areas, which are more fully
described in the following sections.
Spreadsheet Heading
Design Area Advisory

Information
Functions
Figure 7-2. Well Design Spreadsheet. The screen is divided into four areas, as labelled.
Spreadsheet Heading
An example of the spreadsheet heading is shown in Figure 7-3. You select
the operator name (shown in reverse video at the top of the heading), the
platform and the slot when you access the spreadsheet. Therefore, you can
not change them at the spreadsheet. If they are incorrect, quit the spread-
sheet (see page 7-9) and return to it, this time specifying the correct
operator, field and slot.
User’s Guide 7-3

Figure 7-3.
Spreadsheet
Heading. You can
change Well, Tied
To and Name.
You may change the well, the tie point and the design name as follows:
• To change the well, press [F1] to reveal the Design Options menu
shown in Figure 7-4. Highlight Well Name and press [ENTER]. When
the list of existing wells appears, highlight the desired well and press
[ENTER]. Notice that if the desired well is not listed, you can add it by
pressing [F2] and filling in the Well Data Form screen.
Figure 7-4.
Design Options
Menu. This menu
appears when you
press [F1] at the
Well Design
Spreadsheet.
This function links the current design with the well. Any links you
set up previously between the slot and the well are undisturbed.
• To change the tie point, press [F1]. At the Design Options menu, select
Redefine Tie. Highlight Wellhead or Survey and press [ENTER]. For
more information, see “Specifying the Tie Point” on page 8-9.
• To change the design name, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the Name data field. Type the desired name and press [ENTER].
Notice that Ec*Trak Directional places a number enclosed in brackets
before the name, such as the [61] in Figure 7-3. This is an internal
number that the program uses to store the wellpath design. You need
not type the number as part of the name.
Design Area
The design area, the main part of the spreadsheet, is where you design the
wellpath. It is shown in Figure 7-5. For more information about the design
process, see Chapter 8.

Figure 7-5.
Design Area. This
is where you specify
the wellpath design.
Each row in the design area corresponds to a design station, a significant

point on the proposed wellpath where, typically, some change in the design
takes place. Each design station is described by the properties listed above
the first row, as follows:
• MD — Measured Depth, length along the wellpath.
• Inc — Inclination, angle from vertical of the wellpath at the station.
• Dir — Direction (azimuth), angle from north of the wellpath at the
station.
• TVD — True Vertical Depth, vertical coordinate of the station.
• N/S and E/W Coordinates — These are the horizontal coordinates of
the station from the current reference point, as shown in the Advisory
Information.
• Polar Crd — Polar Coordinates. Specify the horizontal coordinates
of the current station as a distance and azimuth from the preceding
station. After you press [ENTER], Ec*Trak Directional converts the
polar coordinates to rectangular (N/S and E/W) coordinates.
• Curv — The value in the Curvature column can mean one of two
things. If the previous and current stations have the same direction
(two dimensional), the Curvature is the build rate, that is, the increase
in inclination. If the previous and current stations have different
directions (three dimensional), the Curvature is the dogleg severity.
A negative build rate is a drop rate.
Curvature is a value which you normally specify for the wellpath
design. If you enter an unsigned Curvature, you are telling Ec*Trak
Directional that the section may have a turn. To force a two-
dimensional section (one with no turn), precede the Curvature value
with a plus or a minus sign; for example, +2 or -3. If you enter 0 as the
curvature, denoting no build or turn, Ec*Trak Directional converts it
to ==>.
User’s Guide 7-5

Your entry for curvature (such as 2 or -3 or +1.5) applies to the course

length you specified at the Options menu within Structure Setup (see
the Advisory Information in the right-hand box). However, you can
type in any course length you wish. For example, enter 1/25 to
indicate 1 degree per 25 meters (or feet). When you press [ENTER],
Ec*Trak Directional converts your input to the course length you
specified at the Options menu in Structure Setup.
• Tf — Toolface, the driller’s toolface used when orienting a deviation
tool. It is the angle between the high side of the well and the tool. The
toolface applies to the wellpath interval from the current station to the
next station.
Note: The Curvature value applies from the previous station

on the spreadsheet to the current station, but Toolface
applies from the current station to the next one.
Functions
The function keys at the bottom of the spreadsheet are shown in Figure 7-6.
They work as follows:
Figure 7-6.
Functions. These
are the functions
at the Well Design
Spreadsheet.
• [F1] Plan Options — When you press [F1], the Design Options menu,
shown in Figure 7-4 on page 7-4, appears. The Design Options menu
uncovers many other functions, which are described in the manual as
they arise. Notice that the function keys are different when the Design
Options menu appears on the screen.
To return to the spreadsheet from the Design Options menu, press
[F4].
• [F2] Delete Field — To empty the contents of a data field, move the
cursor to the data field of interest and press [F2].
Note: On the Well Design Spreadsheet, a blank data field is

different from a data field with a value of 0. Ec*Trak
Directional treats a blank data field as an unknown
whose value is to be determined, while a reverse video
0 means that you are fixing that value as 0.

• [F3] Insert Station — To add a station between two existing stations

in the well design, place the cursor anywhere in the desired row and
press [F3]. This function does not work in the middle of a profile (for
more information about profiles, see page 8-11).
• [F4] Delete Station — To remove a station from the well design, place
the cursor anywhere in the row and press [F4]. Within a profile,
Ec*Trak Directional does not remove the row, but it does empty
all the data fields in the row.
Advisory Information
The Advisory Information is located at the right side of the screen, as
shown in Figure 7-7. It is divided into an upper and lower section.
Figure 7-7.
Advisory
Information. The
upper section lists
items from the
Options menu. The
lower section gives
further information
about each design
station. You can
not directly change
any of the advisory
information data
fields.
The upper section tells you the options in effect for the current well design.
You selected these options — vertical and horizontal reference points for
the slot, north alignment, units and dogleg course length — at the Options
menu (see “Using the Options Menu” on page 3-7).
Verify that the listed options are correct. If they are not, quit the spread-
sheet (for more information, see page 7-9), visit the Options menu for the
structure in question, make and save the desired changes and return to the
Well Design Spreadsheet.
The lower section of the Advisory Information area lists the vertical
section (for more information, see “Set Section Plane” on page 9-17)
for each station in the well design in the left-hand column and the type
of station in the right-hand column. The station types are as follows:
• Tie — This is the point where the current design attaches to the
external environment. The first line on the spreadsheet is always a tie.
• KOP — Kick Off Point, where a well profile begins.
User’s Guide 7-7

• Target — Where a well profile ends.

• EoIH — End of Inclination Hold. The inclination does not change in
the interval ending at this station.
• EoDH — End of Direction Hold. The direction does not change in the
interval ending at this station.
• EoRT — End of Right Turn. The direction increases in the interval
ending at this station.
• EoLT — End of Left Turn. The direction decreases in the interval
ending at this station.
• EoB — End of Build. The inclination increases in the interval ending
at this section.
• EoD — End of Drop. The inclination decreases in the interval ending
at this section.
• SoW — Start of Walk. A walk zone begins at this station.
Using the Well Design Spreadsheet

In making a well design, you type information into certain data fields. That
information appears in reverse video, white type on a black background.
Ec*Trak Directional uses your input to calculate and display the values
in other data fields; these appear in normal video, black type on a white
background.
Use the arrow keys to move around the spreadsheet; the cursor moves in
the direction indicated by the arrow. When you reach the desired data field
and begin typing, the Up and Down arrow keys no longer work, while the
Left and Right arrow keys move horizontally within the data field.
When you finish typing in a data field, press [ENTER]. If the entry is valid
the cursor moves to the next data field and all four arrow keys are active.
Most importantly, Ec*Trak Directional calculates what it can and displays
the results in the appropriate data fields.
If your entry is not valid or if it causes a calculation to yield an invalid
result, Ec*Trak Directional displays an error message. Press [ENTER] to
acknowledge it.
To change a value in a data field, move the cursor there and type in the new
value. You can not edit an existing value by changing part of it. If you need
to change a value while you are entering it (before pressing [ENTER]), you
can use the Left and Right arrow keys to move to the character you need to
change. Press [BACKSPACE] to delete the character to the left of the cursor.

Leaving the Spreadsheet Without Saving Data

No matter what you enter on the spreadsheet or how many changes you
make, no data are stored permanently to the database until you elect to
save them. This includes any slots, wells or targets you created or linked
at the spreadsheet or enroute to the spreadsheet. Saving data is discussed
in “Saving a Wellpath Design” on page 8-21.
When working with the Well Design Spreadsheet, there may be occasions
when you and the program are not working well together, or when you
make a mistake you are having trouble recovering from. In those instances,
the best procedure may be to quit without saving, then return to the
spreadsheet to try again.
If you wish to discard your changes, proceed as follows:
• Press [F1] at the spreadsheet.
• Select Quit at the Design Options menu.
• Confirm your intention to quit without saving anything to the database
by highlighting Yes and pressing [ENTER].
• You return to the Main Menu.
User’s Guide 7-9

Chapter 8
Designing a Wellpath
This chapter describes how to generate a wellpath design

at the Well Design Spreadsheet. It covers topics such as
loading a target and a profile, completing and optimizing
the design and saving it to the database.
Chapter 7 describes how to access the Well Design Spreadsheet and its
appearance, properties and functions. This chapter describes the actual
wellpath planning procedures. The following chapter, Chapter 9, describes
what you can do after planning the wellpath and offers some advanced
wellpath planning techniques.
A flow chart showing the menus and screens to be discussed in this chapter
appears in Figure 8-1.
The flexibility of Ec*Trak Directional allows you to design complex
wellpaths to meet a wide range of requirements. As a result, there
are few strict rules for designing a wellpath.
However, for many typical designs tied to the wellhead, the general steps
follow. For more complex situations, use these steps as a guide, and add,
modify or eliminate items as required.
1. Determine the slot for the design.
2. Determine the tie point for the design.
3. Determine the kick off point for the profile.
4. Load a profile to describe the path from the kick off point.
5. Load a target as the destination for the profile.
6. Fill in some specific values to complete the design.
7. Vary those values to optimize the design.
8. Save the design to the database.
User’s Guide 8-1

Designing a Wellpath Ec*Trak Directional
Well Design
Spreadsheet
[F1]
plan options yes/no default V.S. design name existing token
yes
Top no
Bottom
Back V.S. choices V.S. Reference
Forward screen
Print
Walk
Casings wellhead
survey existing survey
Comments
Set section plane
Redefine tie
Survey errors Add Target Details screen
Well name Modify
Quit Select targets on design
Exit Select target on slot existing target
Select target on field Modify
[F2] Remove target
targets
[F1] existing profile type

profiles Remove selected profile
Figure 8-1. Design Options Menu Flow Chart. This chart shows only the menus and screens
available when you exit the spreadsheet and when you press [F1] and [F2] with the Design
Options menu showing. It also shows the Redefine Tie menus. Further screens and menus
appear when you make other selections from the Design Options menu or when you press [F3].
You completed the first step; to access the Well Design Spreadsheet,
shown in Figure 8-2, you must specify the desired slot for the design.
For more information, see Chapter 7.
Figure 8-2.
Well Design
Spreadsheet.
Because of the many ways the Well Design Spreadsheet can be used, a
sample wellpath is built first. This sample utilizes many of the basic design
functions in a simplified form. If you examine the sample first — and enter
it onto your system — you should find it easier to understand the more
detailed explanation of each function, which starts on page 8-9. Try to
follow the sample, even though it may seem confusing.

Ec*Trak Directional Designing a Wellpath
Designing a Sample Wellpath

The goal of this sample is to design a wellpath from Slot #1 on the Manual
Structure to Target 1. Place the kick off point 350m directly beneath the
wellhead. Then build at 3°/30m with no turn to a certain inclination, and
hold it until the wellpath intersects the target.
Proceed as follows, observing how these steps correspond to the general
procedure given on page 8-1.
Determine a Sample Slot

Steps 1 through 5 determine the slot for the design and bring the Well
Design Spreadsheet to the screen.
2. Select Directional Well Design from the Create/Edit menu.
4. Select Slot #1 from the Slot menu.
5. Select Create New Proposal from the Wellpath menu. The Well
Design Spreadsheet appears.
Determine a Sample Tie Point

Step 6 discusses the sample tie point. The detailed discussion begins on
page 8-9.
6. The first line on the Design Area of the spreadsheet describes
the tie point. Since this design ties to the wellhead, where each
quantity is 0 as shown in Figure 8-2, you do not have to do
anything here. Press the Down arrow key to move the cursor
to the second line.
Determine a Sample Kick Off Point

Steps 7 through 9 discuss the sample kick off point. The detailed
discussion begins on page 8-11.
7. The second line of this spreadsheet describes the sample kick
off point. Since it is 350m deep, press the Right arrow key to
position the cursor under TVD. Type in 350 and press [ENTER].
8. Move the cursor to the Curv. column on the second line. Since
the kick off point is directly beneath the wellhead, the wellpath is
vertical and there is no curvature from the previous station. Type
in 0 and press [ENTER].
9. The 0 changes to ==>. In addition, you have provided enough
information for Ec*Trak Directional to calculate and display the
User’s Guide 8-3

MD, inclination, N/S and E/W coordinates for the kick off point.
Your screen should resemble that shown in Figure 8-3. Notice
that the values you enter are displayed in reverse video, while
the calculated results appear in normal video.
Figure 8-3.
Sample Tie Point
and Kick Off Point.
Ec*Trak Directional
displays the values
you enter in
reverse video. Its
calculated values
appear in normal
video.
Load a Sample Profile

Steps 10 through 12 discuss loading the sample profile. The detailed
10. A profile connects the kick off point to the target. Make sure the
cursor is on the second line, which represents the kick off point.
11. Press [F1] twice. The Profile Types menu appears, shown in
Figure 8-4. Highlight J [2D] and press [ENTER]. You select this
profile because it fits the requirements of the design (“build at
3°/30m with no turn, and hold to the target”).
Figure 8-4. Profile

Types Menu.
This menu appears
when you press
[F1] twice from
the Well Design
Spreadsheet.
12. Two more stations, representing the selected profile, appear on

the third and fourth spreadsheet lines, as shown in Figure 8-5.
Load a Sample Target

Steps 13 through 16 discuss loading the sample target. The detailed
13. Press [F1] and [F2] to access the Operations on Targets menu
shown in Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-5. Profile

Loaded onto
Spreadsheet.
14. Highlight Select Targets on Field and press [ENTER].
Figure 8-6.
Operations on
Targets Menu.
This menu appears
in the lower right-
hand corner of
the screen.
15. Highlight Target 1 from the list of targets and press [ENTER].
The Target Details screen appears, shown in Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7. Target

Details Screen.
This screen
appears below the
Design Area of the
Well Design
Spreadsheet.
16. Press [F1] to return to the spreadsheet. The target coordinates are
loaded to the last station of the profile, and Ec*Trak Directional
calculates and displays the direction of each station, as shown in
Figure 8-8. The Target Details screen remains in view.
Complete a Sample Design

Steps 17 through 19 describe how to complete the sample design. The
detailed discussion begins on page 8-19.
17. The design specifies a build rate of 3°/30m. Move the cursor
to the Curv. data field on the third line.
User’s Guide 8-5

Figure 8-8. Target

Loaded. Target
coordinates appear
on the last line
of the profile.
18. Since the DLS course length is 30m (confirm by looking at

the Advisory Information in the upper right-hand corner of
the screen), type in 3 and press [ENTER].
19. Ec*Trak Directional computes and displays the remaining
values. Your screen should resemble that shown in Figure 8-9.
Notice that the vertical section and type of station on the right-
hand side are also complete.
Figure 8-9.
Completed Sample
Wellpath Design.
After you specify a
curvature, Ec*Trak
Directional has the
information it needs
to calculate the
remaining values
for each station.
Optimize a Sample Design

Steps 20 through 26 describe some ways to vary the sample wellpath,
to find the best design for your drilling situation. The detailed discussion
begins on page 8-20.
20. What if the curvature were 2°/30m, instead of 3°/30m? Move
the cursor to the Curv. data field on the third line. Type in 2
and press [ENTER].
21. The values on the spreadsheet change to reflect the new
build rate. Your spreadsheet should resemble that shown in
Figure 8-10. Compare the inclination and the third-line (end
of build) TVD between the two spreadsheets. Which set of
values do you prefer? Try other build rates if you wish.
22. A common situation is to specify the inclination at the target,
allowing the kick off point to move upward or downward as

Figure 8-10.
Sample Wellpath
Design with
Modified Build
Rate. Change the
curvature from 3 to
2 to produce these
results.
needed. Keeping the build rate at 2°/30m, assume that you want
the wellpath to intersect the target at a 60° inclination.
23. Move the cursor to the kick off point depth, which is the TVD
value on the second line (currently 350).
24. Press [F2] to empty the data field; the values of other data fields
are no longer certain, so they also become blank. Your screen
should resemble that shown in Figure 8-11.
Figure 8-11.
Modifying a
Spreadsheet. To
specify inclination at
target and solve for
the TVD at the kick
off point, blank out
the kick off
TVD to produce
this screen.
25. Move the cursor to the Inc. data field for the target (the fourth
line). Type in 60 and press [ENTER].
26. The values on the spreadsheet change to reflect the new design
criteria. Your spreadsheet should resemble that shown in
Figure 8-12. In particular, notice the new kick off point TVD.
You may try other inclination values to see what effect they have
on the wellpath.
Save a Sample Design

You may modify the design as much as you desire. When finished, save it
to the database. Steps 27 through 34 describe the sample saving procedure.
The detailed discussion begins on page 8-21.
User’s Guide 8-7

Figure 8-12.
Modified Wellpath
Design. You
specify target
inclination (in
reverse video). The
program calculates
kick off point TVD
(in normal video).
27. Make sure a completed design appears on the spreadsheet; all

data fields should be filled in as shown in Figure 8-12. You can
not save an incomplete design.
28. Press [F1] at the spreadsheet to access the Design Options menu,
Figure 8-13.
Design Options
Menu. To save a
design, highlight
Exit and press
[ENTER].
29. Highlight Exit, the last item on the menu, and press [ENTER].
Confirm that you wish to save the design by highlighting Yes
and pressing [ENTER].
30. On the right side, two screens appear relating to vertical section,
as shown in Figure 8-14. Confirm that you wish to keep the
current vertical section direction by highlighting Yes and
pressing [ENTER].
31. If you did not enter a name for the design, you can do so at the
next screen, shown in Figure 8-15. In this case, type Sample
Design #1 and press [ENTER]. For more information about
specifying a design name at the spreadsheet, see page 7-4.
32. At the Select Design Identifiers menu, the identifiers in effect
appear in capital letters, while those not in effect appear in lower

Figure 8-14.
Confirm Vertical
Section Data.
case letters. To toggle an identifier on and off, highlight it and

press [ENTER].
33. For this sample, Definitive Proposal should appear in capital
letters and all other identifiers in lower case letters, as shown
in Figure 8-16.
Figure 8-15.
Input Wellpath
Design Name.
34. When you finish with the Select Design Identifiers menu, press
[F1] to save the design and return to the Main Menu.
Figure 8-16.
Select Design
Identifiers Menu.
Activate as
many identifiers
as needed.
ACTIVE: inactive.
Toggle each
identifier by
highlighting it and
pressing [ENTER].
This concludes the input of a sample wellpath design. A more detailed

discussion of what you did (and what you could have done) follows.
Specifying the Tie Point

The tie point is the starting point for the wellpath design, where the design
attaches to its external environment. The first line on the design area of
the spreadsheet represents the tie point.
Most often, you design a new wellpath from the wellhead or from the end
of a survey. In those cases, Ec*Trak Directional takes care of the tie point
User’s Guide 8-9

for you; you can skip to consideration of the kick off point, discussed
on page 8-11. For a more detailed explanation of the tie point, read on.
Ec*Trak Directional can handle four different kinds of tie points, as
follows. Generally, you encounter the first two more frequently than
the last two:
• Tie to Wellhead — If there is no definitive survey for the selected
wellhead, Ec*Trak Directional assumes that the design begins at
the slot reference point, which you define when you set up the slot.
If there is a definitive survey, the new proposal is tied to it, as
explained in “Tie to Survey” which follows. To change the tie
point from a survey to the wellhead (or slot), proceed as follows:
• Press [F1] to access the Design Options menu.
• Select Redefine Tie to produce the menu shown in Figure 8-17.
Figure 8-17.
Redefine Tie
Menu. Choose
Survey to see a list
of surveys to tie to.
• Highlight Wellhead and press [ENTER].

• Tie to Survey — If the slot has a definitive survey, Ec*Trak
Directional automatically loads the last survey station onto the first
line as the tie point of the new design. To design a sidetrack from the
survey, type the desired MD or TVD of the sidetrack start into the
appropriate data field. The program calculates and displays the other
data fields on the first line.
To tie to a different survey, proceed as follows:
• Press [F1] to access the Design Options menu and select Redefine
Tie to produce the menu shown in Figure 8-17.
• Highlight Survey and press [ENTER]. The list of surveys you
have entered for the slot appears, as shown in Figure 8-18.
Figure 8-18. List

of Surveys. To
tie to a particular
survey, highlight it
and press [ENTER].

• Highlight the survey you wish to tie the current wellpath design
to and press [ENTER].
• Tie to an arbitrary point — Use this procedure to begin a wellpath
design at a survey point that is not yet part of the database. First tie
to the wellhead; then edit the individual data values on the first line.
• Tie to an unknown point — If the purpose of the design is to solve
for some or all of the tie-on elements (designing a wellpath upward
instead of the usual downward direction), select a wellhead tie and
press [F2] to erase the appropriate data fields on the first line.
Specifying the Kick Off Point

On a typical design which ties to the wellhead, the first section drilled is a
vertical path extending from the wellhead to the kick off point. In Ec*Trak
Directional the kick off point is the design station at which a profile is
loaded1 (for more information about profiles, see the following section).
In this typical design, the second line on the spreadsheet represents the kick
off point. For a vertical path, enter the TVD of the kick off point and 0 as
the curvature (which Ec*Trak Directional converts to ==>).
In complex drilling situations, any number of design stations may lie
between the tie point and the kick off point, or they may be identical.
Loading a Profile
Since the kick off point marks the start of a profile, the next step is to load
the profile onto the spreadsheet. A profile is a group of stations which have
a fixed relationship to one another and which can be considered as a unit
within the wellpath design. Each station in a profile occupies one row in
the spreadsheet, beginning at the kick off point and ending at the target.
To load a profile to the spreadsheet, place the cursor on any data field
of the kick off point (generally the second line on the design area of the
spreadsheet). Press [F1] to access the Design Options menu and [F1]
a second time to access the Profile Types menu shown in Figure 8-19.
Note: Make sure the cursor is positioned on the row of the

kick off point when you load a profile. Not doing so
is a common error that can cause major problems.
Seven profile types are listed in the menu, along with an option to remove
a profile. To load a profile, highlight it and press [ENTER]. Ec*Trak
Directional adds the required number of rows to the spreadsheet according
1. Kick off point has a more general definition in the directional drilling industry; it is
the point where the principal build section begins.
User’s Guide 8-11

Figure 8-19.
Profile Types
Menu. With the
cursor on the kick
off point line, press
[F1] twice to
produce this menu.
Highlight the
desired profile and
press [ENTER].
to your selection. In each case, the last line of the profile denotes the target,
which you load next (see page 8-16).
Which profile should you select? No strict rules apply. The requirements
of the individual wellpath design and your experience with the program
and with directional drilling in general are the best guides for selecting
a profile.
The following terms are used in describing the profiles:
• Build — a wellpath section whose inclination increases with MD
at a constant rate. The curvature is a positive value.
• Hold — a wellpath section whose inclination does not change with
MD. The curvature is 0.
• Drop — a wellpath section whose inclination decreases with MD
at a constant rate. The curvature is a negative value.
• Turn — a wellpath section whose direction changes from the
previous section.
A description of each profile follows, as does the customary information
required to complete a design using the profile. See “Loading a Target to
a Profile” on page 8-16 for more information.
J [2D]
The two-dimensional J profile consists of two sections, as follows:
• The first section builds from the kick off point to a certain inclination.
• The second section is a hold section from the previous station to the
target, entering the target at the same inclination.
Since the profile is two-dimensional, the wellpath direction is the same at
each design station.

If you specify the tie point, kick off point and target, you can complete the
design by entering a curvature on the build section of the profile.
S [2D]
The two-dimensional S profile consists of three sections, as follows:
• The second section holds the inclination to a certain depth.
• The third section is a drop section, entering the target at an inclination
less than that of the first two sections.
If you specify the tie point, kick off point and target, you can complete
the design by entering the build curvature, the drop curvature and the
inclination at the target.
S Extended [2D]
The two-dimensional S Extended profile consists of four sections, as
follows:
• The second section holds the inclination to a certain depth.
• The third section is a drop section, to an inclination less than that of
the first two sections.
• The fourth section is a hold section, which enters the target at the
inclination at the end of the third section.
design by entering the build curvature, the drop curvature, the inclination at
the target and the TVD at the end of the drop section.
J [3D]
The three-dimensional J profile consists of two sections, as follows. It is
similar to the J [2D] except that the wellpath may turn within the build
section.
• The first section builds from the kick off point to a certain inclination
and can also turn to a different direction.
User’s Guide 8-13

• The second section is a hold section from the previous station to the
target, entering the target at the same inclination and direction as at
the previous station.
design by entering the build curvature. The J [3D] profile is most often
used when designing sidetracks. At the tie point the wellpath does not point
to the target, and a turn is required to line it up properly.
S [3D]
The three-dimensional S profile consists of three sections, as follows. It is
similar to the S [2D] except that the wellpath may turn within the build and
drop sections.
• The second section holds the inclination and direction to a certain
depth.
• The third section is a drop section, entering the target at an inclination
less than that of the first two sections. A turn to a different direction
may also occur.
design by entering the build curvature, the drop curvature, the inclination at
the target and the direction at the target.
S Extended [3D]
The three-dimensional S Extended profile consists of four sections, as
follows. It is similar to the S Extended [2D] except that the wellpath may
make a turn within the build and drop sections.
• The second section holds the inclination and direction to a certain
depth.
• The third section is a drop section, to an inclination less than that of
the first two sections. A turn to a different direction may also occur.
• The fourth section is a hold section, which enters the target at the
inclination and direction at the end of the third section.
If you specify the tie point, kick off point and target, you can complete
the design by entering the build and drop curvatures, the inclination and
direction at the target and the TVD at the end of the drop section.

The table in Figure 8-20 summarizes each profile and the most common
information to provide Ec*Trak Directional to calculate the design. For
each profile, a tie point and target are assumed to be specified.
Figure 8-20.
Common Data Fields to Complete Design
Completing a Profile
(tie point and target are already specified for each)
Design. This table
summarizes the J [2D] Kick off point (or inclination at target)
most commonly Build rate
used data fields to
complete a design S [2D] Kick off point
using each profile. Build rate
For all profiles it is Drop rate
assumed that a tie Inclination at target
point and a target
are already loaded. S [2D] Kick off point
Extended Build rate
Drop rate
Inclination at target
TVD at end of drop
J [3D] Kick off point

Dogleg of build section
S [3D] Kick off point

Dogleg of build section
Dogleg of drop section
Direction at target
S [3D] Kick off point

Extended Dogleg of build section
Dogleg of drop section
Direction at target
TVD at end of drop
Curved/Straight Segment
The curved/straight segment consists of one section. If you specify the
kick off point and the target, Ec*Trak Directional connects the two with
a continuous curve. You do not need to fill in any other data fields to
complete the design.
Removing a Profile
To remove a profile from the spreadsheet, place the cursor on the kick off
point of the profile. Press [F1] twice, highlight Remove Selected Profile
and press [ENTER]. Each station belonging to the profile leaves the screen,
and any stations following the profile move up on the spreadsheet.
User’s Guide 8-15

Replacing a Profile
To change from one profile to another, place the cursor on the kick off
point of the profile you wish to replace. Press [F1] twice, highlight the new
profile type and press [ENTER]. The previous profile and all data connected
with it leave the screen and are replaced by the new profile. If you choose
the same profile, you blank out all the user-specified fields and can start
designing the wellpath again.
Note: Make sure that the cursor is on the line containing the
kick off point when loading, removing or changing a
profile. Not doing so is a common error that can cause
major problems.
Loading a Target to a Profile

Chapter 5 discusses how to enter target data. Now is the time to apply that
information to the wellpath design as the last station of a profile.
From the spreadsheet, press [F1] to access the Design Options menu. Then
press [F2] to access the Operations on Targets menu at the lower right-hand
corner of the screen, shown in Figure 8-21.
Figure 8-21.
Operations on
Target Menu.
To load a target
to the end of the
first profile on the
spreadsheet, select
it and press [F1].
To load target data to the spreadsheet, proceed as follows:

1. Highlight Select Targets on Field and press [ENTER]. (To
generate a shorter listing of targets, highlight Select Targets
on Slot or Select Targets on Design.)
2. Highlight the desired target from the listing and press [ENTER].
The target data are displayed on the Target Details screen, shown
in Figure 8-22.

Figure 8-22.
Target Details
Screen. The
screen contains
the data from the
selected target.
Press [F1] to load
them to the end of
the first profile on
the spreadsheet.
Note: If you specified coordinates and depths from wellhead

at the Options menu (see page 3-8) and entered targets in
Structure Setup, the target coordinates you see here may
be different than the numbers you originally entered. In
this case, the coordinates were entered from the structure
reference point; now they are being viewed from the slot
reference point.
3. Press [F1] to return to the spreadsheet. The target data appear

on the spreadsheet at the last station of the first profile, as shown
in Figure 8-23. The target’s TVD, North/South and East/West
values appear on the spreadsheet.
Figure 8-23.
Well Design
Spreadsheet.
The target data are
loaded at the end
of the first profile,
shown here on
Line 4 of the
spreadsheet. The
TVD, N/S and E/W
data fields for the
target appear in
reverse video,
meaning that they
are user-specified.
User’s Guide 8-17

Note: Targets appear on the spreadsheet in the order you load

them, not by their depth. This allows you to design a
wellpath that intersects a deeper target and continues
to a shallower target, if that is required. For more
information about multiple targets in a wellpath design,
see pages 9-6 and 9-11.
See “Entering Target Data at the Well Design Spreadsheet” on page 5-9
for more information about selecting, adding and modifying a target at
the spreadsheet.
Removing a Target from the Design

The last item on the Operations on Targets menu is Remove from Design,
which unlinks a target from the current wellpath design. To remove a target
from the design, highlight Remove from Design and press [ENTER].
Targets on the design include those which are loaded to the spreadsheet
plus the target which appears on the Target Details screen. If the design has
multiple targets, they are listed in a menu. Highlight the target to remove
and press [ENTER].
If the removed target had been loaded to the spreadsheet, its coordinates
remain there. However, you may move to those data fields and edit or
blank out the values.
To replace a target with a different one, proceed as follows (steps 2 and 3
are interchangeable):
1. Remove the current target; its data remain on the spreadsheet.
2. Move the cursor to the TVD, N/S and E/W data fields for the
target. Press [F2] at each to blank out the data field.
3. Select a new target. When you press [F1] to return to the
spreadsheet, the new target data are loaded.
Entering Target Data Manually

You may enter target data directly onto the spreadsheet instead of loading
them from the target database. Move the cursor to the last profile station
and type in the desired TVD, N/S and E/W coordinates.
However, loading targets from the database is by far the preferred method
of operation. The reason is that targets in the database can be used by the
entire field, their properties appear in plots and reports, they can have
shape and thickness and their coordinates are translated to different
systems depending on the reference points used. You should enter target
data manually for quick tests, or for an intermediate point on the way to the
principal target.

Offsetting Targets from the Center

If the Target Offset from Wellpath? data field has a Yes answer, the target
is not loaded to the end of a profile. You need to enter manually the point
where you want the wellpath to intersect the target. That may involve
making calculations outside of Ec*Trak Directional to determine the
exact point within the target zone where the wellpath should intersect.
Depending on the shape, thickness and rotation of the target, these calcula-
tions can become complex. Before making them, select the target so that its
data appear in the Target Details screen. The listed coordinates give the
center point of the target, taking into account any adjustments for reference
points, offsets or rotations.
Completing a Wellpath Design

After loading a profile and a target, your screen should resemble that
shown in Figure 8-23 on page 8-17. At this point, fill in one or more of
the blank data fields according to the requirements of your wellpath design.
In the discussion of each profile on pages 8-12 through 8-15, the most
common data fields needed to complete each profile are given. These are
summarized in the table on page 8-15.
Note: After filling in the data fields as specified in the table,

sometimes the entire spreadsheet is calculated with the
exception of the first line or two. In that case, move to the
Dir. column of the first line and enter 0. The remaining
data fields should be calculated.
Note: It is recommended that you enter the data fields specified

for each profile type when you begin a wellpath design.
After you achieve a completed design, described in the
next paragraph, optimize the design to your requirements
(see “Optimizing a Wellpath Design” on page 8-20).
As you fill in each data field and press [ENTER], Ec*Trak Directional
displays your entry in reverse video and calculates as many other data
fields as it can, displaying them in normal video. A completed design
should resemble that shown in Figure 8-24. For each design station, all data
fields are filled in with the exception of Polar Coordinates and Toolface for
the final station. In addition, the vertical section and type of station for each
design station are displayed in the Advisory Information area.
Sometimes the values that you enter to complete a wellpath design result
in a mathematical situation that Ec*Trak Directional is unable to resolve.
When that occurs, one of two error messages appears in the middle of the
screen; press [ENTER] to return to the spreadsheet. For a discussion of
User’s Guide 8-19

Figure 8-24.
Completed
Wellpath Design.
All data fields are
filled in except for
Polar Coordinates
and the Toolface
for the last station.
User-entered values
appear in reverse
video.
some methods to avoid such errors and how to handle them when they
do occur, see “Correcting Errors” on page 9-2.
Optimizing a Wellpath Design

When designing a wellpath, there is no one “correct” answer. You can
fine-tune a design and perform “what if” analyses as often as necessary
to generate a number of possible designs. In addition, the ability to adjust
a design becomes useful as the well is actually drilled, and modifications
become necessary.
When you have a completed design, such as that shown in Figure 8-24, it
is exactly specified. You can change it in one of two ways, as follows:
• To change a value that you previously specified — which appears in
reverse video — move the cursor to the data field and type in the new
value. Ec*Trak Directional re-calculates the entire spreadsheet and
displays the new design (unless your change causes an error).
• To change a calculated value —which appears in normal video — you
must first blank out a user-specified value, one that appears in reverse
video. Move to it and press [F2]. Then move to the calculated value
you wish to specify and type in its value. The new completed design
is calculated and displayed (unless your changes cause an error).
For example, you can use this process to find the design yielding the
minimum course length (MD) which fulfills the drilling requirements.
Enter different values for a certain quantity, and observe their effect on the
MD value at the target. In this case, the optimum design is the one with the
smallest MD.

Saving a Wellpath Design

You may save a completed design to the database at any time. When you
complete the save process, you return to the Main Menu. To continue
working on the same design, call it to the screen again, as described in
Steps 1 through 7 on page 7-1.
Note: You can not save an incomplete wellpath design.
When you save a wellpath design, you also save any structure setup
work — such as adding and modifying slots, targets and wells — that
you performed during the wellpath design session.
Follow these steps to save a wellpath design:
1. Press [F1] from the Well Design Spreadsheet.
2. From the Design Options menu, highlight Exit and press
[ENTER].
3. Confirm that you want to save the design to the database

by highlighting Yes and pressing [ENTER]. To return to the
spreadsheet, highlight No and press [ENTER]. If you answer
Yes, you are committed to saving the design and can not return
to the spreadsheet.
Steps 4 through 7 are concerned with the reference point for determining
vertical section.
4. After you answer Yes, the two screens shown in Figure 8-25
appear in the lower right-hand corner. If saving for the first time,
the system-generated vertical section appears. If editing a
proposal, the previously set vertical section appears.
Figure 8-25.
Confirm Vertical
Section Reference
Point. Generally,
answer Yes.
5. Most often, accept the system generated vertical section by

highlighting Yes and pressing [ENTER].
6. To change to a different vertical section reference point,
highlight No and press [ENTER].
User’s Guide 8-21

7. If you answered No, the two screens shown in Figure 8-26

appear in the lower right-hand corner.
Figure 8-26.
Change Vertical
Section Reference
Point. If you select
Structure or
Wellhead, you
can change the
direction. If you
select User Defined,
you can change all
three values.
Your choice for vertical section plane and location does not affect the
wellpath design station coordinates. It does, however, affect how the
wellpath is depicted graphically on section views, which project the
wellpath onto a vertical plane.
Select a vertical section reference option as follows:
• No Vertical Section Wanted — Skip directly to Step 8.
The default vertical section you specified at the Options
menu for Section From and Section Plane (see page 3-9)
is applied.
• Structure Default — Change the vertical section reference
to the structure reference point. The cursor moves into the
Vertical Section Reference screen, where you can change
the direction value only. Press [ENTER] when finished.
• Wellhead — Change the vertical section reference to the
slot reference point. You can also change the vertical
section direction value.
• User Defined — To define your own vertical section
reference, highlight User Defined and press [ENTER].
You can then edit all three values in the Vertical Section
Reference screen; press [ENTER] after each.
8. If this is the first time you saved this design and if you did not
specify a design name at the spreadsheet (for more information,
see page 7-4), the screen shown in Figure 8-27 appears.
Otherwise, it is skipped. Though optional, it is recommended
that you enter a design name and press [ENTER].
9. The list of design identifiers or tokens appears in the middle of
the screen, an example of which is shown in Figure 8-28. The list

Figure 8-27.
Input Wellpath
Design Name.
includes the token you may have specified during Structure

Setup (see “Allocation Phase” on page 3-17).
Figure 8-28. List

of Tokens. Select
one or more
tokens; toggle by
highlighting each
and pressing
[ENTER]. There
can only be one
definitive proposal
per slot.
A token is an identification tag that you can assign to a wellpath

design or to a survey. When you create wellpath reports and
plots, you can tell Ec*Trak Directional to consider all wellpaths
with a given token.
To assign a token, highlight it and press [ENTER] to toggle the
token between capital and lower case letters. Tokens in capital
letters are applied to the wellpath. You may apply as many
tokens to a wellpath as desired.
The following two tokens merit further discussion:
• You should assign the Definitive Proposal token to the
current best design that you intend to use. A slot can only
have one definitive proposal. When you make the current
design the definitive proposal, Ec*Trak Directional
removes that token from any other design on the slot.
• To add a measure of privacy to a well design, save it with
the Locked token turned on. The only way to access a
locked well design is through the Well Design (No Lock)
selection on the Create/Edit menu. You can not access the
locked well design from the Directional Well Design
selection. This is the only difference between the Well
Design (No Lock) and the Directional Well Design options.
In the normal setup of Ec*Trak Directional, only members of the
Planner group have the Well Design (No Lock) selection on their
Create/Edit menu. As a result, members of the Driller and
Survey groups are unable to access a locked well design.1
User’s Guide 8-23

To make a locked well design available to Driller and Survey,

call the design to the screen through Well Design (No Lock).
When finished working with it, save it and turn off the Locked
token. The well design is again accessible through Directional
Well Design.
10. When you finish assigning tokens, press [F1]. The wellpath
design is saved to the database, and you return to the Main Menu.
1. Members of the Sales group have no access to well designs, locked or unlocked.

Chapter 9
Advanced Well Design Features
This chapter discusses advanced features of the Well

Design Spreadsheet. These include well design errors,
complex well designs, the remaining functions on the
Design Options menu and spreadsheet graphics.
Chapter 7 describes how to access the Well Design Spreadsheet and its
appearance, properties and functions. Chapter 8 describes the essentials
of the wellpath design process. This chapter begins where the previous
chapter ends and covers the following topics:
• How to analyze and correct some common errors you may encounter
when designing a wellpath. See page 9-2.
• How to handle some complex wellpath designs. See page 9-6.
• How to use the rest of the functions on the Design Options menu.
See page 9-13.
• How to enter and utilize graphics directly from the spreadsheet.
See page 9-21.
User’s Guide 9-1

Advanced Well Design Features Ec*Trak Directional
Correcting Errors
Sometimes the values that you enter to complete a wellpath design result
in a mathematical situation that Ec*Trak Directional can not resolve. When
that occurs, one of the two error messages shown in Figure 9-1 appears in
the middle of the screen; press [ENTER] to return to the spreadsheet.
Figure 9-1.
Well Design
Error Messages.
If Ec*Trak
Directional can not
resolve the data
values you enter, it
displays an error
message which
resembles one of
these examples
(row numbers
vary).
What should you do when you encounter such an error? There are no set
rules; experience with the program and with directional drilling in general
are your best guides.
Errors arise because of the nature of the design and the relationship
between adjoining stations. However, there are some general guidelines
that you can use to evaluate the wellpath you are attempting to design.
The most important principle is to relate the spreadsheet on your screen to
the situation in the physical world. A wellpath design is more than a series
of numbers on a computer screen. You must remember what the numbers
represent when applied at the drilling rig. Some common examples follow.
Build Rate Is Too Low

Consider the spreadsheet shown in Figure 9-2. The kick off point is at
350m and the target is at 1000m TVD, 1000m north and 1200m east of the
slot. A J [2D] profile connects them. If you specify a 1°/30m curvature,
Ec*Trak Directional gives an error message. Why?
Think about the physical situation. You can not reach the target point at
that build rate; the well is not moving off vertical fast enough. At 1000m
depth, the wellpath is well short of the specified horizontal coordinates.
In this case, if you increase the curvature value to 3°/30m, the design
is complete.

Ec*Trak Directional Advanced Well Design Features
Figure 9-2. Well

Design Error. In
this case, the build
rate is too low to
reach the target.
An insufficient rate of build or drop is probably the most common source

of wellpath design error messages.
Illogical Direction
Consider the spreadsheet shown in Figure 9-3. The kick off point is at
350m, and the target is at 2500m TVD, 1000m south and 1200m west
of the slot. An S [3D] profile connects them. You specify a build rate
of 2°/30m, a drop rate of 1°/30m and an inclination of 30° at the target.
If you then specify that the direction at the target should be 45°, Ec*Trak
Directional gives an error message. Why?
Figure 9-3. Well

Design Error.
In this case, the
direction is not
realistic, especially
with the build, drop
and inclination you
specified.
Notice that the target coordinates lie in the southwest quadrant, which is
between 180° and 270°. If the wellpath does not go past the target and
come back, you might expect the direction at the target to be somewhere in
that general vicinity. For this example, a direction between 173° and 288°
allows Ec*Trak Directional to complete the design.
Incorrect Profile
Consider the spreadsheet shown in Figure 9-4. The target, at 2500m TVD,
250m north and 300m east of the slot, is to be entered at a 75° inclination.
Use a J [2D] profile with a build rate of 3°/30m. You are solving for the
kick off point, and Ec*Trak Directional gives an error message. Why?
User’s Guide 9-3

Figure 9-4. Well

Design Error.
Choose a realistic
profile to connect
kick off point and
target. In this case,
the J [2D] does not
work, no matter
what values you
specify.
Consider the target position. At 2500m deep it is very close to the slot’s
horizontal coordinates, offset by only 250m to the north and 300m to the
east. The only way to have such a high inclination (75°) at the target is to
drill past it, turn and come back. However, the two-dimensional profile
does not permit any turns. To make this design, you must introduce a turn
at some point by loading a three-dimensional profile. In this example, the
3D [S] profile can be used to complete the design.
Overspecification
Consider the optimization of the sample well, as described (correctly)
in Steps 22 through 26 starting on page 8-6. To vary that optimization,
assume you want the inclination at the target to be 60° and you want the
build section to end at 1000m TVD. When you enter those values onto
the spreadsheet, as shown in Figure 9-5, Ec*Trak Directional gives an
error message. Why?
Figure 9-5. Well

Design Error. If
you overspecify the
wellpath, Ec*Trak
Directional is unable
to complete the
design.
It is not possible for this wellpath to have both a 60° inclination at the
target and to end the 2°/30m build section at 1000m. You have placed
too many restrictions on the wellpath; to use a different term, you have
overspecified the wellpath.
The solution is to remove one of the restrictions by moving to its data field
and pressing [F2]. Ec*Trak Directional can then complete the design and
solve for it.

In this example, if the 60° inclination is more important, move the cursor to
the 1000m TVD data field and press [F2]. Then enter 60 as the inclination
at the target. The design is completed; the TVD at the end of build is
1870.78m. On the other hand, if the 1000m TVD is more important, move
the cursor to the 60 data field on the target line and press [F2]. Then enter
1000 as the end of build TVD. The design is completed; the inclination at
the target is 44.31°.
Overspecification occurs most often during the initial stages of the
wellpath design process, before a design has been completed. One way
to avoid overspecification is as follows:
1. Enter the information required to complete a design, as listed
in the table on page 8-15. Do not be concerned if the data fields
you need to enter to complete the design do not meet the require-
ments for your wellpath. The goal of this step is to obtain a
complete design as a starting point.
2. After you get a complete well design, optimize it to your exact
requirements. You may need to blank out a user-specified data
field by pressing [F2] and then specify a value in a data field
previously calculated by the program.
Is It Drillable?
Even when you have a completed design, it may not be practical to drill
the wellpath. An example is shown in Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-6.
Complete, But
Unfeasible Design.
Check the numbers.
Do you really want a
165° inclination at
the target? If not,
optimize the design
to produce more
reasonable results.
This design is complete and produces no errors; mathematically, there is

nothing wrong with it. Physically, however, the situation is quite different.
It is doubtful that you would be willing or able to drill a wellpath with a
165° inclination, as indicated on the last line of the spreadsheet.
Always check the numbers on the spreadsheet to make sure they describe
a wellpath that makes sense physically. If not, optimize the design or
change the profile to produce a more reasonable wellpath.
User’s Guide 9-5

Complex Well Design Issues

Multiple Profiles
All the well designs discussed in Chapter 8 consist of a tie point, a kick off
point, a single profile and a target. However, Ec*Trak Directional allows
you to design a wellpath to as many targets and to load as many profiles as
required.
To load a second profile, follow the rules for a single profile on page 8-11.
Remember to position the cursor on the design station that serves as the
kick off point for the second profile before loading it. You may load all the
profiles for the design and then all the targets; or you may load the first
profile followed by the first target, then the second profile and second
target, and so on.
The order in which you enter the targets is crucial. The first target you load
is applied to the first profile on the spreadsheet, the second target to the
second profile, and so on. The target depths do not matter. This allows you
to drill to a deeper target first, and then drill upward to intersect a shallower
target.
An example of a wellpath design with multiple profiles is given on page
9-7.
Non-Profile Stations
On many occasions you must design a well section from one station to the
next that does not conform to one of the profiles. These may occur at any
point in the well design (except within an existing profile, whose stations
must remain together as a unit). In fact, a well design can have no profiles
and consist entirely of these manually-entered, non-profile stations.
You must provide enough information to allow Ec*Trak Directional to
calculate the non-profile station. Some common sets of data follow; enter
one of them:
• MD, inclination and direction (the same information provided by
a survey).
• TVD, north/south and east/west coordinates from the slot.
• Inclination and curvature for a two-dimensional section (no turn), or
inclination, direction and curvature for a three-dimensional section
(with a turn). If two dimensional, precede the build rate with a plus
sign (+).
• Toolface, MD and curvature (or toolface, MD and inclination).
An example of a wellpath design with non-profile stations follows.

Sample Wellpath Design Using Multiple Profiles and

Non-Profile Stations
This example includes several non-profile stations and two profiles. It is to
be drilled from slot #1 of the Manual Structure as follows:
• Drill vertically to 200m.
• Begin a nudge section by building at 0.75°/30m to 5°. The nudge
direction is 45°.
• Return the nudge to vertical at 0.5°/30m in the same direction.
• As soon as the design is vertical, drill in a J [2D] profile to Target 2,
at a build rate of 2°/30m.
• Drill 100m past Target 2, holding the same inclination and direction.
• Drill to Target 3 using a J [3D] profile and a 7°/30m dogleg.
A nudge is a section of a wellpath design which is generally used to
increase well separation in the surface zone underneath a structure. A
common nudge gradually increases the wellpath inclination to 5° and then
gently drops it back to vertical. The main portion of the design commences
at a deeper than usual TVD. The direction of a nudge is frequently different
from the rest of the design to locate the kick off point in a less congested
region.
Follow these steps:
1. Create a new proposal for Slot #1 on the Manual Structure.
2. To drill vertically to 200m, move the cursor under TVD on the
second line and type in 200. Then move to Curvature on the
second line and type 0.
3. The third line is devoted to the build section of the nudge. Enter
5 in the Inc. column, 45 in the Dir. column and +.75 in the Curv.
column (the plus sign is needed).
4. The first three lines should be complete. If not, move the cursor
to the Dir. column on the first line and enter 0.
5. The fourth line is devoted to the drop section of the nudge. Since
the wellpath is vertical at the end of this section, enter 0 as the
inclination and -.5 as the curvature. The first four lines of the
design should be complete and should resemble Figure 9-7.
6. The wellpath is back to vertical, so it is time to begin the J [2D]
profile. The end of the nudge drop section, which appears on the
fourth line, is the kick off point for this profile. Make sure the
cursor lies on that line, and load the J [2D] profile.
User’s Guide 9-7

Figure 9-7.
Sample
Spreadsheet After
Entering Nudge
Sections.
7. The J [2D] profile ends on the sixth line of the spreadsheet. The
next section is the 100m length after the target. The data for that
section are to be entered on the seventh line.
8. Move to the seventh line, the kick off point for the second
profile, the J [3D]. Load the profile. Your spreadsheet should
resemble that shown in Figure 9-8. Notice the notations for each
line under the Type of Station column in the right-hand box.
Figure 9-8.
Sample
Spreadsheet After
Profiles Loaded.
With so many blank
data fields, the Type
of Station in the box
to the right helps
you identify each
station.
9. The next step is to load the two targets to the profiles. Select
Targets on Field. Since the wellpath is to intersect Target 2 first,
you must load it first; its coordinates appear on the sixth line.
Then load the second target, which is Target 3. Its coordinates
appear on the ninth line, as shown in Figure 9-9.
Figure 9-9.
Sample
Spreadsheet After
Targets Loaded.
Targets appear in
the order they are
loaded (first target
is applied to first
profile, and so on).

10. Complete the first profile by entering 2 in the curvature column

of the fifth line.
11. Complete the 100m section following the first target. On the
seventh line, enter MD = 3231.02, Curv = 0.
12. Complete the second profile by entering 7 in the curvature
column of the seventh line. The entire design is complete, and
your spreadsheet should resemble that shown in Figure 9-10.
Figure 9-10.
Completed
Sample
Spreadsheet.
Walk
Walk can occur in the hold section of a wellpath when the rotary assembly
drifts from the intended trajectory. Normally, the drift is to the right,
(unless the formation causes a leftward drift). One way to compensate for
walk is to drill before the hold section at an angle to the design (the lead
angle), and allow walk to return the wellpath to the target.1
The problem with walk is that you can not accurately predict it. If other
wells have been drilled in the same geographic area, you may be able to
estimate the walk rate from their experience. Express walk rate as degrees
per course length, the same as dogleg.
A flow chart showing the walk menus appears in Figure 9-11.
To apply walk to a wellpath design, proceed as follows:
1. Begin with a completed design, an example of which is shown in
Figure 9-12. This design contains a J [2D] profile, which consists
of a build and a hold section.
2. Press [F1] and select Walk from the Design Options menu. The
existing walk horizons appear in a menu such as that shown in
Figure 9-13.
1. As the use of steerable motors becomes more widespread, you can correct deviations
due to walk as they occur. If using one of those motors, you do not need to compen-
sate for walk as described in this section of the manual.
User’s Guide 9-9

Figure 9-11. Walk

Data Flow Chart. Well Design
This diagram Spreadsheet
shows the menus [F1]
and screens you plan options
can access when Back
Forward [F1]
entering walk data. Print continue
Walk walk horizon Apply walk?
Casings
Comments [F2], add
Set section plane [F3], modify
Redefine tie
Survey errors TVD horizon
Well name
Quit
Exit
3. Press [F3] to modify this entry. At the Specification of TVD

Horizon screen, shown in Figure 9-14, give the start and end
TVD and the walk rate. Press [ENTER] to move among the data
fields. In this example, assume a walk rate of 0.2°/30m to the
right between 2000m and 2400m TVD. (For walk to the left,
precede the walk rate with a minus sign [-].) Press [F1] when
finished.
Figure 9-12.
Complete Wellpath
Design. This is a
sample design with
a J [2D] profile,
containing a build
section followed by
a hold. Walk can
occur in the hold
section.
4. Add another walk horizon, if desired, by pressing [F2] and

repeating Step 3. To modify or delete an existing walk horizon,
highlight it and press [F3] or [F4], respectively.
Figure 9-13. Menu

of Walk Horizons.
Here, no horizons
exist.
5. When finished with the walk horizons, press [F1] to continue.

At that point, Ec*Trak Directional calculates and displays the
spreadsheet with the values changed to reflect the application

of walk. It also displays a menu telling you what the lead angle
is and asking you to apply it to the profile. See Figure 9-15 for
an example.
Figure 9-14. Walk

Entry Screen. In
the hold section
from 2000 to 2400m
TVD, assume a
0.20 °/30m walk
rate.
Note: This is the only time that the walked values appear on the
spreadsheet.
Figure 9-15.
Walked
Spreadsheet.
After pressing [F1]
to continue, walk
values are applied
and displayed.
Compare with
the unwalked
values shown
in Figure 9-12.
6. Examine the walked spreadsheet and answer Yes if the displayed

values are reasonable. Otherwise, answer No and change the
walk horizons.
7. If you answer Yes, the spreadsheet returns to its unwalked
values. When you save the spreadsheet, the walk horizon is
saved with it. To see the effect of walk, you must do a report
or plot of the wellpath and specify at the Interpolation/Range
Specification screen (for more information, see “Walk” on page
12-7) that you want to consider walk data.
The situation becomes more complex if the initial wellpath design contains
multiple targets or profiles. If there is more than one target, Ec*Trak
Directional needs to know where you want the wellpath to aim after the
lead angle is applied. The revised wellpath can cross the original design at
one location; where? As a result, Ec*Trak Directional displays a menu of
the TVD’s of each design station after you press [F1] to continue. Highlight
the desired TVD and press [ENTER].
User’s Guide 9-11

If there are multiple profiles, Ec*Trak Directional asks where to apply the
lead angle. Again, a list of design station TVD’s is given; select the desired
depth by highlighting it and pressing [ENTER].
After specifying the TVD in the case of multiple targets or profiles, the
spreadsheet with walked values is displayed, as discussed in Step 5 on page
9-10. Accept the lead angle, or change the walk horizons.
Sense of Curvature
The Curvature column on the Well Design Spreadsheet serves two
functions, as follows:
• If the design station lies in the same plane as the previous station
(two dimensional), their directions are the same, and the curvature
value represents the build rate. A positive build rate means that
the inclination is increasing, while a negative build rate (drop rate)
indicates that the inclination is decreasing.
• If the design station lies in a different plane than the previous station
(three dimensional), their directions are different, and the curvature
value represents the dogleg severity.
When you are entering a design station manually, without using a profile,
you control the sign, or sense, of the curvature by your entry in that
column. As discussed on page 9-6, you must precede the curvature with
a plus sign (+) to force the station to be two dimensional.
You also have some control over the curvature sense within a profile. For
instance, although the S [2D] profile nominally consists of a build section,
followed by a hold and a drop, that can change according to your particular
wellpath design. If the wellpath needs to build angle to intersect the target,
Ec*Trak Directional converts the drop section to a build section, making
the profile a build, hold and build.
You can convert any profile section from build to drop — or from drop to
build. Override the default sense by typing a plus or minus sign as part of
the entry. If you enter an unsigned value, the program assumes the default
sense.

Other Design Options

A flow chart showing the menus and screens discussed in this chapter
appears in Figure 9-16.
Well Design
Spreadsheet [F1]
continue
[F1] walk horizon Apply walk?
plan options
[F2], add
Top [F3], modify
Bottom
Back TVD horizon
Forward
Print existing casing Casing Information screen
Walk
Casings
Comments existing comment Comment Text screen
Set section plane
Redefine tie
Survey errors V.S. choices V.S. Reference screen
Well name
Quit
Exit Depth run to
Name of instrument run existing survey tool
existing well Well Entry Form
Quick Wellplot (Auto Scale)

[F3] Plan View (1:5) data level existing token Main Graphics Menu
graphics Plan View (1:25) zoom
Plan View (Auto Scale) [F1] traverse
Horizontal Clearance use selected reset
Traveling Cylinder edit layout
Vertical View (Auto Scale) hard copy
measure
Figure 9-16. Design Options Menu Flow Chart. This chart shows only the menus and
screens discussed in this chapter. Other screens and menus are discussed in Chapter 8.
Top/Bottom
If your wellpath design has more stations than there are lines on the screen,
you can use the Top function to go to the first line of the design and the
Bottom function to go to the last line.
When you call up an existing well design, the end of the design appears on
the screen. To go to the start of the design, press [F1] from the Well Design
Spreadsheet. Then highlight Top and press [ENTER]. To go to the end,
press [F1], highlight Bottom and press [ENTER].
Back/Forward
Use the Back and Forward functions to move one screenful at a time
through a multi-page design.
User’s Guide 9-13

To view stations with a smaller MD than your current location, press

[F1] from the Well Design Spreadsheet. Then highlight Back and press
[ENTER]. To see stations with a greater MD than those currently displayed,
press [F1], highlight Forward and press [ENTER].
As you move between screens, notice that there is an overlap; one or more
stations appear on both the current screen and the previous one.
You can only move one screenful at a time; stations do not scroll on and
off the screen one at a time.
Print
To obtain a copy of the spreadsheet design on paper, press [F1] from the
Well Design Spreadsheet. Then highlight Print and press [ENTER]. For
more information, see “Printing a Well Design Spreadsheet” on page 17-2.
Casing Data
The Well Design Spreadsheet is one of the five places in Ec*Trak
Directional where you can enter casing data. Casing data appear on plots
and reports. A detailed discussion of casing data appears on pages 6-8
through 6-12.
The functional differences between entering casing data at the Well Design
Spreadsheet or in Structure Setup are as follows:
• Date Set — available only in Structure Setup.
• Copy Casing Program — available only in Structure Setup.
• Delete Casing — available only at the Well Design Spreadsheet.
• Projected MD — at the Well Design Spreadsheet, it is calculated
from the TVD according to the wellpath design. It is now possible
to specify Projected MD values which lie in the horizontal section
of a wellpath proposal.
In addition, the appearance of the screens and the methods of accessing
them differ. To work with casing data at the Well Design Spreadsheet,
press [F1], highlight Casing and press [ENTER].
If two or more casing sections exist for the chosen slot, a menu listing them
appears, as shown in Figure 9-17. If one or no sections exist, you move
directly to the Projected Casing Data Entry screen, shown in Figure 9-18.
Proceed as follows:
• To modify an existing casing section, select it from the list and edit
the data fields on the Projected Casing Data Entry screen.

Figure 9-17.
List of Casing
Sections.
Highlight a section
to modify and press
[ENTER]. To add a
casing section,
press [F2].
• To delete an existing section, select any section from the list. At the
Projected Casing Data Entry screen, press [F4]. The list of existing
casing sections appears. Highlight the section you wish to delete and
press [ENTER].
Note: You can not delete a casing section in Structure Setup,

but you can at the Well Design Spreadsheet.
Figure 9-18.
Projected Casing
Data Entry Screen.
Enter or change any
data as needed.
• To add a new casing section, press [F2]. A blank Projected Casing

Data entry screen appears.
Note: At the list of casing sections, an example of which is

shown in Figure 9-17, [F1] says No Selection. However, if
you press it, the highlighted casing section does appear
User’s Guide 9-15

on the Projected Casing Data Entry screen. If you do not

wish to do anything, press [F1] a second time to return to
the Well Design Spreadsheet.
The Projected Casing Data Entry screen is similar to the Casing

Information screen, whose data fields are described on pages 6-9
through 6-11. There are two differences, however, as follows:
• If possible, Ec*Trak Directional calculates and displays the MD
corresponding to the TVD you enter.
• At the spreadsheet, you can not specify a date to set the casing. That is
because the Date Set refers to the actual depths, and the Well Design
Spreadsheet deals with proposed casing.1
When you finish adding or editing data in the Projected Casing Data Entry
screen, proceed as follows:
• To return to the spreadsheet, press [F1].
• To add a new casing section, press [F2].
• To modify a different section, press [F3]. The list of casing sections
appears; highlight the section you wish to modify and press [ENTER].
• To delete a section, press [F4]. The list of casing sections appears;
highlight the section you wish to delete and press [ENTER].
Comments
You can enter comments at any depth on the wellpath design; the
comments appear on plots and reports. To access the comments, press [F1]
at the Well Design Spreadsheet, highlight Comments and press [ENTER].
If a comment exists for the wellpath design, a menu appears. Highlight the
desired comment and press [ENTER]. If no comments exist, you go directly
to the Comment Text screen, shown in Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19.
Comments Text
Screen. Enter MD
or TVD; the other is
calculated if known.
Enter either the MD or TVD of interest; if the other is known, Ec*Trak

Directional displays it. Press [ENTER] to move through the data fields on
1. In contrast, the casing at the Survey Spreadsheet refers to actual casing set. For more
information, see page 10-7.

the Comment Text screen. Type in the comment; when you press [ENTER],
it is centered in the data field.
When you finish, proceed as follows:
• To return to the spreadsheet, press [F1] twice.
• To add a new comment, press [F2].
• To modify a different comment, press [F1], highlight the one you wish
to modify and press [ENTER].
• To delete a comment, press [F1] and then [F3], highlight the one you
wish to delete and press [ENTER].
Set Section Plane

The vertical section plane does not affect the wellpath design, but it does
affect the graph of that design, specifically the section view which projects
the wellpath onto a vertical plane. You should select a section plane which
minimizes distortion of the wellpath projection. Figure 9-20 shows how the
selection of a vertical section plane can affect the graph of a wellpath.
Figure 9-20.
Effect of Vertical
Section Plane.
The same wellpath
is graphed using
two different
vertical section
planes. The left
graph, which is
more informative,
uses the wellpath
azimuth of
320.194°; the right
graph, which is
more distorted,
uses 45°.
The wellpath in Figure 9-20 is two-dimensional with a constant azimuth of

320.194°. The vertical section direction of the left-hand plot is 320.194°,
which produces a graph with a minimum of distortion and a maximum of
information. By contrast, the right-hand plot has a vertical section plane of
45°. The resulting graph of the same data yields a nearly vertical line which
is not very informative.
You establish a default vertical section reference point and plane at the
Options menu (see page 3-9). The most common defaults are to use the
wellhead as the reference point (structure is the other choice) and hold
azimuth as the plane (structure center to target and wellhead to target are
User’s Guide 9-17

the other choices), meaning that Ec*Trak Directional uses the direction
of the first hold section in the wellpath design.
With these defaults in place, two-dimensional wellpaths use the single
azimuth as the vertical section plane, which generally yields the least
distorted graph. A three-dimensional wellpath, however, can cause a
problem because of its different azimuths.
A common vertical section plane for a three-dimensional wellpath is the
wellhead to target direction. However, that may not be adequate if there are
drastic turns, or if you need to focus on a specific section of the wellpath.
In those cases, you may need to choose a vertical section plane based on
the azimuth in the area of interest. If you are looking at graphs of several
wellpaths on the same structure, you may want to define the vertical
section plane as structure center to target.
No matter what choices you make at the Options menu, you can override
them for each wellpath design. To save the vertical section values with
the wellpath design, enter them as you save it (see page 8-21 for more
information).
However, if you wish to view the wellpath graphically from several
different perspectives, you should change the vertical section at the
spreadsheet. Press [F1], highlight Set Section Plane and press [ENTER]. The
Vertical Section Reference Options menu, shown in Figure 9-21, appears.
Figure 9-21.
Vertical Section
Reference
Options Menu.
Select an option as follows:

• No V.S. Wanted — If you make this selection, reports for the
wellpath do not have a vertical section column. Because a plot of the
vertical view must have a section plane, for graphical purposes the
vertical section returns to its default plane and coordinates as
established in the Options menu in Structure Setup.
• Structure Default — sets the vertical section reference point to the
structure reference point. The Vertical Section Reference screen,
shown in Figure 9-22, appears. Enter the desired direction as an
azimuth from north, and press [ENTER] to return to the spreadsheet.
The vertical section for each station, displayed in the right-hand box,
may change, but the values in the Design Area do not change.

Figure 9-22.
Vertical Section
Reference Screen.
• Wellhead — same as Structure Default, except that the vertical

section reference point is set to the slot reference point.
• User Defined — You can define both the vertical section plane and
the vertical section reference point. Fill in all three data fields on the
Vertical Section Reference screen. Press [F1] when finished to return
to the spreadsheet (you may need to press [F1] more than once).
When you return to the spreadsheet, notice that the values in the Section
column in the right-hand box change to reflect the new vertical section
plane and/or reference point.
Survey Errors
The Survey Errors selection on the Design Options menu allows you
to assign survey uncertainty models to as many as six sections of the
proposed wellpath. These models do not affect the wellpath station values,
but do affect the ellipses of uncertainty produced when you perform such a
report or plot.
To assign the models, press [F1] at the spreadsheet, highlight Survey Errors
and press [ENTER] to produce the Survey Uncertainty Models screen
Figure 9-23
Survey Models
Screen. After
specifying the
depth, a menu lists
the available
survey instruments.
If the current design is a sidetrack, choose whether to resurvey the original

hole by answering Yes or No and pressing [ENTER]. Then type in the MD
to which the first survey tool run is planned and press [ENTER] to move
to the Name of Instrument column. Select a survey instrument and its
associated error model. The menu sequence is the same as described in
“Viewing an Existing Tool Error Model” on page 6-13.
User’s Guide 9-19

Continue for up to six instruments until the entire MD is covered. If you

need to delete a line on the screen, move the cursor to it and press [F2].
When finished with the screen, press [F1] to return to the spreadsheet.
Well Name
Use the Well Name function on the Design Options menu to assign a well
name to the current design. If the desired well name does not appear on the
menu, you can add it.
To assign or change a well name, press [F1] at the spreadsheet, highlight
Well Name and press [ENTER]. The list of existing well names, such as
those in Figure 9-24, appears. Highlight the desired name and press
[ENTER]; if the desired name does not appear, press [F2] to add it.
Figure 9-24. List

of Existing Wells.
Highlight the
desired well name
and press [ENTER].
Whether you select an existing well or add a well, the Well Data Form
screen appears, an example of which is shown in Figure 9-25. You may
change the name or License, if necessary. When finished with this screen,
press [F1] to insert the well name into the Well data field and return to the
spreadsheet.
Figure 9-25.
Well Data Form
Screen. Press [F1]
when finished.
You can also add a well by pressing [F2] at the Well Data Form screen.

Well Design Spreadsheet Graphics

Ec*Trak Directional allows you to enter the graphics area of the program
without leaving the Well Design Spreadsheet. You can examine the
completed wellpath design, often in comparison with other designs
and surveys in the same vicinity. Then you can adjust the new design,
if necessary, and continue to compare it with the other wellpaths until
you achieve the optimum design.
Selecting a Graph Type

To plot a completed design — and it must be complete — press [F1] and
[F3] from the Well Design Spreadsheet. A menu of graph types appears,
such as that shown in Figure 9-26.
Figure 9-26.
Graph Types.
Select a graph
type. Horizontal
Clearance and
Travelling Cylinder
require object data.
Highlight the graph type you wish to see and press [ENTER]. The graphs
are summarized as follows:
• Quick Wellplot — consists of both a Vertical View and a Plan View.
The plot may show one or more wellpaths.
• Plan View — a view of the wellpath projected onto a horizontal plane.
Different scale factors are used. The plot may show one or more
wellpaths.
• Horizontal Clearance— a comparison of the clearance, on a horizontal
plane, between a reference wellpath and one or more object wellpaths.
• Travelling Cylinder — a comparison of the clearance, using a cylinder
traveling along the reference wellpath, between the reference and
object wellpaths.
• Vertical View — a view of the wellpath projected onto a vertical
plane. The plot may show one or more wellpaths.
When accessing graphics from the Well Design Spreadsheet, the current
wellpath design is always the reference wellpath. As you go through the
subsequent menus, you may choose to plot other wellpaths at the same
time; these other wellpaths are the object wellpaths.
User’s Guide 9-21

Selecting the Reference Wellpath Only
Note: Horizontal Clearance and Travelling Cylinder plots

require at least one object wellpath. If you choose
one of these plots, skip to “Selecting Object Wellpaths”
on page 9-22.
After selecting a graph type, two more menus appear; proceed as follows:
1. The first menu, which is shown in Figure 9-27, has no
significance if you want to plot the reference wellpath only.
Choose wellhead to minimize the number of capitalized token
names on the next menu. Press [ENTER] to go to it.
Figure 9-27. Data

Level Menu. Select
the pool from which
object data are to
be chosen.
2. At the second menu, an example of which is shown in

Figure 9-28, the tokens associated with saved wellpath designs
and surveys are displayed. To make sure no object wellpaths
appear, highlight any of the tokens displayed in CAPITAL
LETTERS. Press [ENTER] to change their display to lower case
letters.
Figure 9-28.
Token Selection.
Select one or more
tokens whose
object data you
want to plot, or none
to select reference
data only.
3. Highlight Exit and press [ENTER]. The graph of the current

wellpath design appears in a new window.
Selecting Object Wellpaths

The most important value of spreadsheet graphics is the ability to compare
your new wellpath against other designs and surveys. To do that, you need
to select one or more object wellpaths to appear on the same plot as the

reference wellpath. After selecting the graph type, two more menus appear.
Proceed as follows:
1. At the first menu, shown in Figure 9-27, you tell Ec*Trak
Directional at what level of the data hierarchy the object
wellpaths are located.
Wellhead means you only want to consider wellpaths from the
same slot as the reference wellpath. Structure includes wellpaths
on all slots of the same structure. Field expands the scope to
wellpaths on all structures in the field. Highlight one and press
[ENTER].
2. At the second menu (an example is shown in Figure 9-28), use

tokens to narrow the selection of object wellpaths.
Note: At the Well Design Spreadsheet (and all the other

spreadsheets), you can select object wellpaths only
by token; you can not select individual wellpaths.
The menu lists the tokens you assigned to each wellpath design
and survey (on the level you chose at the previous menu) when
you saved it. In Figure 9-28, three tokens were assigned to saved
wellpaths on the current structure: definitive proposal, contin-
gency plan and initial allocation.
To select a token, make sure it appears in CAPITAL LETTERS;
to deselect it, make sure it appears in lower case letters. Toggle
between the two by highlighting the token and pressing [ENTER].
3. You may select more than one token at a time. To plot all the
object wellpaths at the selected level, highlight Select All
Wellpaths and press [ENTER]. To plot some object wellpaths,
select the token(s) of interest; then highlight Exit and press
[ENTER].
4. Ec*Trak Directional searches its database for all the wellpaths on

the selected level which were stored with the selected tokens.
5. The graphs of the current and object wellpaths appear in a new
window.
Working with the Graphics Screen
Note: The main description of graphics in the manual is found

in Chapters 12, 14, 15 and 16, where the graphics system
is accessed through Plot on the Main Menu. The
following discussion focuses on items that are different
User’s Guide 9-23

when you enter graphics through the Well Design

Spreadsheet.
Figure 9-29 shows an example of the initial graphics screen. This sample is
a Plan View (Auto Scale) of a reference wellpath and one object wellpath.
On a color monitor the reference and object wellpaths are drawn in
different colors; the default colors are white for the reference wellpath and
green for the object. The menu of available graphics functions appears in
the upper left-hand corner.
Figure 9-29. Plan

View (Auto Scale).
This graph shows
the reference
wellpath and one
object wellpath
when they are first
drawn. The Well
Design Graphics
menu appears in
the upper left-hand
corner.
A quick summary of these functions and where they are discussed more
completely in the manual, follows:
• Zoom — Focus in on an area of the graph. See page 14-10.
• Traverse — Scroll across a zoomed image. See page 14-11.
• Reset — Redraw the graph at its initial size, un-zooming the image.
See page 14-12.
• Edit Layout — Add a different graphical view of the wellpaths.
Modify, move or delete an existing display. See Chapter 15.

• Hard Copy — Print or plot the graph. See “Printing/Plotting a Graph”

on page 17-3.
• Measure — Measure the distance or curvature between two points on
the graph. See page 14-15.
The Well Design Spreadsheet plots, such as the one in Figure 9-29, are
similar to those from Plot at the Main Menu, except that the identifying
text — such as the title, the profile data and so on — is missing. If you
want to add them, you can do so by selecting Edit Layout from the Well
Design Graphics menu.
However, several functions that are available when you enter graphics
from the Main Menu are not available from the Well Design Spreadsheet.
These unavailable functions, and where they are discussed in greater detail,
are as follows:
• Show/Hide Paper — You can not show the extent of the paper or a
grid marking every 2cm or 1 inch. See page 14-13.
• Detail Edit — You can not draw or manipulate your own objects or
text. See Chapter 16.
• Change Paper — You can not change the size of paper on which the
plot appears. See page 17-11.
• Save Plot — You can not save the plot to a disk file, to be recalled at a
later time. See page 17-7.
Remember that the mouse controls the menus in the graphics window.
Move the mouse pointer to a menu item and left-click to select it. If you do
not want to make a selection from the current menu, right-click to advance
to the next menu.
To leave graphics and return to the Well Design Spreadsheet, continue to
right-click until you reach the menu shown in Figure 9-30. Cancel returns
you to graphics, while Spreadsheet and Quit return you to the spreadsheet.
A discussion of the difference between Spreadsheet and Quit follows.
Figure 9-30.
Leaving Graphics.
Right-click at
the Well Design
Graphics menu to
obtain this menu.
Using Spreadsheet
As mentioned on page 9-22, the most important value of spreadsheet
graphics is to compare your new wellpath design against other wellpaths.
User’s Guide 9-25

What happens if you do not like what you see? You probably want to go
back to the current spreadsheet, change it and compare it again. You may
need to go through this cycle several times until satisfied with the design.
The Spreadsheet feature allows you to make these comparisons more
easily. When you highlight Spreadsheet at the menu shown in Figure 9-30
and left-click, Ec*Trak Directional remembers the object wellpaths and the
context of the graphic. This includes any re-scaling, zooming, added plots,
and so on that you made, thereby eliminating the need to perform those
editing steps again.
After selecting Spreadsheet, you return to the Well Design Spreadsheet for
the wellpath you were working on. Make any desired changes in it. When
you want to look at its plot again, press [F1] and [F3]. The screen shown in
Figure 9-31 appears.
Figure 9-31.
Graphic Types
After Spreadsheet.
If you use
Spreadsheet, [F2]
and [F3] become
active. [F2] returns
you to the same
position on the
same graph.
Press [F2], Current Graphic to return to the same position on the same plot,
this time with the revised reference wellpath.
You have two other options when you reach the screen shown in
Figure 9-31, as follows:
• To view the same graph type, but with different object wellpaths,
press [F3], New Data and select the data level and tokens you wish
to see. The context of the previous graphic is not saved.
• To view a different graph type with the same object wellpaths,
highlight the desired graph type and press [ENTER].
If you exit graphics by selecting Quit, Ec*Trak Directional does not
remember anything about the current session. Any subsequent return
to graphics is treated as an initial visit.

Chapter 10
Survey Data
This chapter discusses how Ec*Trak Directional handles

survey data. It covers such topics as how to enter and edit
survey data, how to project ahead from the end of a survey,
how to view survey graphics, how to save a survey and how
to use the Survey Options menu.
After you design the wellpath, as described in Chapters 7 through 9, you

begin to drill the well. As you run surveys of the actual wellpath, record
them in the Survey section of Ec*Trak Directional.
This chapter describes how to use the survey features. Many of them
are identical or similar to corresponding features of the Well Design
Spreadsheet, so if you know the material in Chapters 7 through 9, you
already know much of the material in this chapter.
In Ec*Trak Directional a survey is the set of data collected from one survey
instrument run in hole.
Survey features which are identical or similar to well design features are
summarized briefly, with references given to the more detailed discussion.
New or different survey features are described in detail in this chapter.
A flow chart showing the survey menus appears on page C-5.
Accessing the Survey Spreadsheet

Accessing the Survey Spreadsheet is similar to accessing the Well Design
Spreadsheet, as follows:
2. Select Directional Survey from the Create/Edit menu.
3. Select the desired operator, field, structure and slot.
4. Select the desired survey to edit from the Wellpath menu, or
select Create New Survey.
User’s Guide 10-1

Survey Data Ec*Trak Directional
Along the way, you can add a new slot or any number of wells. For a more
detailed discussion and to see a flow chart, see “Accessing the Well Design
Spreadsheet” on page 7-1. Everything in that discussion also applies to
accessing the Survey Spreadsheet.
Editing a Survey or Creating a New Survey

Step 4 in the previous section merits further explanation. Should you edit
an existing survey or create a new survey section?
If receiving data from a deeper section of the same well and using the same
type of survey tool, call the existing survey to the screen and add the new
stations to it.
In all other cases, create a new survey. These include:
• Initial survey on the well.
• Initial survey on a sidetrack.
• Whenever you change survey tools.
• Different multi-shot runs of the same survey tool.
For example: You run a gyro from 0m – 1000m, and a week later you
run another gyro from 1000m – 3000m. Enter them as two separate
surveys, and tie the second to the first.
Examining the Survey Spreadsheet

The Survey Spreadsheet for a new survey is shown in Figure 10-1. It can
be divided into three areas as labelled.
Figure 10-1.
Survey
Spreadsheet
Spreadsheet. Heading
There is no
Advisory
Information area
to the right. Data
fields are the same Survey Area
except that Vertical
Section replaces
Polar Coordinates.
Functions
The items on the Spreadsheet Heading are described on page 7-3. You may
change the Survey Name by moving the cursor to that data field and typing
the desired name. You may change the Tied To data field by pressing [F1]

Ec*Trak Directional Survey Data
to access the survey options, selecting Redefine Tie and selecting an

existing survey or the slot reference point to tie to.
The Survey Area is nearly the same as the Design Area of the Well Design
Spreadsheet, whose description begins on page 7-4. The major difference
is that the Polar Coordinate data field on the Well Design Spreadsheet is
replaced by the Vertical Section data field on the Survey Spreadsheet.
The Vertical Section data field gives the distance from the vertical section
reference point to the projection of the survey station onto the plane of
vertical section. Ec*Trak Directional does not use vertical section to
calculate the survey, but does use it to graph the data on a vertical view.
The functions at the bottom of the screen are the same as on the Well
Design Spreadsheet. If you press [F1] Survey Options, the Survey Options
menu appears, as does a new set of function keys.
To leave the spreadsheet without saving data, press [F1] and select Quit
from the Survey Options menu. Then select Yes to confirm. You return
to the Main Menu; none of your work, including any slot or wells you
created, is saved to the database.
Specifying the Tie Point

The first line of the survey represents the tie point, where the survey
connects to its external environment. Ec*Trak Directional can handle the
following types of tie points. In each case, you chose to enter a new survey:
• Tie to Wellhead — If no definitive survey exists for that slot, Ec*Trak
Directional automatically ties the new survey to the slot reference
point. On the first line, the coordinates, inclination and direction all
appear in reverse video, indicating that you may change any of them.
• Tie to Survey — If a definitive survey exists for the slot, the coordi-
nates of its last survey station appear on the first line. To begin the
survey of a sidetrack, type the desired MD of the start of the sidetrack
into the MD data field on the first line. Ec*Trak Directional calculates
and displays on the first line the other quantities for that MD.
• Tie to an arbitrary point — Use this procedure to begin a survey at a
point that is not yet part of the database. First tie to the wellhead; then
edit the appropriate data values on the first line. The program advises
you that this practice is not recommended because your point does not
tie to an existing survey. However, it allows you to do it if you answer
Yes to the confirmation question.
You may change the tie point by pressing [F1] to access the survey options,
selecting Redefine Tie and selecting an existing survey or the slot reference
point to tie to. The new tie point coordinates appear on the first line.
User’s Guide 10-3

Entering Survey Data

For each survey station, type in the following three values:
• MD
• inclination
• direction
Ec*Trak Directional calculates and displays the remaining data fields for
the station and advances the cursor to the next line.
At any time you may change the values you entered for MD, inclination or
direction. After editing each value, Ec*Trak Directional re-calculates the
entire spreadsheet based on the new data. If you edit a survey which
another survey ties to and the tie point changes, the program automatically
updates the tie point on the other survey.
The program offers two facilities to help automate your entry of survey
data. They are Automatic MD and Import Survey, as described in the
following sections.
Using Automatic MD
If you are entering a multi-shot survey at equal depth increments, you can
invoke the Automatic MD function. This allows Ec*Trak Directional to fill
in the MD for you, so you only have to enter the inclination and direction
of each station. The following example shows how Automatic MD works:
1. Assume you are building a survey from the slot reference point.
The tie point is at the slot, and the next station is 350m deep and
directly under the slot. The spreadsheet in Figure 10-2 depicts
this situation.
Figure 10-2. Start

of a Survey. Tie
point is at the
surface. Second
line is the kick off
point, directly under
the slot.
2. Press [F1]. At the Survey Options menu, highlight Automatic

MD’s and press [ENTER] to capitalize it.
3. Enter the MD, inclination and direction of the next station; for
example, 450m MD, 2° inclination and 225° direction.

4. Since the difference in MD is 100m (450m − 350m), Ec*Trak

Directional enters the MD value on the next line as 550, as
Figure 10-3.
Automatic MD.
If you invoke
Automatic MD
and establish an
interval between
stations, Ec*Trak
Directional enters
the next station
using that interval.
5. Enter the inclination and direction for each station. Each

subsequent station has an MD that is greater by 100m.
6. You may move back to the MD data field and change any of
the values that the program enters for you. If you do that with
Automatic MD turned on, Ec*Trak Directional uses the new
difference to calculate the MD of the next station.
7. To turn off Automatic MD, press [F1], highlight AUTOMATIC
MD’s and press [ENTER].
Importing a Survey
By importing a survey file into Ec*Trak Directional, you can avoid typing
in the data altogether. The file must be stored in the proper directory of
your computer’s hard disk (in most cases this is the /u/ideas/ideas_data/
ImportSvy directory). Follow these steps:
1. At the Survey Spreadsheet, press [F1] and select Import Survey.
2. A list of the files in the /u/ideas/ideas_data/ImportSvy directory
appears. Highlight the file you wish to import and press [ENTER].
3. Highlight one of the file formats shown in Figure 10-4. Press
[ENTER] to select it. The choices are summarized as follows:
• MD-Inc-Azi — standard survey format of MD, inclination

and azimuth.
• DDS — survey file format of the Baker Hughes INTEQ
Drilling Database System program.
• Ferranti DDS — survey format obtained from a Ferranti
tool.
User’s Guide 10-5

Figure 10-4.
Survey Format
Menu. Highlight
a format and
press [ENTER].
To cancel an
import, press [F1].
• .ins Output — format of survey obtained from an inertial

navigation tool; the file extension is .ins.
• .fmt Output — format of survey obtained from a Seeker
tool; the file extension is .fmt.
4. You may enter an azimuth correction, if desired, at the Azimuth
Correction screen, shown in Figure 10-5. This is useful when you
need to apply a grid convergence to raw Seeker data to convert
from true north to grid north.
Figure 10-5.
Azimuth
Correction
Screen.
Press [ENTER] when finished. Ec*Trak Directional adds (or

subtracts, if negative) the number you enter to the azimuth value
of each entry in the file.
5. Ec*Trak Directional asks if you want to delete the source file
after importing it. Answer Yes or No as you desire.
6. The imported survey data appear on the spreadsheet and tie
to any existing survey input.
Using the Survey Options Menu

When you press [F1] at the Survey Spreadsheet, the Survey Options menu,
shown in Figure 10-6, appears. If you arrive at this menu by mistake, return
to the Survey Spreadsheet by highlighting Quit and pressing [ENTER]; at
the confirmation screen highlight No and press [ENTER].
The Survey Options functions are described in the following sections.

Figure 10-6.
Survey Options
Menu. To reach
this menu, press
[F1] from the Survey
Spreadsheet. If you
reach this menu by
mistake, select Quit
and answer No to
the confirmation
question.
Top/Bottom
Move to the first or last survey line. For more information, see page 9-13.
Back/Forward
Move to the previous or next screenful of survey stations. For more
Print Screen
Send a copy of the current screen to a printer. For more information, see
“Printing a Survey Spreadsheet” on page 17-2.
Automatic MD
For multi-shot surveys, the program enters MD values at a regular interval.
For more information, see page 10-4.
Casings
Add, edit or delete casing data. Casing at the Survey Spreadsheet is nearly
identical to casing at the Well Design Spreadsheet; for more information
see page 9-14. The main difference is that the data you enter at the Survey
Spreadsheet refers to actual casing depths, while the Well Design
Spreadsheet refers to projected depths.
When you save the casing data at the Survey Spreadsheet and return to
Structure Setup to look at the casing section (for more information, see
pages 6-8 through 6-12), the data fields for Actual Top MD, Actual Bottom
MD and Date Set are filled in.
User’s Guide 10-7

Survey Comments
The procedure for entering comments applicable to a specific MD or
TVD of the survey is identical to that for a wellpath design. For more
Vertical Section
You may reset the vertical section reference point and the angle of the
section plane. For more information, see page 9-17.
One difference from the Well Design Spreadsheet is the possible presence
of two additional menu choices in certain circumstances. The Vertical
Section Reference Options menu is shown in Figure 10-7. The additional
choices are as follows:
Figure 10-7.
Vertical Section
Reference
Options Menu.
Two new choices,
tie position and
proposal reference,
may appear.
• Tie Position — If the current survey is tied to a different survey, this

option appears. Select it to use the tie point as the origin for vertical
section calculations.
• Proposal Section Reference — If there is a definitive proposal for
the slot, this option appears. Select it to use the proposal’s vertical
section origin for the current survey.
Tool Errors
Apply a survey tool error model to the current survey. This assignment
allows the proper ellipses of uncertainty to be generated at each survey
station. Select a tool type from the menu that appears.
Note: Each survey can only have one tool. The current selection
is noted on the heading of the Survey Tool menu.
The Survey Tool menu includes the standard survey tool error models plus
any others that you added for the structure in Structure Setup (for more
information, see page 6-13).
If you need to remove a tool from a survey, press [F2] to unset the tool. The
tool name area at the top of the menu becomes blank.

Modify Identifiers
Identifiers (or tokens) are assigned a bit differently at the Survey and Well
Design Spreadsheets (for more information, see page 8-22). Press [F1] and
select Modify Identifiers to display the list of identifiers, an example of
which is shown in Figure 10-8.
Figure 10-8.
Token Menu. You
can toggle a token
on and off and apply
as many as needed
to the survey.
Move the cursor to the token of interest and press [ENTER] to toggle it on
and off. Tokens which appear in CAPITAL LETTERS are applied to the
survey. A survey may have more than one token.
Each time you save the survey, the tokens that you apply at this screen are
saved with it. Additionally, the first time you save the survey, the program
brings you to the Token Selection screen in case you have not visited it.
For more information about saving a survey, see “Exit” on page 10-10.
The most significant survey tokens are described in the following:
• Definitive Survey — You can make only one survey section on a slot
the definitive survey; Ec*Trak Directional removes the definitive
survey token from all other surveys on the slot. If the definitive survey
ties to another survey, the wellpath above the definitive survey is also
considered to be definitive.
• Overlapping Tie-On — If a survey is attached to the middle of another
survey section, you can designate the earlier survey as having an
overlapping tie on. It indicates that duplicate surveys exist below
the tie on point.
• Inertial — If you select Inertial, it also locks the survey file. For more
information, see the Locked token.
• Sidetrack — If you desire, you may assign a sidetrack token to
sidetrack survey sections.
• Locked — If you save a survey with the locked token, the only way
to edit or look at it is through the Survey (No Lock) option on the
User’s Guide 10-9

Create/Edit menu. Only those users with planner privileges have

access to Survey (No Lock). For more information, see page 8-23.
Redefine Tie Point

Tie the current survey to a different survey or to the slot. For more
Well Name
Assign a well name to the current survey or add a well. For more
Import Survey
Bring in the data from an external file, rather than typing it in. For more
Quit
Leave the survey, return to the Main Menu and abandon all modifications.
Exit
Leave the survey and return to the Main Menu. Save all changes to the
database.
The procedure for saving a survey differs depending on whether you are
saving it for the first time or for a subsequent time. When saving a survey
for the first time, the steps are similar to saving a well design (for more
information, see page 8-21). Proceed as follows:
1. Press [F1], highlight Exit and press [ENTER].
2. To save the changes, highlight Yes and press [ENTER]. At this
point, you are committed to saving the data.
3. Ec*Trak Directional asks you about the vertical section for the
entire survey path. Answer Yes to use the system default vertical
section; answer No to provide your own vertical section
reference point and plane. For more information, see page 8-21.
4. If you did not enter a survey name, you can type it on the next
screen if desired. For more information, see page 8-22.
5. Select the identifiers or tokens to attach to this survey. If you
previously did this (by pressing [F1] and selecting Modify
Identifiers), your choices appear in capital letters. Change any
token as desired. For more information, see page 10-9.
6. Press [F1] to complete the save and return to the Main Menu.

Once you save a survey, subsequent saves involve fewer steps. Proceed
as follows:
1. Press [F1], highlight Exit and press [ENTER].
2. Confirm that you wish to save the data by highlighting Yes and
pressing [ENTER].
3. You return to the Main Menu.
On a subsequent save, Ec*Trak Directional saves the last vertical section
and token changes that you make while working on the spreadsheet. See
pages 10-8 and 10-9 for more information about changing the vertical
section and tokens, respectively, from the Survey Options menu.
Projecting from the End of a Survey

You can make two kinds of projections from the end of a survey, as
follows. These projections are discussed in the next two sections.
• Project at a specified build rate and walk rate to a desired MD.
• Curvature to the target.
Projecting Ahead
Follow these steps to project ahead of the last station on the survey.
1. From the Survey Spreadsheet, press [F1] twice.
2. Type in the MD to project to.
If the Survey Spreadsheet includes a previous projection to an
MD greater than the current projection, Ec*Trak Directional
erases the previous projection.
If the Survey Spreadsheet includes a previous projection to a
lesser MD, Ec*Trak Directional asks if you want to remove it.
Remove it (answer Yes) to project from the actual survey; keep it
(answer No) to project from the end of the previous projection.
3. Type in the build or drop rate to apply to the projected path. If a
drop rate, precede it with a minus sign (-). The number you enter
is applied to the inclination only; it is not applied to direction
(no turn).
4. You can apply walk to the projected path; the walk value applies
to the direction, thus imparting a turn to the projection. If a
wellpath design already has walk rates applied to it, the program
asks if you wish to use them. Answer Yes or No as desired.
User’s Guide 10-11

Note: When making a survey projection, the term walk refers to

the rate of turn you want in the projection.
5. The Select Walk Horizon menu appears, an example of which is

shown in Figure 10-9. You can edit, add or delete walk horizons
for the projection, as described for the Well Design Spreadsheet
(for more information, see page 9-9). To ignore walk — which
keeps a constant direction (no turn) through the projection — the
walk amount should be 0.
Figure 10-9.
Menu of Available
Walk Horizons.
6. After you press [F1] to use the walk horizons, you return to the
Survey Spreadsheet. The projection appears as a series of survey
stations, spaced according to the course length you set at the
Options menu in Structure Setup (see page 3-8). An example
Figure 10-10.
Survey Projection.
This screen shows
the results of a
projection ahead of
the bit. Press [F1]
twice; then provide
the final MD to
project to and a
build rate. Use the
Walk Horizon menu
to specify turn, if
desired.
After making a projection, notice the following:

• The walked values for each station appear on the Survey Spreadsheet.
Note: When you apply walk to a well design, two wellpaths

(walked and unwalked) are created. On a survey
projection, however, only one path is created; it includes
the turn produced by the specified walk value. There is no
unwalked survey projection.

• Once you add projected stations to the screen, you may change them
in the same manner as if you had typed the information directly.
• To remove an existing projection from the screen, press [F1] twice
from the spreadsheet. When asked for the MD to extrapolate to, press
[F1] a third time.
• When you save a survey, projections of this type are removed.

You may also type in projections (as pseudo-surveys) — in the form of
MD, inclination and direction — following actual survey data. Unlike the
automatic projections discussed previously, typed-in projections are saved
to the database if they remain on the spreadsheet when you exit. When
finished with the manually-entered projection, it is good practice (though
not required) to do one of the following:
• Delete the projected stations from the spreadsheet by pressing [F4]
on each line of the projection. That way, they are not saved with the
survey.
• If you wish to save the projected stations, attach a comment to
identify them as projections and not as actual survey stations.
Calculating Curvature to the Target

Ec*Trak Directional can also calculate the minimum curvature from the
end of the survey to the target. Since there is no way to load a target onto
the Survey Spreadsheet, to what target does the program aim?
To use this facility, the survey’s slot must have a definitive proposal
(see page 8-23) which includes a target loaded from the target database
(see page 8-16). This is the target to which the program calculates. If the
definitive proposal has more than one database target, the calculation is
made to the next target in sequence.
To perform the calculation, press [F1] and [F2] from the Survey Spread-
sheet. The result is a screen similar to that shown in Figure 10-11. The
Target Details screen for the subject target appears under the spreadsheet,
but (unlike the Well Design Spreadsheet) you can not change any of the
target information at the Survey Spreadsheet. The curvatures from the end
of the survey to the target appear below the Target Details screen.
As you add stations to the end of the survey, Ec*Trak Directional re-
calculates the curvatures and displays them at the bottom of the screen,
allowing you to monitor the progress of the well as it is drilled. Turn is
the horizontal component, build is the vertical component and 3-D is the
dogleg severity from the end of the survey to the target.

Figure 10-11.
Survey to Target
Results. Press
[F1] and [F2] to
calculate the
curvatures required
to go from the end
of the survey to the
target. The target
coordinates, shown
in the Target Details
screen, are from the
next target on the
definitive proposal.
As you add stations
to the survey, the
curvatures at the
bottom of the
screen change
to reflect the
curvature from
the last survey
station.
Note: If you design a well from the last survey station to

the target and use the curved/straight segment profile,
the value that Ec*Trak Directional calculates as the
Curvature is the same as the 3-D value on this screen.1
Viewing Survey Graphics

The graphic capabilities at the Survey Spreadsheet are nearly identical to
those at the Well Design Spreadsheet. For more information, see pages
9-21 through 9-26. In this section, the procedures are summarized, and
differences between the two spreadsheets are emphasized.
Note: All data on the Survey Spreadsheet — whether typed in,

imported or projected ahead of the survey — are plotted.
Follow these steps to view a graph of the survey:

1. From the Survey Spreadsheet, press [F1] and [F3].
1. The 3-D curvature to target is the actual continuous dogleg required to hit the target.
Build and turn values are averages; actual build and turn values vary along the curve
but combine to equal the 3-D curvature (more build and turn in some places, less
build and turn in others).

2. Select the type of graph from the list, an example of which is

Figure 10-12.
Survey Graph
Types.
3. If you intend to view object data, select the level of the data
hierarchy — either field, structure or wellhead (slot) — from
which to choose comparison wellpaths. If you do not intend to
select object data, choose wellhead to minimize the number of
capitalized token names on the next menu. Notice that object
wellpaths include both surveys and wellpath designs.
4. Select the object wellpaths by token. The menu that appears,
an example of which is shown in Figure 10-13, lists the tokens
associated with each survey followed by the tokens for each
design at the data hierarchy level chosen in the previous step.
Figure 10-13.
Tokens for Object
Data. Tokens for
all surveys at the
selected level are
listed first, followed
by tokens for
wellpath designs.
You can plot both
surveys and
proposals at the
same time.
Highlight a token and toggle it on and off by pressing [ENTER].

A token that appears in CAPITAL LETTERS is selected. You
may select as many tokens as needed. If you want to plot the
reference survey only, make sure all tokens appear in lower
case letters. When finished selecting the tokens, select Exit
or press [F1] to draw the graph.
In this example, the current survey is to be plotted with the
definitive proposal for the slot. This is a common graph,
comparing the actual drilled wellpath with the wellpath design.

5. At the graphics screen, you have the same capabilities

and limitations as when you reach it from the Well Design
Spreadsheet. For more information, see page 9-23.
The functions available from the Survey Graphics menu are
Zoom, Traverse, Reset, Edit Layout, Hard Copy and Measure.
Functions that are unavailable are Show/Hide Paper, Detail Edit,
Change Paper and Save Plot.
6. The procedure for returning to the Survey Spreadsheet from
the graphics screen is identical to that for the Well Design
Spreadsheet, including use of the Spreadsheet feature. For
more information about Spreadsheet, see page 9-25.
Entering a Sample Survey

The goal of this sample is to enter the survey station information for an
actual wellpath as it is drilled. Assume that the well is drilled from Slot #1
on the Manual Structure to Target 1 and that all the survey stations are
recorded using FINDS. The survey data to enter appear in Figure 10-14.
Proceed as follows:
Figure 10-14.
Sample Survey MD Inclination Azimuth MD Inclination Azimuth
Values to Enter.
0 0.0 0.0 1400 18.1 319.9
100 0.1 0.5 1500 25.2 320.1
200 1.2 0.7 1600 31.6 319.5
300 0.9 0.8 1700 38.2 319.7
400 0.6 0.5 1800 45.0 320.2
500 0.2 359.7 1900 51.8 320.5
600 0.4 359.5 2000 58.0 320.4
700 0.4 0.0 2100 60.2 320.1
800 0.1 359.8 2200 60.0 320.0
900 0.3 0.4 2300 59.6 319.4
1000 0.5 0.3 2400 59.9 319.5
1100 0.2 0.2 2500 60.0 320.2
1200 4.9 320.3 2600 59.9 320.0
1300 11.8 320.4 2700 60.2 320.6

2. Select Directional Survey from the Create/Edit menu.
4. Select Slot #1 from the Slot menu.
5. Select Create New Survey from the Wellpath menu. The Survey
Spreadsheet appears.

6. Enter the type of survey tool. Press [F1] and select Tool Errors.
Then select Standard Tools and Gyro/INS. Highlight FINDS and
press [F1].
7. Since the survey stations are 100m apart, you can use the
Automatic MD function. Press [F1], highlight Automatic MD’s
and press [ENTER].
8. The first line (tie point) should already have MD, Inclination and
Direction equal to 0. If not, move the cursor to the data fields and
edit them.
9. Move the cursor to the MD data field on the second line. Enter
100 and press [ENTER]. In the Inc. column, enter .1 and press
[ENTER]. In the Dir. column, enter .5 and press [ENTER].
10. Ec*Trak Directional calculates the remaining data fields on the

second line, displays 200 as the MD of the third line and moves
the cursor to the Inc. column of the third line.
11. Enter Inc. = 1.2 and Dir. = .7. After pressing [ENTER], the third
line’s data fields are calculated, 300 appears as the MD of the
fourth line and the cursor appears in the Inc. column on the
fourth line.
12. Continue entering the survey information in this manner. When
you finish, the end of the Survey Spreadsheet should resemble
that shown in Figure 10-15.
Figure 10-15.
Completed
Sample Survey
Spreadsheet.
13. Save the survey to the database by pressing [F1], highlighting

Exit and pressing [ENTER].
14. Answer Yes to Leave With Update of Database?.
15. Answer Yes to Use System Defined V.S.?.
16. Enter Sample Survey as the name for the survey. Press [ENTER].

17. At the Select Survey Identifiers menu, make sure that only the
first item, Definitive Survey, appears in capital letters. Press [F1]
when finished.
18. You return to the Main Menu, saving the survey to the database.
The preceding series of steps describes the basic operations at the Survey
Spreadsheet. As you are entering the survey data, there are other
procedures you may wish to carry out.
One common practice is to compare the actual wellpath being drilled to
the wellpath you designed at the Well Design Spreadsheet. The sample
definitive proposal for the current wellpath is repeated in Figure 10-16.
The following sections detail some of these operations.
Figure 10-16.
Definitive
Proposal. This
is the sample
wellpath design
for Slot #1
which appears
in Figure 8-12 on
page 8-8.
Graphing the Sample Survey Data

As you enter survey data, you may stop after any station to graph the
survey. For this example, the reference wellpath is the survey on the
spreadsheet, the object wellpath is the definitive proposal and the graph
is made after you enter the 2000m station. Proceed as follows:
1. Press [F1] and [F3], and select the Quick Wellplot (Auto Scale).
Select data at the wellhead (slot) level.
2. At the token screen for selecting object data, make sure that only
Definitive Proposal appears in capital letters. Highlight Exit and
press [ENTER].
3. Two plots appear, similar to those shown in Figure 10-17. Both
the definitive proposal and the current survey appear on the plots.
The definitive proposal line is longer, because it reaches the
target.
4. If you wish, you can examine the plots more closely, utilizing
functions such as zoom (see page 14-10) and measure (see page
14-15) to compare the survey and the definitive proposal. In this

Figure 10-17.
Quick Wellplot
of Survey and
Design.
case, the survey should be close enough to the proposal that no

adjustments are needed.
5. When finished examining the graph, right-click until you return
to the Survey Graphics menu. Then right-click again to reach the
Exit menu. Highlight Spreadsheet and left-click to return to the
spreadsheet, while preserving the context of the graphic.
Calculating Curvature from Sample Survey to Target

One way to monitor the drilling process during the hold section is to
calculate the curvature from the end of the survey to the target. In this
example, perform the first curvature calculation after you enter the 2100m
station. Proceed as follows:
1. Press [F1] and [F2] to produce an area at the bottom of the screen
similar to that shown in Figure 10-18.
Figure 10-18.
Curvature from
Sample Survey
to Target.

2. Enter the remaining survey stations. Notice that the survey to

target curvatures change as you complete each line.
3. Since this is a hold section all the way to the target, the curva-
tures should be close to 0. If they become too large, you may
want to alter the course of the drilling to get the wellpath back
on track.
Projecting Ahead of the Sample Survey

Another way to monitor the drilling is to project ahead to the target. Within
a hold section, the projection calculation can tell you how close the actual
wellpath is to the wellpath design. In this example, project ahead after the
2700m survey station. Proceed as follows:
1. Press [F1] twice. Extrapolate to 3784.92m, the target MD1, at a
build rate of 0. Ignore walk by answering No to Use Existing
Walk Rate?
2. Press [F1] to add the projected data to the spreadsheet.
3. Press [F1], highlight Bottom and press [ENTER] to move to the
end of the projection.
4. At the target MD the projected coordinates are TVD =
2747.74m, N/S = N1513.00m and E/W = W1249.19m, as
shown in Figure 10-19. Compare to the target coordinates
of TVD = 2750m, N/S = N1500m and E/W = W1250m.
Figure 10-19.
End of Sample
Survey Projection.
5. Determine if you are on course or if an adjustment must be made.

You can make that determination by judging the numbers on the
spreadsheet, or by looking again at the graph of the survey and
the design.
1. Unless you drill right down the design, the actual drilled MD at the target is different
from the design MD. When making such a projection, you would need to increase the
projected MD to see where you would end up at the target TVD.

Chapter 11
Rigsite System
This chapter discusses the Rigsite System, which combines

the survey and well design functions in a single module
of Ec*Trak Directional. The unique features of Rigsite —
which include procedures for projecting ahead, planning
a wellpath, using Instant Graphics and saving survey data
— are discussed.
Note: As a general rule, there is little or no need for the office-

based well planner to use the Rigsite System. To record
survey data, enter Directional Survey as described in
Chapter 10. To design a wellpath, enter Directional Well
Design as described in Chapters 7 through 9.
The Rigsite System is a self-contained module for the directional driller or

other personnel monitoring a well in progress. It affords quick access to the
following functions required while drilling a well:
• survey entry
• projections to target
• proximity calculations to adjacent wells
• graphics, including the specialized Instant Graphics functions
• well planning
Before entering the Rigsite System, a design for the well should be created
using the Well Design Spreadsheet and saved as the Definitive Proposal.
A survey for the well entered either through the Survey Spreadsheet or the
Rigsite System links to that design and permits projections to the various
targets in the design as the well progresses.
User’s Guide 11-1

Rigsite System Ec*Trak Directional
Note: A survey section, whether entered at the Survey

Spreadsheet or in the Rigsite System, can be modified
by the other.
Many functions work the same within the Rigsite System as they do at the
Survey and Well Design Spreadsheets. However, significant differences
and limitations exist. Some of these are as follows:
• There is no Quit function. You can only Exit Rigsite. Therefore, any
surveys you create in Rigsite — and all data they contain — must be
saved to the database.
• You can only save survey data and items that apply to the survey.
Those items are casings, comments, vertical section data, the survey
tool error model, tokens and the tie point.
• You can not save wellpath design data.
• A different graphing function, called Instant Graphics, is available
only from the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet.
• The keystrokes needed to perform certain operations are different.
• Certain projections from the end of the survey are unique to the
Rigsite System.
Rigsite features which are similar or identical to those at the Survey
and Well Design Spreadsheets are generally summarized briefly, with
references given to the more detailed discussion. New or different rigsite
features are described in detail in this chapter. Flow charts showing the
rigsite menus appear on page C-6 and C-7.
Accessing the Rigsite System

Accessing the Rigsite System is similar to accessing the spreadsheets.
Proceed as follows:
2. Select Rigsite System from the Create/Edit menu.
3. Select the desired operator, field, structure and slot.
4. Select the desired survey to edit from the Wellpath menu, or
select Create New Survey.
Along the way, you can add a new slot or any number of wells. For a more
detailed discussion and to see a flow chart, see “Accessing the Well Design
Spreadsheet” on page 7-1. Everything in that discussion also applies to
accessing the Rigsite System.

Ec*Trak Directional Rigsite System
Should you edit an existing survey or create a new one? The same
guidelines apply as those given on page 10-2.
Examining the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet

The first screen you encounter in the Rigsite System is the Rigsite Survey
Spreadsheet, which consists of a survey spreadsheet with a Survey
Projection Parameters area below it. Figure 11-1 shows such a screen
for a new survey.
Figure 11-1.
Rigsite Survey
Spreadsheet. Spreadsheet
Heading
The screen
consists of a survey
spreadsheet at the
Survey Area
top and an area at
the bottom for
entering survey
projections.
Projection
Parameters
Area
Functions
The Spreadsheet Heading and Survey Area of the screen are identical to
the same areas on the Survey Spreadsheet, as described on page 10-2. The
Functions at the bottom of the screen are similar, but one difference is the
[F2] key. On the Survey Spreadsheet it deletes the contents of the current
data field, but in the Rigsite System it deletes any projected survey stations
(for more information, see page 11-7).
The first line of the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet describes the tie point and
works the same as on the Survey Spreadsheet. You may tie to the slot or to
a different survey by pressing [F1] and selecting Redefine Tie Point. For
For each survey station, type in the MD, inclination and direction. There
is no Automatic MD function in the Rigsite System, but you can import
a survey. For more information, see page 10-5.
Using the Rigsite Options Menu

Press [F1] to access the Rigsite Options menu, shown in Figure 11-2.
However, the first time you press [F1] for a new survey on which you
have entered data, you encounter several other screens before reaching
the Rigsite Options Menu, as follows:
User’s Guide 11-3

Figure 11-2.
Rigsite Options
Menu. Press
[F1] from the
Rigsite Survey
Spreadsheet to
access this menu.
1. Ec*Trak Directional asks you about the vertical section for the
entire survey path. Highlight Yes and press [ENTER] to use the
default vertical section; highlight No and press [ENTER] to
provide your own vertical section reference point and plane.
2. If you did not enter a survey name, you can type it on the
next screen if desired. Press [ENTER] when finished. For
3. Select the identifiers or tokens that you wish to attach to this
survey. Beware of the Inertial token; for more information see
the Note on page 11-5. Press [F1] when finished.
4. The Rigsite Options menu, shown in Figure 11-2, appears. Enter
any of the desired options, or press [F4] and answer No to return
to the Rigsite System.
The Rigsite Options menu functions are as follows:
• Top/Bottom — Move to the first or last survey station. For more
• Back/Forward — Move to the previous or next screenful of survey
stations. For more information, see page 9-13.
• Print Survey — Send a copy of the current screen to the printer. For
more information, see “Printing a Survey Spreadsheet” on page 17-2.
• Casings — Add, edit or delete casing data, the same as at the Survey
Spreadsheet. For more information, see page 10-7.
• Survey Comments — Add, edit or delete comments at any MD or
TVD. For more information, see page 9-16.
• Vertical Section — Any time after you give the initial vertical section
values (see Step 1 on page 11-4), you can change them by using this
function. For more information, see page 10-8.

• Tool Errors — Assign a survey tool error model to the current survey,
allowing Ec*Trak Directional to calculate ellipses of uncertainty. For
• Modify Identifiers — Assign or change the tokens associated with the
current survey. For more information, see page 10-9.
Note: If you select the Inertial token, it also locks the survey
file. You can not gain access to the survey in the future
unless you have access to the Survey (No Lock) function
on the Create/Edit menu.
• Redefine Tie Point — Tie the current survey to a different survey or to

the slot. For more information, see page 10-3.
• Import Survey — Bring in data from a different survey file. For more
Leaving the Rigsite System

The only time you can quit the Rigsite System without saving anything is
when both of the following conditions are met:
• You are creating a new survey and
• You have not entered any information onto the spreadsheet.
In all other cases, when you leave Rigsite, you save the data currently on
the survey spreadsheet. You do not save any well design data. Once you
leave the Rigsite System, you lose any well design data you entered during
the current session.
To leave the Rigsite System, press [F1] and [F4]. Confirm that you wish to
exit Rigsite by answering Yes. You return to the Main Menu and save your
survey data to the database. If you entered no data on a new survey, the
survey is not added to the database.
Projecting Ahead
When you tell the Rigsite System to analyze the current survey, it performs
three calculations, as follows:
• A proximity calculation against the other surveys on the field.
This calculation is not available from any other spreadsheet (but
is available in report form).
• A calculation of the three-dimensional curvature required to intersect
the next target, which is similar to the calculation on the Survey
Spreadsheet, described on page 10-13.
User’s Guide 11-5

• A projection of survey stations from the end of the actual survey,

given certain user-provided conditions.
When you carry out this analysis, you utilize the Projection Parameters
Area of the screen. Press [F1] twice to place the cursor on the MD
Extension data field. The build and turn rates from the current survey
are copied to the projection as the default build and turn rates.
Handle the survey projection by making the appropriate entry into each
data field followed by [ENTER]. Press [F1] when finished to make the
calculations. The data fields are as follows:
• MD Extension — Enter the distance to project ahead of the survey
end (not the total MD).
• Build/Drop — Enter a constant rate of build (positive) or drop
(negative) for the projected segment. Then enter a turn rate into
the next data field.
• Turn — Enter a constant rate of turn (right turn is positive, left
turn is negative) for the projected segment. If the segment is two-
dimensional, enter 0. If you enter a value for turn, you must also
specify a build or drop rate in the previous data field.
• Toolface — One method of projecting ahead is to provide a build rate
(or drop rate) and a rate of turn. A second method is to provide a
toolface angle and a dogleg. Enter the toolface angle in the Toolface
data field and the dogleg in the Turn data field.
• Proximity Cutoff/1000 — This data field is used for the proximity
calculation. Leave it blank to report the closest distance from the
current survey to all surveys on the field within the projected interval.
A cutoff value of (say) 100/1000 means that at 1000m MD, all
surveys within 100m should be reported, at 2000m MD, all surveys
within 200m, and so on. The minimum value is set by Ec*Trak
Directional at 40/1000.
• Instrument to Bit — Enter the distance from the sensing device to
the bit. If you enter a non-zero value, Ec*Trak Directional adds this
distance to the MD Extension and projects the total distance from the
last survey station. However, no curvatures are used in the sensor-to-
bit section.
When finished with all the data fields, press [F1]. A screen similar to that
shown in Figure 11-3 appears and is described as follows:
• The Proximity Results appear on top of the survey data area. They
show all the surveys on the field which lie within the cutoff distance
you specified and their closest approach to the current survey within
the project ahead interval from the end of the survey.

Figure 11-3.
Proximity
Calculation
Results.
Proximity Results
Projection
Parameters
Area
Target Details
Curvature
to Target
The point of closest approach is informative. If it occurs at the start of

the projection, it indicates that the wellpaths are moving apart with
increasing MD. However, if it occurs at the end of the projected
interval, it indicates that the wellpaths are approaching each other.
• The Target Details area displays the information regarding the target
toward which the survey is aiming.
• The Survey to Target Curvatures at the bottom of the screen show the
curvatures necessary to go from the end of the survey to the center,
left edge, right edge, front edge and back edge of the indicated target.
If the target is a point, the calculation is made only to the center.
After examining the results of the calculations and writing down anything
of interest (or printing it by pressing [CONTROL-P]), press [F1] and
[ENTER] to return to the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet. The projected stations
are added to the survey, while the Proximity Results, the Target Details and
the Curvature to Target areas leave the screen.
You may remove the projected stations by pressing [F2]. Whether or not
you delete them, projected stations are not saved with the rest of the Rigsite
data.
Using the Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet

At any time you can access the Well Design Spreadsheet from within the
Rigsite System. From the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet, press [F1] twice and
then [F2] to move to the Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet, an example of
which is shown in Figure 11-4.
User’s Guide 11-7

Figure 11-4.
Rigsite Well
Design
Spreadsheet.
From the Rigsite
Survey Spread-
sheet, press [F1]
twice and then [F2]
to access this
screen. The Survey
Projection Param-
eters have no
function here.
Notice that it resembles the usual Well Design Spreadsheet except for
the Survey Projection Parameters section near the bottom. Although
it is present, that section has no function during wellpath design.
By default, the tie point, which appears on the first line of the design, is
the last survey station. You can change it by pressing [F1] and selecting
Redefine Tie.
The Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet works the same as the Well Design
Spreadsheet except for the Exit function. You can specify profiles and
targets, plan casing, make comments, graph the results and so on. For
more information, see the relevant discussion in Chapters 7 through 9.
The Exit function works as follows:
• To leave the Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet, press [F1] and then
[F4]. Answer Yes to confirm.
• When you leave the Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet, you return
to the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet, rather than the Main Menu.
• Notice that the Advisory Information box remains on the right
side of the screen, but it is not functional at the Rigsite Survey
Spreadsheet.
• Notice also that there may be a projection in the spreadsheet.
If so, press [F2] Kill Projection to delete it.
• Most important, when you leave the Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet,
all wellpath design data are lost; you can not save them!
Viewing Rigsite Graphics

In the Rigsite System, you have access to the same graphics capabilities
as at the Survey Spreadsheet or the Well Design Spreadsheet. For more
information about survey graphics, see page 10-14; for more information
about well design graphics, see page 9-21.

To access rigsite survey graphics from the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet,

press [F1] twice and [F3]. The Graph Type menu, shown in Figure 11-5,
appears. Specify the type of graph and any object data.
Figure 11-5.
Graph Types.
These are available
when graphing both
rigsite surveys and
rigsite well designs.
To access rigsite well design graphics from the Rigsite Well Design
Spreadsheet, press [F1] and [F3] to move to the Graph Type menu.
Viewing Instant Graphics

A different kind of graphic system, called Instant Graphics, is available
exclusively through the Rigsite System. You access Instant Graphics from
the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet. It allows you to view a plot of the current
survey data along with the other definitive surveys in the same field which
are within a proximity cutoff of 75/1000. It does not plot wellpath design
data, and you can not print the graph to a printer, a plotter or a file.
To access Instant Graphics, press [F1] and [F3] from the Rigsite Survey
Spreadsheet. A window appears containing the Instant Graphics screen,
an example of which is shown in Figure 11-6.
Figure 11-6. Initial

Instant Graphics
Screen. Instant
Graphics are
available for rigsite
surveys only. From
the Rigsite Survey
Spreadsheet, press
[F1] and [F3] to
access this screen.
On your first use of
Instant Graphics
during a rigsite
session, both the
Plan and Section
Views are drawn.
Plan and Section view. Data selected on 75/1000 proximity scan.
User’s Guide 11-9

Graph Types
Instead of choosing the graph type before entering graphics, Instant
Graphics lists the graph types to the left of the plot. The first time you
enter Instant Graphics during a rigsite session, both the Plan and Section
Views are drawn. The message line below the graph tells you the type of
graph currently displayed.
To change to another graph type, left-click on one of the three buttons to
the left of the graph, as follows:
• Plan/Section Views — cycles to the Section View, the Plan View and
back to showing both views.
• Travelling Cylinder — a Travelling Cylinder plot appears. For more
• Ideal Tool Run — a new window appears, showing the Ideal Tool
Run graphic. For more information, see “Using the Ideal Tool Run
Graphic” on page 11-11.
The Zoom, Traverse and Reset Graph functions are available to the left.
For more information, see pages 14-10, 14-11 and 14-12, respectively.
Exit leaves Instant Graphics and returns you to the Rigsite Survey
Spreadsheet. If you change the survey data and return to Instant Graphics
during the same session, the plot updates automatically.
If you specified a survey tool for any of the plotted wellpaths, the ellipses
of uncertainty are shown when you check the Ellipses box. If the box is
unchecked the ellipses are not shown.
Active Steering
The boxes of the Active Steering section are located to the left of the plot
and in the middle of the column. The purpose of this section is to calculate
how to return the actual drilled wellpath to the wellpath design. The system
uses an S [3D] profile (build with turn, hold and drop with turn) for this
correction section.
If the actual wellpath has deviated from the proposed path and you want to
get back on course, proceed as follows:
1. Click on Calculate. A window appears showing the Dogleg and
Step Size. You may change the default values of Dogleg = 13.50
and Step Size = 20 if desired. Generally, keep the Step Size the
same, and change the Dogleg value as needed. Click on OK to
make the calculation.
The dogleg value is the dogleg of the build and drop sections.
The default value is high because your intention is usually to

return as quickly as possible to the proposed path. The step size

tells Ec*Trak Directional at what TVD to return to the proposal.1
Note: If the calculation begins but the Instant Graphics window

leaves the screen, return to Instant Graphics and perform
the calculation again.
2. After the calculation has been made, view the results as follows:
• A table listing the highlights of the calculation appears
when you click on Results Summary. See Figure 11-7. Use
the scroll bar at the bottom of the table to see the columns to
the right.
Figure 11-7.
Results Summary
Screen. After
making an Active
Steering calculation
to return to the
proposed wellpath,
click on Results
Summary to
produce this
window. The table
scrolls horizontally.
• To see a more complete version of the calculation, click

on View Results to produce a Report Previewer screen.
For more information about Report Previewer screens,
see pages 13-1 through 13-3.
• You can view a graph of MD vs. Toolface by clicking
on MD vs. TF Graph.
• The plan and section view plots change to include the
calculated path to return to the proposed design.
Using the Ideal Tool Run Graphic

The purpose of the Ideal Tool Run graphic is to allow you to specify a set
of conditions for drilling ahead of the current position. Ec*Trak Directional
then calculates the coordinates at a projected ending point. This calculation
1. For example, with a step size of 20 the next TVD might be at 1400m. If it is
not possible to get back on course at 1400m, the system next tries to return to
the proposed wellpath at 1420m.

is similar to the projection calculation on the Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet

and is also similar to a directional driller’s ouija board.
Figure 11-8. Ideal

Traveling Cylinder @ 1000 MD Survey is + : Plan is ●
Tool Run Screen. HIGH
SIDE
At the Instant
Graphics screen,
left-click on Ideal
Tool Run to produce
this screen.
Scale |______| 20 meters
Click on Ideal Tool Run to produce a window such as the one shown in
Figure 11-8. Three rows of information at the bottom of the screen give
important coordinates, as follows:
• Cur. — The first row gives the coordinates of the last actual survey
station.
• Proj. — The second row gives the coordinates at a projected point
between the current position and the target. These coordinates change
according to the data values you enter elsewhere on the screen.
• Tgt. — The third row gives the coordinates of the next target. To get
target coordinates, you must have a definitive proposal for the slot.
Typing in Values
Four of the boxes on the screen are darker; they are Projected MD,
Projected TVD, Dogleg (DL) and Toolface (TF). Change the value of
any of these boxes to re-calculate the coordinates of the projected point.
To change a value, proceed as follows:
1. Move the mouse pointer to the desired box.
2. Double-click the left button to highlight the existing value.
3. Type in a new value.
4. Press [ENTER] to re-calculate the remaining projected
coordinates.

At any time you can restore the original Ideal Tool Run by constant curve
into the target center. Move the mouse pointer to Reset at the bottom right-
hand corner and left-click.
Specifying Values Graphically

You can also change the toolface and dogleg graphically. As shown in the
polar grid of Figure 11-9, the toolface is the angle from vertical, expressed
as −180° to +180°, while the distance from the center represents the dogleg
severity. To change these values graphically, proceed as follows:
Figure 11-9.
Toolface/Dogleg TF = 0° DL = 1° x Scale
Screen. The
significant toolface DL =2° x Scale
and dogleg points
on the polar grid
TF = −90° TF = 90°
are labelled. By
changing the scale,
you can change the
range of dogleg
input. DL =3° x Scale
DL =4° x Scale
DL =5° x Scale
TF = 180°
1. Move the mouse pointer to the desired point on the graph and
left-click.
2. A line is drawn from the center to the selected point, the values
you selected for toolface and dogleg appear in their respective
boxes and the coordinates for the projected point are calculated
and displayed.
Initially, you can specify a dogleg value from a minimum of 0° to a
maximum of 5° to 6° (depending on toolface). You can increase the dogleg
range by changing the scale of the graphic (scale does not affect toolface).
The scale is initially set to 1. To change it, left-click on the Scale button
to the left of the graphic to reveal the Scale Prompt screen, shown in
Figure 11-10. The scale values range from 0 (same as 1) to 90. There
are three ways to change the scale setting as follows:
• To change the scale by 1, press the Left or Right arrow key.
• To change the scale by 9, left-click in the area on either side of the
two black boxes (the slide).

Figure 11-10.
Scale Prompt Left-click, hold and Press Left or
Screen. Click move in either direction Right arrow key
Dogleg Scale to move by 1.
the Scale box to
access this screen.
Change the scale
by the indicated
methods and left- Left-click outside of
slide to move it by 9.
click on Accept.
• To change the scale to any desired value, move the mouse pointer on
top of the slide, press and hold the left mouse button, drag the slide to
the desired number and release the button.
When the desired scale appears, left-click on Accept to return to the Ideal
Tool Run screen. At a scale of 5, for example, the range of dogleg values
becomes a minimum of 0 and a maximum of 25 to 30, depending on the
toolface.
The other boxes to the left of the graph are as follows:
• Main Graphics — Leave the Ideal Tool Run window and return to the
original Instant Graphics screen.
• Print — Print the information in the boxes at the bottom of the screen.
The graph is not printed.
• Next Target — If the definitive proposal has more than one target,
left-click on this box to load the position of the next target onto the
Tgt. line. Left-clicking on this box cycles through all the targets of the
proposal. This allows you to project from the current position to each
target.
• Exit — Leave Instant Graphics and return to the Rigsite Survey
Spreadsheet.
Specifying Build and Turn Rates

Instead of giving the toolface and dogleg, you may specify rates of build
and turn. To make the switch, left-click on Bld/Trn to the left of the
graphic area; a screen similar to that shown in Figure 11-11 appears.
To switch back, left-click on DL/TF.
The symbols inside the graph are as follows:
• For any target that is not a point, a series of dots (generally white
in color) represents the boundaries of the target. The target name
is given below the diagram. Figure 11-11 shows a circular target.

Figure 11-11.
Build/Turn
Screen. You may ●
B 3 ● ●
project ahead by U
2 ● ●
specifying build and I
turn rates, either by L 1 +

D
● ● ●
typing them in the 0
/
boxes or by clicking D
-1 ● ●
a point on the R -2
Cartesian grid. O ● ●
-3 ●
The series of P
-4
dots represents -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
TURN
a circular target. Target: Target 1 Trend: BLD 0.24 TRN 0.36
Select a combination of build and turn rates that falls inside the
indicated target area to hit the target.
• The dot in the middle of the diagram (generally red in color) shows
the current projection.
• The trend is the build/turn rate of the last few survey stations and is
indicated in the diagram by a plus sign. The amount of build and turn
are noted below the diagram. If the trend point can not be shown on
the diagram, no plus sign appears and “out of range” appears as part
of the Trend message.
The boxes at the lower right corner are Bld and Trn. You can change them
by typing new values as described in “Typing in Values” on page 11-12.
After doing so, new coordinates for the projected point appear.
You can also change the projected coordinates by left-clicking within
the graphic area. On the rectangular grid shown, the build rate increases
to the top of the screen and the turn rate increases to the right. The origin
(0,0) represents a straight segment, with no build and no turn.
Move the mouse pointer to the desired point and left-click. The red dot
moves to mark the spot, the selected turn and build rates appear in their
respective boxes and the calculated projection coordinates appear in the
boxes beneath the graphic.
The Scale button is inactive at the Build/Turn Ideal Tool Run graphics,
because the system automatically scales the plot according to the data it
displays.

Chapter 12
This chapter explains how to gather data for reports and

plots. You may select proposals and surveys individually,
or in groups by specifying their token assignments. You
may focus on specific depths or depth ranges, as required.
The concepts of reference and object data are discussed.
Ec*Trak Directional permits you to prepare a report or plot of the structure

setup, wellpath design or survey data you have saved to the database. At
any time, you can prepare the report or plot, view it on the screen or send
it to a printer or plotter.
Your report or plot can include a wide variety of items from the database.
This chapter explains how to extract the information you wish to consider.
From the Main Menu, proceed as follows:
• To request a report, highlight Report and press [ENTER].
• To request a plot, highlight Plot and press [ENTER].
The menus you encounter when requesting a report are similar to those for
a plot, the major difference being the first menu (for more information, see
“Using the Report or Plot Type Menu” on page 12-4). A flow chart of the
Report system is shown in Figure 12-1. A flow chart showing the menus
involved in selecting data to plot is shown in Figure 12-2.
Note: When you choose Report or Plot from the Main Menu,
you extract data from the database and, depending on the
particulars of the report or plot, Ec*Trak Directional
may manipulate the data within the computer’s memory.
However, the database remains unchanged. The only way
to change the contents of the database is through the
Create/Edit option on the Main Menu.
User’s Guide 12-1

12-2
Report
plot existing existing existing existing Previewer
see page C-9 Interpolation/Range existing field structure slot wellpath screen
Specification screen operator
Wellpath see below
Inertial back calculation [F1] [F2], select [F2], select
Proposal Summary exit by token by token
Main Menu DDS/Lite transfer format
plot Structure existing token existing token
report Horizontal plane clearance
create/edit Minimum distance clearance
Travelling cylinder clearance
Summary clearance
MMS format for Directional Survey
existing existing existing
operator field structure
create/edit
[F1] see page C-2
exit/utilities Interpolation/Range existing existing existing existing existing
Specification screen [F1] operator field structure slot wellpath
Figure 12-1. Report System Flow Chart.

exit
[F2] [F2], select [F2], select object data

exit/utilities by token by token
see page C-12
existing token existing token
Confidential
Interpolation/Range existing existing existing existing existing API Date
Specification screen [F1] operator field structure slot wellpath #
exit
[F2], select [F2], select
by token by token
file name
Report Save As ...

Previewer Print number of copies
screen File menu Copy to Dos Diskette
Exit
select drive
format floppy?

Baker Hughes INTEQ
Ec*Trak Directional
User’s Guide
Interpolation/Range existing existing existing existing existing Main Graphics
Main Menu wellpath Specification screen [F1] operator field structure slot wellpath Menu
position uncertainty exit see pages C-10
plot
report report wellheads [F2], select [F2], select and C-11
Ec*Trak Directional
create/edit see page C-8 structure by token by token

field
comparison page plot existing token existing token
create/edit horizontal clearance
[F1] see page C-2
exit/utilities travelling cylinder
re-edit
Interpolation/Range existing existing existing
Specification screen [F1] operator field structure
see page C-12 [F2] exit
exit/utilities [F2], select

Interpolation/Range existing by token
Specification screen [F1] field
exit [F2], select
by token existing token
existing token
Interpolation/Range existing existing existing existing existing

exit
by token by token
Confidential
with
existing token existing token object
data
Cutoff Interpolation/Range existing existing existing existing existing

Menu Specification screen [F1] operator field structure slot wellpath
exit
[F2], select with
to the Main Graphics menu and how to select the data for the plot.
[F2], select object data
by token by token
existing
plot file existing token existing token
[F2] [F3]
show comments delete file
existing yes/no
comment
Figure 12-2. Plot System Flow Chart. This flow chart shows how to get from the Main Menu
12-3
Selecting Data for Reports and Plots Ec*Trak Directional
Using the Report or Plot Type Menu
Report Type Menu

When you select Report from the Main Menu, you see the Report Type
menu, an example of which is shown in Figure 12-3. For more information
about the individual report types, see Chapter 13.
Figure 12-3.
Report Type
Menu. This menu
appears when you
select Report from
the Main Menu.
After selecting a
report type at this
menu, the menus
you encounter are
the same as when
generating a plot.
Select a report type by highlighting it and pressing [ENTER]. Depending

on the selected report type, you move either to the Interpolation/Range
Specification screen, described on page 12-5, or to the Select Reference
Data screen, described on page 12-9.
Plot Type Menu

When you select Plot from the Main Menu, you see the Plot Type menu,
an example of which is shown in Figure 12-4. For more information about
the individual plot types, see Chapter 14. Select a plot type by highlighting
it and pressing [ENTER]. You advance to the Interpolation/Range
Specification screen, which is described on page 12-5.
The following menu items, however, represent selections where you do not
go directly to the Interpolation/Range Specification screen:
• Re-edit — The re-edit function allows you to view and change a
plot that you previously saved. When you select a saved plot, it
immediately appears on the screen. You do not have to go through
the menus to select object and reference data, as described later in
this chapter for other report and plot types. For more information
about saving and recalling plots, see “Save Plot” on page 14-16.

Ec*Trak Directional Selecting Data for Reports and Plots
Figure 12-4. Plot

Type Menu. This
menu appears
when you select
Plot from the Main
Menu. After
selecting a plot
type at this menu,
the menus you
encounter are the
same as when
generating a report,
with the exception
of horizontal
clearance, traveling
cylinder and re-edit.
• Horizontal Clearance and Travelling Cylinder — When you select

one of these clearance plots, which displays the distance between
wellpaths, the next menu you see is the Cutoff menu, shown in
Figure 12-5.
Figure 12-5.
Cutoff Menu.
This menu appears
after you select
the Horizontal
Clearance and
Travelling Cylinder
plots.
Highlight the desired cutoff distance and press [ENTER]. The

clearance plot uses this value to scale the graphic to be drawn. After
making a selection, the Interpolation/Range Specification screen,
described in the following section, appears.
Using the Interpolation/Range Specification Screen

After selecting a report or graph type, the Interpolation/Range Specifi-
cation screen, shown in Figure 12-6, appears. The screen is divided into
two sections, with the cursor starting out on the first line of the lower
section. Use the arrow keys to move among the data fields, if desired.
User’s Guide 12-5

Figure 12-6.
Interpolation/
Range
Specification
Screen. Select
certain options in
the upper part of
the screen. Specify
points or a range
of interest in the
lower part.
You can accept the default values, which is commonly done, or you may
change them if necessary. When finished with this screen, press [F1] to
move to the next screen.
The upper section of the screen is devoted to processing options for your
report or plot. The lower section allows you to specify a certain depth or
range of depths of interest to you. The options in the upper portion of the
screen are discussed in the following sections.
Sometimes an option at the top of the screen is listed as Not Supported.
That means that it is not an appropriate option for the type of report or
plot you specified. For example, the casing dimensions option is only
applicable for clearance reports; for all other reports Not Supported
appears next to it.
Ellipses
Ellipses of uncertainty represent the spatial extent of survey instrument
errors. Type I and press [ENTER] to activate this option. If active, ellipse
values are included on wellpath reports and plots if you selected a survey
tool at the Well Design or Survey Spreadsheet. Type N and press [ENTER]
to deactivate.
If you are plotting data, you can override this selection after the plot has
been drawn. For more information, see “Display Ellipses” on page 15-13.

Stations
This data field controls the display of station markers on plots or the listing
of survey stations on reports. Type I and press [ENTER] to include stations.
Type N and press [ENTER] to exclude them.
Coordinate/Depth Reference
You can override the coordinate or depth reference point for the report
or plot you are about to make. The selected reference point applies to
the current report or plot only and is not written back to the database.
Valid entries for these data fields are F, S and W — for field, structure and
wellhead reference points, respectively. Enter A to return to the default
setting, As Set Up.
Any coordinate changes must make sense physically. For example, if you
specified a field plot, Ec*Trak Directional does not allow you to specify
the wellhead or structure reference point. Similarly, using a wellhead
reference point with a structure plot (or report) is not permitted.
Walk
If you entered walk zones at the Well Design Spreadsheet (see page 9-9),
this option controls whether Ec*Trak Directional should apply the walk
calculation to the report or plot. Type I to apply walk and N to ignore walk.
Casing Dimensions
This option is valid only if you are making a clearance report (summary,
travelling cylinder, minimum distance or horizontal plane clearance). Type
I to include the casing dimensions in calculating the clearances, type N if
you do not wish to include them or type A to use the setting specified in the
Structure Edit Options menu1 (for more information, see page 3-11).

If you entered a surface position uncertainty (for more information,
see pages 3-11 and 3-19), you have the option of applying it to ellipse
calculations. Type I to include the surface position uncertainty, type N
if you do not wish to include it or type A to use the setting specified in
the Structure Edit Options menu.1
Clearance Plot Safety Factor

This option is used when making a clearance plot which includes ellipses
of uncertainty. The safety factor can be any decimal value from 1 to 5.
1. The applicable Structure Edit Options menu is the structure to which the reference
data belong. Reference data selection is discussed on page 12-9.
User’s Guide 12-7

The effect of applying the safety factor is to produce a larger error ellip-
soid, which appears on the plot as a semi-circle. The object is to make sure
that the reference well remains outside the semi-circle as you continue
drilling the well; thus providing greater assurance that the wellpaths do
not collide.
Number of Copies
Specify the number of copies of the report you want to generate when you
print it. If the report preview option is active, you can override this number
at the Report Previewer screen. For more information, see “Specifying the
Number of Copies” on page 17-9.
Interpolations and Depth Ranges

The lower portion of the Interpolation/Range Specification screen is the
area where you can tell Ec*Trak Directional to list stations at a specific
depth or range of depths, as well as interpolating points between actual
survey stations.
Each line represents a single depth or a depth range. Press [ENTER] after
entering a value in a data field. Proceed as follows:
• If you are interested in conditions at a particular station — or to
interpolate the conditions at a depth that is not an actual survey station
— enter its depth in the Start column. Indiv appears in the I/S/R
column.
• If you are interested in the stations between two depths, enter
their depths in the Start and Stop columns. Range appears in the
I/S/R column.
• If you are interested in interpolating stations a certain distance apart
between two depths, enter the appropriate values in the Start, Stop and
Step columns. Stepwise appears in the I/S/R column.
• In the first column, type T or M to indicate whether the depth is TVD
or MD.
• Ec*Trak Directional fills in the I/S/R column according to your input
on the rest of the line.
• The Comment column appears on the right. For an individual
interpolation, you may enter comment text to appear on the report
only (not on a plot) at the specified depth. This is in addition to any
comments you entered at the Well Design or Survey Spreadsheet.
Further information about the interpolations and depth ranges follows:
• You may specify up to ten interpolations or ranges.

• You may mix individual and stepwise interpolations as desired. The

entire report or plot is made, with the designated stations located.
• You may specify no more than one range. The report or plot is
restricted to that range only. Any individual or stepwise stations
must lie within the range or they are ignored.
• Press [F4] to delete the current line from the screen.
When you have completed entering data on the Interpolation/Range
Specification screen, press [F1] to advance to the Operator screen, as
described in the next section.
Specifying Reference Data

The next step after filling in the Interpolation/Range Specification screen
is to specify the reference data for your plot or report. Reference data, the
major data to be reported or plotted, are as follows:
• For most reports and plots, a wellpath — either a design or a survey
— is the reference data.
• For a structure report, a structure plot or a wellheads plot, a structure
is the reference data.
• For a field plot, a field is the reference data.
With one exception1, the process for selecting reference data begins with
the Operator menu, shown in Figure 12-7. All operators stored in the
database are displayed. Select one by highlighting it and pressing [ENTER].
Figure 12-7.
Operator Menu.
The process for
selecting items
to report or plot
is similar to the
process for select-
ing data to edit at
one of the spread-
sheets. This is
the first menu
in sequence, the
Operator menu.
1. The exception is the field plot, which skips the Operator menu and proceeds directly
to the Field menu.
User’s Guide 12-9

Note: Since the reference and object data items are most often
wellpaths, the manual discusses how to select wellpaths.
Keep in mind that, depending on the type of report or plot
you choose, the data items may be structures or fields.
Next, a menu listing the fields for that operator is shown. Select a field
in the same manner. Repeat the procedure to select the desired structure,
slot and wellpath. If a menu contains one item, Ec*Trak Directional
automatically selects it and advances to the next menu.
When you reach the lowest level of the data hierarchy applicable for
the graph type you selected (usually wellpath, but possibly structure
or field), you see an option to End Selection. The menu containing the
End Selection message is where you must choose the reference data.
An example of a Wellpath menu is shown in Figure 12-8.
Figure 12-8.
Wellpath Menu.
At the lowest level
of the hierarchy, an
option to end data
selection appears.
Highlight it and
press [ENTER]
to complete data
selection and
generate the
report or plot.
Notice that the Wellpath menu contains all the wellpath designs and
surveys stored in the database for the chosen slot. To select a reference
wellpath, highlight it and press [ENTER].
Note: Before you select reference data, you can return to

the Main Menu without generating a report or plot by
pressing [F1] several times. After you select reference
data, however, you are committed to generating a report
or plot.
The cursor jumps to the End Selection line at the bottom of the screen.
Press [ENTER] to complete your selection of reference data and to generate
the report or plot. One of the following takes place:

• The report is sent directly to the printer if the report preview option is
turned off. For more information about this option, see “Printing a
Report” on page 17-2.
• The report appears inside a new Report window if the report preview
option is turned on. For more information about the Report window,
see “Moving Around the Report Previewer Screen” on page 13-1.
• The plot appears inside a new Plot window. For more information
about the Main Graphics menu, see “Using the Main Graphics Menu”
on page 14-9.
As the report or plot is generated, the “Working ... Working ... Working”
message appears on the screen. When it leaves and the new report or plot
window appears, you can work in either the new window or the Ec*Trak
window. As a result, you can generate another report or plot window (for
comparison purposes) while the first one remains on the screen.
This procedure describes how to select one reference wellpath. You may
also select multiple reference data, if desired. See “Specifying Multiple
Reference and Object Data” on page 12-12 for more information.
The screen in Figure 12-8 shows End Selection at the bottom. Depending
on the type of report or plot you selected, some screens may have two such
choices at the bottom, as follows:
• End Selection With Object Data — If you have completed selecting
reference data and wish to select object data, highlight this choice and
press [ENTER]. Object data are discussed in the following section.
• End Selection Without Object Data — If you have completed
selecting reference data and do not wish to consider object data,
highlight this choice and press [ENTER]. The report or plot is
generated.
Specifying Object Data

Reference data are the “master data set” of a report or plot. Other data that
you want to compare to the reference data are referred to as object data.
Note: An example of how the reference data act as the “master

data set” is when the reference and object data have
different coordinate or depth reference points. The object
data are adjusted to the reference points of the reference
data for the current report or plot. These adjustments are
not written back to the database.
When you wish to extract both reference and object data, the order of data
selection is as follows:

1. Select the reference data.

2. When you finish with the reference data, choose End Selection
With Object Data.
3. Select the object data.
The selection of object data is optional for many report and plot types, but
is required for clearance reports and plots. That is because the purpose
of clearance calculations is to determine the distance from one wellpath
(the reference wellpath) to other wellpaths (the object wellpaths).
Ec*Trak Directional permits you to select object data from the field that
the reference data belong to. After you End Selection With Object Data,
a menu appears listing the structures belonging to the field.
To select a single object wellpath, proceed as follows:
1. Choose the desired structure, slot and wellpath as object data.
2. A choice for End Selection appears at the bottom of the final
menu. At that menu highlight the desired object data and press
[ENTER].
3. The cursor jumps to End Selection; press [ENTER].

4. The report or plot is generated using both the reference and
object data.
This procedure describes how to select one object wellpath. You may also
select multiple object data, if desired, as described in the following section.
Specifying Multiple Reference and Object Data

To select multiple reference data, proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired operator, field, structure and slot until you
reach the Wellpath menu, which has an End Selection message
at the bottom.
2. Highlight the desired wellpath and press [ENTER]. The cursor
jumps to an End Selection choice. You have specified the first
reference data item.
3. If the second data item is located on the same menu, highlight it
and press [ENTER]. If it is located on a different slot of the same
field, press [F1] to move up the data hierarchy. When you find the
desired slot or structure, select it and move down the hierarchy
again until you find the desired wellpath. Highlight it and press
[ENTER] to select it. You have specified the second reference
data item.

4. Continue this process until you have selected each individual

reference wellpath.
5. Highlight one of the End Selection choices and press [ENTER]
to complete the reference data.
You can select multiple object data in a similar manner. After selecting
End Selection With Object Data, choose as many individual object
wellpaths as needed. When finished, highlight End Selection and press
[ENTER] to generate the report or plot.
If you select one or more reference wellpaths, you are committed to

generating a report or plot. If you continue to press [F1], you reach the
highest permissible level in the data hierarchy for the type of report or
plot you are requesting. If you press [F1] again, you generate the report
or plot using the selected wellpath(s).
CAUTION
Although it is possible to select multiple reference
data from different fields, do not do it. If they
are set up with different coordinate systems,
meaningless answers result.
Note: To perform a clearance report or plot using different

reference wellpaths, designate one reference wellpath
and generate the report or plot. Then generate the report
or plot using the second reference wellpath, and so on.
Do not use multiple reference wellpaths for comparisons.
Selecting by Token
The previous section discussed how to select multiple individual wellpaths
to include in a report or plot. However, a more powerful technique is to
include a number of wellpaths by making a single selection.
The tokens, or identifiers, that you assigned to wellpath designs and
surveys are utilized in this process, which is called selection by token.
You can use tokens to select either reference or object data (or both).
Token selection is available when the notation [F2]:select by token appears
in the function key guide at the bottom of the screen, generally at the
menus displaying the existing structures and slots.
To display the screen shown in Figure 12-9, request a Wellpath plot.
At the menu listing the slots on the Manual Structure, press [F2]. As noted
in the heading, this menu displays in capital letters all the tokens stored
with wellpaths (designs and surveys) on the Manual Structure.

Figure 12-9.
Token Selection
Menu. The active
tokens for well-
paths on the chosen
structure are shown
in capital letters.
Those wellpaths
are included in the
report or graph,
unless you highlight
them and press
[ENTER] so they
appear in lower
case.
Similarly, if you press [F2] when the list of structures is displayed, the
token menu displays in capital letters all the tokens stored with wellpaths
on the Manual Field.
You can toggle each item on the token menu by highlighting it and
pressing [ENTER]. Tokens appearing in capital letters are to be included in
the report or plot. When each token is included or excluded according to
your wishes, press [F1] (or highlight Exit and press [ENTER]). All wellpaths
stored with the capitalized tokens are included on the report or plot.
After you make a selection by token, you may choose additional wellpaths,
either individually or by token. If you are selecting reference data and
require object data, you must go to the menu with End Selection With
Object Data. If the current menu does not have it, highlight any item and
press [ENTER]. Continue until you reach the menu with End Selection With
Object Data. Highlight it, press [ENTER] and select the desired object data.
The flexibility of Ec*Trak Directional’s data gathering system allows you
to combine selection by token with individual wellpath selection. For
example, you can generate a single plot which includes all the definitive
surveys on the structure, a proposed wellpath design from Slot #1 and
another proposal from Slot #3.
You can not change a wellpath token when generating a report or plot.
If you find that selection by token does not include a desired wellpath,
perform one of the following:
• Generate the report or plot a second time. After making the selection
by token, individually select the previously excluded wellpath.

• Return to the Well Design or Survey Spreadsheet and re-assign the

wellpath tokens. For more information, see pages 8-22 and 10-9.
After selecting all the desired data — reference only or reference and
object — generate the report or plot. Follow one of these procedures:
• Descend the data hierarchy until an End Selection choice appears.
Highlight it and press [ENTER].
• Ascend the data hierarchy by pressing [F1] until the report or plot
begins to generate, as signified by the “Working ... Working ...
Working” message.
What to do Next
If you generated a report, your options are as follows:
• If the report preview option is turned off, you immediately send the
report to the printer.
• If the report preview option is turned on, the report appears in a
separate window. You can view it, print it, export it or save it as
a file. See Chapter 13 for more information.
If you generated a plot, the plot appears in a new window. Plot types
are described in Chapter 14. Methods for changing the appearance of
plots are given in Chapters 15 and 16.

Chapter 13
Report System
This chapter summarizes the different types of reports you

can generate within Ec*Trak Directional and how to work
with the Report Previewer screen. The different report types
are discussed.
Moving Around the Report Previewer Screen

When you select data for a report and generate it, as described in
Chapter 12, one of the following occurs:
• If the report preview option is turned off, the report is sent directly to
the printer. For more information about the report previewer option,
see “Printing a Report” on page 17-2.
• If the report preview option is turned on, a new screen appears.
This Report Previewer screen, an example of which is shown in
Figure 13-1, contains the text of the report.
At the Report Previewer screen, you can look at the report you generated,
but you can not make any changes to it. If you do not like something about
the report, you must generate a new one.
The mouse is active within the Report Previewer screen. The easiest way to
view the entire report is to use the mouse within the scrolling areas below
and to the right of the screen. The scroll bars and scroll arrows on the
Report Previewer screen function as they do with many other software
programs, so you may be familiar with how they work. If not, proceed
as follows:
• To move the report by the smallest increment, position the mouse
on one of the scroll arrows and left-click. The report scrolls in the
indicated direction, as labelled in Figure 13-1. Vertically, it scrolls
one line per click; horizontally, one character per click.
User’s Guide 13-1

Report System Ec*Trak Directional
Figure 13-1.
Report Previewer
Screen. The
scrolling areas are Scroll up arrow
labelled, as is the
File menu. Scroll up
File menu one section
Vertical scroll bar
Scroll down
one section
Scroll down arrow

Scroll left arrow
Scroll
right arrow
Horizontal scroll bar
Scroll right
Left-click on an arrow and hold to move repeatedly in the same

direction. Release the mouse button to end the scrolling.
• To move the report several increments at a time, left-click in the area
outside the scroll bars. The report scrolls in the indicated direction.
Left-click and hold in the same area to move repeatedly in the same
direction. Release the mouse button to end the scrolling. The distance
covered by each mouse click depends on the size of the report.
• To move to any position in the report, move the mouse pointer to one
of the scroll bars. Left-click, hold the mouse button and slide the
scroll bar up/down or left/right. The report scrolls with the scroll
bar movement; release the mouse button to end the scrolling.
Notice that the position of the scroll bar within the scrolling control
area indicates the current position within the report, while the size of
the scroll bar indicates how much of the report appears on the screen.
For GRiD users who wish to move around reports using the keyboard,
the following function keys are active in the Report Previewer screen:
• [F1] — Move report up one line, same as Scroll up arrow.
• [F2] — Move report down one line, same as Scroll down arrow.
• [F3] — Move report up several lines. This is similar to left-clicking
above the scroll bar, but [F3] moves the report about twice as much.
[PgUp] is equivalent to [F3].
• [F4] — Move report down several lines. This is similar to left-clicking

below the scroll bar, but [F4] moves the report about twice as much.
[PgDn] is equivalent to [F4].

Ec*Trak Directional Report System
• [F5] — Go to the start of the report. [HOME] is equivalent to [F5].

• [F6] — Go to the end of the report. [END] is equivalent to [F6].
Using the File Menu

After you generate and view the report, Ec*Trak Directional allows you to
perform one or more of the following:
• Save the report to the hard disk. See “Printing a Report to a File” on
page 17-5.
• Print the report. See “Printing a Report” on page 17-2.
• Copy the report to a DOS-formatted diskette. See “Printing a Report
to a DOS Diskette” on page 17-6.
• Exit the report.
These options are found on the File menu. To access it, move the mouse
pointer to File in the upper left corner and left-click, or press [ALT-F]. The
File menu shown in Figure 13-2 appears.
Figure 13-2. File

Menu on Report Save As . . .
Print
Previewer Screen. Copy to Dos Diskette
Highlight and left- Exit
click to select.
To exit the report, highlight Exit on the File menu and left-click. The
Report window leaves the screen, and you return to the Ec*Trak window.
Report Format
Most of the reports that Ec*Trak Directional produces consist of three
parts, as follows:
• Cover page
• Body of report
• Supplemental information
The cover page gives information such as the name and location of the
field, structure and slot, the type of report, important dates and so on. The
cover page is similar for each type of wellpath report. Clearance report
cover pages contain an additional statement about the point of closest
approach for the wellpaths being compared. An example of a cover page
for a Minimum Distance Clearance Report is shown in Figure 13-3.
The body of the report begins on a new page. It is a tabular arrangement
of the information being compiled. The number of columns and their
User’s Guide 13-3

Figure 13-3.
Report Cover
Page. This is the
text on the cover
page of a Minimum
Distance Clearance
Report between
two wellpaths.
headings vary according to the type of report requested. An example of

part of the body of a Standard Wellpath Report is shown in Figure 13-4.
Figure 13-4.
Body of a Report.
This is a part of the
body of a Standard
Wellpath Report.
The supplemental information begins on a new page. It lists any additional

pertinent information, such as casing, targets, comments, tool error
models and so on. An example of supplemental information is shown
in Figure 13-5.
Information about the numbers in the report and their reference point
is stated at the bottom of each page after the cover page. An example

Figure 13-5.
Supplemental
Information. This
appears at the end
of the report and
includes informa-
tion about such
items as casings,
targets, comments
and survey tool
error models.
The particular aspects of each report type are described in the following
sections.
Figure 13-6.
Report Reference
Information. This
appears at the
bottom of report
pages.
Standard Wellpath Report

You can generate a standard wellpath report for either a design or a survey.
Ec*Trak Directional requests reference data only, no object data. The
column headings on the body of the report are as follows:
• MD
• Inclination
• Azimuth
• TVD
• Rectangular coordinates north/south and east/west
• Dogleg
• Vertical section
The following three report types are closely related to the standard
wellpath report:
• The Wellpath (Lat/Long) report adds two columns at the right which
list the latitude and longitude of each point along the wellpath.
• The Wellpath (Grid) report adds two columns at the right which list
the grid easting and northing of each point along the wellpath.
User’s Guide 13-5

• The Wellpath (Standard) Faxable report is printed in landscape mode

in larger type. This makes the report easier to read when sent by fax to
another location.
Wellpath (MD-Inc-Azi) Report

The wellpath (MD-inc-azi) report is not a true report. It produces a listing
of the MD, inclination and azimuth for each station along a wellpath design
or survey. No object data are permitted. Although you can print the report,
it does not have a cover page or any explanatory text. Its main purpose is to
be saved as a file for export to different software programs. It can also be
used to transfer data between surveys in Ec*Trak Directional by using the
Import survey function (see page 10-5).
Wellpath with Ellipses Report

The main purpose of the wellpath with ellipses report is to output the size
of the ellipse of uncertainty at each station. No object data are permitted.
The column headings on the body of the report are as follows:
• MD
• Inclination
• Azimuth
• TVD
• Ellipse major, minor and vertical semi axes (or full axes, depending
on your choice in Structure Setup)
• Minor azimuth, the direction to which the minor axis of the ellipse
is pointing
Wellpath (NPD Format) Report

The wellpath (NPD format) report produces an ASCII (readable text) file
in a format acceptable to the Norwegian Petroleum Directorate (NPD). The
report consists of a listing of the MD, TVD, inclination, azimuth, grid
northing, grid easting and dogleg. No object data are permitted. Although
you can print the report, it does not have a cover page or any explanatory
text.
Proposal Summary Report

The proposal summary report prints the highlights of the well designs, as
entered on the Well Design Spreadsheet. You can only select a proposal,

and no object data are permitted. The column headings on the body of the
report are as follows:
• MD
• Inclination
• Azimuth
• TVD
• Dogleg
• Vertical Section
• Description of each section
Horizontal Plane Clearance Report

The horizontal plane clearance report gives the distance, as determined
by the horizontal plane calculation method, between two wellpaths along
the MD of the reference wellpath. Object data are required. The column
headings on the body of the report are as follows:
• MD of reference and object wellpaths
• TVD of reference and object wellpaths
• Rectangular coordinates, north/south and east/west, of reference and
object wellpaths
• Horizontal bearing from reference to object wellpath
• Distance between wellpaths using the horizontal plane calculation
• Distance between wellpaths using the minimum distance calculation
Minimum Distance Clearance Report

The minimum distance clearance report gives the distance, as determined
by the minimum distance calculation method, between two wellpaths along
object wellpaths
• Horizontal bearing from reference to object wellpath
User’s Guide 13-7

• Distance between wellpaths using the travelling cylinder calculation
Travelling Cylinder Clearance Report

The travelling cylinder clearance report gives the distance, as determined
by the travelling cylinder calculation method, between two wellpaths along
object wellpaths
• Angle from highside of reference wellpath to object wellpath
• Distance between wellpaths using the travelling cylinder calculation
Summary Clearance Report

This one-page report consists of the usual cover page information plus the
point of closest approach of two wellpaths. Object data are required.
Structure Report
The structure report summarizes data you entered during Structure Setup.
The report contains information about slots on the structure and their
reference points. It also contains general information about the proposals
and surveys for each slot, including the name, internal storage number,
wellpath tied to and tokens for each path and identification of definitive
proposals and surveys.
Wellpath Reports in Postscript

Four wellpath reports take advantage of the capabilities of the Postscript
printer language. Before selecting one of them, you must have a Postscript
printer set up and enabled on your system. In addition, you can not send
a Postscript report to the Report Previewer screen; regardless of how the
report preview option is set, the report goes directly to the printer.
The four Postscript reports are as follows:
• standard wellpath report (Postscript)
• geodetic wellpath report (Postscript)
• UTM wellpath report (Postscript)

• offshore wellpath report (Postscript)

The standard wellpath report in Postscript has the same column headings
as the non-Postscript standard wellpath report. For more information,
see page 13-5.
The column headings for the body of the geodetic wellpath report are
as follows:
• MD
• TVD
• Inclination
• Azimuth
• Rectangular coordinates, north/south and east/west
• UTM grid coordinates, easting and northing
• Geodetic coordinates, latitude and longitude
The column headings for the body of the UTM wellpath coordinates report
are as follows:
• MD
• TVD
• Inclination
• Azimuth
• Grid easting and northing
• Dogleg
The column headings for the body of the offshore wellpath report are
as follows:
• MD
• Inclination
• Azimuth
• TVD
• Rectangular coordinates, north/south and east/west
• Build rate
• Turn rate
User’s Guide 13-9

Inertial Back Calculation Report

The inertial back calculation report is not a true report and is generated
only for surveys. No object data are permitted. Although you can print
the report, it does not have a cover page or any explanatory text. Its
main purpose is to be saved as a file for export to survey programs that
can only accept MD, inclination and direction as survey parameters.
An inertial survey tool gives the horizontal coordinates and TVD at
each survey station. The inertial back calculation works backward,
determining the MD, inclination and direction from the measured
horizontal coordinates and TVD.
MMS Format for Directional Survey Report
Note: This report is of interest only for wells drilled in the

United States.
The MMS format for directional survey report is not a true report and is
generated only for surveys. It produces a listing of the MD, azimuth and
inclination for each survey station, plus some header information. No
object data are permitted. Although you can print the report, it does not
have a cover page or any explanatory text. Its main purpose is to be saved
as a file for export to the Minerals Management Service, a United States
Government agency, so it can keep track of the wells drilled in that
country.
After you select the survey to report and End Selection, two additional
screens appear. The first asks for the 12-digit API Well Number. Type it in
and press [ENTER] when finished. The second asks for the date the survey
was conducted. Enter it in YYMMDD form, where MM is the month
number (01 = January, and so on). Press [ENTER] when finished.
DDS and DDS-Lite Transfer Format Reports

The DDS and DDS-Lite transfer format reports are not true reports. They
produce a listing for each station along a wellpath design or survey. No
object data are permitted. Although you can print the report, its main
purpose is to be saved as a file for export to the Drilling Database System
(DDS), and to DDS-Lite.

Chapter 14
Plot Types
This chapter summarizes the different kinds of plots you

can generate within Ec*Trak Directional and their default
placement. It describes what appears on the screen when the
plot is initially drawn. It also describes the Main Graphics
menu and its functions.
The discussion of plots in this manual is as follows:

• Chapter 12 describes procedures for selecting the data to plot.
• This chapter describes the default plot types, the elements in each
and their placement on the screen. It also introduces the functions
of the Main Graphics menu.
• Chapters 15 and 16 describe how to modify and customize a plot
to your particular needs after it appears on the Graphics screen.
The plots described in the following sections are the defaults set up
in Ec*Trak Directional. They are controlled by layout description files,
a series of ASCII (readable text) files which you can change according
to your needs. For more information, contact your Ec*Trak Directional
system administrator.
Wellpath Plot
An example of a default wellpath plot for a single reference wellpath
design is shown in Figure 14-1. It consists of the following elements
(or sub-plots), as labelled in the figure:
• Title — lists name of operator, field, location, structure and well.
• Horizontal (or Plan) View — shows a projection of the wellpath onto
a horizontal plane. The distance east or west is the horizontal axis, and
the distance north or south is the vertical axis.
User’s Guide 14-1

Plot Types Ec*Trak Directional
Figure 14-1.
Elements of a Title
Plot. A wellpath
plot for a design Main Graphics
Menu
is shown, with
its components
labelled. This
wellpath plot
appears on square Horizontal
(Plan) View
paper (33 ″ × 33 ″).
Plot Data
Vertical
(Section)
View
• Vertical (or Section) View — shows a projection of the wellpath onto

a vertical plane. The distance from the vertical section origin is the
horizontal axis, and the true vertical depth is the vertical axis.
• Plot Data — a block of text giving the company name, plot creator’s
name, plot date and reference information.
Notice that there are a number of wellpath plots listed on the Plot Type
menu. Each wellpath plot contains the same sub-plots; however, Ec*Trak
Directional scales and arranges them differently depending on the dimen-
sions of the page. For example, the wellpath plot shown in Figure 14-1 is
set up for a square piece of paper (33″ × 33″). Figure 14-2 shows the same
data plotted for a 33″ × 72″ sheet.
Structure Plot
There are three types of structure plots, horizontal, vertical and 3-D. The
horizontal plot is a plan view of the definitive proposals and surveys on the
structure. The distance east or west is the horizontal axis, and the distance
north or south is the vertical axis.
The vertical plot is a section view; the distance from the vertical section
origin is the horizontal axis, and the true vertical depth is the vertical axis.
On the 3-D plot, an example of which is shown in Figure 14-3, the x-axis is
the east-west distance, the y-axis is the north-south distance and the z-axis
is the TVD.

Ec*Trak Directional Plot Types
Figure 14-2.
Wellpath Plot on
33″ × 72″ Paper.
Compare with
Figure 14-1. Notice
how the same
sub-plots are
re-arranged to fit
on the different
page shape.
Field Plot
A sample default field plot for a single reference field is shown in
Figure 14-4. It consists of the following sub-plots:
• Title — lists name of operator, field and location.
• Horizontal View — shows all the definitive wellpaths (designs and
surveys) for the selected field.
Horizontal Clearance Plot

A sample default horizontal clearance plot for a single reference wellpath
and a single object wellpath is shown in Figure 14-5. It consists of the
following sub-plots:
• Horizontal Clearance — shows a graphical view of the horizontal
clearance report. The reference wellpath is at the center. The object
wellpath is represented by a line — a collection of points showing its
distance and direction from the reference wellpath at each station —
calculated using the horizontal clearance method.
User’s Guide 14-3

Figure 14-3. 3-D

Structure Plot.
A structure plot
shows all the
definitive wellpaths
for all the slots on
a structure. Shown
is a 3-D structure
plot. You can also
make a horizontal
structure plot (plan
view) or a vertical
structure plot
(section view).
Figure 14-4. Field

Plot. A field plot
shows all the
wellpaths from all
the structures in
a field belonging
to the indicated
operator.

The cutoff distance you specified when selecting this plot (see page 12-4)
determines the scale of the plot. If you selected an unlimited cutoff
distance, Ec*Trak Directional determines its own scale.
Figure 14-5.
Horizontal
Cylinder Plot.
The center of the
diagram represents
the reference
wellpath. The line
represents the
distance and
direction of the
object wellpath
from the reference.
Travelling Cylinder Plot

A sample default travelling cylinder plot for a single reference wellpath
and a single object wellpath is shown in Figure 14-6. It consists of the
following sub-plots:
• Travelling Cylinder — shows a graphical view of the travelling
cylinder clearance report. The reference wellpath is at the center.
The object wellpath is represented by a line — a collection of points
showing its distance and direction from the reference wellpath at each
station — calculated using the travelling cylinder method.
User’s Guide 14-5

Figure 14-6.
Travelling Cylinder
Plot. The travelling
cylinder plot is
similar to the
horizontal cylinder
plot.
The cutoff distance you specified when selecting this plot (see page 12-4)
determines the scale of the plot. If you selected an unlimited cutoff
distance, Ec*Trak Directional determines its own scale.
Wellheads Plot
A sample default wellheads plot for a single reference wellpath is shown
in Figure 14-7. It consists of the following sub-plots:
• Horizontal View— shows a close-up view under the structure of
its definitive wellpaths, both designs and surveys. This plot is also
known as a cellar deck plot. The plot scale is generally small in order
to show the horizontal spacing among the wellpaths.

Figure 14-7.
Wellheads Plot.
The wellheads plot
is also known as a
cellar deck plot. It
shows a close-up
view of the definitive
wellpaths on a
structure.
Comparison (MD/TVD) Page Plot

A sample default comparison MD page plot for a single reference wellpath
is shown in Figure 14-8. It consists of the following sub-plots:
Figure 14-8.
Comparison (MD)
Page Plot. This
consists of three
small plots: MD vs.
azimuth, inclination
and dogleg. TVD
plots use TVD as
the depth instead
of MD.

• MD vs. Azimuth — shows how the wellpath’s azimuth, on the
horizontal axis, changes with MD, on the vertical axis.
• MD vs. Inclination — shows how the wellpath’s inclination, on the
User’s Guide 14-7

• MD vs. Dogleg — shows how the wellpath’s dogleg, on the

If you wish to use TVD as your depth, choose Comparison (TVD) Page
Plot at the Plot Types menu. All depths on those plots refer to TVD instead
of MD.
Position Uncertainty vs. Depth Plot

A sample plot of the position uncertainty vs. depth for a single reference
wellpath is shown in Figure 14-9. It consists of the following sub-plots:
Figure 14-9.
Position
Uncertainty vs.
Depth Plot. These
two graphs show
how the lateral
(horizontal)
uncertainty varies
with MD and how
the vertical
uncertainty varies
with TVD. You
must have
assigned a tool
error model to the
survey or proposal
for these plots to
be meaningful.

• MD vs. Lateral Uncertainty — shows how the lateral (horizontal)
component of the ellipse of uncertainty varies with MD.
• TVD vs. Vertical Uncertainty — shows how the vertical component
of the ellipse of uncertainty varies with TVD.

Working on the Graphics Screen

The mouse is the primary tool for working on the graphics screen. The
general rules for using the mouse are as follows:
• To select an item from a menu, move the mouse pointer onto it. The
item is highlighted. Left-click to select it.
• In response to certain menu selections, you may specify one or more
elements or areas of the graph. Depending on what you need to
specify, either left-click to select, or left-click, hold, move the mouse
and release the button to define an area.
• To signify the termination of an operation or to advance to the next
menu without making a selection, right-click.
Specific mouse operations are discussed as they arise.
Additionally, it is sometimes necessary to use the keyboard. Two examples
are to specify a file name when saving a plot and to add text to a plot. All
keyboard input appears at the bottom of the graphics screen.
Using the Main Graphics Menu

The Main Graphics menu is shown in Figure 14-10. It appears in the upper
left corner of the graphics screen after Ec*Trak Directional finishes
drawing the plot. The following sections discuss each item in the menu.
Figure 14-10.
Main Graphics
Menu. To make a
selection, highlight
with the mouse
pointer and left-
click. To go to
the Exit menu,
right-click.
A flow chart showing the menus and options available at the Main
Graphics menu appears in Figure 14-11.
Sometimes, when viewing a plot, the Main Graphics menu in the upper left
corner sits on top of an item of interest. Follow these steps to view the
entire plot on the screen:
1. Highlight Zoom with the mouse and left-click to select it.
User’s Guide 14-9

Figure 14-11.
Main Graphics see page C-11
Menu Flow Chart. see page C-10

Main Graphics printer OK
Menu existing printer filename cancel
save to disk cancel
zoom send to printer/plotter
traverse cancel
reset printer OK
existing printer cancel
show/hide paper cancel
edit layout
detail layout
hard copy change paper existing
change paper cancel paper size
measure
Save plot
curvatures target TVD

click right distances origin
next reference
quit
cancel filename comment
2. Move the cross-hairs into a corner of the screen so they are out of
the way. View the screen.
3. Right-click the mouse to make the Main Graphics menu
reappear.
Zoom
The zoom function allows you to define a small rectangular area on the
screen, which Ec*Trak Directional enlarges for easier viewing. To zoom
in on an area, proceed as follows:
1. Highlight Zoom with the mouse and left-click to select it. The
Main Graphics menu leaves the screen.
2. The mouse cursor turns into a set of cross-hairs, as shown in
Figure 14-12. The intersection of the two lines denotes the
current mouse position.
3. Place the mouse at one corner of the rectangular area you wish to
enlarge. Left-click.
4. Move the mouse diagonally to the opposite corner. As you move
the mouse, a rectangle displays the area you are defining, as
shown in Figure 14-13(a).
5. Left-click to magnify. The Main Graphics menu re-appears,
and your screen resembles that shown in Figure 14-13(b).
During the procedure, you can back up a step by right-clicking. After
zooming in, you can further enlarge an image by repeating the zoom
operation.

Figure 14-12.
Cross-Hairs. This
is a wellpath plot
where the mouse
pointer appears as
a set of cross-hairs.
Zoom is one of the
functions where that
change occurs. cross-hairs
First point
Second point
Figure 14-13(a). Define Area to Magnify. Figure 14-13(b). Enlarged Area. Left-
After selecting zoom, left-click on the first click at the second point to complete the
point and move the mouse to the second zoom procedure. In this example, the
point. The rectangle indicates the area to horizontal view becomes easier to read.
be enlarged.
Traverse
Consider the zoomed portion of the vertical view shown in Figure 14-14.
After enlarging the graph, only part of it can be seen on the screen. How
can you view the unseen part?

Figure 14-14.
Zoomed Portion
of Vertical View.
Use the traverse
function to view the
wellpath portion
above what is
shown.
One method is to use the traverse function on the Main Graphics menu.
Proceed as follows:
1. Highlight Traverse on the Main Graphics menu and left-click.
The menu disappears and the cross-hairs appear.
2. Move the cross-hairs to a point in the upper part of the screen and
left-click. This is the first point, which is anchored to the graph.
3. Move the mouse to a point in the lower part of the screen; a line
is drawn as you move. When you reach the desired second point,
left-click. See Figure 14-15(a) for an example.
4. The visible portion of the graph changes, as shown in
Figure 14-15(b).
The way the traverse function works is that Ec*Trak Directional moves
the first point to the second point. Since the rest of the plot is anchored
to the first point, the graph moves too, so you see a different part of it.
The distance and angle between the two points determine how much the
graph moves, and in what direction. Practice using traverse to get a feel for
how it works.
Reset
The reset function restores a zoomed image to its original size. It also
redraws the screen, which is desirable when you are moving or deleting
objects on the screen. Highlight Reset and left-click to activate it.

First point
(anchored to
the graph)
Second point
Figure 14-15(a). Define Traverse. The Figure 14-15(b). View of Wellpath After
first point attaches to the graph. As you Traverse. A portion of the wellpath above
move the mouse to the second point, a that shown in Figure 14-15(a) appears.
line appears on the screen. Notice that the True Vertical Depth label on
the y-axis now appears near the bottom of
the screen.
Reset provides a second method for looking at another portion of a zoomed

plot (traverse was the first method). Proceed as follows:
1. Choose Reset to restore the plot to its original size.
2. Zoom in on a different section to magnify it.
Personal preference determines which method to use.
Show/Hide Paper
Show/Hide Paper is a toggle function which turns a grid on and off. To
activate the function, highlight Show/Hide Paper on the Main Graphics
menu and left-click. When the paper is showing, your screen resembles
Figure 14-16.
The dots represent a grid and indicate the extent of the sheet of paper
to which you are printing. The distance between marks is 1 inch or 2cm,
depending on your choice for units in Structure Setup. Anything located
outside the paper area does not appear on a printout.
Edit Layout
The Edit Layout option provides many capabilities for changing your plot.
Some of these are as follows:
• Add, move or delete sub-plots.

Figure 14-16.
Show Paper. The
extent of the page
is shown, as are
marks representing
every 1 in or 2cm on
the page. It is often
useful to turn on the
Show Paper option
when moving items
around on a plot.
Anything appearing
outside the page
boundary does not
appear on paper
when the graph is
sent to a printer
or plotter.
• Add database details such as casings, comments and ellipses of

uncertainty.
• Define and change axes and plot scale.
• Distinguish among multiple wellpaths by defining a color, line style
and thickness.
Edit Layout is discussed in more detail in Chapter 15.
Detail Edit
The Detail Edit option allows you to customize the plot in many ways,
some of which follow:
• Draw your own art objects such as arrows, lines and circles. Specify
line style, thickness and color.
• Add text and boxed text to the plot. Specify font, size and color for
new or existing text.
• Rotate objects at an angle.
Detail Edit is discussed in more detail in Chapter 16.

Hard Copy
To output the plot onto paper, highlight Hard Copy and left-click. For more
information, see “Printing/Plotting a Graph” on page 17-3 and “Printing a
Graph to a File” on page 17-7.
Change Paper
The Change Paper function allows you to change the size of the paper to
which you intend to print or plot. To activate, highlight Change Paper
and left-click. Ec*Trak Directional asks you to confirm your intention
because the change paper function removes all plots from the screen.
For more information, see “Changing Paper” on page 17-11.
Measure
The Measure function allows you to measure graphically distances
and curvatures within vertical and horizontal views. You may make
a measurement on a zoomed or unzoomed plot.
To make a measurement, highlight Measure and left-click. The extent
of the paper and that of any vertical or horizontal views are indicated by
rectangles. At the same time, a menu appears asking whether to measure
distance or curvature. Highlight and left-click the desired item.
To measure distances, proceed as follows:
1. From the Main Graphics menu, select Measure and Distances.
2. Establish a point to measure from by left-clicking anywhere
within the paper.
If you select a point within the vertical or horizontal view,
Ec*Trak Directional reports the sub-plot and the coordinates
from the sub-plot origin. This information appears in the lower
left corner of the screen.
If you select a point outside the vertical or horizontal view but
within the page limits, Ec*Trak Directional reports the distance
from the point to the lower left corner of the page.
If you select a point outside the paper, Ec*Trak Directional asks
you to try again.
3. After selecting the first point, left-click on any other point within
the page. Ec*Trak Directional displays the distance from the first
point as the horizontal distance (dX), the vertical distance (dY)
and the two-dimensional straight-line distance (2D).
4. Continue left-clicking to measure distances to other points.
When finished, right-click once to return to the selection menu

for distances or curvatures. This allows you to define a new first

point or to measure a curvature.
5. Right-click a second time to return to the Main Graphics menu.
To measure curvatures from the final station of a survey to selected points,
proceed as follows:
1. From the Main Graphics menu, select Measure and Curvatures.
2. Left-click on a target point. Ec*Trak Directional tells you the
rate of turn (left or right), the rate of build or drop and the dogleg
severity (D.L.S.) from the final station to the target point. See the
lower left corner of the screen.
If you specify the target point within a horizontal view sub-plot,
Ec*Trak Directional asks you to enter the TVD of the target
point. Within a vertical view, the target point is assumed to lie
on the plane of the vertical section.
3. Continue left-clicking to measure curvatures to other points.
When finished, right-click once to return to the selection menu
for distances or curvatures. Right-click a second time to return
to the Main Graphics menu.
Although you can measure curvatures to any point within the sub-plots, the
results are most meaningful when you specify a target point on a wellpath.
Save Plot
The Save Plot function saves the current plot to a disk file. Later, you can
recall the plot to the screen by choosing Re-Edit at the Plot Type menu.
Save Plot is generally used when you spend a lot of time and effort to
customize a plot. If you do not save it, your changes are lost.
To save a plot, proceed as follows:
1. Highlight Save Plot and left-click.
2. Type in a file name of less than ten characters. Your entry
appears in the lower left corner of the screen. Press
[BACKSPACE] to correct any typing errors. Press [ENTER]
when finished.
Note: Do not put spaces in the file name; if you do so, you are
unable to recall the plot.
3. Type in a comment, if desired, in the lower left corner of the

screen. Press [ENTER] when finished.
4. Press [ENTER] a second time to save the plot.

By default, plots are saved in the /u/ideas/ideas_data/savedir directory.

To recall a saved plot, proceed as follows:
1. From the Main Menu select Plot.
2. From the Plot Type menu select Re-Edit.
3. A menu of the saved plots appears. Before recalling a file you
can perform any of the following:
Show Comments — Highlight the desired file name and press
[F2] to
view the comments you entered when you saved the plot.
Delete File — If you no longer need a saved plot, you can delete
it by highlighting it and pressing [F3].
4. The last step in recalling the plot is to highlight the desired file
name and press [ENTER]. The plot appears in a separate window.
Leaving the Graphics Screen

To exit from the Graphics screen, right-click when the Main Graphics
menu is showing. When you do, the Exit Graphics menu shown in
Figure 14-17 appears in the upper left corner.
Figure 14-17. Exit

Graphics Menu.
Quit returns you
to the Main Menu.
Cancel returns you
to the Graphics
screen. Next
Reference displays
a plot with different
reference data, if
you specified any.
Proceed as follows:
• To return to the plot, either right-click or highlight Cancel and left-
click.
• If you specified multiple reference data (see “Specifying Multiple
Reference and Object Data” on page 12-12), and all data do not
appear on the plot, highlight Next Reference and left-click to see
a plot of the next reference data.
An example is a field plot where you select more than one reference
field. The first field is plotted; use Next Reference to access the plot
of the second field, and so on.

If you select Next Reference1 and there are no further reference data
to view, you return to the Main Menu.
• To leave the plot entirely and return to the Main Menu, highlight Quit
and left-click.
1. When plotting at the Well Design, Survey and Rigsite Survey Spreadsheets, the term
“Spreadsheet” appears on this menu instead of Next Reference. For more information
about the Spreadsheet function, see page 9-25.

Chapter 15
Layout Editor
This is the first of two chapters devoted to modifying a plot.

This chapter discusses the Edit Layout option, which allows
you to add information from the database to a plot and to
customize the appearance of such information. Edit Layout
works with whole sub-plots.

• Chapter 12 describes how to select the data to plot.
• Chapter 14 describes the default plot types, the elements in each
on the Main Graphics menu.
• This chapter describes how to change the appearance and position of
those items on a plot which are extracted from the database. These
functions are found under Edit Layout on the Main Graphics menu.
• Chapter 16 describes how to add your own art objects and text
to a plot. These functions are found under Detail Edit on the Main
Graphics menu.
Note: The recommended order of work is first to perform

the layout editing functions described in this chapter.
Then add your own art objects and text, as described
in Chapter 16.
Ec*Trak Directional generates a default plot of the data you specify. It

uses a template stored in a layout description file (for more information,
see your Ec*Trak Directional system administrator). After a plot appears
on the screen, the program provides great flexibility for you to modify it
to fit your needs.
User’s Guide 15-1

Layout Editor Ec*Trak Directional
The flow chart on page C-11 shows the menus you encounter under Edit
Layout on the Main Graphics menu. The capabilities described in this
chapter are as follows:
• Moving an existing sub-plot.
• Deleting an existing sub-plot.
• Adding a new sub-plot.
• Scaling a sub-plot.
• Specifying the depth range of a sub-plot.
• Positioning the axes for a sub-plot.
• Adding annotations to a sub-plot. Annotations are items such
as casing symbols, ellipses of uncertainty, targets, comments
and slot circles.
• Specifying the color, line style and line width of individual wellpaths.
As you make these changes, Ec*Trak Directional often prompts you
at the bottom of the screen. Consult that area to guide you through the
modification process.
During most operations, you can right-click to back up a step. By
continuing to right-click, you eventually return to the Main Graphics
menu, with no changes made to the plot.
Note: The modifications described in this chapter only affect

the display of data. Nothing you do at the Graphics
screen changes the data stored in the database.

Ec*Trak Directional Layout Editor
Moving/Deleting a Sub-Plot
Moving a Sub-Plot
You can position a sub-plot anywhere you wish on the plot. Remember,
however, that any part of the sub-plot which appears outside the paper
boundary is not printed. An example of moving sub-plots follows.
Consider the plot shown in Figure 15-1(a), a wellpath plot (33 × 33) of
a design. Notice that the plot data box in the lower right corner is very
close to the target in the vertical view.
Figure 15-1(a). Original Plot. Notice Figure 15-1(b). Modified Plot. The plot
that the plot data box is too close to the data box is moved toward the center of the
vertical view. plot.
One way to improve the appearance is to move the plot data box to a more
open area of the plot. Follow these steps:
1. Left-click on Show/Hide Paper to show the extent of the paper.
This acts as a guide to keep the sub-plots on the page.
2. Left-click on Edit Layout. Ec*Trak Directional instructs you, at
the bottom of the screen, to select a sub-plot to edit.
3. Left-click inside the plot data box to select it as the sub-plot you
want to do something with. Ec*Trak Directional informs you, at
the bottom of the screen, which sub-plot you selected.
Sometimes sub-plots may overlap, making it difficult to select
the desired sub-plot. If you select the wrong sub-plot, right-click
and then left-click on the correct sub-plot. You may have to
User’s Guide 15-3

temporarily move a sub-plot out of the way to access the desired

sub-plot.
4. The Move/Delete/Modify menu appears. To move the plot data,
left-click on Move.
5. A rectangle representing the size of the plot data sub-plot
appears. Position it where desired on the plot.
Note: Right-click now to cancel the Move operation.
6. Left-click. The plot data box is redrawn in its new position, but is
still visible in its previous position.
7. To remove the grid, left-click on Show/Hide Paper. To clean up
the display so that you can no longer see the plot data box in its
previous position, left-click on Reset.
8. When finished, your screen should resemble Figure 15-1(b).
When you move a sub-plot, Ec*Trak Directional positions it at the nearest
whole centimeter or inch mark, so that borders and axes lie on the grid
lines of plotter paper.
Deleting a Sub-Plot
You can delete any sub-plot from the screen. Follow these steps:
1. Left-click on Edit Layout.
2. Left-click inside the sub-plot you wish to edit. Your choice
appears at the bottom of the screen.
3. The Move/Delete/Modify menu appears. Left-click on Delete.
4. A confirmation menu appears. To delete the sub-plot, left-click
on Delete; the sub-plot is erased. If you do not want to delete the
chosen sub-plot, left-click on Cancel.
5. You may need to left-click on Reset on the Main Graphics menu
to remove the sub-plot from the screen or to clean up the display.
If you delete a sub-plot in error, you can later restore it to the plot. See
“Specifying a Sub-Plot to Add” on page 15-5.

Modifying/Adding a Sub-Plot
Once you specify the existing sub-plot to modify or the new sub-plot to
add, your options are the same. The first step is to specify the sub-plot.
Specifying an Existing Sub-Plot to Modify

To change a sub-plot which already appears on the plot, follow these steps:
2. Left-click on the sub-plot you want to edit. Your choice appears
at the bottom of the screen.
3. The Move/Delete/Modify menu appears. Left-click on Modify.
4. The sub-plot leaves the screen and the mouse pointer becomes
a set of cross-hairs.
You are ready to modify the sub-plot. For more information, see “Sizing
and Positioning a Sub-Plot” on page 15-7.
Specifying a Sub-Plot to Add

Any sub-plot that you add refers to data you specified before entering the
plot; you can not access any previously unspecified data. To add a sub-plot
to the graph, follow these steps:
2. Right-click to add a new sub-plot.
Note: In the prompts which Ec*Trak Directional displays at the

bottom of the screen, select means left-click and break
means right-click.
3. A list of possible sub-plots, shown in Figure 15-2, appears.

Left-click on the one you want to add.
Figure 15-2. Add

a Sub-Plot. The
first five choices
are graphs; the last
five choices are
text boxes. An
additional menu of
sub-plots appears
beneath the survey
and ellipse analysis
plots.
User’s Guide 15-5

4. The mouse pointer becomes a set of cross-hairs. You are ready to

customize the new sub-plot. For more information, see “Sizing
and Positioning a Sub-Plot” on page 15-7.
A description of each of the sub-plots you can add follows:
• Vertical View/Plan View — These graphs show the projection of
the wellpath onto the vertical or horizontal plane; see page 14-1.
• 3-D View — This graph shows the selected wellpath(s) in three
dimensions, north/south, east/west and TVD. For more information,
see page 14-2.
• Survey Analysis Plots — When you make this selection, a secondary
menu appears, showing seven survey analysis plots. Six of these are
the sub-plots which appear on the comparison (MD/TVD) page plots
discussed on page 14-7; MD vs. toolface is the new plot. The seven
plots are:
• MD vs. azimuth
• MD vs. inclination
• MD vs. dogleg
• MD vs. toolface
• TVD vs. azimuth
• TVD vs. inclination
• TVD vs. dogleg
• Ellipse Analysis Plots — When you make this selection, a secondary
menu appears, showing the six ellipse analysis plots. These sub-plots
do not appear on any of the default plots described in Chapter 14.
Ellipse analysis plots give a quick view of the results of using
different survey programs on the same wellbore and help display
the alternatives and their accuracies. The six plots are:
• MD vs. lateral errors. MD is plotted along the vertical axis; radial
lateral uncertainty is plotted along the horizontal axis.
• MD vs. along hole errors. MD is plotted along the vertical axis;
radial along hole uncertainty is plotted along the horizontal axis.
• MD vs. vertical errors. MD is plotted along the vertical axis;
radial vertical uncertainty is plotted along the horizontal axis.
• TVD vs. lateral errors.
• TVD vs. along hole errors.
• TVD vs. vertical errors.

• Title/Plot Data — These are boxes containing text extracted from the
database. They are described on pages 14-1 through 14-7. Title and
plot data boxes can appear on plots of design or survey data.
• Well Data — This sub-plot does not appear on any of the default plots
described in Chapter 14. It is a text box which lists the slot name, well
name, wellpath name and ID number of the design or survey. It can
appear on plots of design or survey data.
• Target Details — This sub-plot does not appear on any of the default
plots described in Chapter 14. It is a text box which lists the MD,
TVD and local coordinates of the target(s), the inclination and
direction of the wellpath at the target, the target name and its position.
Target Details appears on the menu only when a wellpath design is
plotted; it does not appear for survey data.
• Profile Data — This sub-plot does not appear on any of the default
plots described in Chapter 14. It is a text box which lists the MD,
inclination, direction, TVD, rectangular coordinates north and east
and the dogleg for each station on the Well Design Spreadsheet.
Profile Data appears on the menu only when a wellpath design is
plotted; it does not appear for survey data.
Sizing and Positioning a Sub-Plot

You can make a sub-plot any size on the page you desire. As you size
a sub-plot, you can also position it where desired. Follow these steps:
1. If you are viewing a zoomed area, left-click on Reset to see
the entire plot.
3. Left-click on an existing sub-plot and on Modify, or add a
new sub-plot.
4. The mouse pointer becomes a set of cross-hairs.
To modify an existing graphic sub-plot without moving or
resizing it, right-click and skip to the Modify menu, which
appears in Figure 15-4 on page 15-9.
5. Position the cross-hairs where you want one corner of the
sub-plot to appear and left-click.
6. Move the cross-hairs to the opposite corner. A rectangle defines
the size and position of the sub-plot.
Note: To cancel the sizing operation, right-click before Step 7.
User’s Guide 15-7

7. Left-click.
If the sub-plot is a text box — that is, title data, plot data, well
data, target details or profile data — it is drawn on the screen.
If the sub-plot is a graph, the Modify menu appears, as shown
in Figure 15-4 on page 15-9. It displays the changes you can
make to a graph.
The manual has described all the Edit Layout operations for text sub-plots;
they can only be sized, positioned, deleted and added. The preceding
material applies to both text and graphic sub-plots. The remainder of
the chapter, however, applies only to graphic sub-plots. The flow chart in
Figure 15-3 shows the menus encountered thus far under the Edit Layout
option on the Main Graphics menu.
Figure 15-3. Flow

Chart of Basic Edit Main Graphics
Menu
Layout Functions. zoom
traverse reposition
reset
show/hide paper delete
edit layout select move cancel
subplot delete Change annotations
detail edit Set depth range
hard copy modify draw box for
new subplot Set section data
change paper Dash all proposals
measure click
right Select axes
Save plot set line attributes
USE OBJECT DATA
Set view vector & shadows
vertical view md/azimuth

plan view md/inclination
3-D view md/dogleg
survey analysis plots md/toolface
ellipse analysis plots tvd/azimuth
title tvd/inclination
plot data tvd/dogleg
well data
target details
profile data md/lateral errors
md/along hole errors
md/vertical errors
tvd/lateral errors
tvd/along hole errors
tvd/vertical errors
draw box for Main Graphics

new subplot Menu
Using the Modify Menu

The items on the Modify menu, shown in Figure 15-4, are all optional; you
can perform all, some or none of these operations. Proceed as follows:
• To add or delete the annotations on a graphic sub-plot, read the
next section.
• To set the depth range for graphing a sub-plot, go to page 15-14.
• To set the vertical section data for a vertical view sub-plot, go to
page 15-16.

Figure 15-4.
Modify Menu.
When you modify
an existing graphic
sub-plot or add a
new graphic sub-
plot, these are
the changes you
can make.
• To show proposal plots using dashed lines instead of solid, go to

page 15-17.
• To select the position of a sub-plot’s axes, go to page 15-17.
• To set line attributes for a wellpath on a sub-plot, go to page 15-18.
• To include or exclude object data on a sub-plot, go to page 15-21.
• To set the view vector and shadows for a 3-D plot, go to page 15-21.
• If you do not need to perform any of these tasks, right-click to
proceed. Go to page 15-23.
Note: None of the changes appears immediately on the screen.
Changing Sub-Plot Annotations

Change annotations to add data to or delete them from a graphic sub-plot.
Annotations are data associated with the plot that you can overlay onto
the graph. The flow chart in Figure 15-5 shows the menus you encounter
when you change annotations.
Figure 15-5.
Change CASING CIRCLES
cancel
Annotations Flow
Chart. Flow chart Change annotations
Set depth range
casings symbols
slot circles regular TVDs start
begins at the Modify Set section data
Dash all proposals
comments
general md
regular MDs stop accept
specific TVD interval
menu. Select axes
set line attributes
general tvd
local md/tvd
specific MD reject
USE OBJECT DATA inclinations

Set view vector & shadows station markers TVD (MD) for interpolation
display targets
display ellipses UNCERTAINTY ELLIPSES
cancel
From the Modify menu, highlight Change Annotations and left-click.

The Change Annotations menu, shown in Figure 15-6, appears.
The items on the Change Annotations menu toggle on and off. Items to
be included on the graph are capitalized, while those not included appear
in lower case letters.
User’s Guide 15-9

Figure 15-6.
Change
Annotations
Menu. You can
toggle any of these
items on or off. In
addition, if both
Casing Symbols
and Slot Circles
are turned on for
a horizontal view,
casing circles are
displayed.
Initially, some of the annotations may appear in capital letters. These items
already appear in the sub-plot and are controlled in the layout description
file for the default plot type; for more information, see your Ec*Trak
Directional system administrator.
When you finish specifying the annotations to change, right-click at the
Change Annotations menu to return to the Modify menu in Figure 15-4.
A description of each annotation follows.
Casing Symbols
You can display casing shoe symbols and the casing name at casing points
on the vertical view of a wellpath. An example of a casing symbol and
name follows, with the wellpath running through the middle.
Slot Circles
You can display slot symbols at each slot position on a horizontal view.
A slot symbol is normally a circle whose diameter is the shallowest casing
string. If the circle is too small to plot, or if there are no casing strings on
the slot, a crossed circle is plotted instead. Examples of a slot circle and a
crossed circle follow.
slot circle crossed circle

Casing Circles
If you specify both casing symbols and slot circles, casing circles are
generated on a horizontal view sub-plot where casing data are known.
If one of the options is toggled on and you left-click on the other, you
encounter a confirmation menu, whose options are Casing Circles and
Cancel. The reason for confirmation is the considerable computation
time required to produce casing circles.
Click on Casing Circles to confirm that you want them. They are not
generated if the inclination is greater than 20°, nor if their printed or plotted
size would be smaller than 4mm (0.2 in). Therefore, you generally must
use a small scale factor, such as 1=1 or 1=5, to see them; you may have
to experiment to find the right scale factor. For more information about
scaling a sub-plot, see “Select Scale” on page 15-26. An example of casing
circles follows.
Comments
If Comments is on, the comments that you entered in a spreadsheet are
printed at the depth you specified. An example of a comment next to a
wellpath follows.
General MD and General TVD

Toggle one of these on to display the MD or TVD interpolations that
you specified at the Interpolation/Range Specification screen. For more
information, see “Interpolations and Depth Ranges” on page 12-8.
Local MD/TVD
This option allows you to display specific depth interpolations on the
selected sub-plot. If you left-click on Local MD/TVD, the menu shown
in Figure 15-7 appears.
To designate a single MD or TVD value to note on the plot, proceed as
follows:

Figure 15-7. Local

MD/TVD Menu.
Regular TVD/MDs
display at a distance
interval. Specific
TVD/MDs allow
you to pinpoint
individual depths.
1. Left-click on Specific MD or Specific TVD.

2. At the prompt at the bottom of the screen, type in the MD or
TVD value of interest and press [ENTER].
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until you have specified all the depths.
To specify a set of MD or TVD values at a certain distance apart, proceed
as follows:
1. Left-click on Regular MDs or Regular TVDs.
2. Enter the starting depth at the bottom of the screen, followed by
[ENTER]. You can type an S (or s) to denote the surface.
3. Enter the ending depth at the bottom of the screen, followed by

[ENTER]. You can type a T (or t) to denote total depth.
4. Enter the desired interval between depth indicators, followed by

[ENTER].
5. Ec*Trak Directional summarizes your depth input and offers

a confirmation menu. Left-click on Accept or Reject to return
to the MD/TVD menu shown in Figure 15-7.
After you specify all the depths of interest, right-click to return to the
Change Annotations menu.
Further information about specifying depth interpolations follow:
• You can mix regular and specific depth interpolations.
• You can mix MDs with TVDs, but the depths are presented on the
plot as numbers only. If you mix them, you must later add text to
distinguish one depth from the other. For more information about
adding your own text to a plot, see page 16-4.
• After you specify depths, Local MD/TVD appears in capital letters on
the Change Annotations menu. To change the depths again, left-click
twice on Local MD/TVD.
However, this removes the previously specified depths. This makes
it impossible to add or delete an existing depth specification. Instead,
each time you must specify all the depths to appear on the plot.

Inclinations
Left-click on Inclinations to display inclination values in the build and drop
sections of the wellpath. Inclinations are only noted on the vertical view of
a wellpath design. If Inclinations is on, Ec*Trak Directional also displays
certain system-generated comments, such as the End of Build, which
appears with the inclination values in the following figure.
Inclination annotations are automatically offset from the wellpath, taking

inclination into account. Ec*Trak Directional prevents overwriting by
omitting any annotation points that would hide others.
Station Markers
Station markers are small dots along a wellpath designating a survey or
design station. When displayed, they allow you to make notations about
stations of interest. When not displayed, the wellpath curve is somewhat
smoother.
Display Targets
This option causes Ec*Trak Directional to display the targets for a wellpath
design. Targets are drawn to scale and in the shape seen according to the
selected view (horizontal or vertical, at the specified vertical section
plane). Target names are also presented. The following shows an example
of a circular target with the wellpath passing through its center.
Display Ellipses
This option draws ellipses of uncertainty calculated using the survey tool
error model(s) you specified for the wellpath. Like targets, ellipses of
uncertainty are drawn to scale according to the selected view. Station

markers must be on for the ellipses to be drawn. An example of ellipses

of uncertainty drawn around a wellpath is shown in the following figure.
Because the computations may require a lot of time, you encounter a

confirmation menu, whose options are Uncertainty Ellipses and Cancel.
Other Wellpath Symbols

Although these are not generated by annotations, there are other symbols
that appear on graphs. Occasionally, a sub-plot is scaled such that the
wellpath continues past the borders of the sub-plot. The following symbols
indicate such a situation.
The following symbol denotes the end of a wellpath.
Setting the Depth Range for a Sub-Plot

The second item on the Modify menu is Set Depth Range. It is used to
restrict the display of a design or survey sub-plot to a certain depth range,
either MD or TVD. It works the same as when you specify a range of
depths at the Interpolation/Range Specification screen (for more infor-
mation, see page 12-8).
The flow chart in Figure 15-8 shows the menus you encounter when you
set the depth range.
To set the depth range for a sub-plot, proceed as follows:
1. At the Modify menu, left-click on Set Depth Range.

Figure 15-8. Set

Depth Range Flow Change annotations md range
Set depth range start MD (TVD)
Chart. Flow chart Set section data
tvd range
end MD (TVD) accept
reject
Dash all proposals
begins at the Modify Select axes
set line attributes
menu. USE OBJECT DATA
2. The next menu asks whether you are interested in an MD or a

TVD range. Left-click on the appropriate depth.
3. Type in the starting depth at the bottom of the screen, followed
by [ENTER]. Type S (or s) to denote the surface.
4. Type in the ending depth, followed by [ENTER]. Type T (or t)
to denote total depth.
5. Ec*Trak Directional summarizes your depth input and offers
a confirmation menu. Left-click on Accept or Reject to return
to the Modify menu.
Figure 15-9(a) shows a wellpath plot for a survey from the surface to a
total depth of 2700m. If you change the depth range of the horizontal view
to 1000m to 2000m TVD, the redrawn plot resembles Figure 15-9(b).
Figure 15-9(a). Wellpath Plot. Depth Figure 15-9(b). Wellpath Plot After
range is from surface to total depth. Editing. The depth range was changed to
1000 – 2000m for the horizontal view on the
right. Notice that its wellpath is now shorter.
Further information about setting the depth range for a sub-plot follows:
• You can set a depth range for a horizontal view, if desired.

• You can set different depth ranges for different sub-plots on the
same plot.
• If you set a depth range at the Interpolation/Range Specification
screen (for example, 1000m to 2000m), you can specify a depth
outside that range by using the Set Depth Range function (for
example, surface to 2500m or 500m to total depth, and so on).
Setting Vertical Section Data

The third item on the Modify menu is Set Section Data. It allows you to
change the origin and plane of the vertical section, so you can vary the
appearance of the vertical view of a wellpath. It works the same way as
specifying vertical section data at the Well Design, Survey or Rigsite
Spreadsheet.
To set the vertical section data for a vertical view sub-plot, proceed as
follows:
1. At the Modify menu, left-click on Set Section Data.
2. Ec*Trak Directional reports the current vertical section data at
the bottom of the screen, and the menu shown in Figure 15-10
appears.
Figure 15-10.
Vertical Section
Data Menu.
3. Left-click one of the menu items as follows:

• Set to Default — If you had previously changed the section
data and wish to return to the original values, left-click on
Set to Default. The values at the bottom of the screen
change to the default data, and the menu shown in
Figure 15-10 remains on the screen.
• Enter New Value — To change the section data, left-click
on Enter New Value. Ec*Trak Directional prompts you to
type in the section plane and the coordinates of the vertical
section reference point north and east of the reference point
you specified for the wellpath being plotted.
Press [ENTER] after typing in each of the three values. After the
third one, the program summarizes your input at the bottom of
the screen, while the menu shown in Figure 15-10 remains on
the screen.

4. When you are satisfied with the vertical section data, left-click
on Accept to apply them to the sub-plot. You return to the
Modify menu.
Dashing All Proposals

You can have all the proposals on the plot appear as dashed lines, while
survey lines remain solid. This can help distinguish proposals from surveys
when viewing them on a monochrome monitor or printing/plotting to a
black-and-white output device.
To have all the proposals appear as dashed lines, from the Modify menu
left-click on Dash All Proposals to make it appear in capital letters. To
have the proposals appear as solid lines, left-click on Dash All Proposals
to make it appear in lower case letters.
Select Axes
You have control over the positioning of axes for the sub-plot, as follows:
• You can position the vertical axis on the left side, the right side, both
sides or neither side of a sub-plot.
• You can position the horizontal axis on the top, the bottom, on both
top and bottom or neither top nor bottom.
• You can not exchange the vertical and horizontal axes.
To specify the positioning of axes, proceed as follows:
1. At the Modify menu, left-click on Select Axes.
2. Look at the rectangle which defines the extent of the sub-plot.
Lines inside the rectangle represent the position of the axes.
An example is shown in Figure 15-11.
3. To toggle an axis on or off, left-click on the side of the rectangle.
Left-click in a corner to toggle the axes on both sides of the
corner.
4. When you have properly placed the axes, right-click to return to
the Modify menu.
Some of the combinations of axis displays are shown in Figure 15-12.
Initially, the axis setup is controlled in the layout description file for the
default plot type; for more information, see your Ec*Trak Directional
system administrator.

Figure 15-11.
Designation of
Axes. You can
have a sub-plot’s
axes appear on
no horizontal
one side, on both axis on top no vertical axis
sides or on neither on right side
side of the plot.
Left-click along the vertical axis appears
appropriate side, on left side
or in the corner,
to toggle the axis
horizontal axis
display on and appears on bottom
off. You can not
exchange the
horizontal and
vertical axes.
Figure 15-12.
Example of Axis
Displays. The
outside rectangle Axes top and
represents the area No Axes bottom, left
of the sub-plot. The and right
inside lines denote
the sides on
which axes and
their labels are
to appear.
Vertical axes
Vertical axis on
on both sides;
right side only;
horizontal axis
no horizontal axis.
on bottom only.
Setting Line Attributes

You have control over the appearance of each wellpath line on a sub-plot.
The program is set up to display reference wellpaths, designs and surveys
in a different manner. These default values are as follows:
• On a color monitor, reference wellpaths are white, surveys are red and
proposals are green.

• On a monochrome monitor, reference wellpaths are thick, surveys are

fine and proposals are dashed.
You can use the Set Line Attributes option to change the display
of wellpaths for a selected sub-plot. The flow chart in Figure 15-13
shows the menus you encounter when you set the line attributes.
Figure 15-13. Set

Line Attributes white
RED
Flow Chart. Flow Change annotations
Set depth range green
SOLID blue
chart starts at the Set section data
Dash all proposals
dashed yellow
Set Color purple
Modify menu. Select axes
set line attributes
Set Line Style cyan
Set Line Width black
USE OBJECT DATA Select Wellpaths
FINE
medium
thick
very thick
wellpath ID
The procedure for setting line attributes requires that you know the ID
number of the wellpath(s) to which the attributes should apply.
What is a wellpath ID number?
It is an internal number that Ec*Trak Directional assigns to each
wellpath.
How can you determine the wellpath ID number?
The easiest way is to add a well data sub-plot to the graph and position
it in an empty area (for more information, see page 15-5). Zoom in to
read the information; it should resemble the well data sub-plot shown
in Figure 15-14.
Figure 15-14. Well

Data Sub-Plot.
The wellpath ID
number for each
plotted wellpath
appears in the first
column.
wellpath ID numbers
The first column gives the wellpath ID numbers; in Figure 15-14

they are p17, s11 and so on. P stands for proposal (wellpath design),
and S stands for survey.
After obtaining the needed information from the well data sub-plot,
you may delete it from the plot. Remember to unzoom the plot before
you begin setting the line attributes.

To change the line attributes for a sub-plot, proceed as follows:

1. At the Modify menu, left-click on Set Line Attributes.
2. The Line Attributes menu, shown in Figure 15-15, appears. You
can set the characteristics of the wellpath lines by left-clicking on
any of the first three items.
Figure 15-15. Line

Attributes Menu.
You can set three
attributes for
wellpath lines.
Then apply the
attributes to the
specified wellpath.
• To change the color, left-click on Set Color. A menu lists

the eight possible colors: white, red, green, blue, yellow,
purple, cyan (light blue) and black. Left-click on the desired
color; you also return to the Line Attributes menu.
• To change the line style, left-click on Set Line Style. A
menu lists the two line styles, solid and dashed. Left-click
on the desired style; you also return to the Line Attributes
menu.
• To change the width of the line, left-click on Set Line
Width. A menu lists the four possible line widths: fine,
medium, thick and very thick. Left-click on the desired line
width; you also return to the Line Attributes menu.
3. After specifying the changes in Step 2, you must tell Ec*Trak
Directional which wellpath lines to change. Left-click on Select
Wellpaths. A prompt at the bottom of the screen asks you to
specify the wellpath ID. This is where you use the information
obtained from the well data sub-plot.
4. Type in a number and press [ENTER].
5. Ec*Trak Directional again asks you to specify a wellpath ID.
If you wish to apply the same attributes to another wellpath,
type its ID number and press [ENTER].
6. When finished giving the wellpath ID numbers, press [ENTER]
without typing a number.
7. You return to the Line Attributes menu. At the bottom of the
screen, Ec*Trak Directional reports the attribute changes you
made. At this point, you can specify a different set of attributes
by repeating Steps 2 through 6.

8. When you have specified all the line attributes, right-click at

the Line Attributes menu to return to the Modify menu.
Further information about setting the line attributes follows:
• When entering the wellpath ID, you do not have to type the p or s
prefix; the number itself is sufficient. However, if s17 and p17 both
exist and you enter 17, Ec*Trak Directional asks whether you want
to use the survey or the proposal.
• If you specify a wellpath ID whose attributes have already been set,
Ec*Trak Directional reports the previous attributes for the wellpath
at the bottom of the screen. You have three choices, as follows:
• To change the wellpath to the attributes you just entered, left-
click on Change Attributes.
• To retain the previous attributes, right-click.
• To return to the program’s default attributes, as discussed on
page 15-18, left-click on Reset to Default.
After making one of the choices, Ec*Trak Directional prompts for the
next wellpath ID (Step 5 in the preceding procedure). Continue from
that step.
Using Object Data

This item is meaningful only when you specified object data or multiple
reference data when selecting the data to plot.
The default selection is on; object data and multiple reference data are
plotted. If desired, you can left-click on Use Object Data to turn it off;
in that case, only the first reference item for a sub-plot is plotted.
Setting View Vector and Shadows

This item is meaningful only when modifying a 3-D plot. When you left-
click on it, the menu shown in Figure 15-16 appears. This menu controls
two aspects of 3-D plots, the view vector and the display of shadows.
Figure 15-16.
View Vector and
Shadows Menu.
To change the view
vector, left-click on
Enter New Value,
and type in the
desired azimuth
and inclination.

Setting the View Vector

The view vector settings allow you to view the plot from a different
azimuth and inclination. The default view is 25 degrees azimuth and 65
degrees inclination. Depending on the new viewpoint, you may find the
resulting plot to be more or less informative than the original view.
To change the view of a 3-D plot, follow these steps:
1. At the Modify menu, left-click on Set View Vector & Shadows.
The current view inclination and azimuth are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
2. At the View Vector & Shadows menu, left-click on Enter New
Value.
3. At the bottom of the screen, you are asked the direction
(azimuth) of the new view. Type in a value and press [ENTER].
4. Then type in a value for the inclination of the view and press
[ENTER]. The new values are reported at the bottom of the
screen, and the View Vector & Shadows menu reappears.
To return the view vector to its default values, left-click on Set to Default.
As an example, the screen in Figure 15-17(a) shows a default 3-D structure
plot. The screen in Figure 15-17(b) shows the same data, but with the view
changed to azimuth 111 degrees and inclination 22 degrees.
Figure 15-17(a). 3-D Structure Plot. Figure 15-17(b). 3-D Structure Plot After
Default view vector of azimuth = 25 degrees Changing View Vector. The view vector of
and inclination = 65 degrees. the same data was changed to azimuth =
111 degrees and inclination = 22 degrees.
After you set both the view vectors and the shadows as desired, left-click
on Accept.

Setting the Shadows

The shadow options allow you to toggle on and off the projection of the
wellpaths onto the horizontal and vertical surfaces of the 3-D cube. The
horizontal and vertical projections are controlled independently; one can
be on while the other is off.
Wall Shadow controls the projection onto the “wall”, or vertical plane of
the cube, while Floor Shadow controls the projection onto the “floor”, or
horizontal plane.
When you click Wall Shadow or Floor Shadow, the menu display changes
between all lower case and all capital letters. Lower case letters means that
the projection is off; capital letters means that it is on. The default is for
both sets of shadows to be on.
As an example, the screen in Figure 15-18(a) shows the default 3-D
structure plot, with wall shadows (to the right) and floor shadows (on the
bottom). In Figure 15-18(b) the shadows are turned off.
Figure 15-18(a). 3-D Structure Plot. The Figure 15-18(b). 3-D Structure Plot After
default setting is for both wall and floor Turning Shadows Off. Wall and floor
shadows to be on. shadows are controlled independently.
After you set both the shadows and the view vectors as desired, left-click
on Accept.
Setting Scale and Area for a Sub-Plot

By following the procedures discussed on pages 15-8 through 15-23,
you tell Ec*Trak Directional about the changes you wish to make with
a new or existing sub-plot. Notice however, that the changes have not
yet appeared on the screen.

The flow chart in Figure 15-19 shows how to advance from the Modify
menu to the Main Graphics menu, where the sub-plot is redrawn according
to your specifications.
Figure 15-19.
Flow Chart of Change annotations
Set depth range
Scale and Area Set section data
Dash all proposals
Menu. Flow chart Select axes
set line attributes
begins at the Modify USE OBJECT DATA
1″=5
menu and ends at 1″=10
1″=20
the Main Graphics select scale
1″=50
1″=100
click position window
menu. right resize window
1″=200
1″=500
zoom enter scale
reset
Main Graphics
click Menu
right
When you finish specifying the desired changes, return to the Modify
menu, shown in Figure 15-4 on page 15-9. From there, right-click to
advance to the Scale and Area screen, shown in Figure 15-20.
Figure 15-20.
Scale and Area plotter paper grid window
Screen. What-
ever is inside the
window appears
when the plot is
redrawn. You can
change the position,
size and aspect
ratio of the window axis
as desired.
sub-plot
path
report of
current view
All the operations at this screen are optional. When you complete them,
right-click to return to the Main Graphics screen, where the sub-plot you
edited or added is drawn to your specification.

A description of the Scale and Area screen follows:

• The wellpaths in the specified sub-plot are quickly drawn.
• A window appears on the screen. The portion of the wellpath inside
the window is what is drawn when you return to the Main Graphics
screen. In Figure 15-20 the window fully encloses the wellpath, but
that is not always true. You can resize and reposition the window
according to your needs.
• At the bottom of the screen, Ec*Trak Directional reports the
coordinates covered by the window.
• Axes are present on all four sides of the sub-plot for your informa-
tion. However, the axes that appear when the sub-plot is redrawn are
the default axes for the sub-plot, overridden by those you specified by
using the Select Axes function (see page 15-17).
• The plotter paper grid, which appears as a series of dots, is always
displayed.
The Scale and Area menu, shown in Figure 15-21, consists of five items.
They are described in the following sections.
Figure 15-21.
Scale and Area
Menu. Select
Scale changes
window size. Resize
Window changes
window size and
aspect ratio.
Zoom
Zoom works the same as at the Main Graphics screen, as described on page
14-10. It allows you to examine items on the Scale and Area screen more
closely, and to change the window’s size and position more accurately.
Whether or not you are zoomed at this screen has no effect on the
appearance of the sub-plot when you right-click to return to the Main
Graphics screen. What is enclosed by the window is what appears there.
Reset
Reset restores a zoomed screen to its unzoomed state, as at the Main
Graphics screen. For more information, see page 14-12.

Position Window
To change the position of the window while retaining its size and aspect
ratio, proceed as follows:
1. Left-click on Position Window.
2. A new window appears; move it with the mouse.
3. When it is in the desired position, left-click. (Right-click to
cancel the operation.)
4. In either case, you return to the Scale and Area menu.
Select Scale
To change the size and position of the window while retaining its aspect
ratio, proceed as follows:
1. Left-click on Select Scale.
2. At the bottom of the screen, Ec*Trak Directional asks you to
“Select a corner around which to scale, or Break to scale around
the center.”
When the rescaled window is drawn, it can be anchored to one of
the four corners of the current window, or to its center. To select
one of the corners, move the mouse pointer there and left-click.
To select the center, right-click. Most users right-click.
3. The Scale menu appears, an example of which is shown in
Figure 15-22, with the current scaling shown at the bottom
of the screen.
Figure 15-22.
Scale Menu.
Select a scale
value from the
menu, or left-click
on Enter Scale and
type in your own
value at the bottom
of the screen.
Note: The scale values on your screen may be different.

4. Select the desired scale factor as follows:

• To focus on part of the wellpath, left-click on a smaller
scale number. A smaller window appears.
• To make sure you include the entire wellpath, left-click on a
larger scale number. A larger window appears.
• To specify a particular scale factor, left-click on Enter
Scale. Type the scale number at the bottom of the screen,
and press [ENTER].
5. The window size changes, you return to the Scale and Area menu
and Ec*Trak Directional reports the coordinates covered by the
window. In all likelihood, you want to move the window by
using the Position Window procedure. For this reason, the choice
you make in Step 2 about scaling around a corner or the center is
usually not important.
Resize Window
To change the position and aspect ratio of the window, proceed as follows:
1. Left-click on Resize Window.
2. Left-click twice to anchor the position of the new window.
3. Move the mouse; a new window is drawn. When it covers the
desired portion of the graph, left-click.
4. The new window may be smaller than what you drew in the
previous step. Ec*Trak Directional considers the size of the
sub-plot and the scale. If your window is too large to fit, the
program shrinks the window accordingly.
5. You return to the Scale and Area menu, where you may resize
the window, position it or set its scale, if needed.
Returning to the Main Graphics Menu

To complete the Edit Layout procedure, right-click with the Scale and Area
menu showing. The Main Graphics menu re-appears. At this time the
specified sub-plot is drawn (after the other sub-plots), with the specified
modifications. View your changes and further modify the sub-plot, if
necessary.
See the next page for a summary of how to use the Edit Layout menus.

Edit Layout Summary

To move an existing sub-plot (see page 15-3):
1. At the Main Graphics menu, left-click on Edit Layout.
2. Left-click on a sub-plot to move.
3. Left-click on Move.
4. Move the mouse.
5. Left-click to place the sub-plot in its new position.
To delete an existing sub-plot (see page 15-4):
2. Left-click on a sub-plot to delete.
3. Left-click on Delete.
4. Confirm by left-clicking on Delete again.
To modify an existing sub-plot or add a new sub-plot (see page 15-5):
2. Perform one of the following:
Left-click on an existing sub-plot and on Modify, or
Right-click to access the menu of available sub-plots to add.
Then left-click on the desired new sub-plot.
3. Position and size the sub-plot (see page 15-7).
4. At the Modify menu, optionally perform one or more of the
following:
Change annotations — see page 15-9.
Set depth range — see page 15-14.
Set section data — see page 15-16.
Select axes — see page 15-17.
Dash proposals — see page 15-17. Set line attributes — see
page 15-18.
Turn object data on or off — see page 15-21.
Set view vector and shadows — see page 15-21.
5. Right-click to go to the Scale and Area screen. Optionally,
perform one or more of the following:
Move the window — see page 15-26.
Change the scale of the window — see page 15-26.
Change the aspect ratio of the window — see page 15-27.
6. Right-click to return to the Main Graphics menu. The new or
edited sub-plot is drawn to your specifications.

Chapter 16
Detail Editor
This is the final chapter devoted to graphics in Ec*Trak

Directional. It describes how to add your own art and text
to a plot. It also discusses how to control the appearance
of these objects, and how to change the appearance of
selected portions of sub-plots. These functions are found
under Detail Edit on the Main Graphics menu.

• Chapter 12 describes how to select the data to plot.
• Chapter 14 describes the default plot types, the elements in each
on the Main Graphics menu.
• Chapter 15 describes how to change the appearance and position of
entire sub-plots. These functions are found under Edit Layout on the
Main Graphics menu.
• This chapter describes how to add your own art and text to a plot. It
also describes how you can change the appearance of selected items
on a plot, whether they are art, text or part of a sub-plot. These
functions are found under Detail Edit on the Main Graphics menu.
Note: The recommended order of work is to perform the layout

editing functions described in Chapter 15; then make the
changes described in this chapter. In other words use
Edit Layout first, then use Detail Edit.
The capabilities described in this chapter are as follows:

• Add art objects such as lines, circles and boxes to the plot.
• Add your own text to the plot, and enclose it inside a box if desired.
User’s Guide 16-1

Detail Editor Ec*Trak Directional
• Specify the appearance (attributes) of art and text.

• Select objects to edit. These objects can be art, text or (with certain
limitations) portions of existing sub-plots.
• Scale up/down, move, delete or rotate selected objects on the plot.
• Copy selected objects, save them to a file or load them onto the plot.
The flow chart on page C-10 shows the menus you encounter under Detail
Edit on the Main Graphics menu.
Adding Art and Text to a Plot

Ec*Trak Directional allows you to add art and text to a plot. One common
usage is to note formation information on a wellpath. The procedure begins
as follows:
1. At the Main Graphics menu, left-click on Detail Edit.
2. At the Detail Edit menu, discussed in more detail on page 16-13,
left-click on Art.
The Art menu, shown in Figure 16-1, appears. The menu lists the items you
can add to a plot; each of which is discussed in detail.
Figure 16-1. Art

Menu. To access
the Art menu, left-
click on Detail Edit
and Art. At the Art
menu first set the
attributes, then
add the art or text
you require.
As a general rule, whatever you add from the Art menu is not associated
with a sub-plot. If you add something and then move or modify a sub-plot,
the added art may no longer appear in the same place relative to the sub-
plot. Therefore, you should perform Edit Layout functions (see Chapter 15)

Ec*Trak Directional Detail Editor
on sub-plots first; then perform the Detail Edit functions described in

this chapter.
Attributes
The art or text you add is given the line and text attributes which you
establish under Attributes on the Art menu. Therefore, set the attributes
before adding any art or text. The flow chart in Figure 16-2 shows the
menus you encounter when setting the attributes.
Figure 16-2.
Attributes Flow 0.1″
serifed 0.2″
Chart. The flow bold elite
...
ELITE 0.9″
Attributes snap off
chart begins at Text Text Font
1.0″
Default
Boxed Text Text Height
the Art menu. Circle Color
Arc Line Style
Box SOLID
Line Width dashed
Line FOREGROUND
Polyline red
Arrow green
FINE blue
Copy Art medium
Save Art yellow
thick purple
Load Art very thick
Hard Line cyan
Grid background
North Arrow
Left-click on Attributes to advance to the Attributes menu shown in

Figure 16-3. Control the display of text by the Text Font, Text Height
and Color options. Control the display of art by the Color, Line Style
and Line Width options.
Figure 16-3.
Attributes Menu.
Snap is a toggle
item, while the
others lead to
further menus.
Note: These attributes control the display of text and art

you are about to add. Do not confuse them with Line
Attributes found under Edit Layout (see page 15-18),
which controls the appearance of wellpath lines on a
sub-plot.
The items on the Attributes Menu are as follows:
User’s Guide 16-3

• Snap — Snap is a toggle item. If you left-click to turn it on, all items
that you add are positioned at the nearest 2mm or 0.1 inch mark on
an invisible grid. This can aid in aligning objects on the graph. The
default setting is off, which allows you to position items anywhere.
• Text Font — Left-click on text font to access a menu listing the three
possibilities shown in the following example. Left-click on the desired
font; the default is elite.
• Text Height — Left-click on text height to select a text height from

2mm to 20mm in 2mm intervals (or 0.1″ to 1″ in 0.1″ intervals, if you
are using imperial-gridded paper). Left-click on the desired size; the
default is 3.1mm or 0.12″.
• Color — Left-click on Color to select a color for the text and art you
are about to add. There are six choices: red, green, blue, yellow,
purple and cyan (light blue). To print in black (which appears on the
screen in white), left-click on Foreground. The last item on the Color
menu, Background, is not active; clicking on it has no effect.
Note: You must properly position the pens in a plotter for the
colors on your hard copy to match the colors on the
screen. You may need to make a trial plot to see how
the colors come out; then you can change the pens so
the colors match.
• Line Style — Left-click on Line Style to select the type of line

desired, either solid or dashed. Left-click on your selection; the
default is solid.
• Line Width — Left-click on Line Width to select the thickness of the
lines you are about to draw. There are four choices: fine, medium,
thick and very thick. Left-click on your selection; the default is fine.
Text
To add text to a plot, proceed as follows:
1. From the Art menu, left-click on Text.
2. At the Enter Text prompt at the bottom of the screen, type a line
of text to appear on the plot. Press [ENTER] to signify the end of
the line.

3. An outline of the text area appears.

4. Position the text and left-click. The text appears on the plot.
5. The Enter Text prompt appears again at the bottom of the screen.
You can add another line of text by repeating Steps 2 through 4.
When finished entering text, press [ENTER] at the prompt
without typing anything else.
Boxed Text
Boxed text is text surrounded by a box. Both the text and the box are drawn
according to the attributes you set for them. Proceed as follows:
1. From the Art menu, left-click on Boxed Text.
2. At the Enter Text prompt at the bottom of the screen, type a line
of text to appear on the plot. Press [ENTER] to signify the end of
the line.
3. The Enter Text prompt appears again at the bottom of the screen.
You can add another line of text by repeating Step 2. Add as
many line of text as you wish.
4. When finished entering lines of text, press [ENTER] at the prompt
without typing anything else.
5. An outline of the boxed text area appears.
6. Position the outline and left-click. The text and surrounding box
appear on the plot. Text lines are centered inside the box. Each
text line and the box itself are considered separate objects that
you can edit individually.
Circle
You can draw a circle on the plot according to the following steps:
1. From the Art menu, left-click on Circle. The mouse pointer turns
into cross-hairs.
2. Position the cross-hairs where you want the center of the circle to
be and left-click.
3. Move the mouse in any direction; as you move a line appears.
This line denotes the radius of the circle.
4. When you establish the desired radius, left-click. The circle is
drawn on the plot.
Arc
You can draw an arc, or part of a circle, by following these steps:
User’s Guide 16-5

1. From the Art menu, left-click on Arc. The mouse pointer turns
into cross-hairs.
2. Position the cross-hairs where you want the center of the arc to
be and left-click.
3. Move the mouse in any direction; as you move a line appears.
This line denotes the radius of the arc.
4. When you establish the desired radius, left-click. A circle is
drawn on the plot, but the radial line remains.
5. Move the mouse in any direction. A second line is drawn from
the center. The resulting arc begins at the radial line and moves
clockwise around the circle to the second line.
Note: The second line can fall short of the circle, or can extend
past it. The arc is drawn to the point where the line
crosses the circle, or would cross it if extended.
To illustrate the situation, see the following figure.
radial line
second line
arc direction resulting arc
6. When you position the second line at the desired spot, left-click
to draw the arc.
Box
To draw a box, proceed as follows:
1. From the Art menu, left-click on Box. The mouse pointer turns
into cross-hairs.
2. Position the cross-hairs so that one corner of the box is correctly
positioned and left-click.
3. Move the mouse to the opposite corner of the box; as you move
the box appears.

4. When the box is the desired size, left-click. The box appears on
the plot.
Line
To draw a single line, proceed as follows:
1. From the Art menu, left-click on Line. The mouse pointer turns
into cross-hairs.
2. Position the cross-hairs to the point where the line should begin
and left-click.
3. Move the mouse; as you move it a line appears on the screen.
4. Position the mouse at the end of the line and left-click to draw it.
Arrow
You can draw a line with an arrowhead on it. Proceed as follows:
1. From the Art menu, left-click on Arrow. The mouse pointer turns
into cross-hairs.
2. Position the cross-hairs to the point where the tail of the arrow
should begin and left-click.
4. Position the mouse where the tip of the arrow should appear and
left-click to draw it.
Polyline
A polyline is a series of lines, each connected to the end of the preceding
line. A polyline can have as many segments as you desire and may be a
closed polygon or an open polygon. There are two ways to draw a polyline,
by using the mouse and by using the keyboard.
To draw a polyline with the mouse, follow these steps:
1. From the Art menu, left-click on Polyline. Then left-click on
Mouse. The mouse pointer turns into cross-hairs.
2. Position the cross-hairs at the point where the first line segment
should begin and left-click.
4. Position the mouse at the end of the first line segment and left-
click to draw it.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until you have drawn all the segments of
the polyline.
User’s Guide 16-7

6. Right-click to complete the polyline and return to the Art menu.

The keyboard method requires that you input the coordinates within a sub-
plot. Before starting the procedure, make sure you know those coordinates
and those of the object you want to draw.
One practical use for this method is to draw an irregular target shape at a
precise position. To draw a polyline with the keyboard, follow these steps:
1. From the Art menu, left-click on Polyline. Then left-click on
Keyboard.
2. Left-click on a graphical sub-plot. This defines the origin for
drawing the polyline.
3. A prompt at the bottom of the screen asks you to “Enter the x y
coordinates with a space in between.” The first point defines
the start of the polyline. Type in the x (horizontal) coordinate,
followed by a space and the y (vertical) coordinate. Complete
the entry of the first point by pressing [ENTER].
If you select a horizontal view sub-plot, place a minus sign
before coordinates to the west and south of the reference point.
4. Repeat Step 3, specifying in order each of the points of the
polyline. Segments of the polyline are drawn as you enter the
points.
5. When finished, press [ENTER] without typing in any coordinates.
The entire polyline is drawn.
A polyline is not a part of the sub-plot. If you subsequently move or
modify the sub-plot, the polyline does not change with it. This is another
reason to edit sub-plots first, then add art.
Hard Line
A hard line is a single line which may, at your option, be drawn with hash
marks. A hard line is associated with a sub-plot, and you must know the
coordinates of the sub-plot and the hard line before starting the procedure.
The flow chart in Figure 16-4 shows the menus you encounter when
drawing a hard line.
To draw a hard line, follow these steps:
1. From the Art menu, left-click on Hard Line.
2. Left-click on a graphical sub-plot. This defines the origin for
drawing the hard line.
3. A prompt at the bottom of the screen asks you to “Enter the x y
coordinates with a space in between.” These coordinates define
one end of the line. Type in the x (horizontal) coordinate,

Figure 16-4. Hard

Line Flow Chart. Attributes
Text
Boxed Text
Circle
Arc
Box
Line
Polyline
Arrow
Copy Art
Save Art HATCH LINES — TOP
Load Art select HATCH LINES — BOTTOM
Hard Line x y coordinates HATCH LINES — RIGHT
subplot x y coordinates
Grid HATCH LINES — LEFT
North Arrow NONE
followed by a space and the y (vertical) coordinate. Complete

the entry pressing [ENTER].
4. Repeat Step 3 for the other end of the line.
5. A menu appears, which allows you to specify where on the hard
line you wish to place hash marks. There are five choices: top,
bottom, right, left or none. Left-click on the desired selection.
6. The hard line is drawn on the plot. An example of a hard line
with hash marks below it follows:
A hard line is partially associated with the sub-plot. If you subsequently

move the sub-plot, the hard line moves with it. However, if you modify
the sub-plot, the hard line is deleted.
Grid
You can draw one or more custom grids on a plot. The grid units are either
centimeters or inches, depending on whether you are working on metric or
imperial paper. To draw a grid, proceed as follows:
1. From the Art menu, left-click on Grid.
2. Left-click on Create. The mouse pointer turns into cross-hairs.
3. Position the cross-hairs at the point where the first corner of the
grid should begin and left-click.
5. Position the mouse at the next corner of the grid and left-click to
draw it.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you have drawn all but the last line
segment of the grid. Right click to complete the grid and return
to the Art menu. Ec*Trak Directional automatically connects the
first and last points you specified.
User’s Guide 16-9

Note: The grid need not be a rectangle. It can be any closed

polygon.
A sample grid is shown in Figure 16-5.
Figure 16-5. Grid

on Plot.
Further information about grids follows:

• To toggle the appearance of a grid on and off, left-click on Grid at
the Art menu. Then left-click on Show/Hide, which turns all grids
on and off.
• The custom grids you can draw are not the same as the grid marks
on plotter paper; these are controlled by Show/Hide Paper at the
Main Graphics menu (see page 14-13).
• A grid need not align with the grid marks on the paper.
North Arrow
Left-click on North Arrow to display a directional diagram such as that
shown in Figure 16-6. The Magnetic to True North correction and date
show the information you entered at the Declination Information screen

in Structure Setup. For more information about declination, see pages 6-5
to 6-7.
Figure 16-6.
North Arrow. The
diagram shows the
relation between
magnetic north and
true north. It uses
the data entered
at the Declination
Information screen
in Structure Setup.
Once it appears on the plot, the north arrow can be moved, resized or edited
like any other art object.
Selecting Items to Edit

To utilize the editing functions on the Detail Edit menu, first left-click one
of the editing functions, either Move, Scale, Delete or Rotate. The mouse
pointer becomes a hand.
Next you must select one or more items to edit. There are two methods of
selecting items, individually or in a group.
To select an individual object, move the mouse pointer to its border and
left-click.
To select a group of objects, enclose them within a polygon by following
these steps:
1. Move the mouse pointer to any point which is not on the border
of an object. Left-click to change the mouse pointer to a set of
cross-hairs.
2. Position the cross-hairs at the desired start of the polygon and
left-click.
4. Position the mouse at the end of the polygon’s first line segment
and left-click to draw it.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until you have drawn all but the last
segment of the polygon.

6. Right-click to complete the polygon; the program automatically

connects the first and last points you specified.
7. The objects entirely enclosed by the polygon flash once on the
screen. If the polygon completely encloses more than one type
of object to edit, a menu lists them.
8. Choose which item(s) on the menu to edit. Perform one of the
following:
• Left-click on All to select all items.
• Left-click on one or more items to select them for editing.
Selected items appear in capital letters, while excluded
items appear in lower case letters. When you have toggled
all the desired items on, left-click on Continue.
• If you do not want to edit any of the selected items, right-
click (or left-click on Continue with no items toggled on).
The items are de-selected and the mouse pointer becomes
a hand.
Depending on the editing function selected, the items which can appear on
the menu are as follows:
• Wellpath • Casing Circle

• Wellpath ID • Slot Symbol
• Axis • Ellipse
• Axis Title • Marker
• Axis Scale • Station Marker
• Axis Value • Target
• MD Label • Text
• TVD Label • Box
• Inclination Label • Art
• Comment • Grid
• Casing Symbol
Notice that most of these items are associated with sub-plots. To work with
an entire sub-plot, use the functions under Edit Layout. To edit portions of
a sub-plot, use the functions under Detail Edit.
An example of selecting objects on a plot is shown in Figure 16-7. The
polygon encloses a portion of the plot, and the items which may be edited
are listed in the menu; they are axis values, a casing symbol, text and art.

In this case, axis value and art are toggled on. When you left-click on
Continue, only axis value and art are edited; the other items remain
unchanged.
Figure 16-7.
Selecting a Group
of Objects to Edit.
Draw a polygon
enclosing the
desired objects. If menu listing
enclosed items
more than one type
of object is included, polygon
enclosing
they are listed on a objects to edit
menu. Choose the
object types you
wish to edit by left-
clicking on them
and on Continue.
To select all objects,
left-click on All.
Note: The menu lists object types only, not individual objects.
If you select an item to edit, all objects of that type are
edited. With Axis Value selected in Figure 16-7, all axis
values enclosed by the polygon are to be edited.
Editing Objects on a Plot

Most of the object editing functions are located on the Detail Edit menu
and are shown in Figure 16-8. Access the Detail Edit menu by left-clicking
on Detail Edit at the Main Graphics menu.
Several other editing functions are found on the Art menu, which you can
access by left-clicking on Art at the Detail Edit menu. The flow chart in
Figure 16-9 shows the menus you encounter when editing the objects on
a plot.
Zoom, Traverse and Reset work the same at the Detail Edit menu as at
the Main Graphics menu. Zoom allows you to enlarge an area of the plot,

Figure 16-8.
Detail Edit Menu.
Most of the object
editing functions
are located on this
menu, which is
accessed from the
Main Graphics
menu. Left-click on
Art to access the Art
menu, where the
rest of the editing
functions are found.
traverse pans across a zoomed image and reset restores a plot to its
unzoomed size. For more information, see page 14-10 through 14-13.
snap off click click

move anywhere right select right enclosed objects
Main Graphics slide horizontal objects All reposition
Menu SLIDE VERTICAL Continue
zoom
traverse click 0.5X
reset select right enclosed objects 1.5X
show/hide paper objects All 2X
edit layout Continue 3X
detail edit Zoom 4X
hard copy Traverse User Defined scale factor
change paper Reset
measure Refresh
Save plot Move click
Scale right enclosed objects delete
Delete select
objects All cancel
Rotate Continue
Art
45
click 90
select right enclosed objects
All 135
objects 180
Continue
225
270
Attributes 315
Text User Defined angle of rotation
Boxed Text
Circle
Arc
Box select
Line objects reposition
Polyline
Arrow click
Copy Art select right
Save Art objects filename
Load Art
Hard Line filename
Grid
North Arrow
Figure 16-9. Flow Chart for Editing Objects on a Plot.
Refresh
Left-click on Refresh to redraw the screen in its current zoomed state. This
is useful because objects on the screen can become broken up during the

editing process. Contrast with the Reset function, which redraws the screen
and restores the plot to its unzoomed condition.
Move
To use the Move function on the Detail Edit menu, select an individual
object or enclose the objects you wish to move inside a polygon. If
you enclose objects that are part of a graphical sub-plot, the following
restrictions apply:
• You can not move a wellpath.
• You can not move an x-axis or values on an x-axis horizontally.
• You can not move a y-axis or values on a y-axis vertically.
• You can neither move nor snap station markers.
Contrast this with Move under Edit Layout (see page 15-3), which allows
you to move an entire sub-plot as a single unit.
To move objects on a plot, proceed as follows:
1. From the Detail Edit menu, left-click on Move.
2. The Move menu appears, as shown in Figure 16-10. There are
two things to consider at this menu, as follows:
Figure 16-10.
Move Menu.
Toggle snap on
or off. Select
one of the three
constraints for
moving objects.
• The first menu item controls snap. It is a toggle item. If snap

is on, all objects you move are positioned to the nearest
2mm or 0.1 inch. If snap is off, you can position objects
anywhere.
• The last three menu items control how to move the selected
items, either anywhere, horizontally only or vertically only.
Left-click on the desired selection; the default is Move
Anywhere.
3. When finished toggling the items on the Move menu, right-click.
4. Select the objects to move, either individually or by enclosing
them inside a polygon (for more information, see page 16-11).
If you enclose more than one object type, select the desired
items from the menu.

5. A rectangle encompassing the selected objects appears. Move

it to the desired position and left-click. The objects are drawn
in their new position on the plot.
6. You return to Step 4, where you can select more objects to move.
When finished moving objects, right-click to return to the Detail
Edit menu.
Scale
Scale modifies the size of art, text and annotations. It has no effect on
the size of wellpaths and axes. To change the size of an entire sub-plot,
see “Sizing and Positioning a Sub-Plot” on page 15-7.
To scale objects on a plot, proceed as follows:
1. From the Detail Edit menu, left-click on Scale.
2. Select the objects to scale, either individually or by enclosing
3. The Scale menu appears, as shown in Figure 16-11. Either
left-click on a scale factor from the menu, or specify your
own by left-clicking on User Defined.
Figure 16-11.
Scale Menu. Left-
click on the desired
scale factor for the
selected objects, or
select User Defined
to specify a custom
factor.
User Defined allows you to enter a different scale factor. A

prompt appears at the bottom of the screen asking you to “Enter
Scale Factor.” Type it in and press [ENTER]. If you do not type
anything in and press [ENTER], that is the same as a scale factor
of 1.0.
4. You return to Step 2, where you can select more objects to scale.
When finished scaling objects, right-click to return to the Detail
Edit menu.

Delete
You can delete most objects from a plot, with the prominent exception
of wellpaths and axes. Common uses of this function are to delete some
values along an axis or to delete some inclination markers along the
vertical view of a wellpath. To delete an entire graphical sub-plot,
including the wellpath and axes, see “Deleting a Sub-Plot” on page 15-4.
To delete objects from a plot, proceed as follows:
1. From the Detail Edit menu, left-click on Delete.
2. Select the objects to delete, either individually or by enclosing
3. A confirmation menu appears. Left-click on Delete to erase
the selected objects, or left-click on Cancel to retain them.
4. You return to Step 2, where you can select more objects to
delete. When finished deleting objects, right-click to return
to the Detail Edit menu.
If you delete a part of the sub-plot, such as axis values or inclination
markers, and subsequently modify the affected sub-plot, the deleted objects
return. This is another reason to perform layout edits before detail edits.
Rotate
You can rotate wellpath annotations, art and text that you added to the plot.
Wellpath annotations are rotated about their associated station marker,
while art and text are rotated about their center.
To rotate objects on a plot, proceed as follows:
1. From the Detail Edit menu, left-click on Rotate.
2. Select the objects to rotate, either individually or by enclosing
3. The menu shown in Figure 16-12 appears. Either left-click on
a rotation angle from the menu, or specify your own angle by
left-clicking on User Defined. All angles are measured from
the current position of the selected object.
If you select User Defined, a prompt at the bottom of the screen
asks you to “Enter Angle of Rotation.” Type in the desired angle
— decimal point and minus sign are permitted — and press
[ENTER].

Figure 16-12.
Rotate Menu. Left-
click on the desired
angle of rotation
for the selected
objects, or select
User Defined to
specify a custom
angle.
4. The selected objects are redrawn, rotated to the specified angle.

5. You return to Step 2, where you can select more objects to rotate.
When finished rotating objects, right-click to return to the Detail
Edit menu.
Copying Art
You can copy art and added text — the items on the Art menu — to a
different position on the same plot. However, the copying procedure does
not apply to portions of a sub-plot.
To make a copy of art or text, follow these steps:
1. From the Detail Edit menu, left-click on Art.
2. From the Art menu, left-click on Copy Art.
3. Select the objects to copy, either individually or by enclosing
them inside a polygon. When copying art, no menu appears
if you enclose more than one object type; all the objects are
selected.
4. Move the mouse; a rectangle defining the extent of the selected
objects appears.
5. Position the rectangle at the desired point and left-click.
6. A copy of the objects appears in the new position, and you return
to the Art menu.
Saving and Loading Art

You can save art and added text — the items on the Art menu — to a file,
making them available for use on different plots. The saving procedure
does not apply to portions of sub-plots. Then recall the saved art by loading
it at the same position on a different plot.

To save art or text, follow these steps:

2. From the Art menu, left-click on Save Art.
3. Select the objects to save, either individually or by enclosing
them inside a polygon. When saving art, no menu appears
if you enclose more than one object type; all the objects are
selected.
4. You are prompted for a file name at the bottom of the screen.
Type it in and press [ENTER]. If the file name already exists,
a menu appears allowing you to overwrite the existing file or
choose a different name.
You should keep the file name short, but it should describe its
contents. If not, you may need to keep a written record of what
art is stored in each file.
5. The art is saved in the specified file, and you return to the Art
menu.
To load saved art onto a plot, follow these steps:
2. From the Art menu, left-click on Load Art.
3. You are prompted for a file name at the bottom of the screen.
Type in the name of a file in which you saved art and press
[ENTER].
4. The objects are drawn on the plot in the same position as when
they were saved. You return to the Art menu.
Load Art can also be used to load company logos onto a plot. Type the
name of the desired logo file in Step 3 of the preceding procedure. The
names of the files can be found in the logodir directory, generally under
u/ideas/ideas_data.
There are two versions of each logo, as follows:
• File names with a .c extension contain a color logo, which can be sent
to a laser printer or an inkjet plotter.
• File names without an extension contain an outline logo, suitable for
a pen plotter.
See Appendix F to view the logos and their file names.

Chapter 17
Hard Copy Output
Hard copy output refers to the process by which the

information on your monitor is transferred to paper.
Ec*Trak Directional can print menus, spreadsheets,
reports and graphs. It can also send graphs to a plotter.
This chapter explains each procedure.
Hard Copy Output — Basic Topics

Printing a Screen
You can print a copy of any menu or spreadsheet screen by pressing
[CONTROL-P]. The content of the printed output matches what you see on
the Ec*Trak screen. Any secondary menus or screens that are open, such as
the Design Options menu on the Well Design Spreadsheet, appear on the
printout as well.
If you are working with a multi-page spreadsheet, only the portion of the
spreadsheet which presently appears on the screen is printed. Similarly, if
you call a long menu to the screen, only those items which presently appear
on the screen are printed.
You cannot print the Report Previewer screen or a graphics screen in this
manner; if you press [CONTROL-P] while the mouse pointer lies within
either of these screens, nothing happens.
When the graphics screen appears, the Ec*Trak screen is visible behind it.
The mouse pointer position determines which screen you are in. If the
mouse pointer is over the graphics screen, [CONTROL-P] has no effect.
If the mouse pointer is on the Ec*Trak screen, [CONTROL-P] produces a
printed copy of the underlying Ec*Trak screen as if the graphics screen
were not there.
User’s Guide 17-1

Hard Copy Output Ec*Trak Directional
Printing a Well Design Spreadsheet

To print the contents of a Well Design Spreadsheet, first call the desired
spreadsheet to the screen (from the Main Menu select Create/Edit,
Directional Well Design, Operator, Field, Structure, Slot and Proposal). At
the spreadsheet, press [F1], highlight Print from the Design Options and
press [ENTER]. Everything you see on the screen, with the exception of the
Design Options menu, is printed. The printout should match the screen in
showing areas of normal and reverse video.
If you are working with a multi-page design, you must print each page
individually. From the spreadsheet, press [F1] and select Back or Forward
from the Design Options menu to go to the desired page. Then press [F1]
and select Print to print it.
Printing a Survey Spreadsheet

To print the contents of a survey spreadsheet, first call the desired spread-
sheet to the screen (from the Main Menu, select Create/Edit, Directional
Survey, Operator, Field, Structure, Slot and Survey). At the spreadsheet,
press [F1], highlight Print Screen from the Survey Options and press
[ENTER]. Everything you see on the screen, with the exception of the
Survey Options menu, is printed. The printout should match the screen
in showing areas of normal and reverse video.
If you are working with a multi-page survey, you must print each page
individually. From the spreadsheet, press [F1] and select Back or Forward
from the Survey Options menu to go to the desired page. Then press [F1]
and select Print Screen to print it.
Printing a Report
To select the report preview option, press [F1] from the Main Menu. The
second item on the Select Action menu says DISABLE Report Preview
or ENABLE Report Preview. DISABLE Report Preview means that
the option is on; if you highlight it and press [ENTER], you turn it off.
Similarly, ENABLE Report Preview means that the option is off;
highlighting it and pressing [ENTER] turns it on.
Therefore, either highlight the second item on the menu and press [ENTER]
to change it, or, if already correct, press [F1] to return to the Main Menu.
Select a report by choosing — from the Main Menu — Report, Report
Type, Interpolation/Range Specifications, reference data, object data
(if any) and end data selection. At this point, one of the following occurs:
• If the report preview option is disabled, the report is sent directly
to the printer.

Ec*Trak Directional Hard Copy Output
• If the report preview option is enabled, the report appears on the

screen for you to view. When you wish to print it, proceed as follows:
1. Move the mouse on top of the word File in the menu bar and left-
click to reveal the menu shown in Figure 17-1.
Figure 17-1.
Contents of File Save As . . .
Menu on Report Print
Copy to Dos Diskette
Previewer Screen. Exit
2. Move the mouse pointer to the second item, Print, and left-click
to reveal the menu shown in Figure 17-2.
Figure 17-2.
Dialog Box to
Specify the
Number of Copies
to Print.
3. Enter the number of copies desired, move the mouse pointer

to OK and left-click to send the entire report to the printer.
For more information about how to specify the number of copies you
desire, see “Specifying the Number of Copies” on page 17-9. For informa-
tion about how to save a report to a file, see “Printing a Report to a File” on
page 17-5. For information about how to send a report to a DOS diskette,
see “Printing a Report to a DOS Diskette” on page 17-6.
Printing/Plotting a Graph
Select a plot by choosing — from the Main Menu — Plot, Plot Type,
Interpolation/Range Specification, reference data, object data (if any)
and end data selection. The plot appears within the graphics window.
Edit the plot as desired, including zooming to the desired magnification.
When you print or plot a graph, the printed output matches the content and
magnification of what you see on the screen. To actually print the graph,
follow these steps:
1. At the Main Graphics menu, left-click on Hard Copy.
2. At the menu shown in Figure 17-3, left-click on Send to Plotter/
Printer.
User’s Guide 17-3

Figure 17-3.
Choices After save to disk
Selecting Hard send to plotter / printer
cancel
Copy.
3. At the next menu, an example of which is shown in Figure 17-4,

left-click on the desired printer or plotter. Depending on the
setup of your system, your list may be different.
Figure 17-4.
Sample List of send to LaserJet
send to epsonlq1500
Available Printers send to hp7475
and Plotters. send to epsonFX
send to epsonFX15
send to calc1044
send to calc1044L
send to alps
send to ThinkJet
send to BubbleJet
cancel
4. If sending to a printer, you may be asked whether to print the

plots in portrait or landscape mode, or you may be asked to
specify the paper size. Left-click on the desired response.
5. Make sure that the specified output device is properly set up and
ready to receive data. When it is, left-click on the OK line to send
the plot to the device.
If you decide not to print the graph, perform one of the following:
• Left-click on Cancel at any menu, or
• Right-click while the mouse pointer is within the graphics window.
For information about how to output a graph to a Unix file on the hard disk,
see “Printing a Graph to a File” on page 17-7.

Hard Copy Output — Advanced Topics

Printing a Report to a File
Sending a report to a file allows you to produce hard copy output at a later
time, at a different place or on a different printer. You save the report as a
Unix ASCII (readable text) file on the hard disk. After saving it, you can
include it within another document or print it on a compatible printer.
Follow these steps to send a report to a file:
1. Make sure that the report preview option is enabled, because
you must access the Report Previewer screen to print to a file.
To select the report preview option, press [F1] from the Main
Menu. The second item on the Select Action menu says
DISABLE Report Preview or ENABLE Report Preview.
DISABLE Report Preview means that the option is on; if
you highlight it and press [ENTER], you turn it off. Similarly,
ENABLE Report Preview means that the option is off; pressing
[ENTER] turns it on.
Therefore, if the second item on the menu says ENABLE, press

[ENTER] to turn it on. If it says DISABLE, press [F1] to return to
the Main Menu.
2. Select a report by choosing — from the Main Menu — Report,
Report Type, Interpolation/Range Specifications, reference data,
object data (if any) and end data selection. The Report Previewer
screen appears and contains the requested report.
click to reveal the menu shown in Figure 17-1 on page 17-3.
4. Move the mouse pointer to the first item, Save As, and left-click
to display the window shown in Figure 17-5. Keep the mouse
pointer within the window.
Figure 17-5.
Save Report File
Dialog Box.
5. Ec*Trak Directional suggests that you store the file in the

/usr/tmp directory, but it is not required. Left-click to the
User’s Guide 17-5

right of the directory name. Change the directory name, if

desired, and enter a file name.
6. When finished specifying the directory and file names, move the
mouse pointer to OK and left-click. You return to the Report
Previewer screen.
To cancel the operation, move the mouse pointer to Cancel and left-click.
You return to the Report Previewer screen.
Printing a Report to a DOS Diskette

Sending a report to a diskette allows you to print the hard copy output
at a later time, at a different place or on a different printer. The resulting
file is an ASCII (readable text) file placed on a DOS-formatted diskette.
After printing the report to a diskette, you can include it within another
document, or you can print it on a compatible printer.
Follow these steps to send a report to a DOS diskette:
1. Make sure that the report preview option is enabled, because
you must access the Report Previewer screen to print to a file.
To select the report preview option, press [F1] from the Main
Menu. The second item on the Select Action menu says
DISABLE Report Preview or ENABLE Report Preview.
DISABLE Report Preview means that the option is on; if
you highlight it and press [ENTER], you turn it off. Similarly,
ENABLE Report Preview means that the option is off; pressing
[ENTER] turns it on.
Therefore, if the second item on the menu says ENABLE, press

[ENTER] to turn it on. If it says DISABLE, press [F1] to return to
the Main Menu.
2. Select a report by choosing — from the Main Menu — Report,
Report Type, Interpolation/Range Specifications, reference data,
object data (if any) and end data selection. The Report Previewer
screen appears and contains the requested report.
click to reveal the menu shown in Figure 17-1 on page 17-3.
4. Move the mouse pointer to the third item, Copy to DOS Diskette,
and left-click. The window shown in Figure 17-6 appears. Keep
the mouse pointer within the DOS Backup window.
5. Select diskette drive A: or B: by typing A or B.
6. Place the diskette in the selected drive.

Figure 17-6. DOS

Backup Window.
7. You are next asked to enter a valid DOS filename. If you press
[ENTER] without typing in a valid DOS filename, the system
names the file.
8. Ec*Trak Directional can format your diskette if necessary. If you
want to format it, answer the next question by pressing Y. If you
do not need to format it, answer N.
At this point, the program formats the diskette, if you so
specified, and writes the report file to it.
9. A message tells you when the copying is complete. Press
[ENTER] to return to the Report Previewer screen.
To leave this function without sending the report to diskette, answer Q

for quit when asked which diskette drive to use.
Printing a Graph to a File
Generating the Graph

Sending a graph to a file allows you to output it later when the desired
output device becomes available. The printed or plotted output is saved as
a Unix file, usually in the /u/ideas/ideas_data/savedir directory of the hard
disk. If your setup is different, your file may be stored in another directory.
Select a plot by choosing — from the Main Menu — Plot, Plot Type,
Interpolation/Range Specification, reference data, object data (if any) and
end data selection. You may also generate a plot from the Well Design
Spreadsheet (see page 9-21), the Survey Spreadsheet (see page 10-14) or
the Rigsite System (see page 11-8). The plot appears within the graphics
window.
Edit the plot as desired, including zooming to the desired magnification.
When you print or plot a graph, the printed output matches the content and
magnification of what you see on the screen. To print the graph to disk,
follow these steps:
1. At the Main Graphics menu, left-click on Hard Copy to produce
the menu shown in Figure 17-3 on page 17-4.
2. Left-click on Save to Disk.
User’s Guide 17-7

3. At the next menu, shown in Figure 17-4 on page 17-4, left-click

on the desired printer or plotter type. Depending on the setup
of your system, your list may be different.
4. At the bottom of the screen, enter a file name of eight characters
or less. Press [ENTER] when complete.
Note: It is good practice to encode the output device in the file

name when you save a graph. You must send the plot to
the same printer or plotter type you specified when you
saved it.
5. At the next menu, left-click on the OK line to generate the plot

and send it to the disk file.
6. A Please Wait message appears at the bottom of the screen while
the graph is generated. When the message leaves the screen, the
Main Graphics menu appears and you may resume work.
If you decide not to print the graph to disk, perform one of the following:
• Left-click on Cancel at any menu, or
• Right-click while the mouse pointer is within the graphics window.
After you save the graph as a Unix file, you may work with it by using
Unix commands issued at a Unix prompt.
Sending the Saved Graph to a Printer or Plotter

If you leave a copy of the file in the same directory where you originally
saved it, you can send it to the desired output device from within Ec*Trak
Directional. Follow these steps:
1. Connect the computer to the output device.
2. At the Main Menu, press [F1].
3. At the Select Action menu, highlight Printer Operations and
press [ENTER].
4. When the Printer Operations menu appears, press [F3] to print
saved jobs.
5. When the Print Queue Control menu appears, press [F3] to
resubmit old print jobs.
6. A menu of saved graphs appears. Highlight the desired file name
and press [ENTER].
7. At the Select Printer/Plotter menu, highlight the output device
and press [ENTER] to send the graph there. This must be the same
output device that you used when you saved the graph.

8. After the Please Wait message leaves the screen, select another
graph file to print if desired, or press [F1] to move back through
the menus.
Specifying the Number of Copies

There are two ways to tell Ec*Trak Directional how many copies of a
report to print. Choose one of the following as appropriate:
• When printing reports from the Report Previewer screen, select
File and Print. When the next screen appears — as shown in
Figure 17-2 on page 17-3 — type in the number of copies you
need and click on OK.
• When printing reports with the report preview option turned off,
use the Interpolation/Range Specification screen. Enter the number
of copies you need on the last line of the top section, as shown in
Figure 17-7.
Figure 17-7.
Interpolation/
Range
Specification
Screen. Change
Number of Copies enter Number of
on the indicated Copies here
line; this affects
reports only.
Whenever you
print a plot, you
get one copy.
Note: Number of Copies affects reports only. Regardless of the

number in this box, you get just one graph at a time.
Disabling/Enabling Printers
Disabling a Single Device

If a printer or plotter is not working for some reason (the cable has been
disconnected, the paper has jammed, the pens have run dry, and so on),
you may wish to disable the device until it is functioning properly. When
you disable a device, you prevent Ec*Trak Directional from sending data
to it.
User’s Guide 17-9

To disable a single device, follow these steps:

press [ENTER].
3. The Printer Operations menu is shown in Figure 17-8. The
item labelled Disable BubbleJet, for example, means that
the BubbleJet is currently enabled. If you highlight it and
press [ENTER], you disable the device.
Figure 17-8.
Printer
Operations Menu.
This menu allows
you to enable and
disable individual
printers. You can
affect all the printers
at once by using the
Stop Scheduler
option.
Find the device you wish to disable. It should say Disable Device.
Highlight it and press [ENTER] to disable it.
At this point, you can disable another device in the same manner.
Disabling All Devices on the System

To suspend output to all devices connected to the system, follow these
steps:
press [ENTER].
3. At the Printer Operations menu, highlight the first line, Stop
Scheduler, and press [ENTER].
Working While Devices Are Disabled

If one or more output devices are disabled, your work with the rest of
Ec*Trak Directional should proceed as usual. Even if you need hard copy
output for a report or graph, generate it as you normally do. The hard copy
is sent to a print queue where it waits until you enable its output device.

Enabling an Output Device

When the output device is ready to receive data, enable it within Ec*Trak
Directional. Follow these steps:
press [ENTER].
3. At the Printer Operations menu, highlight the device you wish
to enable — it should say Enable Device — and press [ENTER] to
enable it. If you stopped the scheduler, highlight the first line and
press [ENTER] to restart the scheduler.
As soon as you enable an output device, any jobs stored for it in the print
queue are sent to it.
Changing Paper
Each type of graph uses a pre-selected paper size. When you send a graph
to a printer or plotter, Ec*Trak Directional scales the graph to the paper
size of the output device with no change in aspect ratio.
For example, if a wellpath plot on metric paper is 84cm by 84cm, the plot
remains square when sent to an output device. Therefore, if you send a
wellpath plot to A3 paper (42cm by 30cm), Ec*Trak Directional scales
down the plot to 30cm by 30cm. However, if you want to fill the entire
42cm length, you may need to use the Change Paper function, which is
found on the Main Graphics menu.
To change the paper, proceed as follows:
1. Select a plot by choosing, from the Main Menu, Plot, Plot Type,
Interpolation/Range Specification, reference data, object data
(if any) and end data selection.
2. At the Main Graphics menu, move the mouse pointer to Change
Paper and left-click. The menu shown in Figure 17-9 appears.
Figure 17-9.
Change Paper change paper
cancel
Confirmation.
3. Change Paper erases the entire plot and presents the menu of
paper sizes shown in Figure 17-10. Depending on the setup of
your system, your list may be different. Cancel returns you to
the previous screen.

Figure 17-10.
List of Available
Paper Sizes.
4. Highlight the desired paper size and left-click to select it. If you
right-click, a default paper size (118cm by 84cm or 33 inches by
54 inches) is selected.
5. As shown in Figure 17-11, the extent of the paper and its grid are
displayed. If you wish to get rid of the marks, highlight Show/
Hide Paper and left-click.

At this point you have a blank sheet of paper. You can not load a standard
plot to it. You must select Edit Layout and add each sub-plot individually,
specifying location on the paper, size, axes, depth range, attributes and so
on. For more information, see “Edit Layout Summary” on page 15-28.
Figure 17-11.
Graphics Screen
with New Paper.
After you select
Change Paper and
the new paper size,
the Graphics screen
resembles this
figure. Each dot
represents 2cm or
1 inch. You must
add sub-plots
individually, using
the Edit Layout
function.
As you may see, this process can become quite tedious. You should not
have to use Change Paper very often, if ever. If you are making extensive
use of Change Paper, you should make up one or more customized plot
description files that fulfill your requirements. For more information,
see your Ec*Trak Directional system administrator.

Chapter 18
Utilities
This chapter discusses several utilities within Ec*Trak

Directional. Two of these topics are located at the Exit/
Utilities menu, and the others are located at the Create/Edit
menu.
Ec*Trak Directional contains utilities for carrying out a variety of useful

tasks. These utilities are located on two menus, the Exit/Utilities menu and
the Create/Edit menu.
Database Deletion Utility

The Database Deletion Utility allows you delete from the database entire
sections of the data hierarchy. You can not, however, delete an individual
survey or proposal.
To access the Database Deletion Utility, select Create/Edit from the Main
Menu and Database Deletion Utility from the Create/Edit menu. You then
proceed along the data hierarchy.
At the first menu, all the operators are listed. Highlight the operator to
delete data from and press [ENTER]. All the fields belonging to the operator
are listed on the next menu, as shown in Figure 18-1.
Figure 18-1.
List of Fields
to Delete. Select
a field, or select
End Selection to
delete the operator
and all its data.
User’s Guide 18-1

Utilities Ec*Trak Directional
You have two choices; perform one of the following:

• If you want to delete the operator and all data belonging to it, press
[F1] (or highlight End Selection and press [ENTER]). A message
appears telling you that all data belonging to the operator are about
to be deleted. Answer Yes to delete the data or No to retain them.
See Figure 18-2.
Figure 18-2.
Confirm Deletion.
Answer Yes to
delete data, No
to retain data.
• If you want to retain the operator, but want to delete data further along
the data hierarchy, highlight the field that you want to delete data
from and press [ENTER].
If you select a field, a screen appears which shows all the structures
belonging to the field. Your options are the same as at the previous menu.
To delete the field and all data belonging to it, select End Selection and
confirm. To retain the field but to delete data further along the data
hierarchy, highlight the structure that you want to delete data from and
press [ENTER].
If you select a structure, a menu appears which shows all the slots
belonging to the field. Your options are again the same. To delete the
structure and all data belonging to it, select End Selection and confirm.
To retain the structure but to delete data from a slot, highlight the slot
that you want to delete data from and press [ENTER].
The slot is the lowest level of the data hierarchy whose data you can delete.
After selecting the slot, the confirmation message appears. Answer Yes to
delete the slot data or No to retain the slot data.
If you specify an incorrect item in the data hierarchy (for example, the
wrong field name), press [F1] and answer No to the confirmation question.
You return to the Main Menu, where you can try the deletion again.
Bulk Edit
The Bulk Edit utility allows you to select a group of surveys and proposals
and to edit certain items within them at the same time. This can be a great
time-saver when compared to entering each survey and proposal one-at-a-
time, making the change and saving it.
You can edit the following items:
• MD, inclination and azimuth of surveys.

Ec*Trak Directional Utilities
• Tokens on surveys and proposals.

• Survey tool error models on surveys.
• Casing string on surveys and proposals.
To access Bulk Edit, select Create/Edit from the Main Menu and Bulk Edit
Svy/Prop from the Create/Edit menu. You then proceed along the data
hierarchy.
There are two ways to select the wellpaths to edit. Perform one of the
following:
• To select wellpaths individually, on a one-by-one basis, follow the
procedure in the next section, “Selecting Wellpaths Individually”.
• To select groups of wellpaths at the same time, see “Selecting Groups
of Wellpaths”.
Note: It is possible to select wellpaths individually and by

groups during the same selection process. Therefore, you
can combine the procedures of the next two sections.
Selecting Wellpaths Individually

The first menu of the data hierarchy lists all the operators. Highlight
the operator whose surveys or proposals you wish to change and press
[ENTER]. The next menu lists the fields belonging to the operator.
Highlight the desired field and press [ENTER]. Continue by selecting
the desired wellpath, slot and wellpath.
After selecting the first wellpath, you can select other wellpaths on
the same slot by highlighting them and pressing [ENTER]. To include
a wellpath on a different slot, press [F1] as needed to go up the data
hierarchy; then make the appropriate selections to go down a different
part of the data hierarchy and select the desired wellpath.
Continue until you have selected all the wellpaths. When finished,
highlight End Selection and press [ENTER].
Selecting Groups of Wellpaths

The first menu of the data hierarchy lists all the operators. Highlight
the operator whose surveys or proposals you wish to change and press
[ENTER]. The next menu lists the fields belonging to the operator.
Press [F2] to display all the tokens for the field. An example of such
a screen is shown in Figure 18-3.
Note: If the operator owns one field, the field menu is skipped.
To return to the field menu, press [F1] as needed.
User’s Guide 18-3

Figure 18-3.
Tokens for Field.
From the field
menu, press [F2]
to reveal the list of
tokens. Wellpaths
on the field which
have capitalized
tokens names
assigned to them
are selected for
editing. Most
common is to
select all wellpaths.
The tokens listed are all those available for the field. The capitalized token
names are the ones which are to be selected for editing. Capitalize the
tokens to edit and make sure the rest are in lower case; toggle by
highlighting a token and pressing [ENTER].
Probably the most commonly used item on the token menu is Select All
Wellpaths. In the example shown in Figure 18-3, if you highlight Select
All Wellpaths and press [ENTER], all wellpaths belonging to the Manual
Field are selected for editing.
After selecting all wellpaths, a menu asks if you wish to gather more data
for editing. Highlight Yes or No as desired and press [ENTER]. A Yes
answer allows you to select more wellpaths to edit, while a No answer
takes you directly to the Bulk Edit menu.
You can also select the tokens or wellpaths on a structure by selecting the
desired operator, field and structure and pressing [F2]. The screen is similar
to that shown in Figure 18-3, but it refers to the structure.
Bulk Edit Menu

After selecting the wellpaths to edit — whether individually, by group
or in any combination — you receive a warning message, as shown in
Figure 18-4.
Figure 18-4.
Warning
Message. Press
[ENTER] to go to the
Bulk Edit menu.

Press [ENTER] to leave the warning message and go to the Bulk Edit menu,
Figure 18-5. Bulk
Edit Menu.
When you selected the wellpaths to edit, they may have included both
proposals and surveys. The first two items on the Bulk Edit menu allow
you to restrict the edited wellpaths to proposals only or surveys only. If
proposals or surveys are included, those wellpaths are subject to editing.
If proposals or wellpaths are ignored, those wellpaths are not changed by
your actions at the Bulk Edit menu. Toggle between Included and Ignored
by highlighting either proposals or surveys and pressing [ENTER].
MD/Inc/Azi Corrections
These are applied to surveys only; if you also specified proposals, the
corrections are not applied to proposals. A series of screens appears, as
follows:
1. The first screen is a warning that the corrections you specify take
effect even if you later tell Ec*Trak Directional to quit and
ignore the changes you made. Press [ENTER] to continue.
2. The second screen asks you to enter an amount to add to the MD
value of each survey station. This amount can be positive or
negative. Press [ENTER] after typing in the desired amount.
3. If you added 0 to the MD in Step 2, a screen appears asking you
to enter an amount by which to multiply the MD of each survey
station. Type the desired amount and press [ENTER].
4. The next screen asks you to enter an amount (positive or
negative) to add to the inclination of each survey station.
5. The next screen — probably the most commonly used correction
— asks you to enter an amount (positive or negative) to add to
the azimuth of each survey station.
This feature is useful in that it allows you to enter azimuth values
as read directly from the survey film. Then you can come to the
Bulk Edit utility to enter the declination adjustment to be applied
to each station.
User’s Guide 18-5

This feature also allows you to convert the survey data to a

different north reference point (grid or true).
6. The last screen in the sequence summarizes your input and asks
you to confirm the changes. If you answer Yes, the changes are
made even if later you choose to quit and ignore data changes.
If you answer No, no changes are made.
Tokens
The Set a Token and Clear a Token choices apply to both surveys and
proposals. To apply a new token to all the selected wellpaths, highlight
Set a Token and press [ENTER]. A window appears telling you that all
the token names appear in lower case. Press [ENTER].
At the next menu, the list of available tokens for surveys appears. To apply
a token highlight it and press [ENTER] to toggle it to capital letters. You
may apply as many tokens as desired. For more information about survey
tokens, see page 10-9. When finished press [F1] to end your selection.
The next menu shows the list of available tokens for proposals. Select the
desired tokens by highlighting each one and pressing [ENTER] and pressing
[F1] when finished. For more information about proposal tokens, see page
8-22.
In separate windows, Ec*Trak Directional tells you which surveys and
which proposals it changed. Press [ENTER] to leave each window.
To clear a token from the selected wellpaths, highlight Clear a Token and
press [ENTER]. Tokens are cleared one at a time by highlighting the desired
token on the menu and pressing [ENTER]. Windows appear telling you
which surveys and proposals were changed.
Set Tool Error Specifications

This choice applies only to surveys; any selected proposals are not
affected. This option allows you to apply a survey tool error model
to the selected surveys.
To enter the option, highlight Set Tool Error Specifications and press
[ENTER]. The sequence of menus that follows is identical to what you
encounter when applying a tool to a survey. For more information, see
“Tool Errors” on page 10-8 and “Survey Tool Error Models” on page 6-13.
Associate Casing String

This choice applies to surveys and proposals. You can associate a casing
string identifier with the selected wellpaths. At the Bulk Edit menu,
highlight Associate Casing String With Svy/Prop and press [ENTER].

The next screen asks you to enter the casing string identifier to associate
with the wellpaths. Type in the identifier letter and press [ENTER]. A single
window lists both the proposals and surveys that were changed. For more
information about the casing string identifiers, see “String Identifier” on
page 6-10.
Leaving the Bulk Edit Menu

There are two familiar methods for leaving the Bulk Edit menu. Quit
leaves the menu and discards the changes you made, with the exception of
any MD/Inclination/Azimuth corrections. Exit leaves the menu and saves
the changes you made. Both Quit and Exit have confirmation menus. After
you leave the Bulk Edit menu, you return to the Main Menu.
Generate Well Site Data

Generate Well Site Data is an export function; it transfers a section of
your data hierarchy onto a diskette or tape in a special file format. This
function is most commonly used to transfer data between office and field
computers.
The sequence of menus to select the data to export is the same as the
sequence to delete data in the Database Deletion Utility (see page 18-1).
To enter this utility, select Create/Edit at the Main Menu and Generate
Well Site Data at the Create/Edit menu. You then proceed along the data
hierarchy.
At the first menu, all the operators are listed. Highlight the operator whose
data you wish to export and press [ENTER]. All the fields belonging to the
operator are shown in the next menu.
Perform one of the following:
• To export all the data belonging to the operator, press [F1]
(or highlight End Selection and press [ENTER]).
• To export data further along the data hierarchy, highlight the field
whose data you wish to export and press [ENTER].
If you select a field, all structures belonging to the field are listed. Your
options are the same as at the previous menu. To export the field data,
select End Selection. To export data further along the data hierarchy,
highlight the desired structure and press [ENTER].
If you select a structure, all slots belonging to the structure are listed.
Your options are again the same. To export the structure data, select
End Selection. To export data from a slot, highlight the desired slot
and press [ENTER]. The slot is the lowest level of data that you can
export.
User’s Guide 18-7

After making your selection of data to export, Ec*Trak Directional asks

you a series of questions as follows:
1. The following backup devices are available:
The choices depend on how your system is set up; generally they
are a diskette drive and tape. Type in your choice as shown on
the list and press [ENTER].
2. Place the proper medium (diskette or tape) in the selected backup
device and press [ENTER]. The data are copied to it.
3. Do you want to view the contents of the backup media?
To see a Unix file listing of the backup, answer Yes. Otherwise,
answer No.
4. Do you want to clean out all deleted data in the database?
This function is obsolete; answer No and press [ENTER].
5. Backup complete.
Press [ENTER] to return to the Main Menu.
Insert Incoming Data

Insert Incoming Data is the import function which works with Generate
Well Site Data. Insert Incoming Data can interpret the special format in
which Generate Well Site Data writes its output.
To import such data, select Create/Edit at the Main Menu and Insert
Incoming Data at the Create/Edit menu. A series of questions follows:
1. The following backup devices are available:
Type the desired backup device as listed and press [ENTER].
2. Place the proper medium in the selected backup device and press
[ENTER]. The data are read and the files listed.
3. Ec*Trak Directional reports on the source of the incoming data.

In the example shown in Figure 18-6, the incoming data are the
structure data from the DEF Octopus Platform #1.
Figure 18-6.
Incoming Data
Confirmation
Screen.
If these are the data you wish to import, select Yes to import
them; otherwise, select No to return to the Main Menu.

4. Next, you must tell Ec*Trak Directional where to place the new
data in the database, as follows:
• If you exported slot data, you must specify a structure to
receive them.
• If you exported structure data, you specify a field to receive
them.
• If you exported field, data you must specify an operator to
receive them.
• If you exported operator data, you do not have to specify
anything. A new operator with the same name is created
in the receiving database.
5. You proceed along the data hierarchy, selecting the desired
operator, field and structure in accordance with the guidelines
in Step 4. Highlight the desired items and press [ENTER].
6. When you reach the proper point in the data hierarchy, the data
are imported and you return to the Main Menu.
Insert Incoming Sysdrill Data

This import function works the same as Insert Incoming Data. However,
in this case, the source of the data is an original Sysdrill database, the
type found in earlier versions of Ec*Trak Directional. Because of recent
programming changes to the structure of the database, two different import
functions are required to handle incoming data.
Backup Data
Generate Well Site Data can export at most the data of a single operator.
Backup Data allows you to make a copy of your entire database.
To enter this utility press [F1] at the Main Menu. At the Utilities menu,
highlight Backup Data and press [ENTER]. Answer the questions as they
appear.
Delete Temp/Spool Files

This function deletes certain unneeded temporary files and spool files that
can remain on the /usr/tmp directory of your hard disk. To perform this
utility, press [F1] at the Main Menu. At the Utilities menu, highlight Delete
Temp/Spool Files and press [ENTER]; the files are deleted. Press [F1] to
return to the Main Menu.
User’s Guide 18-9

Appendix A
Geodetics Summary
Three north reference points — True North, Grid North and

Magnetic North — are used in directional drilling. This
appendix defines each and explains how to convert among
them. The appendix also reviews a number of coordinate
systems for expressing the location of a point on the surface
of the earth.
Azimuth References
As commonly used in directional drilling, azimuth is the horizontal
direction of the wellpath at a particular point, measured in a clockwise
direction from a chosen north reference point.
Azimuth may be expressed as a value on a compass system (0°–360°),
rather than a quadrant system (such as N45°20′E). A circle is divided into
360 degrees (°), each degree into 60 minutes (′) and each minute into 60
seconds (″).
For directional drilling and borehole surveying, there are three primary
azimuth references, as follows:
• True (Geographic) North (TN)
• Magnetic North (MN)
• Grid North (GN)
True North
True or Geographic North is the horizontal direction from a point on the
earth’s surface to the geographic North Pole, which lies on the earth’s axis
of rotation. The direction is shown on a globe by meridians of longitude
(see page A-5 for more information).
User’s Guide A-1

Geodetics Summary Ec*Trak Directional
Magnetic North
Magnetic North is the direction of the horizontal component of the earth’s
magnetic field lines at a particular point on the earth’s surface pointing to
the magnetic pole. A magnetic compass aligns itself to these lines with the
positive pole of the compass indicating North.
Grid North
Grid North is a reference system devised by map makers in the compli-
cated task of transferring the curved surface of the earth onto a flat sheet.
The meridians of longitude on a globe converge toward the North Pole and
therefore do not produce a rectangular grid system.
A map can be drawn such that the grid lines are rectangular, for some
specified area of the earth, the northerly direction of which is determined
by one specified meridian of longitude. This direction is called Grid North
and is identical to True North only for that specified central meridian.
Azimuth Reference System Conversions

Well proposals generated using grid systems reference a particular Grid
North. Since wells are surveyed with sensors that reference direction to
either Magnetic or True North, it is necessary to convert between these
references.
Declination
Magnetic declination correction converts azimuth values between the
Magnetic North and True North systems. The magnetic declination
correction is the angle between the horizontal component of the earth’s
magnetic field lines and the meridians of longitude. When Magnetic North
lies to the west of True North, the magnetic declination is westerly, and if
to the east, easterly. The relationship between Magnetic North and True
North is shown in Figure A-1.
Values of magnetic declination change with time and location. They must
be updated regularly. Their values and rates of change can be obtained
from “world magnetic variation charts” or “isogonic charts” which are
issued by major hydrographic institutes. A computer program such as
Ec*Trak Directional has such information coded within it. When magnetic
results are recorded, the declination and the date must be included.
Convergence
Convergence, or grid correction angle, converts azimuth readings between
True North and the specified Grid North. The angle of correction is the
angle between the meridians of longitude and the northings of the grid
system at the specified point. The magnitude of the correction angle
A-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Ec*Trak Directional Geodetics Summary
Figure A-1.
Magnetic and
Geographic
North. Declination
is the angular
difference between
them for a point on
the earth’s surface
at a particular time.
depends upon its location within the grid. The relationship between Grid
North and True North is shown in Figure A-2.
Figure A-2. Grid

and True North.
Convergence is the
angular difference
between them for
a point within the
grid. Grid and True
North coincide
along the grid’s
central meridian.
The computation of the grid correction angle or angle of convergence

requires special mathematical techniques depending on the type of
projection of the curved earth’s surface onto the flat grid.
Ec*Trak Directional automatically calculates the UTM (for more infor-
mation, see page A-7) and Lambert (for more information, see page A-8)
conformal conic convergence and places it on reports and plots. Grid North
is expressed as x degrees east or west of True North.
User’s Guide A-3

When working with the UTM system, the calculated direction between two
UTM coordinates is referenced to Grid North. To convert this UTM Grid
North direction to a True North direction, you must apply the grid conver-
gence to the calculated UTM Grid North direction.
System Conversions
Once you acquire accurate magnetic declinations and grid convergence
angles, add or subtract these angles from one another to change reference
systems. Typically, you begin with a magnetic reading; apply declination
to convert to True North. Then apply convergence to True North to convert
to Grid North.
Construct a diagram as shown in Figure A-3 with Grid North at 0° azimuth
(straight up). Draw arrows for True North and Magnetic North to the east
or west of Grid North, depending on the convergence and declination.
Draw an arbitrary borehole at 90° azimuth.
Figure A-3. True, Grid Convergence = 3°W

Grid and Magnetic Magnetic Declination = 5°E
North. In this GN
True Azimuth = 87°
MN
example, Grid 3° 5°
Grid Azimuth = 90°
Magnetic Azimuth = 82°
North is west of
True North, while
Magnetic North is To
True Grid Mag
east of True North. From
The diagram and True 0 3 −5
table show their Grid −3 0 −8

relationship. 90°
Mag 5 8 0 Borehole Azimuth
Figure A-3 shows a situation with a 3.0° west grid convergence and a 5.0°
east magnetic declination. The diagram shows the arbitrary Grid North
azimuth of 90.0° to equal 87.0° True North and 82.0° Magnetic North. To
convert from Magnetic azimuth to True azimuth, add 5.0° to all Magnetic
North azimuths, and so on. The chart adjacent to the diagram shows all
possible combinations to change between systems.
The survey printout for this example should include, under an azimuth
reference heading, the following data:
• Grid North is 3.0°W from True North.
• Magnetic North is 5.0°E from True North and 8.0°E from Grid North,
and the date the survey was taken.
• Survey printout is referenced to Grid North.
Figure A-4 shows a similar situation with a 3.0° east grid convergence and
an 8.0° east magnetic declination.

Figure A-4. True, Grid Convergence = 3°E

Grid and Magnetic Magnetic Declination = 8°E
North. In this GN MN
True Azimuth = 93°
example, both Grid 3° 5° Grid Azimuth = 90°
Magnetic Azimuth = 85°
and Magnetic North
are east of True
North. The diagram To
True Grid Mag
and table show their From
−3 −8
relationship. True 0
Grid 3 0 −5
90°
Mag 8 5 0 Borehole Azimuth
Geographic Coordinates
Latitude and Longitude

By drawing a set of east-west rings around the globe (parallel to the
equator) and a set of north-south rings crossing the equator at right angles
and converging at the poles, a network of reference lines is formed from
which any point on the earth’s surface can be located.
The distance of a point north or south of the equator is its latitude. The
rings around the earth parallel to the equator are called parallels of latitude
or parallels. Lines of latitude run east-west, with north-south distances
measured between them.
A second set of rings around the globe at right angles to lines of latitude
and passing through the poles are known as meridians of longitude or
meridians. One meridian is designated as the prime meridian. The prime
meridian accepted by the majority of the world runs through Greenwich,
England and is known as the Greenwich meridian. The distance east or
west of a prime meridian to a point is known as its longitude. Lines of
longitude (meridians) run north-south, with east-west distances measured
between them.
Starting with 0° at the equator, the parallels of latitude are numbered to
90° both north and south. The extremities are the North Pole at 90° north
latitude and the South Pole at 90° south latitude. Latitudes can have the
same numerical value north or south of the equator, so the direction N
or S must always be given.
Starting with 0° at the prime meridian, longitude is measured both east and
west around the world. Lines east of the prime meridian are numbered to
180° and identified as east longitude; lines west of the prime meridian are
numbered to 180° and identified as west longitude. The direction E or W
must always be given. The line directly opposite the prime meridian, 180°,
may be referred to as either east or west longitude. Latitude and longitude
are shown in Figure A-5.
User’s Guide A-5

Figure A-5.
Latitude and
Longitude. The
equator, the prime
meridian and the
location of a
particular point
on the globe are
shown.
It is important to enter geographic coordinates to as many decimal places

as is practical. For example, in Houston, Texas a latitude change of 0.01
seconds produces a change of 1.24 feet, and a longitude change of 0.01
seconds produces a change of 2.17 feet.
Geographic Datum
For most atlas maps and any directional drilling map, the earth may be
considered a sphere. Actually it more nearly resembles an oblate ellipsoid
flattened by approximately one part in 300 at the poles. On small-scale
maps this oblateness is negligible. However, different ellipsoids produce
slightly different coordinates for the same point on the earth and therefore
warrant a brief summary.
More than a dozen principal ellipsoids are in use today. An official shape
was designated in 1924 by the International Union of Geodesy and
Geophysics (IUGG), which adopted a flattening ratio of one part in
297. This is called the International Ellipsoid and is based on Hayford’s
calculations in 1909 giving an equatorial radius of 6,378,388 meters and
a polar radius of 6,356,911.9 meters.
This ellipsoid was not adopted by many countries, however, including
those in North America. The different dimensions of the other established

ellipsoids are not only the result of varying uncertainties in the geodetic
measurements that were made, but also are due to a non-uniform curvature
of the earth’s surface.
It is for this reason that a particular ellipsoid is slightly more accurate in the
areas it was measured, rather than using a generalized ellipsoid for the
whole earth. This also includes satellite derived ellipsoids such as WGS72.
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Grid

The most common worldwide grid system used in directional drilling is the
UTM. The UTM divides the world into 60 equal zones (6° wide), running
north and south, between latitudes 84°N and 80°S. (Polar regions are nor-
mally covered by a separate planar projection system known as Universal
Polar Stereographic.) Each of the 60 zones has its origin at the intersection
of its central meridian and the equator.
Each zone is numbered, beginning with Zone 1 at the 180th meridian
(International Date Line), with zone numbers increasing to the east. Most
of the United States is included in Zones 10–19. Each zone is flattened and
a square grid superimposed upon it.
Any point in the zone may be referred to by citing its zone number, its
distance in meters from the equator (“northing”) and its distance from a
north-south reference line (“easting”). These three figures — the zone
number, easting and northing (plus the Northern or Southern Hemisphere
designation) — make up the complete UTM Grid Reference for any point,
and distinguish it from any other point on earth.
Figure A-6 shows a zone, its shape somewhat exaggerated, with its most
important features. Note that when drawn on a flat map, its outer edges are
curves (since they follow meridian lines on the globe), which are farther
apart at the equator than at the poles.
The UTM Coordinate System is based on the measurements of the earth’s
axes. Since the earth’s north-south axis is shorter than its east-west axis, it
is actually an ellipsoid and not a true sphere. As a result, it is important to
enter the ellipsoid used to arrive at the given easting and northing values.
The two most important features of each zone are the equator, which runs
east and west through its center, and the central meridian. Easting and
northing measurements are based on these two lines. The easting of a point
represents its distance in meters from the central meridian of the zone in
which it lies. The northing of a point represents its distance in meters from
the equator.
By common agreement, there are no negative numbers for the eastings of
points west of the central meridian. Instead of assigning a value of 0 meters
User’s Guide A-7

Figure A-6. A
UTM Grid Zone.
Basics of the UTM
grid zone are
shown. Note that
standard UTM
zones do not extend
to the poles.
to the central meridian of each zone, each is assigned an arbitrary value of

500,000 meters, increasing to the east.
Along the equator at their widest points, the zones somewhat exceed
600,000 meters from west to east. Therefore, easting values range from
approximately 200,000 meters to approximately 800,000 meters at the
equator, with no negative values. The range of possible easting values
narrows as the zones narrow toward the poles.
Northings for points north of the equator are measured directly in meters,
beginning with a value of 0 at the equator and increasing to the north. To
avoid negative northing values for points south of the equator, the equator
is arbitrarily assigned a value of 10,000,000 meters, and points are
measured with decreasing, but positive northing values heading southward.
Some maps, particularly in the United States (U.S.), have converted UTM
coordinates from meters to feet.
Lambert Coordinate System

The Lambert system is based on a conformal conic projection and is
particularly useful in mapping regions that have a predominantly east-west
expanse. This system has heavy use in North America and is the official
U.S. state plane coordinate system for more than half of the 48 contiguous
states, including the majority of those where oil is drilled and produced
(such as Texas, Louisiana, Oklahoma, California, Colorado, Kansas, Utah
and Michigan). The remainder of the states, including Wyoming, use the
Transverse Mercator, with Alaska using a combination.
The features of this conic projection (see Figure A-7) include:
• Parallels of latitude are unequally spaced arcs of concentric circles.

Figure A-7.
Lambert
Projection.
Lambert grids
can be defined
for local areas.
For example,
Louisiana has
three such zones.
• Meridians of longitude are equally spaced radii cutting the parallels at

right angles.
• Scale is normally true along two defined parallels, but can be true
along one.
• Pole in same hemisphere is a point, other pole is at infinity.
Since there is no distortion at the parallels, it is possible to change the
“standard parallels” to another pair by changing the scale applied to the
existing map and recalculating standards to fit the new scale. Each state or
area has its own standard parallels, or sets of the same depending on its
size, to reduce distortion at the center. For example, Louisiana is divided
into three zones.
The grid origins for most states are measured in feet, with the east-west
axis starting at 2,000,000 feet and the north-south axis at 0 feet.
Local Grid Systems

There are numerous local grid systems in use around the world today.
These systems all have different base line coordinates and projections,
covering different sizes of surface areas, but all serve the same basic
purpose as outlined for UTM and Lambert.
In the U.S. lease lines are often used as a convenient grid reference, as well
as other privately surveyed grids. Outside the U.S., local grids are used in
the Netherlands, the United Kingdom (U.K.), Brunei, Australia and other
User’s Guide A-9

countries. Several countries have also shifted the starting points of the
UTM grid zones to fall inside their own territory.
In some situations when using standard grid coordinates, the well’s target
location may lie in a different zone from the surface location. In these cases
a special local grid is normally produced by creating a nonstandard zone.
This is done by either extending the surface location zone by a few miles to
include the target, or shifting the zone center, as sometimes is done with
UTM, 3° to the zone boundary.

Appendix B
Grid Types and Spheroids
This appendix shows the various grid types and spheroids

that are available to you when you are using the Options
menu (see page 3-7).
Table 1 — Grid Types for Alaska Projection

Zone 1 Zone 6
Zone 2 Zone 7
Zone 3 Zone 8
Zone 4 Zone 9
Zone 5 Zone 10
Table 2 — Grid Types for Lambert Projection

Lambert zone numbers are shown in parentheses.
Alaska Zone 10 (5010) Kansas North (1501) Montana North (2501)

Arkansas North (0301) Kansas South (1502) Montana Central (2502)
Arkansas South (0302) Kentucky North (1601) Montana South (2503)
California I (0401) Kentucky South (1602) Nebraska North (2601)
California II (0402) Louisiana North (1701) Nebraska South (2602)
California III (0403) Louisiana South (1702) New York Long Island (3104)
California IV (0404) Louisiana Offshore (1703) North Carolina (3200)
California V (0405) Maryland (1900) North Dakota North (3301)
California VI (0406) Massachusetts Mainland North Dakota South (3302)
California VII (0407) (2001) Ohio North (3401)
Colorado North (0501) Massachusetts Island (2002) Ohio South (3402)
Colorado Central (0502) Michigan North (2111) Oklahoma North (3501)
Colorado South (0503) Michigan Central (2112) Oklahoma South (3502)
Connecticut (0600) Michigan South (2113) Oregon North (3601)
Florida North (0903) Minnesota North (2201) Oregon South (3602)
Iowa North (1401) Minnesota Central (2202) Pennsylvania North (3701)
Iowa South (1402) Minnesota South (2203) Pennsylvania South (3702)
User’s Guide B-1

Grid Types and Spheroids Ec*Trak Directional
Table 2 —Grid Types for Lambert Projection, continued

Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands Texas North (4201) Virginia North (4501)
(5201) Texas North Central (4202) Virginia South (4502)
St. Croix (5202) Texas Central (4203) Washington North (4601)
South Carolina North (3901) Texas South Central (4204) Washington South (4602)
South Carolina South (3902) Texas South (4205) West Virginia North (4701)
South Dakota North (4001) Utah North (4301) West Virginia South (4702)
South Dakota South (4002) Utah Central (4302) Wisconsin North (4801)
Tennessee (4100) Utah South (4303) Wisconsin Central (4802)
Wisconsin South (4803)
Table 3 — Grid Types for Mercator Projection

Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Arizona Central (0202) Michigan West (2103)
(UTM) — Shell China Arizona West (0203) Mississippi East (2301)
Gauss Kruger Delaware (0700) Mississippi West (2302)
Argentina Zone 1 Florida East (0901) Missouri East (2401)
Argentina Zone 2 Florida West (0902) Missouri Central (2402)
Argentina Zone 3 Georgia East (1001) Missouri West (2403)
Argentina Zone 4 Georgia West (1002) Nevada East (2701)
Argentina Zone 5 Hawaii 1 (5101) Nevada Central (2702)
Argentina Zone 6 Hawaii 2 (5102) Nevada West (2703)
Argentina Zone 7 Hawaii 3 (5103) New Hampshire (2800)
Argentina Zone 8 Hawaii 4 (5104) New Jersey (2900)
Argentina Zone 9 Hawaii 5 (5105) New Mexico East (3001)
Bogota — TMCOLB Idaho East (1101) New Mexico Central (3002)
Bogota — TMCOLE Idaho Central (1102) New Mexico West (3003)
Bogota — TMCOLEC Idaho West (1003) New York East (3101)
Bogota — TMCOLW Illinois East (1201) New York Central (3102)
British National Illinois West (1202) New York West (3103)
New Amersfoort Indiana East (1301) Rhode Island (3800)
Nigeria Mid Belt Indiana West (1302) Vermont (4400)
Oxy System Maine East (1801) Wyoming East (4901)
Alabama East (0101) Maine West (1802) Wyoming East Central (4902)
Alabama West (0102) Michigan East (2101) Wyoming West Central (4903)
Arizona East (0201) Michigan Central (2102) Wyoming West (4904)
Table 4 — Grid Types for International Lambert Projection

Algeria — North (Deg) France I North (Grad)
Algeria — South (Deg) France II Centre (Grad)
Australia France III Sud (Grad)
Canada France IV Corsica (Grad)
Canadian Arctic Iran
China Middle East
Colombia Tunisia — North
Egypt Tunisia — South
Venezuela
B-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Ec*Trak Directional Grid Types and Spheroids
Table 5 — Spheroids
Hayford Danish
Clarke – 1866 Bessel
Clarke – 1880 Airy
International European Datum 1950
Delambre NAD
Plessis NAD 83
Everest WGS 84
Clarke – 1858 Australian Nat
Struve Heiskanen
Helmert Jeffreys
Krasovsky NWL
Australian 165 WGS
IUGG
User’s Guide B-3

Appendix C
This appendix presents flow charts representing the menus

and functions available in each module of Ec*Trak
Directional.
User’s Guide C-1

C-2
plot; see page C-9
Main Menu
report; see page C-8
plot
report Create/Edit Menu
create/edit create operator create field create location Structure Edit
structure, wellheads, etc. existing operator existing field existing location Options Menu
[F1] Directional survey
exit/utilities Directional well design see page C-3
Rigsite system existing operator
[F2] Survey (NO LOCK)
exit/utilities Well Design (NO LOCK) create structure Warning
see page C-12 bulk edit svy/prop Screen
existing structure
Database Deletion Utility
Generate Well Site Data
Insert Incoming Data create slot
Insert Incoming Sysdrill Data existing field existing structure create wellpath
existing slot existing wellpath
Create/Edit Functions
choose backup device Survey

existing Spreadsheet
operator
existing yes/no see page C-5

operator yes/no or
existing operator Well Design
existing [F1] Spreadsheet
field [F1] Slot exit form
existing existing end Information see page C-4
[F1] field operator screen or
end existing field
[F3] [F4] Rigsite Survey
existing
Confidential
link with well link with targ. Spreadsheet
structure [F1]
existing existing end see page C-6
[F1] structure field [F1] existing well existing target
end end
existing structure
existing [F2]
slot [F1] [F2] existing token add well
existing existing by token all paths
structure end
[F1] slot [F1] Well Data Remove association
end end Form screen Re-date as today
yes/no existing slot yes/no Leave alone
existing
choose backup device slot [F1]
view backup media? [F1]
end exit
clean deleted data? existing path proposals are INCLUDED
surveys are INCLUDED
data set tool error specification
inserted set casing string identifier enter name
quit, ignore changes yes/no
exit, save changes
existing survey tool

Baker Hughes INTEQ
Ec*Trak Directional
units in ...
course length = ...
[F2] calculation method
User’s Guide
Operator, Field, Structure, Location Data screen surface error north alignment
coords from ...
depths from ...
section from ...
Edit current section plane existing projection
Edit next Slot Information screen
Ec*Trak Directional
projection type
Structure Edit Find existing slot grid type existing grid type
Options Menu Add spheroid
Rotate Slots [F3] [F4] ------
Structure name and position link with link with error summation existing spheroid
Offset Slots
Options Heading well target standard deviations [F2]
Slot data [F2] report axis
casing program custom spheroid
Well data casing dimensions
Target data errors start at ...
Declination data existing target surface uncertainty major, minor axis

Survey tool errors
Save current edits yes/no
Structure Edit Options
Quit, no update yes/no starting points
Well Data Remove association

[F1] existing well Form screen
exit structure [F2] Re-date as today
add well Leave alone
yes/no
add
edit Casing Information screen
next deepest
copy casing program yes/no existing slot
Confidential
North offset East offset
existing well Well Data Form screen
Add Target
Edit Target existing target Target Details screen
Delete Target
existing target
Add
Edit Declination Information screen
Next Oldest
Tool Error
existing tool names Parameters Specification screen
C-3
[F1]
Well Design continue
C-4
Spreadsheet [F1] walk horizon Apply walk?
plan options
[F2], add
Top [F3], modify
Bottom
Back TVD horizon
Forward
Print existing casing Casing Information screen
Walk
Casings
Set section plane
Redefine tie
Survey errors V.S. choices V.S. Reference screen
Well name
Quit yes/no
Exit wellhead
Depth run to
yes/no default V.S. survey name existing token

yes
Confidential
no
Well Design Spreadsheet Functions
V.S. choices V.S. Reference

[F1]
profiles screen
existing profile type Target Details

Remove selected profile Add screen
[F2] Modify
targets Select targets on design
Select target on slot existing target
[F3] Select target on field Modify
graphics Remove from design
Main Graphics Menu
Plan View (1:5) data level existing token see pages C-10
Plan View (1:25) [F1] and C-11
Plan View (Auto Scale) use selected
zoom
Horizontal Clearance traverse
Traveling Cylinder reset
Vertical View (Auto Scale) edit layout
hard copy
measure

Baker Hughes INTEQ
Ec*Trak Directional
Ec*Trak Directional Ec*Trak Directional Flow Charts
Survey Spreadsheet Functions
Survey
Spreadsheet
[F1]
survey options
existing casing Casing Information screen
Top
Bottom
Back existing comment Comment Text screen
Forward
Print screen
Automatic M.D.’s V.S. choices V.S. Reference screen
Casings
Survey comments
Vertical section
Tool errors existing survey tool
Modify identifiers
Redefine tie point
Well name existing token
Import survey
Quit yes/no
Exit wellhead

delete file?
existing survey file formats azimuth correction
[F2]
Svy. to [F2] file name
target preview file
Save As ...
Report Pre-viewer Print number of copies
Exit select drive
format floppy?
yes
yes/no default V.S. survey name existing token
[F3] no
graphics
V.S. choices V.S. Reference

[F1] screen
project ahead
[F2], add
[F3], modify
which MD build rate walk horizon TVD horizon
Quick Wellplot (Auto Scale) Main Graphics Menu

Plan View (1:5) data level existing token see pages C-10
Plan View (1:25) [F1]
use selected and C-11
Plan View (Auto Scale)
Horizontal Clearance zoom
Traveling Cylinder traverse
Vertical View (Auto Scale) reset
edit layout
hard copy
measure
User’s Guide C-5

Ec*Trak Directional Flow Charts Ec*Trak Directional
Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet Functions
Rigsite Survey
Spreadsheet
yes
[F1] default V.S. survey name existing token
survey options if new survey
no
V.S. Reference
V.S. choices screen
Top
Bottom existing casing Casing Information screen
Back
Forward
Print survey
Casings existing comment Comment Text screen
Survey comments
Vertical section V.S. choices V.S. Reference screen
Tool errors
Modify identifiers
Redefine tie point existing survey tool
Import survey
existing token
wellhead
delete file?
existing survey file formats azimuth correction
[F2] file name

[F4] yes/no preview file
Save As ...
exit system Print number of copies
Report Pre-viewer
Exit select drive
format floppy?
Instant Graphics Menu

[F3] Plan/Section View Main Graphics
instant graph Trav. Cylinder Print
Ideal Tool Run Next Target
MD vs TF Graph Scale scale menu
Dogleg Exit
Calculate Step Size
View Results DL/TF
Results Summary BLD/TRN
Zoom Report
Traverse Previewer
Reset Graph screen
Exit
[F1]
analysis Survey Projection
Parameters Form

Plan View (1:5) Main Graphics Menu
Plan View (1:25)
Plan View (Auto Scale) see pages C-10
[F3] and C-11
survey Horizontal Clearance
graphics Traveling Cylinder zoom
Vertical View (Auto Scale) data level existing token traverse
[F1]
use selected reset
edit layout
hard copy
[F2] Rigsite Design measure
well Spreadsheet
design
see page C-7
[F1] Proximity Results

proximity
[F2]
design
[F3]
graphics
C-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Ec*Trak Directional Ec*Trak Directional Flow Charts
Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet Functions
Rigsite Design
Spreadsheet
[F1]
plan options
Top
Bottom walk horizon TVD horizon
Back
Forward
Print screen existing casing Casing Information screen
Walk
Casings
Set section plane
Redefine tie
Set error model V.S. choices V.S. Reference screen
wellhead
Depth run to
[F1]
profiles
existing profile type
Remove selected profile
Add Target Details screen
[F2] Modify
targets Select targets on design
Select target on slot existing target
Select target on field Modify
Remove from design
[F3]
graphics
Main Graphics Menu
Quick Wellplot (Auto Scale) see pages C-10
Plan View (1:5) data level existing token and C-11
Plan View (1:25) [F1] zoom
Plan View (Auto Scale) Use traverse
Horizontal Clearance Selected reset
Traveling Cylinder edit layout
Vertical View (Auto Scale) hard copy
measure
[F4]
exit to survey
yes/no
User’s Guide C-7

C-8
Report
plot existing existing existing existing Previewer
see page C-9 Interpolation/Range existing field structure slot wellpath screen
Specification screen operator
Wellpath see below
Inertial back calculation [F1] [F2], select [F2], select
Proposal Summary exit by token by token
Main Menu DDS/Lite transfer format
plot Structure existing token existing token
report Horizontal plane clearance
create/edit Minimum distance clearance
Travelling cylinder clearance
Report Functions
Summary clearance
MMS format for Directional Survey
existing existing existing
operator field structure
create/edit
[F1] see page C-2
exit/utilities Interpolation/Range existing existing existing existing existing

exit
[F2] [F2], select [F2], select object data
exit/utilities by token by token
see page C-12
Confidential
Interpolation/Range existing existing existing existing existing API Date
Specification screen [F1] operator field structure slot wellpath #
exit
by token by token
file name
Report Save As ...

Previewer Print number of copies
Exit
select drive
format floppy?

Baker Hughes INTEQ
Ec*Trak Directional
User’s Guide
Interpolation/Range existing existing existing existing existing Main Graphics
Main Menu wellpath Specification screen [F1] operator field structure slot wellpath Menu
position uncertainty exit see pages C-10
plot
report report wellheads [F2], select [F2], select and C-11
Ec*Trak Directional
create/edit see page C-8 structure by token by token

field
comparison page plot existing token existing token
create/edit horizontal clearance
[F1] see page C-2
exit/utilities travelling cylinder
re-edit
Interpolation/Range existing existing existing
Specification screen [F1] operator field structure
see page C-12 [F2] exit
exit/utilities [F2], select

Interpolation/Range existing by token
Specification screen [F1] field
exit [F2], select
by token existing token
existing token
Interpolation/Range existing existing existing existing existing

exit
by token by token
Confidential
with
existing token existing token object
Accessing the Main Graphics Menu
data
Cutoff Interpolation/Range existing existing existing existing existing

Menu Specification screen [F1] operator field structure slot wellpath
exit
[F2], select with
[F2], select object data
by token by token
existing
plot file existing token existing token
[F2] [F3]
show comments delete file
existing yes/no
comment
C-9
snap off click click
move anywhere right select right enclosed objects
C-10
slide horizontal objects All reposition
SLIDE VERTICAL Continue
click 0.5X
see page C-11 select right enclosed objects 1.5X
objects All 2X
Continue 3X
Zoom 4X
Traverse User Defined X scaling factor
Reset Y scaling factor
Main Graphics Refresh
Menu Move click
Scale right enclosed objects delete
zoom Delete select
traverse objects All cancel
Rotate Continue
reset Art
show/hide paper
edit layout
detail edit 45
click 90
hard copy select right enclosed objects
change paper All 135
objects 180
measure Continue
Save plot 225
270 angle of rotation
Attributes 315 0.1″
User Defined
click right Text enter text 0.2″

Most Graphics Functions
Boxed Text ...

position text serifed
Circle 0.9″
next reference Arc bold elite 1.0″
quit Box Keyboard snap off ELITE Default
cancel Line Mouse Text Font
Polyline Text Height
Arrow click Color
Copy Art select right Line Style SOLID FOREGROUND
Save Art objects filename Line Width dashed red
Confidential
Load Art green
Hard Line filename blue
Grid FINE yellow
North Arrow select medium purple
subplot x y coordinates thick cyan
x y coordinates very thick background
create
show/hide
HATCH LINES — TOP
HATCH LINES — BOTTOM
HATCH LINES — RIGHT
HATCH LINES — LEFT
printer OK NONE
existing printer filename cancel
save to disk cancel
send to printer/plotter
cancel
printer OK
existing printer cancel
cancel
change paper existing
cancel paper size
curvatures target TVD

distances origin
filename comment

Baker Hughes INTEQ
Ec*Trak Directional
CASING CIRCLES
cancel
casings symbols regular TVDs start

slot circles regular MDs stop
comments specific TVD interval accept
User’s Guide
general md specific MD reject
general tvd
local md/tvd TVD (MD) for interpolation
inclinations
station markers
display targets
Ec*Trak Directional
display ellipses UNCERTAINTY ELLIPSES

Main Graphics cancel
Menu
zoom
traverse reposition md range
tvd range start MD (TVD)
reset end MD (TVD) accept
show/hide paper delete reject
edit layout select move cancel
subplot delete Change annotations

detail edit section plane
hard copy modify draw box for Set depth range Set to default
Edit Layout Functions
new subplot Set section data Enter new value section ref North
change paper section ref East
measure click Dash all proposals Accept
Save plot right Select axes
set line attributes
USE OBJECT DATA Set to default azimuth
Set view vector & shadows Enter new value inclination
Accept
white
RED
click green
right Set Color blue
SOLID yellow
vertical view md/azimuth Set Line Style dashed purple
Confidential
plan view md/inclination Set Line Width
Select Wellpaths cyan
3-D view md/dogleg black
survey analysis plots md/toolface FINE
ellipse analysis plots tvd/azimuth medium
next reference title tvd/inclination thick
quit plot data tvd/dogleg Set to default very thick
cancel well data Enter new value
target details WALL SHADOW
profile data md/lateral errors FLOOR SHADOW wellpath ID
md/along hole errors Accept
md/vertical errors
tvd/lateral errors
tvd/along hole errors
tvd/vertical errors click select scale 1″=5
Main Menu right position window 1″=10
resize window 1″=20
zoom 1″=50
reset 1″=100
1″=200
1″=500
click enter scale
right
Main Graphics
draw box for Menu
new subplot
C-11
Ec*Trak Directional Flow Charts Ec*Trak Directional
Exit/Utility Functions
Main Menu
plot plot; see page C-9
report report; see page C-8
create/edit create/edit; see page C-2
[F1]
exit/utilities
exit Ec*Trak yes/no

DISABLE report preview
delete temp/spool files
backup data proceed? choose a device
printer operations insert tape/diskette
STOP scheduler view backup media?
disable printers delete SQL log?
clean deleted data?
Backup complete.
[F3]
print jobs
cancel queued jobs
[F3]
resubmit old
print saved jobs select printer/plotter
[F2] [F3]
delete file delete all
C-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Appendix D
Data Entry Methods
This appendix describes alternate ways to enter numerical

data into the data fields of Ec*Trak Directional.
The Well Design and Survey Spreadsheets of Ec*Trak Directional accept

data entered in a number of formats. However, you are urged to find one
you like and use it all the time. Consistency in data entry leads to accurate
computations and results.
Entering Direction
Azimuth Entry
You can enter the angle from north in either azimuth or quadrature form.
In both forms you need to express the number of whole and fractional
degrees.
• A decimal point denotes a decimal number of degrees. For example,
1.23 means 1.23°.
• A space denotes the number of minutes. For example, 1 23 means
1 degree and 23 minutes or 1.383° (1 + 23⁄60).
Quadrature Entry
You have the further option of quadrature entry relating to north/south
and east/west. For example, the entry S28 23W is equivalent to 208.383°
azimuth. The first two digits following S are added to south (180°)
resulting in 208°. The next two digits represent the number of minutes.
Therefore S28 23W is 180 + 28 + 23⁄60 = 208.383°.
Some examples of direction in the quadrature form, and their azimuth
equivalent, follow:
• 123 = 123.00°
• N3E = 3.00°
User’s Guide D-1

743-500-022UG420 Version 4.2 / Febuary 1996 Confidential
Data Entry Methods Ec*Trak Directional
• N20W = 340°
• N1.23E = 1.23°
• S28 23W = 208.383°
Note: All entries in the Direction column of the spreadsheet

appear in azimuth or quadrature form, depending on
your last Direction entry.
Entering MD or TVD
Valid keys are 0 – 9 and the decimal point.
Entering Inclination
You may enter inclination in either decimal degrees or in degrees and
minutes, as described for the azimuth form of Direction input (see page
D-1). Inclinations from 0° to 180° are permitted. Some examples of
inclination follow:
• 3 = 3.00°
• 23 = 23.00°
• 123 = 123.00°
• 1 23 = 1.383°
• 1.23 = 1.23°
Entering North/South and East/West Coordinates

You may use N, S, E, W, + or - to denote the sense of the coordinate, and
these characters may come before or after the numeric value. An unsigned
coordinate is north or east, while a minus sign denotes south or west. Some
examples of north/south coordinate entry follow:
• 5000 = N 5000.00
• S 5000 = S 5000.00
• 5000 S = S 5000.00
• -5000 = S 5000.00
• 8000.00- = S 8000.00
• N 8000 = N 8000.00
D-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Confidential 743-500-022UG420 Version 4.2 / Febuary 1996
Ec*Trak Directional Data Entry Methods
Entering Polar Coordinates

Polar coordinates are entered as distance and direction. The coordinates
may be separated by any non-numeric character. For example both
3000@50 and 3000 50 are interpreted as a 3000 ft (or m) displacement
in a direction of 50°.
Entering Curvature
Enter curvature values as a change of angle, in decimal degrees, and an
optional measured depth interval (course length) to denote a rate of change.
The curvature applies between the previous and current stations on the
Well Design Spreadsheet. If you omit the course length, the default you
specify at Structure Edit is used. That default is either 30 meters, 10 meters
or 100 feet.
Some examples of curvature input follow:
• 2 = 2°/30m
• 2/50 = 2°/50m
• 3.25/30 = 3.25°/30m
• 3.5/100 = 3.5°/100m
Some default interpretations of the curvature sense, + or -, are made by the
system when profiles are loaded into the spreadsheet. The symbol ==>
indicates 0 curvature.
Entering Toolface
Toolface is entered as degrees and decimal degrees from −180° to 180°.
User’s Guide D-3

Appendix E
Position Uncertainty
This appendix provides some background regarding the

position uncertainty inherent when making surveys and
generating proposals. The appendix also describes how the
uncertainty issues are handled by Ec*Trak Directional.1
Baker Hughes INTEQ Error Model

The Baker Hughes INTEQ error model provides the framework for
calculating position uncertainties, and the tool error models provide
the parameter values.
The Baker Hughes INTEQ error model is an extension of the Wolff and
de Wardt (WdeW) six-parameter error model. The Baker Hughes INTEQ
model includes seven additional error terms and several additional
parameters, and it includes the dependence of the error terms on
geographic location.
The Baker Hughes INTEQ error model is defined by the equations that
calculate position uncertainties for a specific wellpath from specific
parameter values for a specific location. The Baker Hughes INTEQ error
model provides the framework for calculating position uncertainties. In
contrast, each tool error model (discussed on page E-11 through E-25)
provides values for the parameters of the Baker Hughes INTEQ error
model, including dependence on geographic location.
The following discussion is presented so that it closely corresponds to the
original WdeW paper.2 To clarify the meaning of the various error terms,
first consider the position uncertainty of a straight segment of the wellpath.
This will help in understanding the general case.
1. This appendix contains papers and notes written by Harry Wilson. The Error Model
description was written by Mark Stephenson and modified by Andy Brooks.
2. Wolff, C.J.M. and de Wardt, J.P.: “Borehole Position Uncertainty — Analysis of
Measuring Methods and Derivation of Systematic Error Model”, JPT (December
1981) 2339–2350.
User’s Guide E-1

Position Uncertainty Ec*Trak Directional
Straight Segment
Assume the segment has inclination I (in radians), azimuth A (in radians),
and course length D (in either feet or meters). The lateral (in the horizontal
plane and perpendicular to the direction of the wellpath), radial (in the
horizontal plane and in the direction of the wellpath), and vertical position
uncertainties (in either feet or meters, depending on the units of D) are:
∆L = [ µ 2 + ( ∆ A sin I ) 2 + ρ 2 ] 1 / 2 D
∆R = [ ( ε sin I ) 2 + ( µ cos I ) 2 + ( ∆I cos I ) 2 + ρ 2 ] 1 / 2 D
∆V = [ ( ε cos I ) 2 + ( µ sin I ) 2 + ( ∆I sin I ) 2 + ρ 2 ] 1 / 2 D
where:
∆ indicates the 2σ uncertainty of the quantity that it precedes
µ is the 2σ misalignment uncertainty in radians
ε is the fractional (dimensionless) 2σ measured depth error (“error”
and “uncertainty” are used interchangeably)
ρ is the fractional (dimensionless) 2σ pure positional uncertainty
(for FINDS)
and the azimuth and inclination uncertainties in radians are:
∆ A = ( ∆ A R2 + ∆ A D2 + ∆ A M
2 + ∆A 2 + ∆A 2 + ∆A 2 + ∆A 2 )1 / 2
C G DI DS
∆I = ( ∆I F2 + ∆I S2 + ∆I C2 ) 1 / 2
where:
∆AR is the azimuth reference error
∆AD is the declination azimuth error
∆AM is the magnetic interference azimuth error
∆AC is the residual azimuth error after correction for magnetic
interference
∆AG is the gyro azimuth error
∆ADI is the Seeker DI (Drift, Input) azimuth error
∆ADS is the Seeker DS (Drift, Spin) azimuth error
E-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Ec*Trak Directional Position Uncertainty
∆IF is the fixed inclination error

∆IS is the sag inclination error
∆IC is the residual inclination error after correction for sag.
The names of these terms are unimportant; it is their unique forms of
dependence on inclination, azimuth, and location that are important.
The error terms depend on parameter values which may depend on
location, but not on inclination or azimuth. These parameters have
subscript zeroes attached (for example, the error term ∆AG depends
on the parameter ∆AG0). The error terms are related to the parameters
by weighting factors which may depend on inclination and azimuth;
the seven azimuth error terms (numbered 1–7) are:
1. ∆ A R = ∆ A R0
which corresponds to the WdeW “compass reference error”; for gyro

tools and some magnetic tools, ∆AR0 is a constant independent of
geographic location.
For most Baker Hughes INTEQ magnetic tools, the azimuth reference
error ∆AR0 is calculated from the following formula, as described in
an internal memo from Andy Brooks dated 26 October 1993, and
based on an earlier memo dated 20 August 1993:
∆a 0 tan d 2 ∆m 0 2 1/2
∆ A R0 =  ----------------------  +  ----------------- 
 G   H cos d 
where two parameters are needed for each tool error model:
∆a0, the lumped accelerometer error in g
∆m0, the lumped magnetometer error in gamma.
Also G is the local gravitational field strength in units of g
(assume G equals 1 g)
H is the local magnetic field strength in gammas
d is the local magnetic dip angle.
It is recognized that ∆AR0 for these tools may also depend on the local
inclination and azimuth values, but the expression used here is correct
at 90° inclination and is reasonably close for most inclinations greater
than about 10°. Since the ∆AR0 term is weighted by sinI, the use of
this approximation does not lead to significant errors in the ellipsoid
dimensions.
User’s Guide E-3

(Properly speaking, the values we are using are for the magnetic flux
density B rather than for the magnetic field strength H. In vacuum, a B
field of 1 nanotesla corresponds to an H field of 1 gamma; we treat
these units as equal. This choice of units is consistent with the British
Geological Survey tables that we use.)
2. ∆ A D = ∆ A D0
where ∆AD0 has a different dependence on location than ∆a0 or ∆m0.
3. ∆ A M = ∆ A M0 sin I sin A
which corresponds to the WdeW “magnetic compass error”.
4. ∆ A C = [ ( ∆d 0 S d ) 2 + ( ∆H n0 S H ) 2 + ( ∆H 0 S H ) 2 ] 1 / 2
where:
∆d0 is the magnetic dip angle error in radians
∆Hn0 is the nominal magnetic field error in gammas
∆H0 is the magnetic field error in gammas due to sensor scale
factor error.
The sensitivity factors Sd and SH are defined by:
– sin I sin A [ H h cos I – H v sin I cos A ]

S d = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
H h [ 1 – sin2 I sin2 A ]
– sin I sin A [ sin d cos I + cos d sin I cos A ]

S H = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
H h [ 1 – sin2 I sin2 A ]
where the vertical and horizontal components of the magnetic field

are
H v = H sin d
H h = H cos d

and Sd and SH are set to zero if their denominator is zero, as described

in an internal memo dated 28 October 1993 from Rick Dipersio.
5. ∆ A G = ∆ A G0 sec I
which corresponds to the WdeW “gyrocompass error”.
6. ∆ A DI = ∆ A DI 0 sin I cos A
and
7. ∆ A DS = ∆ A DS0 tan I sin A
Each of the inclination error terms also depends on parameter values

that are independent of inclination and azimuth. The three inclination
error terms (numbered 8–10) are:
8. ∆I F = ∆I F0
which corresponds to the WdeW “true inclination error.” The

inclination dependence which WdeW had assigned to their “true
inclination error” is now included in:
9. ∆I S = ∆I SF0 + ∆I SV 0 sin I
which models the gravity-dependent effect of sag, and:
10. ∆I C = ∆I C0 f S ( I , A )
where fS(I, A) = 1 for now (at a later time, we may wish to include
dependence of the error on inclination and azimuth).
The three remaining parameters are:
11. ε = ε 0
which corresponds to the WdeW “relative depth error”:
User’s Guide E-5

12. ρ = ρ 0
which applies only to FINDS, and:
13. µ = µ 0 ⁄ 2
which corresponds to the WdeW “misalignment error.” The factor of

1 ⁄ 2 accounts for the randomization of misalignment orientation, as
pointed out by Dubrule and Nelson,1 which was overlooked in the
original WdeW paper.
Altogether, the parameters of the Baker Hughes INTEQ error model are
∆AR0 (or ∆a0 and ∆m0), ∆AD0, ∆AM0, ∆d0, ∆Hn0, ∆H0, ∆AG0, ∆ADI0,
∆ADS0, ∆IF0, ∆ISF0, ∆ISV0, ∆IC0, ε0, ρ0, and µ0. Specification of these
parameters, including location dependence, defines a tool error model.
The error model gives rise to a 2σ volume of uncertainty about any
position along the wellpath. This volume takes the shape of an ellipsoid
which can be defined by the lengths and orientations of its principal axes.
The projection of this ellipsoid onto the horizontal plane is the ellipse
defined by half-axes ∆L and ∆R, with the minor axis azimuth either in the
direction of the wellpath (the usual case, where azimuth error dominates)
or perpendicular to the direction of the wellpath. The projection of the
ellipsoid onto a vertical plane has a maximum vertical extent of ±∆V.
In practice, these projections may be more useful than a full description
of the true ellipsoid.
General Case
Now that we know how to calculate the position uncertainties for a straight
segment of wellpath, it is straightforward (but mathematically messy) to
calculate the position uncertainties for an arbitrary wellpath. The procedure
is to divide the wellpath into segments that are approximately straight,
calculate the directed position uncertainties for each segment, and then sum
vectorially the contributions of all the segments. This assumes that the
errors are completely systematic. At tie-on points some errors may be
randomized; for more information, see “Survey Tie-On Methods” on page
E-32.
The general calculation method is essentially the same as the one given in
the appendices of WdeW, with additional error terms as described above,
and a few small changes. The sizes and orientations of the position
uncertainties are derived from a modified 3-dimensional position
covariance matrix through standard numerical methods. Because each
1. Dubrule, O. and Nelson, P.E.: “Evaluation of Directional Survey Errors at Prudhoe
Bay”, SPE Drilling Engineering (September 1987) 257–267.

uncertainty has been specified at the 2σ level, each term in the modified
matrix is four times larger than its corresponding variance or covariance.
The following overview outlines the general method.
Denote the position vector for any point along the wellpath by r, and
assume for later convenience a north, east, and vertical coordinate system.
The position uncertainty is then:
∆r = ∫ ∆u ( s ) ds
where ds is an infinitesimal element of course length, ∆u(s) is the
measurement error vector (fractional position error vector) at measured
depth s, and the integration is from a known reference position (such as the
wellhead) to the measured depth of the position of interest. In practice,
survey information is available at discrete points, so the integral must be
approximated by the sum:
∆r = ∑ ∆uk ( sk )δsk
where the sum is over survey intervals, labelled k, with course lengths δsk,
and the range of the sum is the same as for the integral. Each incremental
position error vector may be decomposed into the individual measurement
error terms described earlier:
∆u k ( s k ) = ∑ ∆ukj ( sk )
where the sum over j ranges from 1 to 11, corresponding to the first 11
measurement error types (the 12th and 13th error terms are handled
differently, as described below). Dropping the subscript k for now as
understood:
∆u ( s ) = ∑ ∆u j ( s ) = ∑ m j w j ( s )v j ( s )
where:
mj is the jth parameter value (m1 = ∆AR0, m2 = ∆AD0, and so on)
wj(s) is the jth weighting function containing the dependence of the
position error term on inclination and azimuth (w1 = 1 × sinI, w2 = 1 ×
sinI, w3 = sin2I sinA, and so on)
vj(s) is the unit vector in the direction of the jth error term contribution
to the measurement error vector.
User’s Guide E-7

It is convenient to introduce three orthogonal unit vectors — the unit vector

along the wellpath:
v AT = ( sin I cos A, sin I sin A, cos I )
the lateral unit vector:
v LT = ( – sin A, cos A, 0 )
and the upward (tilted upward from the horizontal plane) unit vector:
v UT = ( cos I cos A, cos I sin A, – sin I )
Notice that these unit vectors are not constant as you move along the
wellpath, as inclination and azimuth change.
With these conventions, the fractional position measurement error
contributions can be written:
∆u 1 = ∆ A R ( I , A ) sin I v L
where ∆AR as a function of I and A may be either a constant or the same as

the function given on page E-3 for equation 1:
∆u 2 = ∆ A D0 sin I v L
∆u 3 = ∆ A M0 sin2 I sin Av L
∆u 4 = ∆ A C ( I , A ) sin I v L
where ∆AC as a function of I and A is the same as the function given on

page E-4 for equation 4:
∆u 5 = ∆ A G0 tan I v L
∆u 6 = ∆ A DI 0 sin2 I cos A v L
∆u 7 = ∆ A DS0 sin I tan I sin Av L

∆u 8 = ∆I F0 v U
∆u 9 = ∆I S ( I )v U
where ∆IS as a function of I is the same as the function given on page E-5
for equation 9:
∆u 10 = ∆I C0 f S ( I , A )v U
∆u 11 = ε 0 v A
and ∆u12 and ∆u13, which describe the FINDS and misalignment errors,
must be treated separately because they are not in fixed directions.
The individual parameters are assumed to be uncorrelated with one
another. Also, each of the parameters is assumed to have an expectation
value of zero. This differs from the original WdeW model in that we do not
allow the special case of an offset for the magnetic interference error. That
special case was only significant for poor magnetic surveys, and greatly
complicated further error analysis applications such as clearance
calculations.
The modified (north, east, vertical) position covariance matrix is calculated
from the 13 position error contributions as follows. First, substitute the
expression for the measurement errors ∆uj into the first equation for ∆r:
∆r = ∑ m j ∫ w j ( s )v j ( s ) ds
For convenience, introduce the simplifying notation for the integrals:
aj = ∫ w j ( s )v j ( s ) ds
In practice these integrals are replaced by sums over survey intervals as
before. They can be calculated by substituting the known inclinations and
azimuths of the survey. In terms of these integrals, the contribution of the
first eleven terms to the covariance matrix is:
C 1-11 = ∑ m 2j a j a Tj
where the sum is for j from 1 to 11. Further details are provided in
Appendix A of WdeW. The contribution of the FINDS error is a sphere:
User’s Guide E-9

C 12 = ρ 2 s 2 U
where U is the 3×3 identity matrix (also, remember s is the total measured
depth from the starting reference position to the position of interest).
Finally, as derived in WdeW, the contribution of the misalignment error is:
C 13 = µ 2 ∑ ( δs k2 U – δr k δr kT )
where the sum is over survey intervals from the reference position to the
position of interest, and:
µ
µ = ------0-
2
Altogether, the position covariance matrix is:
C = ∑ m 2j a j a Tj + ρ 2 s 2 U + µ 2 ∑ ( δsk2 U – δrk δrkT )

The diagonal elements of this matrix are the squares of the 2σ position
uncertainties in the north, east, and vertical directions. The 2σ ellipsoid
equation is:
∆r kT C –1 ∆r k = 1
from which the ellipsoid axes and their orientations, or projections of the
ellipsoid, can be calculated using standard computational methods. As an
example, the analytic form of the equation for the horizontal ellipse
projection is:
( c 22 ∆N 2 – 2c 12 ∆N ∆E + c 11 ∆E 2 ) ⁄ ( c 11 c 22 – c 12
2 ) = 1
and the vertical extent of the ellipsoid is:
∆V = ± c 33
where cij is the element of C in the ith row and jth column.
Notice that the particular computational methods used to solve the matrix
equations are not part of the specification of the model. Any methods that
work may be used; the ones used in the current version of Ec*Trak
Directional are fine.

This discussion of the general case has been very terse. Some additional
discussion and derivations of equations may be found in the original
WdeW paper.
Tool Error Models

A tool error model is defined by specifying values for all the parameters of
the Baker Hughes INTEQ error model, including the location dependence
of the parameters. Two general simplifying assumptions are made:
• There is only one level of magnetic interference correction; all
methods (DRAW, EMS, and others) result in identical amounts
of azimuth correction.
• There is only one level of sag correction, and it affects only
inclination; all methods (Thomas Dahl’s 3-D FLX program,
Sysdrill’s 2-D EMS subprogram, and others) result in identical
amounts of inclination correction.
The presently defined tool error models follow. Parameter values are
quoted at the 2σ level. Only those parameters with non-zero values are
listed for each tool.
Two error terms, ∆AR and ∆AC, make use of the nominal values for
magnetic dip angle and field strength. The values are obtained from SPOT
and change with time. Therefore successive uncertainty calculations for
a well change over time. Consideration was given to whether the values
should be frozen, based on a selected date. Unfortunately, this would
lock in the date at structure level and cause the date to be applied to
all subsequent surveys on the structure. Since the impact of fluctuating
magnetic field parameters on the overall uncertainty is very small, we
have decided that no action is necessary.
Standardizing error values at two significant figures was considered, but
rejected. Although mathematically correct, it makes little difference to the
outputs and might be confusing for users.
User’s Guide E-11

Photomechanical Magnetic
∆AR0 = 1.00 degrees
∆AD0 = lookup table value (table starts on page E-26)
∆AM0 = 1.00 degrees
∆IF0 = 0.50 degrees
∆ISF0 = 0.10 degrees
∆ISV0 = 0.30 degrees
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
The nonzero parameters for this model are similar to those of the WdeW
good magnetic example, but with additional parameters for declination
error and fixed inclination error. As stated earlier, the azimuth reference
error and declination error depend on location in different ways.
Photomechanical Magnetic (Bent Sub)

ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 1.00 degrees
This model is the same as the Photomechanical Magnetic model, except for
the values of ∆AM0, and the sag and misalignment parameters.
Steering Tool
∆AR0 is calculated from the Baker Hughes INTEQ magnetic reference
error equation with
∆a0 = 0.076 degrees-g; multiply by π/180 to find the value
in g
∆m0 = 5670 degrees-gamma; multiply by π/180 to find the
value in gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees

Steering Tool (Bent Sub)

error equation with
∆a0 = 0.076 degrees-g
∆m0 = 5670 degrees-gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 1.00 degrees
Steering Tool (Sag Corrected)

error equation with
∆IC0 = 0.1 degrees
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
User’s Guide E-13

Steering Tool (Mag Corrected)

error equation with
∆AC is calculated at each station using the following parameter
values:
∆d0 = lookup table value (table starts on page E-26)
∆Hn0 = lookup table value (table starts on page E-26)
∆H0 = 150 gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
Steering Tool (Sag and Mag Corrected)

error equation with
values:
∆H0 = 150 gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees

EMS
error equation with
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
EMS (Sag Corrected)

error equation with
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
User’s Guide E-15

EMS (Mag Corrected)

error equation with
values:
∆H0 = 150 gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
EMS (Sag and Mag Corrected)

error equation with:
values:
∆H0 = 150 gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees

MTC (Collar) and DMWD (DSP)

ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
All ∆a0, ∆m0 and ∆H0 parameter values for MWD tools are from an
internal memo authored by Robert Estes and dated May 23, 1994. His
variable names for these parameters are, respectively, σlg, σlh and σH. To
convert from his 1σ values to our 2σ values, multiply by two. To convert
mGauss to gamma for σlh multiply by 100, and to convert Gauss to gamma
for σH multiply by 105.
MTC (Collar) (Bent Sub) and DMWD (DSP) (Bent Sub)

ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 1.00 degrees
User’s Guide E-17

MTC (Collar) (Sag Corrected) and DMWD (DSP)

(Sag Corrected)
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
MTC (Collar) (Mag Corrected) and DMWD (DSP)

(Mag Corrected)
values:
∆H0 = 464 gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees

MTC (Collar) (Sag and Mag Corrected) and DMWD (DSP)

(Sag and Mag Corrected)
values:
∆H0 = 464 gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
DDS (Collar)
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
User’s Guide E-19

DDS (Collar) (Bent Sub)

ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 1.00 degrees
DDS (Collar) (Sag Corrected)

ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees

DDS (Collar) (Mag Corrected)

values:
∆H0 = 124 gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
DDS (Collar) (Sag and Mag Corrected)

values:
∆H0 = 124 gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
User’s Guide E-21

NaviTrak (DAS)
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
NaviTrak (DAS) (Bent Sub)

ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 1.00 degrees
NaviTrak (DAS) (Sag Corrected)

ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees

NaviTrak (DAS) (Mag Corrected)

∆AM0 = N/A
values:
∆H0 = 152 gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
NaviTrak (DAS) (Sag and Mag Corrected)

values:
∆H0 = 152 gamma
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
User’s Guide E-23

Level Rotor Gyro

∆AG0 = 1.00 degrees
ε0 = 1.5 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
The nonzero parameters for this model are similar to those of the WdeW
good gyro example, but with an additional parameter for fixed inclination
error.
Level Rotor Gyro (Bent Sub)

∆AG0 = 1.00 degrees
ε0 = 2.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 1.00 degrees
This model is the same as the “Level Rotor Gyro” tool model, except for
the values of the sag, measured depth, and misalignment parameters.
Seeker
∆ADI0 = (180 / π) 0.10 / [15.041 cos(latitude)] degrees
∆ADS0 = (180 / π) 0.10 / [15.041 cos(latitude)] degrees
ε0 = 1.0 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.10 degrees
The list of nonzero parameters for this model differs from the “Level Rotor
Gyro” model in that gyro DI and DS parameters are included in place of the
gyro azimuth error parameter, and the azimuth reference error is omitted
for Seeker.
Note: The units for ∆ADI0 and ∆ADS0 are degrees/hour; when
divided by the earth’s rotation rate expressed in degrees/
hour, the resulting error is in radians, which must be
converted to degrees for consistency with the other
azimuth error terms.

RIGS
∆AR0 = 0.15
∆ISF = 0.00 degrees
∆ISV = 0.10 degrees
ε0 = 0.5 × 10-3
µ0 = 0.025 degrees
Details of this error model are given in a paper by Mark Stephenson and
Harry Wilson.1 The error model has been modified slightly to incorporate
separate sag and true inclination error terms.
FINDS
The only nonzero parameter for the FINDS model is:
ρ0 = 1.0 × 10-3
The previous model, 0.5 × 10-3, was based on testing carried out early
in the tool’s development. For much of the tool’s life, tools were tested
between jobs over a land surveyed route and must perform to better than
1.0 × 10-3. This criterion has been used to specify the new model since it is
more relevant to the bulk of the surveys run during the life of the FINDS
tool. The difference between 100% of tools meeting the criterion during
test and our assigning a 95% confidence level (2σ) to the model is a rough-
and-ready method of allowing for unknown downhole effects.
RIGS 2 and Pinpoint (under development)

The error models for these tools are still to be finalized. The active Kalmn
filtering used by both tools makes it difficult to model them satisfactorily
using the systematic error model described here. It is intended to provide
such models, but they will only be made available once sufficient data are
acquired to validate them.
Table of Location-Dependent Uncertainties

The following table was obtained from the British Geological Survey
(BGS). Do not interpolate; use the uncertainties for the nearest latitude
and longitude (in that order).
1. Stephenson, M. and Wilson, H.: “Improving Quality Control of Directional Survey

Data With Continuous Inertial Navigation”, SPE Drilling Engineering (June 1992)
105–106.
User’s Guide E-25

The quantities ∆AD0 and ∆d in minutes must be converted into degrees by

dividing by 60. Values are given at the 2σ level.
Location Dependent Uncertainties

Lat Long ∆AD0 ∆d ∆Hn
deg deg min min gamma
90 0 261 27 383
90 30 261 27 383
90 60 261 27 383
90 90 261 27 383
90 120 261 27 383
90 150 261 27 383
90 180 261 27 383
90 210 261 27 383
90 240 261 27 383
90 270 261 27 383
90 300 261 27 383
90 330 261 27 383
75 0 63 28 361
75 30 63 28 361
75 60 63 28 361
75 90 63 28 361
75 120 63 28 361
75 150 63 28 361
75 180 63 28 361
75 210 63 28 361
75 240 261 27 383
75 270 261 27 383
75 300 261 27 383
75 330 261 27 383
60 0 63 28 361
60 30 63 28 361
60 60 53 21 297
60 90 53 21 297
60 120 53 21 297
60 150 53 21 297
60 180 63 28 361
60 210 63 28 361
60 240 63 28 361
60 270 63 28 361
60 300 63 28 361
60 330 63 28 361
45 0 53 21 297
45 30 53 21 297
45 60 53 21 297

Location Dependent Uncertainties (continued)

45 90 53 21 297
45 120 53 21 297
45 150 53 21 297
45 180 53 21 297
45 210 53 21 297
45 240 53 21 297
45 270 63 28 361
45 300 63 28 361
45 330 53 21 297
30 0 53 21 297
30 30 53 21 297
30 60 52 22 314
30 90 52 22 314
30 120 52 22 314
30 150 52 22 314
30 180 53 21 297
30 210 53 21 297
30 240 53 21 297
30 270 53 21 297
30 300 53 21 297
30 330 53 21 297
15 0 52 22 314
15 30 52 22 314
15 60 52 22 314
15 90 52 22 314
15 120 52 22 314
15 150 52 22 314
15 180 52 22 314
15 210 52 22 314
15 240 52 22 314
15 270 52 22 314
15 300 53 21 297
15 330 52 22 314
0 0 52 22 314
0 30 52 22 314
0 60 52 22 314
0 90 52 22 314
0 120 52 22 314
0 150 52 22 314
0 180 52 22 314
0 210 52 22 314
0 240 52 22 314
User’s Guide E-27


0 270 52 22 314
0 300 52 22 314
0 330 52 22 314
-15 0 52 22 314
-15 30 52 22 314
-15 60 52 22 314
-15 90 52 22 314
-15 120 53 21 297
-15 150 52 22 314
-15 180 52 22 314
-15 210 52 22 314
-15 240 52 22 314
-15 270 52 22 314
-15 300 52 22 314
-15 330 52 22 314
-30 0 53 21 297
-30 30 53 21 297
-30 60 53 21 297
-30 90 53 21 297
-30 120 53 21 297
-30 150 53 21 297
-30 180 53 21 297
-30 210 53 21 297
-30 240 52 22 314
-30 270 52 22 314
-30 300 52 22 314
-30 330 52 22 314
-45 0 53 21 297
-45 30 53 21 297
-45 60 53 21 297
-45 90 63 28 361
-45 120 63 28 361
-45 150 53 21 297
-45 180 53 21 297
-45 210 53 21 297
-45 240 53 21 297
-45 270 53 21 297
-45 300 53 21 297
-45 330 53 21 297
-60 0 63 28 361
-60 30 63 28 361
-60 60 63 28 361


-60 90 63 28 361
-60 120 63 28 361
-60 150 63 28 361
-60 180 63 28 361
-60 210 63 28 361
-60 240 53 21 297
-60 270 53 21 297
-60 300 53 21 297
-60 330 53 21 297
-75 0 63 28 361
-75 30 63 28 361
-75 60 261 27 383
-75 90 261 27 383
-75 120 261 27 383
-75 150 261 27 383
-75 180 63 28 361
-75 210 63 28 361
-75 240 63 28 361
-75 270 63 28 361
-75 300 63 28 361
-75 330 63 28 361
-90 0 261 27 383
-90 30 261 27 383
-90 60 261 27 383
-90 90 261 27 383
-90 120 261 27 383
-90 150 261 27 383
-90 180 261 27 383
-90 210 261 27 383
-90 240 261 27 383
-90 270 261 27 383
-90 300 261 27 383
-90 330 261 27 383
User’s Guide E-29

Additional Notes Relating to Position Uncertainty
Editing of Error Models

Earlier versions of Ec*Trak Directional allowed existing models to be
edited at will. This was a dangerous feature which compromised database
integrity. Error models are therefore no longer editable. However, it is
recognized that there is a requirement for user-specified models. The user
can choose an existing model as a starting point.
In keeping with the desire to maintain database integrity, the program
provides the user with a duplicate of the selected model, and prompts
for the entry of a new name. The program insists on a name and checks
the uniqueness of that name within the structure. The model spreadsheet
states which standard model was used as a basis. No two models within
a structure can have the same name. The entry spreadsheet also prompts
for the author’s name. Once entered the model can not be edited, but the
user may delete user-specified models.
Station Interval Sensitivity

The size of the ellipse is affected by the frequency of the survey interval.
The effect is small and only occurs where there is build or turn.
User-specified interpolation interval does not affect ellipse size. Only the
frequency of stations entered by the user, in either survey mode or proposal
mode, has an effect. Proposals may therefore provide extreme examples of
the problem, since they use only two stations to define a curved section.
However this is not so, since no matter how many points are defined,
proposal ellipsoids are automatically calculated on 100′ stations through
build or turn sections.
The impact of station interval on ellipse size is small. It depends on the
station interval, the size of the errors and the dogleg severity.
For 1,600′ from 0 to 80 deg inclination with a WdeW poor gyro assigned,
the following major dimensions apply:
Station Half
Interval Major Axis
1,600′ 397′
200′ 118′
100′ 103′
50′ 96′
It is accepted that a reduced number of survey stations increases position

uncertainty. However, the effect depends on several variables and is not
easy to predict. The original WdeW paper did not deal with survey station

interval. Some tools such as FINDS and RIGS navigate continuously and
do not have station interval dependency.
It is desirable that Ec*Trak Directional does not exhibit station interval
sensitivity. Our error models should be based on our standard procedures
for running survey tools. These should guarantee that extreme course
lengths are not used.
Andy Brooks’ investigation determined that the effect is due to the
inclination and azimuth of the end station (of the two stations that define
each interval) being used in the weighting of the error terms. (In the
extreme 1600′ station interval example, the interval has an average
inclination of 40 deg, but the end station, at 80 deg inclination, is used
to define the uncertainty.) Therefore, the smaller the interval the more
correct the calculated uncertainty.
Although it is possible to improve on the existing method of calculation,
in most situations the effect is negligible, and therefore any change to
the method will be held over for the future. Meantime, users should be
informed of the effect and its cause so that suitable precautions can be
taken when working with extreme well profiles.
Errors Assigned to Sidetracks

Where a proposal is tied to an existing well, the user has the option to
specify whether or not the sidetrack will be surveyed from the surface
or from the tie-on point. The prompt “Resurvey old hole if sidetracking?
yes/no” appears when Survey Errors is selected at the Well Design
Spreadsheet (for more information, see page 9-19).
Users should be aware of the anti-collision scan implications of
resurveying or not resurveying the old hole to the sidetrack point. If the
old hole is not resurveyed, proximity calculations between the original
well and the sidetrack overestimate the uncertainty of the old well relative
to the new well since no account is taken of the fact that both wells are
common down to the tie point. If the old hole is resurveyed, the proximity
calculation is valid.
Depth to Start Errors

Drill depth zero (DDZ) was chosen as being the least ambiguous
description for the vertical datum from which survey data are normally
referenced. A physical description of drill depth zero (such as rotary table)
is included on the Slot Information screen (see Figure 4-6 on page 4-4).
The option to override the structure level default using the Interpolation/
Range Specification screen has not been provided. The inclusion of the
option at structure level is thought to accommodate most requirements.
User’s Guide E-31

If the seabed option is selected, the drill depth zero to seabed value is
presumed to be a vertical depth, not a measured depth.
Survey Tie-On Methods

The position uncertainty at any depth greater than the bottom of the first
survey depends, in addition to the individual survey tool error models, on
the method used to sum the errors across the tie-on.
To derive the most accurate assessment of position uncertainty, summation
of errors at tie-ons ought to be tailored to the particular combination of
tools used.
Earlier versions of Ec*Trak Directional allowed only one method, which
presumes that there is no correlation between the uncertainty of the first
survey and the second. Combined uncertainty at the bottom of the second
survey equates to the root of the sum of the squares of each of the two
surveys’ uncertainty dimension. This is a reasonable method for any two
tools which have errors that are genuinely uncorrelated, for example,
MWD tied to a north seeking gyro.
The method has been retained under the description “fully random”.
However, the “fully random” method underestimates the uncertainty when
correlation of errors does exist, for example, MWD tied to EMS. For
combinations such as this, some error terms (for example, depth and
declination) are correlated, while others (for example, sensor inclination
error) are not. It is desirable to be able to model such relationships, but
unfortunately it is not possible to do so under the present error model
structure.
A compromise solution, described as “systematic”, is provided, under
which error terms that are identical, one model to the other, are treated
as being correlated and are summed systematically. This is a sweeping
generalization and is not correct in many circumstances. However, when
it is incorrect it overestimates the uncertainty, unlike the “fully random”
option which tends to underestimate. It should not be confused with a
“fully systematic” summation, whereby the combined uncertainty equals
the sum of the two individual uncertainties under all conditions.
Because “systematic” is the more conservative of the two methods
available, it is recommended as the Baker Hughes INTEQ standard.
It is the Ec*Trak Directional default setup.
The degree to which our “systematic” method delivers answers closer to
“fully random” or closer to “fully systematic” depends on the degree of
similarity between the parameters of two error models.
Calculation of uncertainty across tie-ons has a large impact on subsequent
position uncertainty, and it is presently the area of greatest weakness in our

error modeling capability. It is hoped to improve on the present limitations,

but meantime it is important that users understand those limitations and
plan accordingly.
Separation Factor
The use of Separation Factors (SF) as a means of defining proximity is
not Baker Hughes INTEQ policy, but is the preferred method of several
customers. In most applications it is used in conjunction with simple cones
of uncertainty. The two calculations are compatible since both are over
simple, yet robust, planning tools. Some customers may wish to calculate
SF for true ellipsoids. Like the calculation of edge to edge separation, SF
takes no account of the probability distribution of the ellipsoid.
Several different methods of calculating separation factor exist. Ec*Trak
Directional uses the formula C/(C−E), where C is the center-to-center
separation and E is the closest approach of the ellipsoid. This method has
the advantage of giving the same answer as other methods when applied
to simple cones of uncertainty, while taking into account ellipsoid
orientations when applied to more complex models.
Casing Dimensions
In top hole the casing dimension can be more significant than the position
uncertainty, in terms of well proximities. Ec*Trak Directional therefore
allows inclusion of casing dimensions in proximity calculations, with and
without ellipses (see pages 3-11 and 12-7).
The correct method of combining the hard bounded cylindrical volume of
the casing with the 3D probability distribution of the surveyed position
is no doubt complex. Ec*Trak Directional takes the simple approach of
subtracting the casing radius from the well to well separation. Although not
correct, this method has close to the desired effect when it is most critical
— large casing, small separation — and has reducing impact as uncertainty
increases.
Note: Casing dimensions can not be included in wellpath with

ellipses reports.
If inclusion of casing dimensions is selected, either at the Options menu

in Structure Setup or at the Interpolation/Range Specification screen,
Ec*Trak Directional automatically identifies any object wells that do not
have casing programs and assigns them the casing program from the
reference well. Casing shoe depths are as per the TVDs of the reference
well.
Note: If the reference well does not have a casing program

assigned, the report gives no indication of this; the
User’s Guide E-33

proximity calculation assigns a casing dimension of zero

to the reference well.

For anti-collision scanning on a multi-well single structure (such as an
onshore pad or offshore platform), surface location uncertainty is of
minimal concern. Such structures normally have a single reference point
surveyed. Offset measurements are then taken over short distances to the
individual wellheads. The discrepancy between actual and measured
location of the wells is liable to be so small that it can be ignored.
However, surface location uncertainty should be considered in circum-
stances where the surface location of the object and reference have been
surveyed independently. For example:
• relief wells
• close pass situations of wells from different structures
• exploration wells positioned near concession boundaries
• intersection of small targets or targets with hard boundaries
Where possible the uncertainty value should be obtained from the client. If
this is not available then the positioning system used should be determined,
and the appropriate radius selected from the following table.

Uncertainties are given to 2 standard deviations.
Values are correct for October 1993.
Radius of
Method
Uncertainty
A. Offshore
1. Transit satellite on rig — Single point 15m
2. Translocation 5m
3. GPS satellite on rig — Pseudo range (single point) 25m
4. Differential 15m
5. Carrier phase 5m
6. Radionavigation — Pulse/8 30m
7. Syledis 8m
8. Miniranger, Trisponder 5m
B. Onshore
1. Transit satellite — Single point 10m
2. Translocation 1m
3. GPS Satellite — Pseudo range 20m
4. Differential 10m
5. Carrier phase 1m
6. Theodolite/EDM traverse 2m

Position Uncertainty vs. Depth Diagram

Although the data are available in tabular form, diagrams allow one to
visualize position uncertainty over the length of the well. They also clearly
show changes in the rate of generation of uncertainty for different tools.
These are features that are appreciated by client Drilling Engineers and
other personnel. The diagrams also serve as an in-house educational tool.
Different survey programs can be tried (and illustrated) against the
positional specification, and the most cost-effective program determined.
User’s Guide E-35

Appendix F
Logos
This appendix shows the logos that you can place on plots
in Ec*Trak Directional.
You can place one or more company logos on your plot. For more
information about how to do it, see page 16-19.
The diagrams on the following pages show the outline version of each
logo, suitable for sending to a pen plotter. The file name to enter is
also given.
Most logos also have a color version, which is not shown in this appendix;
their files have a .c extension.
The logos are presented in the alphabetical order of their file names.
User’s Guide F-1

Logos Ec*Trak Directional
agip / agip.c amoco / amoco.c arco / arco.c
beb / beb.c bhp / bhp.c bp / bp.c
bpcolombia / bpcolombia.c britannia / britannia.c britgas / britgas.c
chevron / chevron.c clyde / clyde.c conoco / conoco.c
F-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Ec*Trak Directional Logos
corpoven / corpoven.c danop / danop.c dbe / dbe.c
dea / dea.c ecopetrol / ecopetrol.c elf / elf.c
enron / enron.c enterprise / enterprise.c esso / esso.c
exal / exal.c exxon / exxon.c foralith / foralith.c
User’s Guide F-3

gommern / gommern.c hess / hess.c hibernia / hibernia.c
inteq / inteq.c ivg / ivg.c kbb / kbb.c
kca / kca.c lagoven / lagoven.c maersk / maersk.c
marathon / marathon.c maraven / maraven.c maxus / maxus.c

mexpetrol / mexpetrol.c mnd / mnd.c mobil / mobil.c
nam / nam.c norsk / norsk.c omv / omv.c
oryx / oryx.c oxy / oxy.c pe / pe.c
pennzoil / pennzoil.c petrobalt / petrobalt.c phillips / phillips.c
User’s Guide F-5

ple / ple.c polish / polish.c preussag / preussag.c
prostar / prostar.c rag / rag.c ramoil / ramoil.c
rig shell / shell.c statoil / statoil.c
swiss / swiss.c tatoil tecpetrol / tecpetrol.c

texaco / texaco.c thermostar / thermostar.c total / total.c
ugs / ugs.c unap / unap.c uniontexas / uniontexas.c
unocal / unocal.c wintersh / wintersh.c ypf / ypf.c
User’s Guide F-7

Glossary
A
annotations
data such as casing, comments and targets that can appear on a plot
at your option. See page 15-9.
ASCII file
a computer file containing readable text. If you look at an ASCII
file or load it into a text editor, you can read the file contents. See
page 17-6.
aspect ratio
the ratio between the height and width of a rectangular area. See
page 15-24.
attributes
the qualities that govern the appearance of lines and text on a plot.
Color, line width, line style, text height and text style are the
attributes for art objects and text. See page 16-3.
axes
more than one axis. See page A-7.
azimuth
the horizontal direction expressed on a compass system (0 – 360
degrees). See page A-1.
B
Baker Hughes INTEQ error model
thirteen-parameter model for calculating position uncertainties. It is
an enhancement to the six-parameter Wolff and de Wardt model.
See page E-1.
blank data field
see empty data field
break
click the right mouse button while on a graphics screen. See page
15-5.
build
a wellpath section whose inclination increases with MD at a constant
rate and whose curvature is positive. See page 8-12.
User’s Guide G-1

Glossary Ec*Trak Directional
C
case
These are UPPER CASE or CAPITAL letters. These are lower case
letters. See page 1-5.
case-sensitivity
when the computer makes a distinction between upper and lower
case letters. For example, the Match in Menu function is case
sensitive. See page 1-5.
casing
steel pipe which lines the borehole and is cemented into place to
provide additional support and a pressure-tight seal. Casing extends
to the surface. See page 6-8.
central meridian
the north-south line at the middle of a grid zone, from which easting
measurements to a point are made. See page A-7.
change paper
a function on the Main Graphics menu which allows you to change
the paper size of a plot from its pre-determined size. If invoked, the
plot is erased and you must reconstruct it. See page 17-11.
clearance
the distance between two wellpaths. See page 13-7.
comment
any notation you wish to make at a particular depth. Comments are
printed on reports and are noted on plots. See page 9-16.
completed design
when all stations within a wellpath design have each data field filled
in, except for polar coordinates and a toolface for the last station. See
page 8-19.
[CONTROL-P]
Do a screen print of a non-report or a non-graphic screen. See page
17-1.
convergence
the angle between grid north and true north. See page A-2.
cursor control keys
the four arrow keys, plus keys such as [BACKSPACE], [DELETE],
[INSERT], [PgUp], [PgDn], [HOME], [END] and so on. See page 1-8.
G-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Ec*Trak Directional Glossary
curvature
instantaneous rate of inclination change. In two dimensions the
curvature value is the build or drop rate; in three dimensions
curvature is the dogleg severity. See page 7-5.
cycle
switch among three or more possible choices. Toggle refers to two
choices. See page 1-9.
D
data field
an area of the screen where you can enter or change information. See
page 1-8.
data hierarchy
the ranking of data in the Ec*Trak Directional database. The field is
the highest level, followed by the structure, the slot and the wellpath.
See page 1-7.
database
the collection of stored data which Ec*Trak Directional accesses to
respond to your commands. See page 1-9.
datum
text, not numbers, describing a coordinate or point. The text is used
where applicable in reports and plots. See page 3-17.
declination
see magnetic declination
definitive proposal
the best wellpath design for a slot. You can not have more than one
definitive proposal per slot. See page 8-23.
definitive survey
the best survey section for a slot. Each slot may have no more than
one definitive survey. Any survey section that the definitive survey
ties to is also considered definitive. See page 10-9.
design station
a significant point on the proposed wellpath where some change in
the design takes place. See page 7-5.
destination
an area to receive data which originated at a source. See page 6-11.
User’s Guide G-3

direction
the horizontal direction of a particular point along the wellpath,
measured clockwise from a north reference point. See page 7-5.
disabling a device
cutting off contact between Ec*Trak Directional and an external
device, commonly a printer or a plotter. You disable a device
through a series of menus within Ec*Trak Directional. See page
17-9.
dogleg severity
a single value which accounts for changes in both inclination and
azimuth in a wellpath interval. Enter its value on the Well Design
Spreadsheet under Curvature. See page 7-5.
drop
a wellpath section whose inclination decreases at a constant rate
with increasing MD and whose curvature is negative. See page 8-12.
E
easting
the distance between a point and the central meridian of a grid zone.
See page A-7.
Ec*Trak Directional system administrator
the person in charge of setting up and maintaining your Ec*Trak
Directional system — including hardware, SCO Unix, X Windows
and Ec*Trak Directional components. See page 2-3.
Edit Layout option
provides facilities for manipulating entire sub-plots, whose
information is extracted from the database. See page 15-1.
elevation
distance above or below a reference point. See page 4-5.
ellipse of uncertainty
an ellipse which represents the spatial extent of possible survey
instrument errors. See page 12-6.
ellipsoid
a model of the earth which takes into account its non-spherical
nature due to flattening at the poles. See page A-6.
empty data field
a data field with nothing in it. An empty data field is different from
a data field which contains a value of 0. See page 7-6.

enabling a device
establishing contact between Ec*Trak Directional and an external
device, commonly a printer or a plotter. You enable a device through
a series of menus within Ec*Trak Directional. See page 17-11.
equator
the set of points on the earth’s surface which are equidistant from
the north and south poles and whose plane is perpendicular to
the axis of rotation. The equator is located at 0 degrees latitude. See
page A-5.
exit
leave a section of the program and save any data you entered or
changed. See page 1-9.
F
field
the highest data level. A field can own a number of structures. See
page 1-7.
field reference point
a point on the earth’s surface which serves as the field’s location,
expressed using a global coordinate system. See page 1-7.
function keys
the set of keys labelled [F1], [F2] and so on. These keys perform
different functions depending on where you are in a program.
Ec*Trak Directional only uses [F1] through [F4]. See page 1-4.
G
geodetics
the study of mapping the earth. See page A-1.
geographic north
see true north
geographic pole
the two points (North Pole and South Pole) which lie on the earth’s
axis of rotation. The poles are located at 90 degrees north and south
latitude. See page A-1.
global position
the coordinates of a point on the surface of the earth, expressed by
latitude and longitude. See page 5-3.
User’s Guide G-5

graphic screen
a screen in Ec*Trak Directional where a graph is displayed.
Keystrokes do not work on graphic screens, but the mouse does
work. See page 1-6.
graphical sub-plot
a sub-plot which consists of a graph representing information in the
database. See page 15-6.
grid correction angle
see convergence
grid north
When the earth’s curved surface is approximated by a two-
dimensional rectangular grid, the northerly direction of the grid is
grid north. It coincides with true north only for the central meridian
of the grid. See page A-2.
grid position
the coordinates of a point on the surface of the earth, expressed
in terms of a distance east and north of grid reference lines. See page
5-4.
group membership
The system administrator assigns each user to one or more groups.
Each group, in turn, may access (or be denied access to) certain areas
of the computer system, including certain functions within Ec*Trak
Directional. See page 1-4.
H
hold
a wellpath section whose inclination does not change with MD and
whose curvature is 0. See page 8-12.
horizontal view
a graph which projects the wellpath onto a horizontal plane, also
known as a plan view. See page 14-1.
I
incomplete wellpath design
a Well Design Spreadsheet which has one or more blank fields
(not counting Polar Coordinates and the last Toolface data field).
You can not save or graph such a wellpath design. See page 8-21.

Instant Graphics
a graphical system available only from the Rigsite Survey
Spreadsheet. Within the Instant Graphics window, you can
change the graph type. See page 11-9.
International Date Line
the meridian farthest from the Greenwich meridian. The Interna-
tional Date Line is located in the Pacific Ocean at 180 degrees
longitude. See page A-7.
Interpolation/Range Specification screen
when generating a report or plot, this screen allows you to specify
a variety of options and to focus on specific depths or ranges. See
page 12-5.
J
J [2D] profile
consists of two sections, build/drop and hold. See page 8-12.
J [3D] profile
consists of two sections — build/drop with turn and hold. See page
8-13.
K
kick off point
as used in Ec*Trak Directional, it is the design station at which a
profile is loaded. In a simple design starting at the wellhead, the kick
off point usually appears on the second line of the spreadsheet. See
page 8-11.
L
Lambert
a grid system which is based on a conformal conic projection
and whose central meridian and base latitude can be changed
as required. See page A-8.
latitude
the distance of a point north or south of the equator, expressed in
degrees. See page A-5.
lead angle
the angle to drill away from the wellpath design to compensate for
walk in a later hold section. See page 9-11.
left-click
press and release the left mouse button. See page 1-5.
User’s Guide G-7

license
a well identification number issued by a regulatory body. See page
6-3.
line attributes
the characteristics of wellpath lines on a plot, including their color,
style and width. See page 15-18.
liner
a section of casing which runs from the bottom of the previous string
to the bottom of the borehole. There is minimal overlap with the
previous casing. See page 6-9.
local grid system
a grid system adopted to a smaller geographic area. Each one has
different baseline coordinates and projections. See page A-9.
location
a text description of the field, such as North Sea, as opposed to the
global coordinates which define the field’s position. See page 3-4.
login name
a unique name assigned by the system administrator to each
Ec*Trak Directional user. You must have a valid login name to
use the program. See page 1-4.
longitude
the distance east or west of the prime meridian, expressed in
degrees. See page A-5.
M
magnetic declination
the angle between magnetic and true north. Magnetic declination
values change with location and time. See page A-2.
magnetic north
the direction of the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic
field lines at a particular point on the earth’s surface pointing to the
magnetic pole. See page A-2.
magnetic pole
the points where the earth’s magnetic field lines converge. There
are magnetic north and south poles, which are different from the
geographic north and south poles. The magnetic pole locations
change significantly with time. See page A-2.

Main Menu
the starting point for all operations in Ec*Trak Directional. It
is the first menu where you can provide input to the program. See
page 1-2.
MD
distance along the wellpath. See page 6-11.
measured depth
see MD
menu field
a data field whose choices are presented in menu form. Highlight the
desired item and press [ENTER] to select it. See page 1-9.
meridians of longitude
the set of north-south rings perpendicular to the equator and running
through the geographic poles. See page A-5.
mouse
a pointing device which is used on graphic screens and on the Report
Previewer screen. The mouse pointer moves as you move the mouse.
To perform a given task, position the pointer in a particular area of
the screen and click certain mouse buttons. See page 1-4.
N
next reference
If you specify multiple reference data, Next Reference calls the
subsequent plot to the Graphics screen. See page 14-17.
non-graphic screens
Ec*Trak Directional screens such as menus, spreadsheets and
data screens where the cursor is controlled by keystrokes. See page
1-4.
non-profile station
a line on the Well Design Spreadsheet which is not part of a profile.
See page 9-6.
normal data field
a data field where you type in necessary information. See page 1-8.
normal video
a display of data in black type on a white background. On a
spreadsheet, a data field in normal video indicates a value that
Ec*Trak Directional calculated. See page 8-4.
User’s Guide G-9

northing
the distance from a point to the base latitude of a grid zone. In the
UTM grid the base latitude is the equator. See page A-7.
nudge
a wellpath section which is generally used to increase well separa-
tion underneath a structure so that the wellpath kicks off in a less
congested region. See page 9-7.
O
object data
secondary data for a report or plot. In comparison calculations,
object data are compared to reference data. See page 12-11.
offset slots
to move all the slots on a structure by a certain distance, both north
and east, while keeping the structure reference point fixed. See page
4-10.
operator
the name of the company drilling in the specified field. Ec*Trak
Directional permits a field name to be associated with more than one
operator. See page 1-7.
optimize a wellpath design
Adjust a completed wellpath design to a certain desired result (such
as minimum MD) while continuing to satisfy all the requirements
for the wellpath. See page 8-20.
overspecification
placing too many restrictions on a wellpath design. To complete the
design, blank out one or more of the data fields that you specified.
See page 9-4.
ownership of data
the concept that a higher level in the data hierarchy owns the data of
levels beneath it. For example, a field owns the data of its structures.
See page 1-7.
P
parallels of latitude
the set of east-west rings around the earth parallel to the equator. See
page A-5.

password
After typing in your login name, you must enter a password, which
does not appear on the screen. You must remember your password
(but do not write it down!); without it you cannot run Ec*Trak
plan view
a view of the wellpath projected onto a horizontal plane. See page
9-21.
platform
see structure
Please Wait message
The program tells you, on several occasions, to wait for it to finish
doing something before you can continue your work. The manual
refers to these statements as Please Wait messages. See page 17-8.
plot
a graphical representation of selected data from the Ec*Trak
Directional database. See page 12-4.
prime meridian
an arbitrarily-designated main meridian of longitude. The generally
accepted prime meridian runs through Greenwich, England and has
a longitude of 0 degrees. See page A-5.
print queue
a software device which stores print jobs for the various print
devices. Each job waits in the queue until the printer is ready to
receive it. See page 17-10.
print screen
a paper copy of the current data appearing on the screen. See page
17-1.
printing to diskette (or disk)
directing the data comprising a printed report or graph to a file
instead of a printer or plotter. This allows the data to be manipulated,
included within another document, or printed at a different time or
place. See page 17-6.
profile
a group of design stations which have a fixed relationship to one
another and can be considered as a unit within the wellpath design.
See page 8-11.
User’s Guide G-11

Q
quit
leave a section of the program and discard any data you entered or
changed. See page 1-10.
R
reference data
the primary data of a report or plot; the data which serve as the basis
of any comparisons. See page 12-9.
report
a tabular representation of selected data from the Ec*Trak
Directional database. See page 12-4.
Report Previewer screen
a mouse-controlled screen where you can view a report before
printing it. See page 13-1.
reset
re-draw and unzoom a plot. See page 14-12.
reverse video
a display of data in white type on a black background. On a
spreadsheet, values that you enter appear in reverse video. See page
8-4.
right-click
press and release the right mouse button. See page 1-5.
Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet
the first screen you see in the Rigsite System. It is a survey
spreadsheet with an area beneath it for entering projection
information. See page 11-3.
Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet
the well design spreadsheet that you can access from the Rigsite
Survey Spreadsheet. It has all the capabilities of the Well Design
Spreadsheet, except that you can not save any data. See page 11-7.
rotate slots
If you enter slot coordinates assuming that the slots are aligned in a
rectangular pattern, you must rotate the slots by a certain angle to the
structure’s actual orientation. See page 4-8.

S
S [2D] profile
consists of three stations, build/drop, hold and drop/hold. See page
8-13.
S [3D] profile
consists of three sections — build/drop with turn, hold and drop/
build with turn. See page 8-14.
S extended [2D] profile
consists of four sections — build/drop, hold, drop/build and hold.
See page 8-13.
S extended [3D] profile
consists of four sections — build/drop with turn, hold, drop/build
with turn and hold. See page 8-14.
saving data
Data changes reside initially in the computer’s memory. Saving the
data stores them permanently in the database for future retrieval or
changes. See page 3-21.
scrolling areas
the areas to the right and below a report screen where scroll bars and
scroll arrows are located. See page 13-1.
section view
see vertical view
select
On a text screen, highlight an item by using the cursor control keys
and press [ENTER]. On a graphics screen, highlight an item by
moving the mouse pointer to it and left-click. See page 3-3.
selection field
a data field consisting of a number of possibilities which Ec*Trak
Directional presents to you. Press [ENTER] to see each choice. See
page 1-9.
sense of curvature
the sign of the value in the curvature column on the Well Design
Spreadsheet, only applicable to two-dimensional curves. Three-
dimensional curves (doglegs) are always positive. See page 9-12.
sidetrack
a new wellpath drilled from a point along an existing wellpath. See
page 6-10.
User’s Guide G-13

slot
the point on a structure from which drilling takes place. A structure
may have one or more slots on it. See page 1-7.
slot name
a name given to the slot on the physical structure, normally
something like Slot #1 or Slot A. As a contrast, see well name. See
page 4-4.
slot reference point
the position on the structure where the slot is located. It is generally
expressed as a coordinate from the structure reference point. See
page 1-7.
source
an area containing data to be copied or moved. See page 6-11.
string identifier
a letter or series of letters which traces a wellpath from surface
to bottom. It starts with A at the surface and adds another letter
(B, C and so on) for each sidetrack encountered. See page 6-10.
structure
an offshore platform or a land-based pad which is part of a field
and can have one or more slots. If the subject wellhead is a single
land-based unit, you must describe a structure for it in Ec*Trak
structure heading
azimuth from north of a structure’s orientation. See page 4-8.
structure reference point
a single point considered as the location of the structure. Generally,
it is expressed using a global coordinate system. See page 1-7.
Structure Setup
the series of menus and screens accessed from Structures,
Wellheads, etc. at the Create/Edit Menu. See page 3-6.
sub-plot
a major element on a plot, whose information is extracted from the
database. A sub-plot can be a graph, such as a vertical view of a
survey, or it can be a block of text, such as the title. See page 14-1.
survey
In Ec*Trak Directional a survey is the set of data collected from one
survey instrument run in hole. See page 10-1.

survey section
a group of related survey stations, all of which are recorded using the
same type of sensing device. See page 10-2.
Survey Spreadsheet
the screen on which you enter actual or projected survey data. See
page 10-2.
survey station
a single survey point, generally specified by an MD, inclination
and direction. A survey station is represented by a single line on
the Survey Spreadsheet. See page 10-3.
survey tool error model
the specification of the errors inherent in a survey tool. Because of
these errors, a survey reading at a given depth is accurate only within
a certain area, the ellipse of uncertainty. See page 6-13.
system administrator
see Ec*Trak Directional system administrator
T
target
as used in Ec*Trak Directional, the last station of a profile. See page
8-16.
target shapes
Ec*Trak Directional recognizes five target shapes: point, rectangle,
circle, semi-circle and ellipse. A third dimension can be introduced
by entering a thickness. See page 5-4.
text sub-plot
a sub-plot consisting entirely of a box of text, rather than a graph.
See page 15-7.
tie point
starting point for a wellpath design or a survey section, where it
attaches to its external environment. The first line on the spreadsheet
represents the tie point. See page 8-9.
toggle
switch between two possible choices. Cycle refers to more than two
choices. See page 1-9.
token
an identification tag that you can assign to a wellpath design or a
survey. See page 8-23.
User’s Guide G-15

toolface
driller’s toolface used when orienting a deviation tool. See page 7-6.
traverse
pan, or scroll, across a zoomed plot. See page 14-11.
true north
the horizontal direction from a point on the earth’s surface to the
geographic North Pole. See page A-1.
true vertical depth
see TVD
turn
a wellpath section whose direction (azimuth) changes from the
previous section. See page 8-12.
TVD
the depth of a point below the slot. See page 6-9.
U
Universal Transverse Mercator
see UTM
UTM
a grid system which divides the world into 60 equal zones running
north and south, each zone being 6 degrees wide. See page A-7.
V
vertical section
the projection of a wellpath onto a vertical plane. Vertical section
consists of a reference point and an azimuth. The selection of a
vertical section does not affect a wellpath, but does affect how
you view it on a graph. See page 9-17.
vertical view
a graph which projects the wellpath onto a vertical plane, also
known as a section view. See page 9-21.
volume of uncertainty
Applying the Baker Hughes INTEQ error model produces a volume
of space around any position along the wellpath. The actual position
may be at any point within this volume. See page E-6.

W
walk
1. the drift of the wellpath away from its designed trajectory during
a hold section. Walk is normally to the right, unless formation
effects cause a walk to the left. Walk is expressed in degrees per
course length. See page 9-9.
2. When projecting ahead of the survey, walk is the turn rate you are
specifying for the projection calculation. See page 10-12.
the screen on which you plan a proposed wellpath. See page 7-1.
well name
the name of a well, such as A56, that is drilled from a slot. See page
6-3.
wellhead
As used in Ec*Trak Directional, wellhead is the same as slot. See
page 3-8.
wellpath
an actual drilled and surveyed path or a proposed trajectory. See
page 1-8.
wellpath design
the complete specification of a set of stations starting at the tie point
and ending at the target. See page 8-19.
wellpath ID number
an internal number, such as p17 or s43, that Ec*Trak Directional
assigns to a wellpath. You must specify the wellpath ID number
when assigning line attributes to a wellpath. See page 15-19.
Z
zoom
a function which allows you to enlarge an area of a plot. See page
14-10.
User’s Guide G-17

Index
Symbols advisory information 7-7, 8-6, 8-19, 11-8

Alaska projection type 3-10
==> 7-5, 8-3, 8-11, D-3 allocation phase 3-17
[ALT-F] 13-3
Numerics annotations 15-9 to 15-14
API Well Number 6-3, 13-10
165° inclination 9-5 arc 16-5
3-D 10-13 arrow 16-7
arrow keys 7-8
A Art menu 16-2, 16-13
ASCII (readable text) file 14-1, 17-6
A3 paper 17-11 aspect ratio 15-24
accelerometer error E-3 associate casing string 18-6
Accept 11-14 attributes 16-3
access casing data 6-8 attributes flow chart 16-3
access declination data 6-5 Attributes menu 16-3
access Instant Graphics 11-9 author name 6-15
access Rigsite System 11-2 automatic MD 10-7, 10-17
access Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet 11-7 automatic menu selection 1-6, 7-2
access Survey Spreadsheet 10-1 average angle 3-8
access well data 6-2 axis 3-10, 13-6, 15-17
access Well Design Spreadsheet 7-1 to 7-3 azimuth A-1 to A-4, E-2
access Well Design Spreadsheet flow chart 7-2 see also direction
Acrobat Reader 2-3 azimuth correction 18-5
active steering 11-10 Azimuth Correction screen 10-6
actual MD 6-11 azimuth entry D-1
add azimuth reference error E-2, E-3
see also create
add arc to plot 16-5
add arrow to plot 16-7 B
add box to plot 16-6 back 9-13, 10-7, 11-4, 17-2
add boxed text to plot 16-5 back up entire database 18-9
add casing data 6-8 [BACKSPACE] key 1-8, 7-8
add circle to plot 16-5 Baker Hughes INTEQ error model E-1
add custom tool error model 6-14 balanced tangential 3-8
add declination data 6-5 base latitude 3-16
add grid to plot 16-9 blank data field 7-6
add hard line to plot 16-8 blank name 3-20
add line to plot 16-7 blank sheet of paper 17-13
add north arrow to plot 16-10 block name 3-18
add one slot 7-2 body of report 13-3
add polyline to plot 16-7 bold elite text font 16-4
add slot 4-6 bottom 9-13, 10-7, 10-20, 11-4
add stations to survey 10-2 bottom TVD 6-9
add sub-plot 15-5 box 16-6
add target 5-2 boxed text 16-5
add text to plot 16-4 break 15-5
add well 6-3, 7-3, 7-4, 9-20, 10-2, 11-2 Brunei 3-10
User’s Guide Index-1

Index Ec*Trak Directional
build 8-12, 10-13 comments

build rate 7-5, 10-11, 11-6, 11-14 Interpolation/Range Specification
build rate too low 9-2 screen 12-8
bulk edit 18-2 on plots 15-11
Bulk Edit menu 18-4 Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet 11-4
Survey Spreadsheet 10-8
C Well Design Spreadsheet 9-16
when saving plot 14-16
calculation method 3-8 Commit Current Edits 3-21, 4-10, 5-6
casing company logos 16-19
sidetracked 6-10 comparison (MD/TVD) page plot 14-7
casing circle 15-11 see also survey analysis sub-plot
casing data 6-8 to 6-12, 9-14 to 9-16, 10-7, compass reference error E-3
11-4 compass system A-1
casing data example 6-21 completed sample design 8-5
casing data flow chart 6-8 completed wellpath design 8-1, 8-19, 8-20, 9-9,
casing diameter 6-9 9-21
casing dimensions 3-11, 12-7, E-33 completing data entry 1-8
Casing Information screen 6-9 complex well designs 9-6 to 9-12
Casing Options menu 6-8, 6-12 cone 6-15
casing section configuration files 2-3
existing 9-14 context of graphic 9-26, 10-19
casing section name 6-9 control art 16-3
casing shoe depth 6-9 control text 16-3
casing string identifier 6-10, 18-6 [CONTROL-P] 17-1
casing symbol 15-10 convergence 3-19, 5-3, 10-6, A-2 to A-4
caution coordinate reference point 12-7
creating operator, field, location or coordinates
structure 3-3 field 3-12
declination not applied 6-5 slot 4-4
Operator, Field, Structure and Location structure 3-12
Data screen 3-12 target 5-3
reference data from same field 12-13 coordinates from 3-8, 5-1, 5-3
cellar deck plot 14-6 copy art 16-18
center button 1-5 copy casing program 6-11, 9-14
center-to-center separation E-33 copy to DOS diskette 17-6
central meridian 3-15 to 3-17, 3-18, A-2, A-7 Copyright screen 1-2
change annotations 15-9 to 15-14 counterclockwise 4-8
change annotations flow chart 15-9 course length 3-8, 7-6, 7-7, E-2, E-7
Change Annotations menu 15-9 covariance matrix E-10
change paper 9-25, 10-16, 14-15, 17-11 cover page 13-3
change selected characters 1-9 create
change wellpath design 8-20 see also add
circle 5-4, 16-5 create casing data 6-8
clean out deleted data 18-8 create custom tool error model 6-14
clear a token 18-6 create declination data 6-5
clearances require object data 12-12 create field 3-4, 3-14
clockwise 4-8 create location 3-5, 3-18
closest approach 11-7 create operator 3-3, 3-12, 3-14
closest approach of the ellipsoid E-33 create proposal 8-3
color 15-20, 16-4 create slot 4-1, 4-6, 7-2, 10-2, 11-2
Comment Text screen 9-16 create structure 3-5, 3-12
create survey 10-1, 11-2
Index-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Ec*Trak Directional Index
create target 4-7, 5-2 projected survey stations 11-3, 11-7

create well 4-6, 6-3 saved plot 14-17
create/edit 1-3 station 7-7
Create/Edit menu 1-4, 3-2, 7-1 sub-plot 15-4
crossed circle 15-10 target 5-5
cross-hairs 14-10, 14-12, 15-5, 15-7 walk horizon 9-10
current declination 6-6 delete a custom tool 6-16
current graphic 9-26 delete temp/spool files 18-9
curvature 3-8, 7-5, 8-3 depth from 5-1
measure 14-16 depth range of sub-plot 15-14
curvature entry D-3 depth ranges 12-8
curvature to target 10-13, 10-19, 11-5 depth reference point 12-7
curved/straight segment 8-15, 10-14 depth to start errors 3-11, E-31
custom spheroid 3-10 depths from 3-8
custom tool error model 6-14 design
cutoff distance 14-6 link with target 7-3
Cutoff menu 12-5 link with well 7-3, 7-4
cycle 1-9, 3-7 see also wellpath design
design area 7-4
D design error message 8-19, 9-2
design name 7-4, 8-8, 8-22
dashing proposals 15-17 Design Options menu 7-4, 7-6, 7-9, 8-2, 8-10,
data field 1-8 9-13, 17-2
blank 7-6 Design Options menu flow chart 8-2, 9-13
empty 7-6 design sample wellpath 8-3 to 8-9
data field with 0 7-6 design station 7-5, 9-11
data hierarchy 1-7, 3-1, 9-23, 10-15, 18-1, 18-3 design wellpath 8-1 to 8-24
data linkage 3-13 design wellpath upward 8-11
data source 6-7 destination slot for casing program 6-11
database deletion utility 18-1 detail edit 9-25, 10-16, 14-14, 16-1
date casing set 6-11, 9-14 Detail Edit menu 16-13
date commenced 6-5 detail editor 16-1 to 16-19
DDS (collar) 6-13 determine sample kick off point 8-3
DDS file 10-5 determine sample slot for design 8-3
DDS transfer format report 13-10 determine sample tie point 8-3
decimal point D-1 diameter
declination A-2 to A-4 casing 6-9
declination azimuth error E-2 hole 6-9
declination data 6-5 to 6-7 dimension #1 5-4
declination data example 6-21 dimension #2 5-4
declination data flow chart 6-5 dimensions of page 14-2
declination history 6-6 direction 7-5, 9-3, 9-12, 10-4, 11-3, D-1
Declination Information screen 6-5 see also azimuth
Declination Options menu 6-6 direction at target 8-14
definitive proposal 8-9, 8-23, 10-13, 10-18 disable printer 17-9
definitive survey 8-10, 10-3, 10-9 disable report preview 17-2, 17-5, 17-6
degrees 3-15, A-1 diskette drive 17-6
[DELETE] key 1-8 display ellipses of uncertainty 15-13
delete display targets on plot 15-13
casing data 9-15 distance
data field 7-6 measure 14-15
data hierarchy 18-1 DLS
objects from plot 16-17 see dogleg severity and curvature

DMWD (DDS) 6-13 end of build (EoB) 7-8

DoE reference number 6-3 end of direction hold (EoDH) 7-8
dogleg 11-10, 11-12 end of drop (EoD) 7-8
dogleg severity 7-5, 10-13 end of inclination hold (EoIH) 7-8
maximum 6-11 end of left turn (EoLT) 7-8
DOS Backup window 17-6 end of right turn (EoRT) 7-8
DOS diskette 17-6 end selection 12-10, 12-12
down one screenful 1-5 end selection with/without object data 12-11,
drift 9-9 12-14
drill depth zero 3-11 equator 3-16, A-5 to A-8
drillable 9-5 equatorial radius A-6
driller group 1-4, 8-24 error correction 9-2 to 9-5
drop 8-12 error message
design 8-19
E error summation 3-10
error summation at tie-ons E-32
East Offset screen 4-10 examine Well Design Spreadsheet 7-3 to 7-8
east/west coordinate 1-7, 4-4, 5-3, 7-5 example
east/west coordinate entry D-2 casing data 6-21
easting 3-15 to 3-18, 4-5, 5-4, A-7 to A-9 declination data 6-21
Ec*Trak Directional system administrator 2-3 field data 3-24
Ec*Trak screen 17-1 link slots with targets 5-8
Ec*Trak window 12-11 link slots with wells 6-20
edit casing data 6-12, 9-14 location data 3-24
edit current slot 4-8 move sub-plot 15-3
edit data 1-8 multiple profiles 9-7
edit declination data 6-7 non-profile stations 9-7
edit layout 9-24, 10-16, 14-13, 15-1 to 15-28, operator data 3-24
17-13 rotate slots 4-13
edit layout flow chart 15-8 select items on plot 16-12
edit next slot 4-8 slot data 4-11
edit objects flow chart 16-14 structure data 3-24
edit objects on plot 16-13 structure options 3-23
Edit Options menu 4-3 to 4-10, 6-8 survey data 10-16
edit plot 15-1 to 15-28, 16-13 target data 5-7
summary 15-28 well data 6-20
edit portion of sub-plot 16-12 well design 8-3
edit survey 10-4 existing casing section 9-14
edit target data 5-5, 5-11 existing field 3-4, 3-12, 3-14
edit well data 6-3 existing location 3-5, 3-18
electronic manual 2-3 existing operator 3-3, 3-14
elevation above structure vertical datum 4-5 existing slot 4-1, 4-3, 4-6, 4-8
elite text font 16-4 existing structure 3-5, 3-12
ellipse 5-4 existing survey 10-2, 10-3
ellipse analysis plot 15-6 existing target 4-7, 5-5
ellipse of uncertainty 3-10, 6-13, 12-6 existing tool error model 6-13
display on plot 15-13 existing walk horizon 9-9
ellipsoid A-6, A-7 existing well 4-6, 6-3, 9-20
ellipsoid equation E-10 existing wellpath design 7-2
empty data field 7-6 exit 1-9, 3-21, 4-10, 5-6, 8-21, 10-10, 11-5,
EMS 6-13 11-8
enable printer 17-9 Instant Graphics 11-10, 11-14
enable report preview 17-5, 17-6 Exit Graphics menu 14-17

Exit With Save 3-21, 4-10, 5-6 fully systematic E-32

exit/utilities 1-3 function keys 1-4, 7-6
exporting data 18-7
G
F
general MD/TVD 15-11
[F2] select by token 12-13 generate well site data 18-7
false north 4-4 geodetic wellpath report (Postscript) 13-8
feet 3-7 geographic coordinates 3-15
Ferranti DDS file 10-5 geographic north
field 1-7 see true north
create 3-4, 3-14 geographic North Pole A-1
existing 3-4, 3-12, 3-14 graph
select 3-4 see also plot
field coordinates 3-12 print to file 17-7
field data example 3-24 print/plot 17-3
field horizontal datum 3-17 graph type 9-21
Field menu 3-4, 3-5, 3-21 Graph Type menu 11-9
field plot 3-9, 12-9, 14-3 graphics
field reference point 1-7, 3-8, 3-14 to 3-18, see also plot
3-20 Instant Graphics 11-10
field report 3-9 Survey Spreadsheet 10-14, 10-18
field vertical datum 3-17, 3-20 Well Design Spreadsheet 9-21 to 9-26
find 4-3, 6-11 Graphics screen 14-9, 17-1
FINDS 6-13, E-6 Greenwich A-5
first letter of item 1-5 grid 16-9
first line of spreadsheet 8-3, 8-9 grid coordinates 3-15
fixed inclination error E-3 grid easting 3-15 to 3-18, 5-4
flow chart grid north 3-8, A-2 to A-4
access Well Design Spreadsheet 7-2 grid northing 3-15 to 3-18, 5-4
attributes 16-3 grid type 3-10
casing data 6-8 group membership 1-4
change annotations 15-9 group of objects on plot 16-11
declination data 6-5 gyro azimuth error E-2
Design Options menu 8-2, 9-13 gyro/INS 6-14
edit layout 15-8 gyrocompass error E-5
edit objects 16-14
hard line 16-9 H
Main Graphics menu 14-9
Scale and Area screen 15-24 hard copy 9-25, 10-16, 14-15, 17-1, 17-3, 17-7
set depth range 15-14 hard line 16-8
set line attributes 15-19 hard line flow chart 16-9
slot data 4-2 hash marks 16-8
structure edit 3-2 Hayford A-6
survey tool error model 6-13 heading 4-8
target data 5-2, 5-9 hemisphere 3-15, 3-18
well data 6-2 hold 8-12, 9-9
.fmt file 10-6 hold azimuth 3-9
format diskette 17-7 hole diameter 6-9
formation information 16-2 horizontal bearing 13-7
forward 9-13, 10-7, 11-4, 17-2 horizontal clearance plot 9-21, 12-5, 14-3
full axes 3-11 horizontal distance 14-15
fully random E-32 horizontal ellipse projection E-10

horizontal plane clearance report 13-7 K

horizontal view 14-1, 14-3, 14-6
see also plan view Kalmn filtering E-25
hot text 2-3 kelly bushing elevation 3-19
keyboard use
Graphics screen 14-9
I Report Previewer screen 13-2
ID number of wellpath 15-19 kick off point 7-7, 8-1, 8-3, 8-11
ideal tool run 11-11 to 11-15 start of profile 8-4
identifier 8-22 KOP
see also token see kick off point
casing string 6-10
illogical direction 9-3 L
import survey 10-5, 10-10, 11-5
importing data 18-8 Lambert 3-10, A-8 to A-9
in general use? 6-7 Lambert International 3-10
inches 6-9 lateral unit vector E-8
inclination 7-5, 10-4, 11-3, 15-13, D-2, E-2 latitude 3-15 to 3-18, 4-5, 5-3, A-5 to A-9
inclination at target 8-6, 8-13, 8-14 layout description file 14-1
inclination correction 18-5 lead angle 9-9 to 9-12
incomplete wellpath design 8-8, 8-21 lease lines A-9
incorrect menu path 1-6 leave data section 1-9
incorrect profile 9-3 leave Ec*Trak Directional 1-10
individual object data 12-13 left-click 1-5
individual object on plot 16-11 level of data 1-7
individual reference data 12-13 level rotor gyro 6-13
individual station 12-8 license 6-3, 9-20
inertial 10-9, 11-4, 11-5 line 16-7
inertial back calculation report 13-10 line attributes 15-18, 16-3
initial allocation 3-17 Line Attributes menu 15-20
initial survey on sidetrack 10-2 line style 15-20, 16-4
initial survey on well 10-2 line width 15-20, 16-4
.ins file 10-6 link design with target 7-3
insert incoming data 18-8 link design with well 7-3, 7-4
insert station 7-7 link slot with target 4-7, 7-2
Instant Graphics 11-1, 11-9 link slot with well 4-6, 7-2
instrument to bit 11-6 link slots with targets example 5-8
International Date Line A-7 link slots with wells example 6-20
International Ellipsoid A-6 linked data 3-13
Interpolation/Range Specification screen 3-9, load art 16-19
9-11, 12-5 to 12-9, 15-11, 15-14 load sample profile 8-4
lower section 12-8 load sample target 8-4
upper section 12-6 load target to profile 8-16
interpolations 12-8 loading logos onto a plot 16-19
isogonic charts A-2 local gravitational field strength E-3
IUGG A-6 local grid systems A-9
local magnetic dip angle E-3
local magnetic field strength E-3
J local MD/TVD 15-11
J [2D] profile 8-4, 8-12 location 3-18
J [3D] profile 8-13 select 3-4
location data example 3-24
location dependent uncertainties E-26 to E-29
Location menu 3-4

locked 8-23, 10-9 menu

login name 1-4 Art 16-2, 16-13
logodir directory 16-19 Attributes 16-3
logos 16-19, F-1 Bulk Edit 18-4
longitude 3-15 to 3-18, 4-5, 5-3, A-5 to A-9 Casing Options 6-8, 6-12
Change Annotations 15-9
M Create/Edit 1-4, 3-2, 7-1
Cutoff 12-5
magnetic 6-14 Declination Options 6-6
magnetic compass error E-4 Design Options 7-4, 7-6, 7-9, 8-2, 8-10,
magnetic declination A-2 to A-4 9-13, 17-2
see also declination Detail Edit 16-13
magnetic dip angle E-11 Edit Options 4-3 to 4-10, 6-8
magnetic dip angle error E-4 Exit Graphics 14-17
magnetic field error due to sensor scale factor Field 3-4, 3-5, 3-21
error E-4 Graph Type 11-9
magnetic field strength E-11 Line Attributes 15-20
magnetic flux density E-4 Location 3-4
magnetic interference azimuth error E-2 Main Graphics 14-9, 16-1, 17-11
magnetic north A-2 to A-4 Modify 15-7 to 15-24
magnetometer error E-3 Move 16-15
magnification 17-3, 17-7 Move/Delete/Modify 15-4
main graphics 11-14 Operations on Targets 5-9, 8-4, 8-16
Main Graphics menu 14-9, 16-1, 17-11 Operator 3-2
Main Graphics menu flow chart 14-9 Options 3-7, 3-15, 3-23, 5-1, 7-7
Main Menu 1-2 Plot Type 12-4, 14-2
major axis 3-10 Print Queue Control 17-8
map north 4-13 Printer Operations 17-8 to 17-11
master data set 12-11 Profile Types 8-4, 8-11
match in menu 1-5 Report Type 12-4
maximum dogleg severity 6-11 Rigsite Options 11-3
MD 7-5, 10-4, 10-11, 11-3, 12-8 Scale 15-26, 16-16
actual 6-11 Select Action 17-2, 17-5, 17-6, 17-8 to
projected 9-14 17-11
MD correction 18-5 Select Design Identifiers 8-8
MD entry D-2 Select Printer/Plotter 17-8
MD extension 11-6 Slot 7-2
MD vs. along hole errors 15-6 Structure 3-5
MD vs. azimuth 14-7, 15-6 Structure Edit Options 3-6, 3-23, 4-1,
MD vs. dogleg 14-8, 15-6 5-2, 6-2, 6-5
MD vs. inclination 14-7, 15-6 Survey Options 10-3, 17-2
MD vs. lateral errors 15-6 Target Option 5-2
MD vs. lateral uncertainty 14-8 Vertical Section Reference Options
MD vs. toolface 15-6 9-18, 10-8
MD vs. vertical errors 15-6 View Vector and Shadows 15-21
MD-Inc-Azi file 10-5 Walk Horizons 9-9, 10-12
mean sea level 3-19 Well Design Graphics 9-24
measure 9-25, 10-16, 10-18, 14-15 menu field 1-9
measure curvature 14-16 menu items order 1-6
measure distance 14-15 menu path 1-6
measured depth menus 1-5, 3-7
see MD Mercator 3-10
measurement error vector E-7 meridians A-5 to A-9

meters 3-7 north

Minerals Management Service 13-10 false 4-4
minimum curvature 3-8 north alignment 3-8, 7-7
minimum distance clearance report 13-7 north arrow 16-10
minimum MD 8-20 North Offset screen 4-10
minor axis 3-10 North Pole A-1
minor azimuth 13-6 north/south coordinate 1-7, 4-4, 5-3, 7-5
minus sign D-2 north/south coordinate entry D-2
minutes 3-15, A-1, D-1 northern hemisphere 3-16, 3-17
misalignment error E-6 northing 3-15 to 3-18, 4-5, 5-4, A-7 to A-9
MM 13-10 Norwegian Petroleum Directorate 13-6
MMS format for directional survey report not saving data 1-10
13-10 note
modify Acrobat and SCO Unix 2-3
specify sub-plot 15-5 active steering calculation bombs 11-11
modify identifiers 10-9, 11-5 add casing 6-11
Modify menu 15-7 to 15-24 add declination 6-6
modify sub-plot 15-5 to 15-27 add well 6-3
mouse 1-4, 9-25, 13-1 application of curvature and toolface
mouse button 1-5 values 7-6
mouse pointer 17-1 attributes vs. line attributes 16-3
Move menu 16-15 blank data field on spreadsheet 7-6
move objects on plot 16-15 break 15-5
move sub-plot 15-3 casing dimensions not in report E-33
example 15-3 central meridian and hemisphere 3-16
Move/Delete/Modify menu 15-4 changing structure reference point 4-5
MTC (collar) 6-13 changing target position 5-5
multi-page design 9-13, 17-2 clearances with multiple reference
multi-page survey 17-2 wellpaths 12-13
multiple entries with same name 3-13 convert from radians to degrees E-24
multiple object data 12-13 creating data level by mistake 3-3
multiple profiles 9-6, 9-11 cursor position when loading profile
multiple reference data 12-12 8-11, 8-16
multiple targets 9-11 deleting casing 9-15
description of graphics functions 9-23
N different scale values 15-26
edit layout before detail edit 15-1, 16-1
name edit layout changes do not appear right
casing section 6-9 away 15-9
design 7-4 edit survey in Survey or Rigsite area 11-2
survey 10-10, 11-4 editing plot does not change database
name of instrument 9-19 15-2
NaviTrak (DAS) 6-13 entering latitude/longitude data 3-16
new data 9-26 entries in Direction column D-2
next deepest 6-12 extensive structure setup 7-3
next oldest 6-6 [F2] at Structure menu 3-6
next reference 14-17 fill in standard data fields first to complete
next target 11-14 design 8-19
nominal magnetic field error E-4 grid need not be a rectangle 16-10
non-profile station 9-6 how not to make report or plot 12-10
normal data field 1-8 inch mark on plots 6-9
normal video 7-8 inertial token locks survey file 11-5

note, continued objects on plot

manual discusses selecting wellpaths delete 16-17
12-10 move 16-15
moving around Target Details screen 5-3 rotate 16-17
no need to use Rigsite 11-1 scale 16-16
No Selection at list of casing sections oblate ellipsoid A-6
9-15 OCSG reference number 6-3
no spaces in file name 14-16 offset slots 4-10
no unwalked survey projection 10-12 offshore wellpath report (Postscript) 13-9
one graph printed 17-9 one slot 7-2
one tool per survey 10-8 Operations on Targets menu 5-9, 8-4, 8-16
order of sections on Operator, Structure, operator 1-7
Field and Location data screen 3-14 create 3-3, 3-12, 3-14
output device in saved plot file name existing 3-3, 3-14
17-8 select 3-2
press [ENTER] after typing in data 1-8 operator data example 3-24
projected survey data are plotted 10-14 Operator menu 3-2
quitting Structure Edit Options menu 3-6 Operator, Field, Structure and Location Data
reference wells without casing program screen 3-11, 3-24
E-33 optimize design 8-1
report and plot do not change database optimize sample design 8-6
12-1 optimize wellpath design 8-20
returning to a skipped menu 18-3 Options menu 3-7, 3-15, 3-23, 5-1, 7-7
retype entire coordinate 3-25 order of menu items 1-6
select 15-5 ouija board 11-12
select object data by token only 9-23 overlapping sub-plots 15-3
set up pens for correct color 16-4 overlapping tie-on 10-9
skip custom tool error section 6-14 overspecification 9-4
spreadsheet complete except for first two
lines 8-19 P
Structure Setup 3-6
survey-to-target curvature same as curved/ page dimensions 14-2
straight segment 10-14 paper sizes 17-11
target changes with field reference point parallels A-5
5-4 Parameters screen 6-14
target coordinate numbers may differ password 1-4
8-17 photomechanical magnetic 6-13
targets appear in order loaded 8-18 physical world 9-2
walk in survey projection 10-12 plan view 9-21, 11-10, 14-1, 15-6
walked values on spreadsheet 9-11 see also horizontal view
well name 4-4 plane of vertical section 3-9
well not required 4-6 planner group 1-4, 8-23
wellhead is same as slot 3-9 platform
NPD 13-6 see structure
nudge 9-7 plot 1-2
number of copies 12-8, 17-9 see also graph and graphics
cellar deck 14-6
O comparison (MD/TVD) page 14-7
edit 16-13
object data 3-9, 9-21, 10-15, 10-18, 12-11 field 3-9, 12-9, 14-3
multiple 12-13 horizontal clearance 12-5, 14-3
object wells without casing E-33 position uncertainty vs. depth 14-8
structure 3-9, 14-2

plot, continued profiles

travelling cylinder 12-5, 14-5 multiple 9-6, 9-11
wellheads 14-6 project ahead of bit 11-5
wellpath 14-1 project ahead of survey 10-11 to 10-13
plot data 14-2, 14-5, 14-6, 15-7 project ahead of survey (no turn) 10-20
plot description files 17-13 Projected Casing Data Entry screen 9-14
Plot from Main Menu 12-1 projected ending point 11-11
plot graph 17-3 projected MD 9-14, 11-12
Plot Type menu 12-4, 14-2 projected TVD 11-12
Plot window 12-11 projection 11-12
point 5-4 projection parameters area 11-6
point of closest approach 11-7 projection type 3-10
polar coordinates 5-3, 7-5, 8-19, 10-3 proposal
polar coordinates entry D-3 see design and wellpath design
polar grid 11-13 proposal section reference 10-8
polar radius A-6 proposal summary report 13-6
polygon 16-11 proposed bottom TVD 6-9
see also polyline proposed top TVD 6-9
polyline 16-7 proximity calculation 11-5
using keyboard 16-8 proximity cutoff 11-6
using mouse 16-7 proximity results 11-6
portion of sub-plot
edit 16-12 Q
position axis 15-17
position covariance matrix E-10 quadrant system A-1
position sub-plot 15-7 quadrature entry D-1
position uncertainty E-1 to E-35 queue 17-10, 17-11
position uncertainty vs. depth E-35 quick wellplot 9-21, 10-18
position uncertainty vs. depth plot 14-8 quit 1-10, 3-13, 11-2
position window 15-26, 15-27 quit Rigsite System 11-5
Postscript report 13-8 quit spreadsheet 7-9, 10-3, 10-10
prime meridian A-5 quit Well Design Spreadsheet 7-7
print Quit, No Update 3-6, 3-14, 3-22, 4-10, 5-6, 6-4,
graph 17-3 6-7, 6-12
report 17-2
report to diskette 17-6 R
Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet 11-4
screen 17-1 radius of curvature 3-8
Survey Spreadsheet 10-7, 17-2 range of stations 12-8
Well Design Spreadsheet 9-14, 17-2 recall plot 14-17
print graph to file 17-7 rectangle 5-4
print queue 17-10, 17-11 re-date as today 4-7
Print Queue Control menu 17-8 redefine tie 7-4, 8-10, 10-3, 10-10, 11-3, 11-5,
print saved jobs 17-8 11-8
printer redraw Graphics screen 14-12
disable/enable 17-9 re-edit 12-4, 14-17
Printer Operations menu 17-8 to 17-11 reference data 3-9, 9-21, 10-15, 12-9 to 12-11
private declination data 6-7 multiple 12-12
profile 8-1, 8-4, 8-11 to 8-16, 9-3 reference north 3-8
remove 8-15 reference points 1-7, 3-20
replace 8-16 refresh 16-14
profile data 15-7 regular MD/TVD 15-12
Profile Types menu 8-4, 8-11 relative depth error E-5

relief wells E-34 RIGS 6-13

remove association 4-8 Rigsite graphics 11-8
remove profile 8-15 Rigsite Options menu 11-3
remove projected survey stations 11-7 Rigsite Survey Spreadsheet 11-3
remove target from design 8-18 print 11-4
removed target may remain on spreadsheet Rigsite System 11-1 to 11-15
8-18 access 11-2
replace profile 8-16 exit 11-5
replace target 8-18 Rigsite Well Design Spreadsheet 11-7
report 1-3 access 11-7
DDS transfer format 13-10 no data are saved 11-8
field 3-9 RKB 3-19
geodetic wellpath (Postscript) 13-8 rotate objects on plot 16-17
horizontal plane clearance 13-7 rotate slots 4-4, 4-8
inertial back calculation 13-10 rotate slots example 4-13
minimum distance clearance 13-7 rotation from north 5-4
MMS format for directional survey 13-10 run through shoe? 6-10
offshore wellpath (Postscript) 13-9
Postscript 13-8 S
print 17-2
print to diskette 17-6 S [2D] profile 8-13
proposal summary 13-6 S [3D] profile 8-14, 11-10
standard wellpath 13-5 S extended [2D] profile 8-13
standard wellpath (Postscript) 13-8 S extended [3D] profile 8-14
structure 3-9, 13-8 safety factor 12-7
summary clearance 13-8 sag inclination error E-3
travelling cylinder clearance 13-8 sales group 1-4, 8-24
UTM wellpath (Postscript) 13-8 sample design 8-3 to 8-9
wellpath (grid) 13-5 save and continue working on structure 3-21,
wellpath (lat/long) 13-5 4-10, 5-6, 6-4, 6-7, 6-12
wellpath (MD-Azi-Inc) 13-6 save and exit 6-4, 6-7, 6-12
wellpath (NPD) format 13-6 save art 16-18
wellpath (standard) — faxable 13-6 save as 17-5
wellpath with ellipses 13-6 save casing data 6-12
Report from Main Menu 12-1 Save Current Edits 3-21, 4-10, 5-6
report preview 12-11, 13-1, 17-5, 17-6 save data 1-9
Report Previewer screen 13-1, 17-1 save declination data 6-7
report system 13-1 to 13-10 save plot 9-25, 10-16, 14-16
Report Type menu 12-4 save Rigsite data 11-2
Report window 12-11 save sample design 8-7
reset 9-24, 10-16, 15-25, 16-13 save structure data 3-21
reset graph 11-10, 14-12 save survey 10-10
residual azimuth error after correction for save target data 5-6
magnetic interference E-2 save to disk 17-7
residual inclination error after correction for save vertical section 9-18
sag E-3 save well data 6-4
resize window 15-27 save wellpath design 7-3, 7-9, 8-1, 8-21
resubmit old print jobs 17-8 savedir directory 17-7
resurvey old hole if sidetracking E-31 scale 11-13
return to Main Graphics screen 15-27 Scale and Area screen 15-24, 15-25
re-type entire entry 1-9 Scale and Area screen flow chart 15-24
reverse video 7-3, 7-8 scale factor 3-8, 16-16
right-click 1-5, 14-9, 15-2 Scale menu 15-26, 16-16

scale objects on plot 16-16 select axes 15-17

Scale Prompt screen 11-13 select by token 12-13
scaling a sub-plot 15-26 Select Design Identifiers menu 8-8
scheduler 17-10, 17-11 select field 3-4
SCO Unix operating system 1-1, 2-3 select items on plot 16-11
screen example 16-12
Azimuth Correction 10-6 select location 3-4
Casing Information 6-9 select menu item 1-5
Comment Text 9-16 select operator 3-2
Declination Information 6-5 Select Printer/Plotter menu 17-8
East Offset 4-10 select scale 15-26
Ec*Trak 17-1 select structure 3-5
Graphics 14-9, 17-1 Select Targets on Design 5-10, 8-16
Interpolation/Range Specification 9-11, Select Targets on Field 5-10, 8-5, 8-16
12-5 to 12-9, 15-11, 15-14 Select Targets on Slot 5-10, 8-16
North Offset 4-10 selecting groups of wellpaths 18-3
Operator, Field, Structure and Location selecting wellpaths individually 18-3
Data 3-11, 3-24 selection by token 12-13
Parameters 6-14 selection field 1-9
Projected Casing Data Entry 9-14 semi axes 3-11, 13-6
Report Previewer 17-1 semi-circle 5-4
Scale and Area 15-24, 15-25 send to printer/plotter 17-3
Scale Prompt 11-13 sense of curvature 9-12
Slot Information 4-2, 4-3 to 4-7, 6-8, sensitivity factors E-4
6-12 separation factor E-33
Slot Rotation 4-8 serifed text font 16-4
Specification of TVD Horizon 9-10 set a token 18-6
Spheroid 3-10 set color 15-20
Survey Models 9-19 set depth range 15-14
Survey Projection Parameters 11-3 set depth range flow chart 15-14
Target Details 5-2 to 5-5, 8-5, 8-16, set line attributes 15-18
10-13, 11-7 set line attributes flow chart 15-19
Token Selection 10-9 set line style 15-20
Tool Error Specification 6-15 set line width 15-20
Vertical Section Reference 8-22, 9-18 set section data 15-16
Well Data Form 6-2, 6-3, 7-4 set sub-plot depth range 15-14
Well Design Spreadsheet 7-3, 8-2 set sub-plot scale and area 15-23
screen print 17-1 set tool error specifications 18-6
scrolling on Report Previewer screen 13-1 to set vertical section data 15-16
13-3 shadows 15-21
seabed 3-11 shape of target 5-4
second line of spreadsheet 8-3, 8-11 show comments 14-17
seconds 3-15, A-1 show/hide paper 9-25, 10-16, 14-13, 15-3,
section from 3-9 17-12
section plane 3-9 sidetrack 8-10, 8-14, 10-3, 10-9
section view 11-10, 14-2 sidetracked casing 6-10
see also vertical view size of target 5-4
Seeker 6-13, 10-6 sizing a sub-plot 15-7
Seeker DI azimuth error E-2 slide 11-13
Seeker DS azimuth error E-2 slot 1-7
Select Action menu 17-2, 17-5, 17-6, 17-8 to add 4-6
17-11 add one 7-2
select all wellpaths 9-23, 18-4 create 4-1, 4-6, 7-2, 10-2, 11-2

slot, continued existing 3-5, 3-12

existing 4-1, 4-3, 4-6, 4-8 select 3-5
link with target 4-7, 7-2 structure center to target 3-9
link with well 4-6, 7-2 structure coordinates 3-12
unlink from target 4-8 structure data 3-13
unlink from well 4-6 structure data example 3-24
when accessing spreadsheet 7-2 structure edit flow chart 3-2
slot circle 15-10 Structure Edit Options menu 3-6, 3-23, 4-1,
slot data 4-1 to 4-10 5-2, 6-2, 6-5
slot data example 4-11 structure elevation 3-19
slot data flow chart 4-2 structure heading 4-8
slot for design 8-1 structure horizontal datum 3-19
slot geometry pattern 4-4, 4-8, 4-9 Structure menu 3-5
slot horizontal coordinates 4-4, 7-7 structure name 3-18
Slot Information screen 4-2, 4-3 to 4-7, 6-8, structure options example 3-23
6-12 structure plot 3-9, 12-9, 14-2
Slot menu 7-2 structure reference point 1-7, 3-8, 3-14 to 3-18,
slot name 4-4 3-20, 4-4, 4-5
Slot Rotation screen 4-8 structure report 3-9, 12-9, 13-8
slot vertical coordinates 7-7 Structure Setup 3-6
slots oriented north 4-8 structure vertical datum 3-19
snap 16-4, 16-15 structure vertical datum to seabed 3-19
source slot for casing program 6-11 sub-plot 14-1
southern hemisphere 3-15, 3-16, 3-17 3-D view 15-6
space D-1 delete 15-4
specific MD/TVD 15-12 edit portion 16-12
Specification of TVD Horizon screen 9-10 ellipse analysis 15-6
specify sub-plot to add 15-5 graph 15-8
specify sub-plot to modify 15-5 modify 15-5 to 15-27
spheroid 3-10 move 15-3
Spheroid screen 3-10 overlapping 15-3
spool files 18-9 plan view 15-6
SPOT E-11 plot data 15-7
spreadsheet 9-25, 10-19 position 15-7
spreadsheet heading 7-3, 10-2, 11-3 profile data 15-7
standard deviations 3-11 scale 15-26
standard survey tools 6-13 set depth range 15-14
standard wellpath report 13-5 set scale and area 15-23
standard wellpath report (Postscript) 13-8 size 15-7
start column 12-8 survey analysis 15-6
start of walk (SoW) 7-8 target details 15-7
station 7-5, 9-6 text box 15-8
station interval uncertainty E-30 title 15-7
station markers 15-13 vertical view 15-6
steering tool 6-13 well data 15-19
step column 12-8 summary clearance report 13-8
step size 11-10 summation of errors at tie-ons E-32
stepwise stations 12-8 supplemental information 13-3
stop column 12-8 surface position uncertainty 3-11, 3-19, 12-7,
stop scheduler 17-10 E-34
string identifier 6-10 surface position uncertainty chart E-34
structure 1-7 survey
create 3-5, 3-12 create 10-1, 11-2

survey, continued target data flow chart 5-2, 5-9

edit 10-4 Target Details screen 5-2 to 5-5, 8-5, 8-16,
existing 10-2, 10-3 10-13, 11-7
import 10-5 target details sub-plot 15-7
survey analysis sub-plot 15-6 target name 5-4
see also comparison (MD/TVD) page plot target offset from center 8-19
survey area 10-3, 11-3 target offset from wellpath 5-4
survey as tie point 8-9, 10-3 Target Option menu 5-2
survey data example 10-16 target size and shape 5-4
survey file formats 10-5 target thickness 5-4
survey group 1-4, 8-24 target used in well design 5-5
survey interval E-7 targets from database 8-18
Survey Models screen 9-19 targets on design 8-18
survey name 10-2, 10-10, 11-4 targets on field 9-8
Survey Options menu 10-3, 10-6, 17-2 temp/spool files 18-9
Survey Projection Parameters screen 11-3 text 16-4
Survey Spreadsheet 10-2 text font 16-4
print 10-7, 17-2 text height 16-4
similarities to Well Design Spreadsheet TF
10-1 see toolface
survey stations 12-7 three dimensional 9-6, 9-12
survey tie-on methods E-32 tie point 7-4, 7-7, 8-1, 8-3, 8-9, 10-2, 10-3,
survey to target curvatures 11-7 11-3, 11-8
survey tool error model 6-13 to 6-16 tie position 10-8
apply 9-19, 10-8, 11-5, 18-6 title 14-1 to 14-7, 15-7
survey tool error model flow chart 6-13 toggle 1-9, 3-7
survey tools token 3-17, 8-22, 9-22, 10-9, 10-10, 10-15,
change 10-2 11-4, 18-3, 18-6
Sysdrill data 18-9 Token Selection screen 10-9
system administrator 1-2 tool error model 6-13 to 6-16
systematic E-32 apply 9-19, 10-8, 11-5, 18-6
tool error models E-11 to E-26
T DDS (collar) E-19
DDS (collar) (bent sub) E-20
target 5-1, 7-8, 8-1, 8-4 DDS (collar) (mag corrected) E-21
add 5-2, 5-10 DDS (collar) (sag and mag corrected)
create 4-7, 5-2, 5-10 E-21
delete 5-5 DDS (collar) (sag corrected) E-20
display on plot 15-13 EMS E-15
edit 5-5, 5-11 EMS (mag corrected) E-16
enter manually 8-18 EMS (sag and mag corrected) E-16
existing 4-7, 5-5, 8-16 EMS (sag corrected) E-15
load to profile 8-16, 9-6 FINDS E-25
multiple 9-11 level rotor gyro E-24
order 9-6 level rotor gyro (bent sub) E-24
remove 5-11, 8-18 MTC (collar) (mag corrected) and DMWD
replace 8-18 (DSP) (mag corrected) E-18
save 5-6 MTC (collar) (sag and mag corrected)
select 5-10, 8-16 and DMWD (DSP)
target coordinates 5-3 (sag and mag corrected) E-19
target data 5-1 to 5-11 MTC (collar) (sag corrected) and DMWD
where to enter 5-1 (DSP) (sag corrected) E-18
target data example 5-7 NaviTrak (DAS) E-22

tool error models, continued U

NaviTrak (DAS) (bent sub) E-22
NaviTrak (DAS) (mag corrected) E-23 u/ideas/ideas_data directory 16-19
NaviTrak (DAS) (sag and mag /u/ideas/ideas_data/savedir directory 14-17,
corrected) E-23 17-7
NaviTrak (DAS) (sag corrected) E-22 /u/ideas/ideas_data/ImportSvy directory 10-5
photomechanical magnetic E-12 unfeasible design 9-5
photomechanical magnetic (bent sub) unique name 3-13, 3-20
E-12 unit vector along the wellpath E-8
Pinpoint E-25 units 3-7, 7-7
RIGS E-25 Universal Polar Stereographic A-7
RIGS 2 E-25 Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) grid
Seeker E-24 A-7
steering tool E-12 Unix commands 17-8
steering tool (bent sub) E-13 Unix file 17-5, 17-7
steering tool (mag corrected) E-14 Unix prompt 17-8
steering tool (sag and mag corrected) Unknown 3-20
E-14 unknown field name 3-20
steering tool (sag corrected) E-13 unlink slot from target 4-8
Tool Error Specification screen 6-15 unlink slot from well 4-6
tool name 6-15 Unnamed well 6-3
toolface 7-6, 8-19, 11-6, 11-12 unset survey tool 10-8
toolface entry D-3 unsigned coordinate D-2
top 9-13, 10-7, 11-4 up one screenful 1-5
top TVD 6-9 upward unit vector E-8
travelling cylinder clearance report 13-8 user-specified tool error models E-30
travelling cylinder plot 9-21, 11-10, 12-5, 14-5 /usr/tmp directory 18-9
traverse 9-24, 10-16, 11-10, 14-11, 16-13 Utilities menu 18-9
trend 11-15 UTM projection 3-15 to 3-17
true inclination error E-5 UTM wellpath report (Postscript) 13-8
true north 3-8, A-1 to A-4 UTM zone number 3-17, A-7
true vertical depth
see TVD V
turn 8-12, 10-13, 11-6
turn rate 11-14 vertical component 1-7
TVD 7-5, 9-11, 12-8 vertical datum 4-5
TVD at end of drop 8-13, 8-14 vertical datum above field vertical datum 3-19,
TVD data field 5-3 3-20
TVD entry D-2 vertical distance 14-15
TVD vs. along hole errors 15-6 vertical section 3-9, 7-7, 8-6, 8-8, 8-19, 8-21,
TVD vs. azimuth 15-6 10-3, 10-8, 10-10, 11-4, 15-16
TVD vs. dogleg 15-6 save 8-21, 9-18
TVD vs. inclination 15-6 vertical section plane 3-9, 9-17 to 9-19
TVD vs. lateral errors 15-6 three-dimensional wellpath 9-18
TVD vs. vertical errors 15-6 Vertical Section Reference Options menu 9-18,
TVD vs. vertical uncertainty 14-8 10-8
two dimensional 9-6, 9-12 vertical section reference point 9-17
two-dimensional straight-line distance 14-15 Vertical Section Reference screen 8-22, 9-18
type of station 7-7, 8-6, 8-19, 9-8 vertical thickness of the ellipsoid E-10
typeover mode 1-9 vertical view 9-21, 14-2, 15-6
see also section view
vertical wellpath 8-3
view existing tool error model 6-13
view vector 15-21

View Vector and Shadows menu 15-21 completing 8-19

volume of uncertainty E-6 example 8-3
existing 7-2
W general steps 8-1
optimize 8-20
walk 9-9 to 9-12, 10-11, 12-7 save 7-3, 7-9, 8-21
Walk Horizons menu 9-9, 10-12 wellpath distortion 9-17
walk rate 3-8 wellpath end 15-14
warning message wellpath grid report 13-5
bulk edit 18-4 wellpath ID number 15-19
structure 3-5, 3-12 wellpath past plot border 15-14
well name 6-3 wellpath plot 14-1, 17-11
well wellpath report in Postscript 13-8
add 6-3, 7-3, 7-4, 9-20, 10-2, 10-10, 11-2 wellpath with ellipses report 13-6
create 4-6, 6-3 wells from different structures E-34
existing 4-6, 6-3, 9-20 wells near concession boundaries E-34
well data 6-2 to 6-4, 15-7, 15-19 western hemisphere 3-15, 3-17
well data example 6-20 WGS72 A-7
well data flow chart 6-2 window
Well Data Form screen 6-2, 6-3, 7-4 change aspect ratio 15-27
Well Design (No Lock) 8-23 change position 15-26
Well Design Graphics menu 9-24 change size 15-26
Well Design Spreadsheet 5-9, 7-1 to 7-9, 8-2 DOS Backup 17-6
print 9-14, 17-2 Ec*Trak 12-11
quit 7-7 Plot 12-11
Well Design Spreadsheet access position 15-27
flow chart 7-2 Report 12-11
well license 6-3 resize 15-27
well name 6-3, 9-20, 10-10 Scale and Area screen 15-25
warning message 6-3 Wolff and de Wardt E-1
wellhead 3-8, 7-4 world magnetic variation charts A-2
see also slot
wellhead as tie point 8-9 X
wellhead to target 3-9
wellheads plot 12-9, 14-6 X Windows 2-3
wellpath 1-8, 7-1
wellpath (lat/long) report 13-5 Y
wellpath (MD-Azi-Inc) report 13-6
wellpath (NPD format) report 13-6 YYMMDD form 13-10
wellpath (standard) — faxable report 13-6
wellpath design Z
see also design
change 8-20 zoom 9-24, 10-16, 10-18, 11-10, 14-10, 15-25,
16-13, 17-3, 17-7


Ec Trak Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ec Trak Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Baker Hughes INTEQ

743-500-022UG420 Version 4.2 February 1996

Baker Hughes INTEQ

ii Baker Hughes INTEQ

Block Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

User’s Guide iii

Entering Target Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

iv Baker Hughes INTEQ

Copying Existing Casing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Loading a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

vi Baker Hughes INTEQ

Survey Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

User’s Guide vii

Calculating Curvature from Sample Survey to Target . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

viii Baker Hughes INTEQ

x Baker Hughes INTEQ

Select Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26

Hard Copy Output — Advanced Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5

xii Baker Hughes INTEQ

User’s Guide xiii

Entering Curvature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

xiv Baker Hughes INTEQ

Introduction to Ec*Trak Directional

This chapter presents general information which applies to

User’s Guide 1-1

The Main Menu

1-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ

• Report — Assemble selected data in tabular form for viewing and/or

User’s Guide 1-3

• Members of the Drilling group can access the Directional Survey,

Using Function Keys

Using the Mouse

1-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Although an arrow which responds to mouse movements may be visible

Selecting a Menu Item

User’s Guide 1-5

You cannot use the mouse to make menu selections on non-graphic

Selecting an Item Automatically

Re-ordering of Menu Items

Leaving a Series of Menus

1-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ

User’s Guide 1-7

generally express its position as an offset from the structure reference

Moving Around a Data Screen

Entering Data and Moving Within a Data Field

“Normal” Data Fields

1-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ

Notice the following functions which are not available:

Leaving a Data Section

Leaving and Saving Data — The Exit Function

User’s Guide 1-9

Leaving Without Saving Data — The Quit Function

Leaving Ec*Trak Directional

1-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ

How to Use the Manual

This chapter discusses the scope of the manual, what is and

Contents of the Manual

User’s Guide 2-1

2-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ

What Is Not in the Manual

Using the Electronic Manual

Note: Adobe Acrobat does not run under SCO Unix.

In addition to the standard Acrobat Reader capabilities, there are a number

User’s Guide 2-3